SK760 880 Powerstation UK

IMPORTANT Read Before Using Keyboard!
Congratulations on your purchase of the new GEM SK760/SK880 World Keyboard by Generalmusic. This instrument is equipped with cutting edge Flash ROM memory, so that your new keyboard can be permanently updated by disk with the latest operational advantages and new features. It is important that you follow the procedure below before using your instrument for the first time to ensure that the instrument functions properly. Check with your authorised Generalmusic dealer for exciting new features to load in your Flash ROM in the future. With the instrument turned OFF, insert the GEM SK760/SK880 Operating System Disk included in your materials packet into the disk drive. After you have inserted the disk, turn the instrument ON. You will see a message in the instrument display screen that says: Loading OS-DISK clears ALL MEMORY!! <Enter to Load/Escape to abort> Press ENTER and wait about 3 minutes for the new Operating System to load. When the new system has finished loading, you will see the following message in the instrument display screen: Loading Successful!! <Enter to continue> At this time, Press ENTER again and the instrument will proceed through the normal operating display screens. You can now Turn OFF the instrument in preparation for the final step listed below. IMPORTANT: REMOVE THE OPERATING SYSTEM DISK BEFORE PROCEEDING TO THE FINAL STEP! As you turn the instrument ON, KEEP ROTATING THE DIAL until the following message appears in your display screen: !!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests Memory Clear!! <Enter to clear/Escape to abort> Press ENTER. You have now completed the update process, and your WK6/WK8 World Keyboard has been permanently upgraded.
ESCAPE
FINAL STEP
ENTER TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
Dial
Location of Dial, Enter & Escape controls.
Note: There may be a Battery Warning message when you initially turn on the instrument. This message will not appear after the instrument has been plugged in and turned ON for a few hours. During this time, the internal battery that holds new information in memory will recharge. For now, just press ENTER or ESCAPE to continue on if the message appears when you power-up the instrument.
271219
FINAL STEP
Note: There may be a Battery Warning message when you initially turn on the instrument. This message will not appear after the instrument has been plugged in and turned ON for a few hours. During this time, the internal battery that holds new information in memory will recharge. For now, just press ENTER or ESCAPE to continue on if the message appears when you power-up the instrument.
STEP 2
STEP 2
STEP 1
Congratulations on your purchase of the new GEM SK760/SK880 World Keyboard by Generalmusic. This instrument is equipped with cutting edge Flash ROM memory, so that your new keyboard can be permanently updated by disk with the latest operational advantages and new features. It is important that you follow the procedure below before using your instrument for the first time to ensure that the instrument functions properly. Check with your authorised Generalmusic dealer for exciting new features to load in your Flash ROM in the future.
ENTER
IMPORTANT Read Before Using Keyboard!
Dial
TEMPO / DATA
Location of Dial, Enter & Escape controls.
STEP 1
As you turn the instrument ON, KEEP ROTATING THE DIAL until the following message appears in your display screen: !!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests Memory Clear!! <Enter to clear/Escape to abort> Press ENTER. You have now completed the update process, and your WK6/WK8 World Keyboard has been permanently upgraded.
You will see a message in the instrument display screen that says: Loading OS-DISK clears ALL MEMORY!! <Enter to Load/Escape to abort> Press ENTER and wait about 3 minutes for the new Operating System to load. When the new system has finished loading, you will see the following message in the instrument display screen: Loading Successful!! <Enter to continue> At this time, Press ENTER again and the instrument will proceed through the normal operating display screens. You can now Turn OFF the instrument in preparation for the final step listed below. IMPORTANT: REMOVE THE OPERATING SYSTEM DISK BEFORE PROCEEDING TO THE FINAL STEP!
With the instrument turned OFF, insert the GEM SK760/SK880 Operating System Disk included in your materials packet into the disk drive. After you have inserted the disk, turn the instrument ON.
271219
Owners manual
Owners manual
Cod. 271219
English
Cod. 271219
English
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the products enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS
1. 2. 3. Read all the instructions (Safety, Installation and FCC if applicable) before using the product. Do not use this product near water (example, near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink or wet basement) and do not expose to rain. This product should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer, or should be used with the components supplied. If this product requires assembly before being played, take special care to follow the assembly instructions found at the back of the manual. This product, whether alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord, or place it in a position where one could walk on, trip over or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. This product should be located so that its location does not interfere with its proper ventilation. This product should be located away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, or other products that produce heat. This product should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the product. This product may be equipped with a polarised line plug (one blade wider than the other). This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the wall outlet, contact an electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the plug. The power supply cord of the product should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for long periods of time. Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings. This product should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: a) the power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or b) objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the product; or c) the product has been exposed to rain; or d) the product does not appear to operate normally or exhibits marked changes in performance; or e) the product has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged. Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. Some products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as part of the product or as optional accessories. Please ensure that benches are correctly assembled and stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured before use. Electromagnetic Interference (RFI) This electronic product utilises digital sample wave processing technology (S.W.P.) that may adversely affect radio/TV reception. Read the FCC note on the inside back cover of the owners manual for additional information.
4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. 11. 12.
13. 14.
15.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

The information in this publication has been carefully prepared and checked. The manufacturers however decline all liability for eventual errors. All rights are reserved. This publication may not be copied, photocopied or reproduced in part or in whole without prior written consent from Generalmusic S.p.A. Generalmusic reserves the right to apply any aesthetic, design or function modifications it considers necessary to any of its products without prior notice. Generalmusic declines all liability for damage to property or persons resulting from improper use of the instrument. Make sure that all internal electronic options are installed by an authorized Generalmusic service technician. Check with an authorized Generalmusic dealer for information on the closest service center. Copyright Generalmusic 1998. All rights reserved. Products and brand names that are referred to in this publication (AKAI, Apple, IBM,Jaz, Kurzweil, Macintosh, Microsoft, MS-DOS, Sample Vision, Windows, Zip) may either be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective owners. The Publisher/s and Author/s make no claim to these trademarks.
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this instrument does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the instrument off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this product not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the users authority to operate this product.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this instrument does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the instrument off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this product not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the users authority to operate this product. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Stock Code 271219

Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
PRINTED IN ITALY
Sales Division: I -47048 S.Giovanni in Marignano (RN) - Italy Via delle Rose, 12 Tel. +39 541 959511 fax +39 541 957404 tlx 550555 GMUSIC I
Internet: http://www.generalmusic.com
Contents
Selecting the Arrange Mode options 2. 33 Changing the split point 2. 34
Chapter 1 Layout & Display
Chapter 2 User Guide

Power up 2. 1
1 The SK760/880 playing modes 2. 2

Style/RealTime mode 2. 2 Song mode 2. 2
2 Play the SK760/880 keyboard sounds (Style/RealTime mode) 2. 3

Full keyboard mode 2. 3 Upper/Lower keyboard mode 2. 4 Multi keyboard mode 2. 7 Adjust the overall volume of the instrument 2. 8 Adjust the sound volumes separately (balancing) 2. 8 Transpose the instrument up or down 2. 9 Transposing tracks by octaves 2. 10 Play the Programmable Pads 2. 11 Play with headphones 2. 11 Play with the pedals 2. 12 Play with the Wheels 2. 12 Select and play the Performances 2. 15
3 Adjusting the volume of the real time sounds 2. 8

About the SK Sounds 2. 17 Select and play the Bank 1 Sounds (GM) 2. 17 Select and play sound variations (Bank 2, 3, ..... etc..) 2. 19 Using the Keypad to Select a Sound 2. 20 The SOLO button - Isolate a single sound from the rest 2. 21
4 General transposition 2. 9
7 Selecting the SK Sounds 2. 17
8 Display Hold 2. 22 9 The Styles 2. 23
Hold the display during selection procedures 2. 22 About the SK Styles 2. 23 Play with the Styles 2. 24 About the accompaniment tracks 2. 26 Start a Style with Key Start 2. 27 Start a Style with Tap Tempo 2. 28 Start and stop a Style with Fade In/Out 2. 28 The functions of the Styles 2. 29 Select a Style Performance 2. 29 Select a Style without changing the keyboard sounds 2. 31 Selecting the Arrange Mode options 2. 33 Changing the split point 2. 34
10 Arrange Mode and the chord recognition modes 2. 32 11 The Digital Signal Processor (DSP) 2. 35
Introduction i
Change the effect assigned to a Performance 2. 35 Play with Effects or bypass them 2. 37
QUICK GUIDE
Contents
4 General transposition 2. 9
3 Adjusting the volume of the real time sounds 2. 8
2 Play the SK760/880 keyboard sounds (Style/RealTime mode) 2. 3
1 The SK760/880 playing modes 2. 2
Transpose the instrument up or down 2. 9 Transposing tracks by octaves 2. 10 Play the Programmable Pads 2. 11 Play with headphones 2. 11 Play with the pedals 2. 12 Play with the Wheels 2. 12
5 Listen to the Demo Songs 2. 13 6 The Performances 2. 15
11 The Digital Signal Processor (DSP) 2. 35

Front layout 1. 1 Rear panel connections 1. 2 The Display 1. 3 Select and play the Performances 2. 15 About the SK Sounds 2. 17 Select and play the Bank 1 Sounds (GM) 2. 17 Select and play sound variations (Bank 2, 3, ..... etc..) 2. 19 Using the Keypad to Select a Sound 2. 20 The SOLO button - Isolate a single sound from the rest 2. 21
QUICK GUIDE
10 Arrange Mode and the chord recognition modes 2. 32
9 The Styles 2. 23
8 Display Hold 2. 22
7 Selecting the SK Sounds 2. 17
5 Listen to the Demo Songs 2. 13 6 The Performances 2. 15
Change the effect assigned to a Performance 2. 35 Play with Effects or bypass them 2. 37 Hold the display during selection procedures 2. 22 Adjust the sound volumes separately (balancing) 2. 8 Full keyboard mode 2. 3 Upper/Lower keyboard mode 2. 4 Multi keyboard mode 2. 7 Adjust the overall volume of the instrument 2. 8 Style/RealTime mode 2. 2 Song mode 2. 2 Power up 2. 1 Front layout 1. 1 Rear panel connections 1. 2 The Display 1. 3

Introduction
About the SK Styles 2. 23 Play with the Styles 2. 24 About the accompaniment tracks 2. 26 Start a Style with Key Start 2. 27 Start a Style with Tap Tempo 2. 28 Start and stop a Style with Fade In/Out 2. 28 The functions of the Styles 2. 29 Select a Style Performance 2. 29 Select a Style without changing the keyboard sounds 2. 31
Contents i
12 Store Performance 2. 38
Save to the current Performance 2. 38 Save to a different Performance 2. 39 Restoring the original Performance settings 2. 41
13 Load and play back the supplied Demo Song 2. 42

Load the Demo Song 2. 42 Playback the Demo Song 2. 44
14 Preload 2. 46
Play all the Songs or MidiFiles present on a disk 2. 46
15 Multimedia 2. 48
Display Song lyrics 2. 48
16 Record a Song (Quick rec.) 2. 50

Play along with your recorded Song 2. 53 Play Songs using Jukebox 2. 54
17 Save your programmed data to disk 2. 55

The Save procedure 2. 55 Restoring the Songs memory 2. 58
18 MIDI 2. 59
About MIDI 2. 59 The MIDI Channels 2. 60 The MIDI Configuration 2. 61 The Computer port 2. 62 MIDI Filters 2. 63 MIDI Lock 2. 63 MIDI Panic 2. 64
REFERENCE GUIDE
Chapter 3 Disk & Hard disk 3. 1
The general Disk procedure 3. 4 Load Operations 3. 7 Save operations 3. 14 Erase operations 3. 22 Copy 3. 24 Move 3. 26 Utility 3. 28 Additional functions 3. 34 General disk handling information 3. 37
Chapter 4 Preload 4. 1
Create a Preload list 4. 2 The Preload functions 4. 3
Chapter 5 Selection/Help 5. 1
Selection 5. 1 Display Hold 5. 9 Effects Off 5. 9 Help 5. 10
Chapter 6 Songs, MIDI files & Song recording 6. 1

About Songs 6. 1 About Standard MIDI files 6. 1 Song Playback/Jukebox 6. 2 Play view parameters 6. 3 Play view Soft buttons 6. 4 Jukebox Soft buttons 6. 5 Recording a Song 6. 6 The Record method 6. 7 The Record View page in detail
6. 10
Chapter 7 Edit Song 7. 1

Wheels 13. 1 Pedals Programming 13. 2
Chapter 8 User Style recording 8. 1

Recording 8. 2 The Record View page 8. 4
Chapter 9 Edit Style 9. 1

Erase 9. 3 Move 9. 5 Copy 9. 6 Quantize 9. 8 Insert Measures 9. 10 Delete measures 9. 11 Velocity 9. 12 Transpose 9. 13 Microscope 9. 14 Mask 9. 17
Chapter 10 Edit Effects 10. 1
Chapter 11 Edit MIDI 11. 1
Chapter 12 Edit Mixer 12. 1

Volume 12. 1 Pan 12. 1 Random Pan 12. 2 Audio Out 12. 2 3D Effect 12. 3
Chapter 13 Edit Controllers/Pads 13. 1

Wheels 13. 1 Pedals Programming 13. 2
Chapter 13 Edit Controllers/Pads 13. 1

Effect type 10. 1 Send Level 10. 2 General Effect Balance 10. 2 Effects Programming 10. 3 Effect 1 - Reverb table 10. 5 Effect 2 - Delay/Chorus/Flanger/Modulation table 10. 6 Vocal Processor 10. 7 Chord 10. 19 Vocoder 10. 10 Unison 10. 11 Edit 10. 11 MIDI Channels 11. 1 Configuration 11. 2 MIDI Filters 11. 3 General Settings 11. 3 Common Channel/Arrangement 11. 6 MIDI Dump 11. 7 Local On,Local Off 11. 9 MIDI Lock 11. 9

Chapter 12 Edit Mixer 12. 1 Chapter 11 Edit MIDI 11. 1 Chapter 9 Edit Style 9. 1 Chapter 7 Edit Song 7. 1
Chapter 10 Edit Effects 10. 1
Chapter 8 User Style recording 8. 1
Volume 12. 1 Pan 12. 1 Random Pan 12. 2 Audio Out 12. 2 3D Effect 12. 3

MIDI Channels 11. 1 Configuration 11. 2 MIDI Filters 11. 3 General Settings 11. 3 Common Channel/Arrangement 11. 6 MIDI Dump 11. 7 Local On,Local Off 11. 9 MIDI Lock 11. 9 Erase 9. 3 Move 9. 5 Copy 9. 6 Quantize 9. 8 Insert Measures 9. 10 Delete measures 9. 11 Velocity 9. 12 Transpose 9. 13 Microscope 9. 14 Mask 9. 17 Recording 8. 2 The Record View page 8. 4 Erase 7. 3 Move 7. 5 Copy 7. 6 Quantize 7. 8 Insert measures 7. 10 Delete measures 7. 11 Velocity 7. 12 Transpose 7. 13 Microscope 7. 14 Master Track 7. 17 Score & Edit Score 7. 20 Score Controls 7. 21 Edit Score 7. 22
Erase 7. 3 Move 7. 5 Copy 7. 6 Quantize 7. 8 Insert measures 7. 10 Delete measures 7. 11 Velocity 7. 12 Transpose 7. 13 Microscope 7. 14 Master Track 7. 17 Score & Edit Score 7. 20 Score Controls 7. 21 Edit Score 7. 22
Effect type 10. 1 Send Level 10. 2 General Effect Balance 10. 2 Effects Programming 10. 3 Effect 1 - Reverb table 10. 5 Effect 2 - Delay/Chorus/Flanger/Modulation table 10. 6 Vocal Processor 10. 7 Chord 10. 19 Vocoder 10. 10 Unison 10. 11 Edit 10. 11
Contents iii
Pedals Assignment 13. 2 Pads 13. 3 The Switch Pedal functions 13. 4 The Continuous Pedal functions 13. 5
Chapter 14 Edit Tracks 14. 1

Transpose 14. 1 Master Transpose 14. 1 Detune 14. 2 Random Pitch 14. 2 Mode/Priority 14. 2 Velocity Curve 14. 3 Velocity Range 14. 3 Harmony 14. 4 Delay 14. 5 Key Range 14. 5 Create Track 14. 6 Copy Track 14. 6 Erase Track 14. 6
Chapter 15 Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch 15. 1

Edit Perf Sound 15. 2 Edit Sound Patch 15. 5
Chapter 16 Edit Sound 16. 1

Waveform 16. 9 Volume & Balance 16. 11 Amplitude Envelope & Balance Envelope 16. 15 Filter 16. 23 Pitch Envelope 16. 28 LFO (Low Frequency Ocillator) 16. 31 Pan 16. 33 Sample Translator version 1.0 16. 40 Loading samples 16. 42 Saving your Samples 16. 45 Cancelling samples 16. 46 Assigning samples 16. 46 Cancelling assignments 16. 48 Sample Editing 16. 48 Sample MIDI Dump 16. 52 Abort (F8) 16. 53
Chapter 17 Edit General 17. 1

General Controls 17. 2 Tuning/Scale 17. 2 Pedalboard / Computer 17. 4 Date & Time 17. 5 Display controls 17. 6 Mic/Line Input 17. 6 The Edit General Main Menu Options 17. 9
APPENDIX
ROM Sound tables A. 2 Drumkit tables A. 10 ROM Style tables A. 30 Performance tables A. 32 Effects tables A. 32 Wavetables A. 33 MIDI Implementation chart A. 36/37 Recongnized Control Changer messages A. 38 System Exclusive Implementation A. 39 Index (alphabetical) A. 59
At the end of the manual is the Appendix containing various tables, MIDI information and an index.
Once you are acquainted with the instruments basic functions, use the Reference Guide to discover all the potentials of your SK760/SK880 World Keyboard.
First, read the Quick Guide chapter while operating the SK760/880 which explains the functions of each button and the display. This will help you understand the basic operation of the instrument. Graphical illustrations are included for a better understanding of the instrument.
To ensure long, trouble-free operation, please read this manual carefully. The Owners Manual is supplied as a 3-ring binder with instructions inserted inside.
The Standard model can be fitted with optional kits for Power Station and Mega Station facilities, and all models can be fitted with the SCSI port.
HOW TO USE THE OWNERS MANUAL
To ensure long, trouble-free operation, please read this manual carefully. The Owners Manual is supplied as a 3-ring binder with instructions inserted inside. First, read the Quick Guide chapter while operating the SK760/880 which explains the functions of each button and the display. This will help you understand the basic operation of the instrument. Graphical illustrations are included for a better understanding of the instrument. Once you are acquainted with the instruments basic functions, use the Reference Guide to discover all the potentials of your SK760/SK880 World Keyboard. At the end of the manual is the Appendix containing various tables, MIDI information and an index.
HOW TO USE THE OWNERS MANUAL
The SK Series World Keyboard is produced in two versions: the SK760 standard and the SK760 Power Station, the SK880 standard and the SK880 Power Station. All two versions incorporate a FlashROM memory which allows the instruments to be up-dated by disk with the latest operational advantages and new functions.
The basic Operating System, which features an advanced Edit Sound function and the Sample Translator, is common to all three versions. The SK760/880 Power Station is supplied with a factory-fitted Hard Disk containing a vast library of Songs and User Styles. SK760/880 model is also predisposed for a SCSI port which can be installed via an optional Generalmusic SCSI kit.
TWO VERSIONS OF A POWERFUL WORKSTATION
The SK760/SK880 is a multimedia keyboard workstation which offers several ways of interfacing with the instrument. With the optional A/V card, a musician can connect his instrument to the SK760/880, mix his sounds with those of the workstation (complete with effects processing!) and follow a music score which can be projected on a monitor connected to the instruments video outputs. At the same time a group of singers can follow the lyrics projected on the monitor (television or other video projection device) by the SK760/880 video interface.
The Standard model can be fitted with optional kits for Power Station and Mega Station facilities, and all models can be fitted with the SCSI port.
Thank you for purchasing the GEM SK760/SK880 World Keyboard by Generalmusic.
Introduction
Introduction i

Introduction

Thank you for purchasing the GEM SK760/SK880 World Keyboard by Generalmusic. The SK760/SK880 is a multimedia keyboard workstation which offers several ways of interfacing with the instrument. With the optional A/V card, a musician can connect his instrument to the SK760/880, mix his sounds with those of the workstation (complete with effects processing!) and follow a music score which can be projected on a monitor connected to the instruments video outputs. At the same time a group of singers can follow the lyrics projected on the monitor (television or other video projection device) by the SK760/880 video interface.
TWO VERSIONS OF A POWERFUL WORKSTATION
The SK Series World Keyboard is produced in two versions: the SK760 standard and the SK760 Power Station, the SK880 standard and the SK880 Power Station. All two versions incorporate a FlashROM memory which allows the instruments to be up-dated by disk with the latest operational advantages and new functions. The basic Operating System, which features an advanced Edit Sound function and the Sample Translator, is common to all three versions. The SK760/880 Power Station is supplied with a factory-fitted Hard Disk containing a vast library of Songs and User Styles. SK760/880 model is also predisposed for a SCSI port which can be installed via an optional Generalmusic SCSI kit.
Introduction i
FEATURES OF THE WK6 & WK8

Polyphony/multitimbral capabilities Maximum polyphony: 64 voices. Multitimbricity: 16 parts (Style/RealTime modes) or 32 parts (Song mode). Each part is assigned to a track. In Style/RealTime mode 8 tracks are assigned to the keyboard and the other 8 to the auto-accompaniment section. Sound generation Based on sampled waveforms (Wave), modified by programmable digital filters (DCF, Digitally Controlled Filters). Waves are assigned singularly or in pairs to up to a maximum of 3 Layers, to obtain Sounds consisting of a maximum of 6 Waves per voice. ROM-Sounds ROM (permanent memory) contains up to 16 megabytes of samples which are the source of over 1,000 ROM-Sounds. RAM-Sounds You can load disk-based RAM-Sounds based on samples contained in ROM. RAM Sounds can be supplied by Generalmusic, by third parties, or can be created by the user with the sound editor program. Sounds can be loaded from SK760/880, WK6/8, WK4, SK, PS and WX/SX Series disks. Edit Perf-Sound/Sound Patch The Edit Perf Sound and Edit Sound Patch functions permits quick modification of Sounds and Drumkits to produce PerformanceSounds. The modifications are stored in Performance tracks to allow Songs, Styles or Real-Performances to load the correct sounds. Sound Edit SK760/880 features and advanced, powerful and highly flexible Sound Edit section that takes you deep into the heart of sound synthesis at its very best. You can shape envelopes, control Waveforms and open and close filters with the help of high definition graphical representations projected on the display. The Sound Edit also features the Sample Translator, an incoporated Waveform creating program which allows you to create new Sounds

starting from disk-based samples or data received via MIDI.
Volatile Sample RAM (optional) It is possible to install up to 32 megabytes of additional Sample-RAM via standard 30 pin computer SIMMs (single in-line Memory Modules) obtainable from most computer outlets. Digital Effects Processor Four Digital Effects Processors, controlled in real time, enrich the sound with effects (reverbs and modulations). A flexible matrix allows different effects to be assigned to every track. Sequencer The 32 track, 250 event/16 Song sequencer has a Microscope function (microscopic edit) and Score facility (to display Score, chords and Lyrics). The QuickRec recording method allows the rapid recording of Songs by using existing Styles. Jukebox & Preload The Jukebox function allows you to chain the Songs in memory and play them one after the other with a single command. The Preload function allows you to create a list of diskbased Songs or MIDI Files and play them all by means of a single command, without first loading all data in memory. Automatic accompaniment The internal ROM Styles provide automatic musical accompaniments, consisting of 8 tracks. Every Style has 4 Variations. Up to 32 disk based Styles (User programmable) can be loaded and automatically stored in the battery backed system memory. Each Style can also be automatically reconfigured by means of up to 8 associated Style Performances. Disk drive Data can be stored on 3.5" HD floppy disks, in SK760/880 expanded format (1.6 megabyte), standard MS-DOS (1.44 megabyte) or Atari ST/ Falcon format (720 Kb). SK760/880 is able to initialize disks for every format. It is possible to load RAM-Sounds, Styles and Songs from SK760/880, WX2, SX2 floppy disks. If Sample-RAM is present, it is also possible to load
ii Introduction
Multitasking operating mode The Multitasking operating system allows you to execute several operations simultaneously, such as modifying sounds while a song is playing, loading a song during song play, formatting a disk while playing. Up-dateable operating system (OS) Since the operating system resides in a flashROM, it is possible to load updates from floppy disk. Operating system updates can add new functions to the instrument.
Introduction iii
Score view The display can show the score, the lyrics and chord symbols of a song. It is also possible to connect SK760/880 to a video system (monitor, domestic TV, closed circuit video) by means of the Generalmusic Audio/Video card (optional) to display score and lyrics on a television (or other external video device). Lyrics can be projected onto a monitor during a performance to allow others to sing with the player.
Direct connection with a computer The Computer jack permits the connection of computers not fitted with a MIDI interface to SK760/880 via a single serial cable.
Advanced MIDI operation & System Exclusive SK760/880 has two independent MIDI circuits (A and B), offering up to 32 MIDI channels, with MIDI-merge and MIDI-thru functions and System Exclusive communcation.
Audio/Video card with Vocal Processor The optional Audio/Video card installation kit offers the possibility of processing Mic/Line signals with the instruments internal Effects Processor, of projecting Song lyrics onto an external video device (TV, monitor, etc.), and includes the Vocal Processor function to add vocal harmonies to your performance.
Hard disk SK760/880 (Power Station) can be fitted with a 2.5 IDE or E-IDE internal hard disk (max. 2 Gigabytes). The standard model can be upgraded with the optional Generalmusic Hard Disk installation kit, available from authorized Generalmusic stores and should be installed by a qualified service technician. A compatible IDE hard drive can be purchased from most computer outlets.
new samples from disk (as RAM -Sounds). MS-DOS compatibility permits MIDI file exchange with other instruments and computers.
Hard disk SK760/880 (Power Station) can be fitted with a 2.5 IDE or E-IDE internal hard disk (max. 2 Gigabytes). The standard model can be upgraded with the optional Generalmusic Hard Disk installation kit, available from authorized Generalmusic stores and should be installed by a qualified service technician. A compatible IDE hard drive can be purchased from most computer outlets. Score view The display can show the score, the lyrics and chord symbols of a song. It is also possible to connect SK760/880 to a video system (monitor, domestic TV, closed circuit video) by means of the Generalmusic Audio/Video card (optional) to display score and lyrics on a television (or other external video device). Lyrics can be projected onto a monitor during a performance to allow others to sing with the player. Audio/Video card with Vocal Processor The optional Audio/Video card installation kit offers the possibility of processing Mic/Line signals with the instruments internal Effects Processor, of projecting Song lyrics onto an external video device (TV, monitor, etc.), and includes the Vocal Processor function to add vocal harmonies to your performance. Advanced MIDI operation & System Exclusive SK760/880 has two independent MIDI circuits (A and B), offering up to 32 MIDI channels, with MIDI-merge and MIDI-thru functions and System Exclusive communcation. Direct connection with a computer The Computer jack permits the connection of computers not fitted with a MIDI interface to SK760/880 via a single serial cable. SCSI port (optional) For off-line storage, SK760/880 can be fitted with a SCSI port, so you can store files on an
SCSI port (optional) For off-line storage, SK760/880 can be fitted with a SCSI port, so you can store files on an
external storage device connected via the SCSI port (ZIP, JAZ, Hard Disks, etc.). This also makes it possible to load files from a CD-ROM drive. A SCSI port can be installed in all models by means of Generalmusics optional SCSI installation kit, available from all authorised Generalmusic outlets. Installation should only be carried out by authorised Generalmusic service centres. The WK8 leaves the factory predisposed for the SCSI port for easy installation.
Up-dateable operating system (OS) Since the operating system resides in a flashROM, it is possible to load updates from floppy disk. Operating system updates can add new functions to the instrument.
Multitasking operating mode The Multitasking operating system allows you to execute several operations simultaneously, such as modifying sounds while a song is playing, loading a song during song play, formatting a disk while playing.
Introduction iii

new samples from disk (as RAM -Sounds). MS-DOS compatibility permits MIDI file exchange with other instruments and computers.

external storage device connected via the SCSI port (ZIP, JAZ, Hard Disks, etc.). This also makes it possible to load files from a CD-ROM drive. A SCSI port can be installed in all models by means of Generalmusics optional SCSI installation kit, available from all authorised Generalmusic outlets. Installation should only be carried out by authorised Generalmusic service centres. The WK8 leaves the factory predisposed for the SCSI port for easy installation.
IMPORTANT PRELIMINARY NOTES

Observe these important preliminary notes before using your instrument: AVOID PLACING DISKS NEAR MAGNETS - Do not place floppy disks on top of speakers, near magnets, telephones, or other sources of electromagnetic fields. The disk contents could be damaged.= MODELS WITH OPTIONAL HARD DISK INSTALLED- the hard disk may appear to operate rather slowly the first time you open its directory. This is caused by operations relating to the organization of the internal data and tests on the integrity of the device. The delay is eliminated on all successive hard disk access operations. You may also find that the Hard Disk is write protected - this is merely a precautionary measure to avoid accidental erasure of any factory-loaded files. The protection is removed in the Disk Utility page. UP-DATEABLE OPERATING SYSTEM - A disk containing the operating system is supplied with the instrument. The disk can contain a more recent version of the operating system than the one contained in the instruments Flash ROM. To load the operating system contained on the floppy disk: (1) turn off the instrument, (2) insert the floppy disk in the drive, (3) turn on the instrument, (4) When the message Loading OS-disk clears all memory!! ENTER to load, ESCAPE to abort appears, press ENTER to start the OS update, (5) wait while the operating system is being loaded, (6) when the message Loading successful (Enter to continue) is displayed, press ENTER. After completing this process, proceed with the power-up reset that follows below to insure proper operation. RESETTING AT POWER UP - If the data contained in the instruments memory has been damaged, either by being exposed to the effects of a strong magnetic field, or other unknown reason, the instrument may not operate properly. The remedy is a power-up reset: (1) Turn on the instrument while simultaneously pressing the POWER switch and rotating the DIAL, (2) when the message !!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests MEMORY CLEAR !! < ENTER to CLEAR / ESCAPE to abort> appears, press ENTER to clear the MEMORY.
1
TEMPO / DATA
2 +
!!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests MEMORY CLEAR !! < ENTER to CLEAR / ESCAPE to abort >
ENTER
ESCAPE
Important information
1. The SK760/880 should contain the following items from the factory: a) Instrument; b) 2 Floppy disks (1 Operating System (OS)-Disk, 1 Demo disk); c) Owners manual (shrink-wrap pack with 3-ring binder). 2. When contacting your retailer or authorized Generalmusic technical assistance centre, always provide the model name and serial number of your instrument (found on the identification plate). 3. Generalmusic on Internet: http://www.generalmusic.com

iv Introduction
The status of the following buttons also remain memorized: ARRANGE ON/OFF, ARRANGE MEMORY, LOWER MEMORY, TEMPO LOCK, MIXER LOCK, BASS TO LOWEST and the ARRANGE MODE settings.
-Sounds) are conserved after power down only if the Backed Sample-RAM is installed. If the volatile Sample-RAM is installed, the Sounds and samples will be lost at power down (much like typical computer memory). If desired, these Sounds can be reloaded from disk after powering up the instrument again

WARNING- Sounds based on sample RAM (RAM
Programmable Performances User Styles (User buttons)

Setup (general settings)

RAM-Sounds (based on samples in ROM) RAM

-Sounds (based on samples in Backed S-RAM)

RAM

Samples in Backed S-RAM

Samples in Volatile S-RAM

The SK760/880 conserves the data in RAM after turning off, thanks to a rechargeable battery. The battery is recharged while the instrument is turned on (not just plugged in!).
The rechargeable battery
To increase the efficiency of the rechargeable battery, repeat the complete recharging operation at least once a month. In most cases, normal use of the SK760/880 will keep the battery charged.
The status of the following buttons also remain memorized: ARRANGE ON/OFF, ARRANGE MEMORY, LOWER MEMORY, TEMPO LOCK, MIXER LOCK, BASS TO LOWEST and the ARRANGE MODE settings.
When the instrument is turned off, if the battery is at maximum charge level, the data in RAM is conserved for about two weeks. The charge of the battery increases by one day for every hour the instrument is left on, until the maximum level is reached. If the battery discharges, leave the instrument on for at least 15 hours to recharge it completely.
SOME USEFUL INFORMATION BEFORE STARTING
Note: It is possible to load RAM
WARNING- Sounds based on sample RAM (RAM -Sounds) are conserved after power down only if the Backed Sample-RAM is installed. If the volatile Sample-RAM is installed, the Sounds and samples will be lost at power down (much like typical computer memory). If desired, these Sounds can be reloaded from disk after powering up the instrument again
-Sounds (totally new Sound Waves) only if the Sample-RAM is installed.
Songs
What remains in memory and what is cancelled
Modified Style-Performances
-Sounds (based on samples in Volatile S-RAM)

Stored after turning off
Not stored after turning off
Stored after turning off
Not stored after turning off
Modified Style-Performances
What remains in memory and what is cancelled
Introduction v
Songs
Note: It is possible to load RAM
-Sounds (totally new Sound Waves) only if the Sample-RAM is installed.

Setup (general settings)
Samples in Backed S-RAM
RAM
RAM-Sounds (based on samples in ROM)
User Styles (User buttons)
Programmable Performances
-Sounds (based on samples in Backed S-RAM)
Samples in Volatile S-RAM
RAM
-Sounds (based on samples in Volatile S-RAM)
Introduction v

SOME USEFUL INFORMATION BEFORE STARTING

The rechargeable battery The SK760/880 conserves the data in RAM after turning off, thanks to a rechargeable battery. The battery is recharged while the instrument is turned on (not just plugged in!). When the instrument is turned off, if the battery is at maximum charge level, the data in RAM is conserved for about two weeks. The charge of the battery increases by one day for every hour the instrument is left on, until the maximum level is reached. If the battery discharges, leave the instrument on for at least 15 hours to recharge it completely. To increase the efficiency of the rechargeable battery, repeat the complete recharging operation at least once a month. In most cases, normal use of the SK760/880 will keep the battery charged.

RAM RESET
If you want to recall the factory settings, you can reset the backed RAM. 1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to enter the Edit General menu.
Battery discharged message If the instrument has been left turned off for a long period of time, the battery will slowly discharge. When the battery discharges completely, it causes the total loss of all user programmed data. If the battery has lost its charge completely, turning the instrument on will show the following message:
2. Press the soft button F4 to select the Restore all command. The following dialogue window is displayed.
The message cancels automatically after 2/3 seconds. After the message cancels, be sure to save all of your edited work to disk until after the battery has sufficiently charged.
3. Press ENTER to confirm the initialization, or ESCAPE to cancel the procedure. If the procedure is confirmed, the instrument can be played after few seconds.
Leave the instrument on for a few hours to recharge the battery. One hour of charge time corresponds to approximately one day of use - the battery charge remains active for approximately 15 days of non-use. If you foresee leaving the instrument turned off for a long period of time, be sure to save all userprogrammed data to disk to safeguard your data against automatic erasure due to battery discharge.
vi Introduction
Quick Guide
1 Layout & Display 2 User Guide
Quick Guide
2 User Guide 1 Layout & Display
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Power source
Be sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate before connecting to the mains. DC power cannot be used to power this instrument. If the instrument is to remain unused for long periods of time, remove the power cord from its wall outlet. For safety purposes, remove the power cord in cases of storms with lightning.
Handling the power cord
Never touch the power cord or its plug with wet hands. Never pull on the cord to remove it from the wall socket, always pull the plug. Never forcibly bend the power cord. If the power cord is scarred, cut or broken, or has a bad contact, it will be a potential fire hazard or source of serious electric shock. NEVER use a damaged power cord; have it replaced by a qualified technician.
If water (or other liquid) gets into the instrument
Do not allow liquids to penetrate the instrument. Do not place containers of liquids on the instrument. If water or liquids penetrate the instrument, remove the power cord from the wall socket at once, and contact the store where the unit was purchased. As a general precaution, never open the unit and touch or tamper with the internal circuitry.
If the instrument plays in an abnormal way
Turn off the power immediately, remove the power cord from the mains outlet and contact the store where it was purchased. Discontinue using the unit at once. Failure to do so may result in additional damage or other unexpected damage or accident.
Important notes
Do not place heavy objects on the instrument and avoid leaning on it. Before turning on the instrument, be sure to set the volume to a reasonable level (master volume slider at about two thirds of the course). Before connecting your instrument to other devices, always remember to turn off the power to all units; this will help to prevent damage or malfunction.
General user maintenance
Clean the outer surface of your instrument using a soft, clean, slightly damp cloth and polish with a soft, dry cloth. Never use industrial cleaners, detergents, abrasive cleansers, waxes, solvents or polishes as they may damage the instrument finish. Always turn off the power supply after use and never turn the unit on and off repeatedly in quick succession as this places an undue load on the electronic components.
User Guide
FRONT LAYOUT
C D E
1 2
M.VOL
MIC/LINE
DRUMS
BASS
ACC. 1/3
ACC. 4/6
LOWER.2
LOWER.1
UPPER.2
UPPER.1
MAX
MIN
H SOLO
ARRANGE ON / OFF
ARRANGE MEMORY
LOWER MEMORY
ARRANGE MODE
EFFECTS BYPASS
TEMPO LOCK
MIXER LOCK
BASS TO LOWEST
HARMONY ON / OFF
SINGLE TCH. PLAY
STORE PERF.
STYLE GROUPS
DANCE. 1
8. BEAT
16. BEAT
ROCK
FUNK
DANCE. 2
USER. 1
USER. 2 INTRO
JAZZ
US. TRAD
TRAD. 1
TRAD. 2
LATIN. 1
LATIN. 2
USER. 3
USER. 4
FADE I / O
VAR. 1
VAR. 2
VAR. 3
VAR. 4
FILL
FILL
FILL
TAP TEMPO
CAPS
I/O SPACE
DELETE
9 10 11
12
13 14
15
16
1. Sliders (M.Vol, Mic/Line, Drum, Bass, Acc1/ 3, Acc 4/6, Lower 2, Lower 1, Upper 2, Upper 1, [A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H]. 2. Arrange On/Off, Arrange Memory, Lower Memory, Arrange Mode, Tempo Lock, Mixer Lock, Bass to Lowest, Harmony On/Off 3. Effects Bypass, Solo, Single Touch Play, Store Perf. 4. 1/4 VGA Display (backlit), Track Scroll buttons, Page Select buttons, Soft buttons AH, F1F8. 5. Contrast, Undo, Help, D. Hold, Key Pad. 6. Sequencer: Record St./Song, <<, >>, Score, Song, Stop, Play, Style/Real Time. 7. Sound Groups. 8. Edit/Number: Effects, Midi, Mixer, Cnt/Pads, Tracks, Sound, St./Song, Synth, General, Demo, Preload, Disk, Hard Disk LED. 9. Disk Drive location.
TRACK SCROLL
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
RECORD ST. / SONG
F6
F7
F8
STYLE REAL TIME
KEY START
ENDING
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
PERFORMANCE GROUP
2 3
ST. LOCK
STYLE P.
START / STOP
ESCAPE
17
18 19 20

Front & Rear panel 11
FRONT LAYOUT
CAPS
FADE I / O
I/O SPACE
MAX
MIN
1 2
8. BEAT
ARRANGE ON / OFF
JAZZ
TEMPO LOCK
M.VOL
VAR. 1
DELETE
MIC/LINE
US. TRAD
16. BEAT
ARRANGE MEMORY
MIXER LOCK
VAR. 2
DRUMS
TRAD. 1
LOWER MEMORY
BASS TO LOWEST
ROCK
VAR. 3
BASS
HARMONY ON / OFF
ARRANGE MODE
TRAD. 2
FUNK
STYLE GROUPS
ACC. 1/3
VAR. 4
DANCE. 1
ACC. 4/6
LATIN. 1
LOWER.2
DANCE. 2
LATIN. 2
FILL
SINGLE TCH. PLAY
EFFECTS BYPASS
LOWER.1
USER. 3
USER. 1
FILL
UPPER.2
TAP TEMPO
USER. 2
USER. 4
UPPER.1
FILL
STORE PERF.
SOLO
INTRO
1. Sliders (M.Vol, Mic/Line, Drum, Bass, Acc1/ 3, Acc 4/6, Lower 2, Lower 1, Upper 2, Upper 1, [A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H]. 2. Arrange On/Off, Arrange Memory, Lower Memory, Arrange Mode, Tempo Lock, Mixer Lock, Bass to Lowest, Harmony On/Off 3. Effects Bypass, Solo, Single Touch Play, Store Perf. 4. 1/4 VGA Display (backlit), Track Scroll buttons, Page Select buttons, Soft buttons AH, F1F8. 5. Contrast, Undo, Help, D. Hold, Key Pad. 6. Sequencer: Record St./Song, <<, >>, Score, Song, Stop, Play, Style/Real Time. 7. Sound Groups. 8. Edit/Number: Effects, Midi, Mixer, Cnt/Pads, Tracks, Sound, St./Song, Synth, General, Demo, Preload, Disk, Hard Disk LED. 9. Disk Drive location.
F
START / STOP KEY START TRACK SCROLL
10. Wheels (Pitch Bend, Modulation). 11. Headphones jacks (2). 12. Keyboard (SK760: E1-A7, SK880: C0-C8) responds to note messages transmitted to MIDI IN for all notes from C1 - G9 (notes numbers 0 - 127). Using the Transpose function, the entire range C1 - G9 can be covered on the keyboard. 13. Alphanumeric configuration - each note corresponds to a letter or number for use in name writing situations. 14. Fade In/Out, Var 1, Var 2, Var 3, Var 4, Fill <, Fill ><, Fill >. 15. Style Groups. 16. Start/Stop, Intro, Key Start, Ending. 17. Style Lock, Performance Groups, Style P. 18. Enter, Escape, Tempo/Data Dial. 19. Directional buttons (cursor arrows). 20. Pad 1, Pad 2, Pad 3, Pad 4. 21. Octave /+, Transpose b/#.
5 6 7
EDIT / NUMBER
MIDI
CONTRAST
UNDO
HELP
D. HOLD
KEY PAD
EFFECTS
MIXER
CNT / PADS
TRACKS
SOUND
SEQUENCER
SCORE
ST. / SONG
SYNTH
GENERAL
SONG
STOP
PLAY
DEMO
PRELOAD
DISK
H. D.
SOUND GROUP
PIANO
CHROM.
ORGAN
GUITAR
BASS
STRINGS
ENSEMB
BRASS
REED
PIPE
SYN. LD
SYN. PAD
SYN. FIX
ETHNIC
PERC.
SFX
PAD 1
PAD 2
PAD 3
PAD 4
OCTAVE
TRANSPOSE
21
9 10 11
12
13 14
15
16
ENDING
ST. LOCK
STYLE P.
17
PERFORMANCE GROUP
10. Wheels (Pitch Bend, Modulation). 11. Headphones jacks (2). 12. Keyboard (SK760: E1-A7, SK880: C0-C8) responds to note messages transmitted to MIDI IN for all notes from C1 - G9 (notes numbers 0 - 127). Using the Transpose function, the entire range C1 - G9 can be covered on the keyboard. 13. Alphanumeric configuration - each note corresponds to a letter or number for use in name writing situations. 14. Fade In/Out, Var 1, Var 2, Var 3, Var 4, Fill <, Fill ><, Fill >. 15. Style Groups. 16. Start/Stop, Intro, Key Start, Ending. 17. Style Lock, Performance Groups, Style P. 18. Enter, Escape, Tempo/Data Dial. 19. Directional buttons (cursor arrows). 20. Pad 1, Pad 2, Pad 3, Pad 4. 21. Octave /+, Transpose b/#.
ESCAPE
ENTER
18 19 20
F4
F2
F6
F8
TEMPO / DATA
F3
F5
F7
F1
STYLE REAL TIME
RECORD ST. / SONG
PIANO
CONTRAST
PAD 1
REED
5 6 7
CHROM.
PAD 2
PIPE
UNDO
SONG
HELP
SYN. LD
ORGAN
PAD 3
SEQUENCER
STOP
D. HOLD
Front & Rear panel 11


3 U 4 V
SYN. PAD
GUITAR
SOUND GROUP
PAD 4
KEY PAD
PLAY
SCORE
SYN. FIX
BASS
STRINGS
ETHNIC
ST. / SONG
CNT / PADS
EFFECTS
DEMO
OCTAVE
EDIT / NUMBER
ENSEMB
21
PERC. PRELOAD
SYNTH
TRACKS
MIDI
GENERAL
BRASS
SOUND
MIXER
DISK
SFX
TRANSPOSE
H. D.
'
'
REAR PANEL (CONNECTIONS)

1. 2. 3. 4. SCSI port (optional). Pedals: Damper, 1, 2, Volume. Pedalboard port. Computer port (serial connector for direct computer conection (Apple Macintosh or IBM PC and compatibles). 5. MIDI interface: (MIDI IN A/B, MIDI THRU A/ B, MIDI OUT A/B). 6. Video RGB, SVHS: RGB (Video output in RGB/Composite Video standard), SVHS (Video output in SVHS/Composite Video standard). Both outputs are operational only with the Audio/Video Interface (optional). Models not fitted with the A/V Interface leave the factory with an adhesive applied below these outputs saying NO VIDEO INTERFACE INSTALLED. 7. Output: (Left, Right, 1, 2). For Mono reproduction, use either the RIGHT or LEFT jack. The auxiliary outputs emit dry sounds (i.e. with no effects). 8. Mic/Line In: 1, 2, Gain 2/1 (audio inputs for Microphone or Line signals and twin gain control for the input signals). The optional A/ V board is required for most external processing applications (optional for WK6 standard and Power Station models). 9. Power On/Off Switch. 10. Mains socket: Insert the supplied power cord into this socket.
SCSI PORT
PEDAL
MIDI
VIDEO OUTPUT MIC / LINE IN
DAMPER
VOLUME
PEDALB.
COMPUTER
THRU B
OUT B
IN B
THRU A
OUT A
IN A
S-VHS
RGB
LEFT
RIGHT
2 34
9 10
SCSI PORT
PEDAL
MIDI
DAMPER
VOLUME
PEDALB.
COMPUTER
THRU B
OUT B
IN B
THRU A
OUT A
IN A
VIDEO OUTPUT MIC / LINE IN
S-VHS
RGB
LEFT
RIGHT
10
12 User Guide
TRACK SCROLL BUTTONS

TRACK SCROLL
ESCAPE
D
The SK760/880 display is the principal user interface which communicates the status of the instrument at all times.
THE DISPLAY
TRACK SCROLL
TRACK SCROLL BUTTONS
The displays cursor is a negative highlight zone which can be moved by means of the cursor buttons. The selected parameter can be modified with the DIAL or NUMERIC KEYPAD. Confirmation or cancellation of an operation within the display is with the ENTER or ESCAPE buttons.
PAGE (MENU) SCROLL BUTTONS
EDIT/NUMBER SECTION ENABLED FOR NUMERIC ENTRY WHEN THE KEYPAD LED IS ON
OLD
The principal navigating controls are the CURSOR ARROWS (directional arrows) and the principal Data entry device is the DIAL. Secondary navigating devices are the SOFT BUTTONS on the left and right of the display, and the TRACK SCROLL and PAGE (MENU) SCROLL buttons above the Soft buttons. A secondary data entry device is the numeric keypad (the EDIT/NUMBER section), which enters absolute numbers when the KEYPAD LED is on.
F4 F6 F2 F8 F7 F5 F3 F1
SOFT BUTTONS A H
NAVIGATION, DATA ENTRY, CONFIRMATION/CANCELLATION

NEGATIVE HIGHLIGHT CURSOR SOFT BUTTONS F1 F8
NAVIGATION, DATA ENTRY, CONFIRMATION/CANCELLATION
SOFT BUTTONS A H
ESCAPE
ENTER
OLD
The displays cursor is a negative highlight zone which can be moved by means of the cursor buttons. The selected parameter can be modified with the DIAL or NUMERIC KEYPAD. Confirmation or cancellation of an operation within the display is with the ENTER or ESCAPE buttons.
The principal navigating controls are the CURSOR ARROWS (directional arrows) and the principal Data entry device is the DIAL. Secondary navigating devices are the SOFT BUTTONS on the left and right of the display, and the TRACK SCROLL and PAGE (MENU) SCROLL buttons above the Soft buttons. A secondary data entry device is the numeric keypad (the EDIT/NUMBER section), which enters absolute numbers when the KEYPAD LED is on.
EDIT/NUMBER SECTION ENABLED FOR NUMERIC ENTRY WHEN THE KEYPAD LED IS ON
ENTER/ESCAPE AND DIAL
KEY PAD
TEMPO / DATA
ST. / SONG
CNT / PADS
EFFECTS
DEMO
EDIT / NUMBER
Display 13

THE DISPLAY

The SK760/880 display is the principal user interface which communicates the status of the instrument at all times.
PRELOAD 0
TRACKS
SYNTH
MIDI
CURSOR ARROWS
GENERAL
SOUND
MIXER
DISK
+
9 6 3 H. D.
PAGE (MENU) SCROLL BUTTONS
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
NEGATIVE HIGHLIGHT CURSOR
SOFT BUTTONS F1 F8
ENTER/ESCAPE AND DIAL

TEMPO / DATA
CURSOR ARROWS
ENTER
KEY PAD
EDIT / NUMBER
EFFECTS MIDI MIXER
CNT / PADS
TRACKS
SOUND
ST. / SONG
SYNTH
GENERAL
DEMO
PRELOAD
DISK H. D.
Display 13
ALPHANUMERIC ENTRY
In name writing situations (Performance name, Song name, etc.), the keyboard activates as a source of alphanumerical data where each note of the central zone of the keyboard corresponds to a letter, symbol or number. Use the / cursor buttons or the DIAL to navigate within the active name writing zone.
ALPHANUMERIC CONFIGURATION IN NAME-WRITING MODE
The following example shows how to modify a Performance name:
1. Press the STORE PERFORMANCE button. An entry zone appears showing the status of the current Performance:
4. Insert the desired characters using the keyboard. Each note corresponds to a character, processing command or number. Two options appear below the name (Caps On/Caps Off and Insert/Overwrite) which can be enabled or disabled with notes D2 and D#2 respectively. The notes on the extreme left of the keyboard zone provide word processing functions:
2. Press the Soft buttons F7 or F8 to activate the Change name... function. A second entry zone appears where a name can be inserted. The current name appears selected (shown in negative highlight).
D2: D#2: E2: F2: G2:
CAPS - Caps On / Caps Off; INS/OVER - toggles between Insert / Overwrite mode; SPACE - inserts a space between two entries; DELETE - cancels the selected character or the one after; < (BACKSPACE) - cancels the previous character;
3. To completely cancel the selected name, insert the first character. To change one or more characters only, move the flashing cursor with the cursor buttons.
5. Move back with the cursor button and correct wrong characters. In Overwrite mode, the inserted characters substitute the selected characters (in negative highlight). 6. Press ENTER to confirm and to close the active zone, or press ESCAPE to cancel and close the window.
14 User Guide
If the track has been modified with Edit Perf Sound, the symbol appears after the Sound name. c. Menu or Function list. Contains options which can be selected with the Soft buttons F1...F8. In Style/RealTime mode the soft buttons are coupled (F1/F2, F3/F4, F5/F6, F7/F8) and the menu shows the options to select: the track status (Full, Upp/Low, Multi). the Split Point. The keyboard area below the split point corresponds to the chord recognition zone for the automatic accompaniment. d. Status bar showing general information. e. Style and Performance name (Performance or Style-Performance, depending on whether SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on or off). Song mode: Song and Song-Performance name. A Performance that has been modified but not saved with STORE PERFORMANCE is identified by the symbol []. A ROM Style with a modified Style-Performance is identified by the symbol [*]. f. Tempo (varied with the DIAL). g. Locator (measure and beat counter). In Style mode this parameter monitors the Style pattern (riff). h. Chord - the current recognized Chord symbol.
a. Track status icons. Select the tracks with the Soft buttons A...H or with the cursor buttons / . b. Sound names. The name of the Group to which the Sound belongs appears close to the Sound name, or (in order) the ProgramChange, BankSelect MSB, BankSelect LSB numbers. Tracks which are not assigned to internal sounds show a string of dashes (------) instead of the Sound name.
This type of page shows the Sounds assigned to the tracks. Sound View is the default viewing mode. A typical Sound View page appears in Style/RealTime mode (other Sound View pages showing slight variations appear in Song mode and Style and Song recording modes).
THE DEFAULT DISPLAY: SOUND VIEW PAGE
f. g. h.
Display 15

THE DEFAULT DISPLAY: SOUND VIEW PAGE

This type of page shows the Sounds assigned to the tracks. Sound View is the default viewing mode. A typical Sound View page appears in Style/RealTime mode (other Sound View pages showing slight variations appear in Song mode and Style and Song recording modes).
a. Track status icons. Select the tracks with the Soft buttons A...H or with the cursor buttons / . b. Sound names. The name of the Group to which the Sound belongs appears close to the Sound name, or (in order) the ProgramChange, BankSelect MSB, BankSelect LSB numbers. Tracks which are not assigned to internal sounds show a string of dashes (------) instead of the Sound name. If the track has been modified with Edit Perf Sound, the symbol appears after the Sound name. Menu or Function list. Contains options which can be selected with the Soft buttons F1...F8. In Style/RealTime mode the soft buttons are coupled (F1/F2, F3/F4, F5/F6, F7/F8) and the menu shows the options to select: the track status (Full, Upp/Low, Multi). the Split Point. The keyboard area below the split point corresponds to the chord recognition zone for the automatic accompaniment. Status bar showing general information. Style and Performance name (Performance or Style-Performance, depending on whether SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on or off). Song mode: Song and Song-Performance name. A Performance that has been modified but not saved with STORE PERFORMANCE is identified by the symbol []. A ROM Style with a modified Style-Performance is identified by the symbol [*]. Tempo (varied with the DIAL). Locator (measure and beat counter). In Style mode this parameter monitors the Style pattern (riff). Chord - the current recognized Chord symbol.
c.
d. e.
Display 15
THE DISPLAYS EDIT STATUS IDENTIFICATION ICONS

Every edit environment has a relative icon:
Edit Effects
Edit MIDI
Edit Mixer
Edit Controllers/Pads
Edit Tracks
Edit Perf Sound/Drumkit
Edit Style/Song
Edit General
Edit Disk / Preload
Edit Sound
TRACKS, PERFORMANCES AND THE TRACK STATUS ICONS

A Track is the smallest part of a Performance and in normal playing conditions, the display shows from 4 to 8 tracks of the current Performance. A Performance is a configuration of several tracks, so that different Sounds can be combined to play at the same time. The Sound name and its ProgramChange and BankSelect numbers or the relative Group name appears on the main display. Style-Performances and Programmable Performances have a maximum of 16 tracks (8 tracks for the keyboard and 8 engaged by the sequencer for the arrangements). A Song-Performance can contain up to 32 tracks. Sometimes, a track is not assigned to a SK760/880 Sound, but it controls an expander connected to the MIDI OUT. In this case, MIDI is shown as well as ProgramChange and BankSelect numbers (MSBLSB) on the main display when SK760/880 is set to Multi mode. In Full or Upper/Lower modes only the Sound Bank name appears, the ProgramChange and Bank Select numbers are not shown.
16 User Guide
Each status is identified by an icon which appears in the track status column. You can change the track status by repeatedly pressing the corresponding soft button. For example, in RealTime mode, you can toggle between the mute and play status by pressing the corresponding soft button repeatedly.
record icon mute icon (track with note)
key-play icon (keyboard play)
The track can be played on the keyboard in Real Time.
mute icon
seq-play icon (sequencer-play) MIDI-receive icon
MIDI-transmit icon
mute icon (track with note)
The track is temporarily deactivated. Each status is identified by an icon which appears in the track status column. You can change the track status by repeatedly pressing the corresponding soft button. For example, in RealTime mode, you can toggle between the mute and play status by pressing the corresponding soft button repeatedly.
record icon
The track is in a recording status.
The MIDI status of the tracks is also be identified by a status icon.
key-play icon (keyboard play)
THE TRACK ICONS
Most of the operating modes display the tracks and their status icons are shown on the left part of the display. The status of a track can be shown in four different ways: in key-play if it can be played on the keyboard; in mute if the track is temporarily deactivated; in record if the track is in a record pending status; in seq-play if the track contains recorded notes.
The track can be played on the keyboard in Real Time.
The track contains notes i.e. it is engaged by a Song or Style accompaniment track. In either case, this type of track cannot play in real time on the keyboard, unless it is set to key-play. This track cannot receive data at MIDI IN.
The Track and MIDI status Icons are usually combined together to allow you to control the overall track status, both for playing, muting, recording in real time and in MIDI setups.
seq-play icon (sequencer-play)
mute icon
The track is temporarily deactivated, even if it is connected to the keyboard. The track does not receive or transmit MIDI.
The track is temporarily deactivated, even if it is connected to the keyboard. The track does not receive or transmit MIDI.
MIDI-transmit icon
The track contains notes i.e. it is engaged by a Song or Style accompaniment track. In either case, this type of track cannot play in real time on the keyboard, unless it is set to key-play. This track cannot receive data at MIDI IN.
The Track and MIDI status Icons are usually combined together to allow you to control the overall track status, both for playing, muting, recording in real time and in MIDI setups.
THE TRACK ICONS
The MIDI status of the tracks is also be identified by a status icon.
The track is in a recording status.
The track is temporarily deactivated.
MIDI-receive/transmit icon
The track does not receive MIDI messages (IN), but transmits them (OUT).
The track receives MIDI messages (IN), but does not transmit them (OUT).
The track can receive (IN) and transmit (OUT).
Display 17

Most of the operating modes display the tracks and their status icons are shown on the left part of the display. The status of a track can be shown in four different ways: in key-play if it can be played on the keyboard; in mute if the track is temporarily deactivated; in record if the track is in a record pending status; in seq-play if the track contains recorded notes.

MIDI-receive/transmit icon
The track can receive (IN) and transmit (OUT).
MIDI-receive icon
The track receives MIDI messages (IN), but does not transmit them (OUT).
The track does not receive MIDI messages (IN), but transmits them (OUT).
Display 17
DIALOG WINDOWS
Several types of dialog window exist; generally an option requires selection or one or more parameters require modifications and confirmation with ENTER or a soft button. Some examples follow.
Select one of the options with the cursor buttons. Press ENTER to confirm or press ESCAPE to cancel the modifications. ENTER and ESCAPE close the dialog windows.
Select the parameter which has to be modified with the cursor. Modify the value with the DIAL or numeric keypad. Press ENTER to confirm or press ESCAPE to cancel the modifications.
Press the soft button corresponding to the option required.
WARNINGS
These are similar to the dialog windows, but they do not display options to select. They communicate specific messages to the user (wrong operations, information on the current operation, etc.).
Press F5, ENTER or ESCAPE to close the warning.
18 User Guide
2. Connect the power cord to the rear panel mains socket and insert the other end of the power cord into a suitable grounded wall outlet.
Connect the stereo audio outputs (Left, Right) to your amp. system (mixer, powered speakers, etc.) using audio cables with standard 1/ 4 jacks. Use RCA jacks to connect to domestic stereo units. For mono reproduction, connect to either the Left or Right jack.
CONTRAST
3. Connect the audio cables
OUT
PAD
F4
F5
REED
PAD
F6
F7
F8
/ DATA
TEMPO
ENTER
SCROLL
TRACK
GROUP
3
NCE
ESCAPE
PERFORMA 2
UPPER.1
UPPER.2
LOWER.1
LOCK
LOWER.2
ST.
4/6
ENDING
P.
ACC.
SONG
1/3
SOLO
START
ACC.
KEY
BASS
STORE PERF.
INTRO
DRUMS
EFFECTS BYPASS
MIC/LINE
/ STOP
4. Press the power switch to turn on SK760/880.

CAPS I/O SPACE DELETE A B C D
M.VOL
PLAY SINGLE TCH.
USER.
START
ARRANGE MODE
USER.
USER.
MAX
LOWER MEMORY
FILL
/ OFF HARMONY ON
DANCE.
USER.
ARRANGE MEMORY
TO
GROUPS
FILL
MIN
BASS LOWEST
DANCE.
LATIN.
TEMPO
TAP
/ OFF ARRANGE ON
STYLE
FILL
MIXER LOCK
FUNK
LATIN.
TEMPO LOCK
ROCK
TRAD.
VAR.
BEAT
16.
TRAD.
VAR.
8.
BEAT
TRAD
US.
VAR.
JAZZ
VAR.
I/
FADE
DELETE
SPACE
I/O
CAPS
5. Play on the keyboard and you will hear the Piano 1 sound play across the full keyboard.
< --------------- Single sound - full keyboard --------------- >
3. Connect the audio cables
2. Connect the power cord to the rear panel mains socket and insert the other end of the power cord into a suitable grounded wall outlet.
If necessary, regulate the display contrast with the DISPLAY CONTRAST panel knob on the right of the display. Different viewing angles may require an adjustment of the contrast. The display reaches its maximum brightness a few minutes after turning on.
4. Press the power switch to turn on SK760/880.
1. Be sure that the power switch on the rear panel is in the OFF position.
POWER UP
Connect the stereo audio outputs (Left, Right) to your amp. system (mixer, powered speakers, etc.) using audio cables with standard 1/ 4 jacks. Use RCA jacks to connect to domestic stereo units. For mono reproduction, connect to either the Left or Right jack.
After a few seconds the instrument sets to the default situation. The power up display shows a single sound (Piano 1) active.
CONTRAST
IN

5. Play on the keyboard and you will hear the Piano 1 sound play across the full keyboard.
If necessary, regulate the display contrast with the DISPLAY CONTRAST panel knob on the right of the display. Different viewing angles may require an adjustment of the contrast. The display reaches its maximum brightness a few minutes after turning on.
After a few seconds the instrument sets to the default situation. The power up display shows a single sound (Piano 1) active.
< --------------- Single sound - full keyboard --------------- >
M.VOL
MAX
MIC/LINE
MIN
DRUMS
BASS
/ OFF ARRANGE ON
ACC.
1/3
ARRANGE MEMORY
ACC.
TEMPO LOCK
4/6
LOWER.2
LOWER MEMORY
MIXER LOCK
LOWER.1
8.
FADE
BEAT
ARRANGE MODE
I/
BASS LOWEST
UPPER.2
TO
JAZZ
16.
BEAT
UPPER.1
/ OFF HARMONY ON
VAR.
US.
TRAD
ROCK
EFFECTS BYPASS
STYLE
VAR.
TRAD.
FUNK
GROUPS
PLAY SINGLE TCH.
VAR.
TRAD.
DANCE.
SOLO
TRACK
LATIN.
VAR.
DANCE.
SCROLL
STORE PERF.
LATIN.
USER.
FILL
USER.
USER.
FILL
USER.
FILL
INTRO
TAP
TEMPO
KEY
START
ENDING
START
/ STOP
ST.
LOCK
SONG
P.
PERFORMA 2
F1
F2
NCE
F3
F4
GROUP
F5
F6
F7
F8
ENTER
CONTRAST
TEMPO
UNDO
/ DATA
ESCAPE
HELP
/ SONG RECORD ST.
D.
HOLD
KEY
TIME STYLE REAL
HOLD
SEQUENCE
PIANO
SONG
EFFECTS
EDIT
SCORE
REED
STOP
CHROM.
/ NUMBER
MIDI
PAD
CNT
PIPE
/ PADS
PLAY
ORGAN
MIXER
PAD
T.
SOUND
SPLIT
ST.
SYN.
GUITAR
/ SONG
LD
SOUND
GROUP
PAD
OPTION
SYN.
BASS
DEMO
PAD
GENERAL
PAD
PRELOAD
SYN.
STRINGS
FIX
DISK
ETHNIC
ENSEMB
H.
D.
PERC.
BRASS
OCTAVE
SFX
TRANSPOSE
'
User Guide 21


POWER UP
1. Be sure that the power switch on the rear panel is in the OFF position.
1 2
MIXER
/ NUMBER
MIDI
EDIT
SOUND
EFFECTS
T.
SPLIT
/ PADS
GENERAL
CNT
HOLD
KEY
OPTION
H.
D.
D.
HOLD
/ SONG
DISK
ST.
HELP
PRELOAD
DEMO
UNDO
BRASS
SCORE
SFX
CONTRAST
ENSEMB
TRANSPOSE
SEQUENCE
PLAY
STRINGS
PERC.
STOP
GROUP
BASS
ETHNIC
OCTAVE
SOUND
/ SONG RECORD ST.
SONG
FIX
GUITAR
SYN.
PAD
TIME STYLE REAL
ORGAN
SYN.
'
PAD
LD
F1
CHROM.
SYN.
PAD
F2
F3
PIANO
PIPE
OUT
IN
User Guide 21
1 The SK760/880 playing modes

SK760/880 features two distinct playing modes: Style/RealTime mode and Song mode.
STYLE/REALTIME MODE
In this mode you can play with Styles, or play with the Performances and use SK760/880 as a conventional keyboard. If the auto-accompaniments are playing, the Style mode is active; if not, Style mode is off and Performance (RealTime) mode is on. Style and RealTime modes have a Performance in common, structured with the same number of tracks (16) and the same Performance editing tasks. A sound is assigned to each track and 8 tracks can be played at the same time in real time; the remaining 8 accompaniment tracks belong to the Style and play automatically when you press Start/Stop and play chords below the split point with the instrument set to Style mode. Sounds and accompaniments can be recalled by selecting a Style (from the STYLE GROUP buttons) or a Performance (from the PERFORMANCE GROUPS buttons).
SONG MODE
Up to 32 tracks are available in Song mode. Via MIDI, SK760/880 can be also used as a multitimbral (32 part) sound generator for Song recording with an external sequencer. A Song is sequenced data consisting of one or more tracks (instrumental parts). A Song can be loaded from disk as a SK760/880 Song or as a Standard MIDI-file. You can record a Song one track at a time (multitrack recording), or in a single step by exploiting the existing styles (Quick Record). The Quick Record method has the advantage of allowing you to record the melody of a Song while the auto-accompaniments take care of the rest.
Lets takes a brief look at some of the operations that can be carried out in Style/RealTime mode and Song mode.
22 User Guide
Every time you power up, SK760/880 sets to Style/RealTime mode with the GrandPiano Performance selected. This Performance is factory-set to activate the Piano 1 sound across the full keyboard. This sound is assigned to the Upper 1 keyboard section - all other keyboard sections (Upper 2, Lower 1, Lower 2) are off (mute).
1. After turning the instrument on, you can play a single sound (Piano1) straight away.
You will hear two sounds for each note played. Both sounds are layered across the entire keyboard.
Play a single sound or two layered sounds across the entire keyboard
FULL KEYBOARD MODE
2 Play the SK760/880 keyboard sounds (Style/RealTime mode)
The sound, which is assigned to the Upper 1 keyboard section, plays across the entire keyboard range (Full keyboard).
3. Play on the keyboard.
2. Press the soft button(s) E/F TWICE to select and activate the Upper 2 keyboard section.
Note that the soft buttons in this situation are paired. The track (Upper 2) activates for play (shown by the small keyboard icon in the track status column).
Note that the soft buttons in this situation are paired. The track (Upper 2) activates for play (shown by the small keyboard icon in the track status column).
2. Press the soft button(s) E/F TWICE to select and activate the Upper 2 keyboard section.
G H
< --------------------- Piano 1 (Upper 1) --------------------- > < ------------------ Slow Strings (Upper 2) ------------------ >
The sound, which is assigned to the Upper 1 keyboard section, plays across the entire keyboard range (Full keyboard).
You will hear two sounds for each note played. Both sounds are layered across the entire keyboard.
< --------------------- Piano 1 (Upper 1) --------------------- > < ------------------ Slow Strings (Upper 2) ------------------ >
< --------------------- Piano 1 (Upper 1) --------------------- >
User Guide 23

2 Play the SK760/880 keyboard sounds (Style/RealTime mode)

Every time you power up, SK760/880 sets to Style/RealTime mode with the GrandPiano Performance selected. This Performance is factory-set to activate the Piano 1 sound across the full keyboard. This sound is assigned to the Upper 1 keyboard section - all other keyboard sections (Upper 2, Lower 1, Lower 2) are off (mute).
FULL KEYBOARD MODE
Play a single sound or two layered sounds across the entire keyboard
1. After turning the instrument on, you can play a single sound (Piano1) straight away.
< --------------------- Piano 1 (Upper 1) --------------------- >
Sounds shown active for play (the keyboard icon)
Sounds shown active for play (the keyboard icon)
User Guide 23
UPPER/LOWER KEYBOARD MODE

Split the keyboard
4
F1 F2 F3 F4
4. Press the paired soft buttons F3/F4 on the right of the display to select the UPP/LOW keyboard mode. 5. Play on the keyboard with both hands.
You will hear no sound on the left part of the keyboard and two on the right. The keyboard will be divided at the note indicated in the bottom right hand corner of the display (Split: F#3). In this situation (Upper 1 & 2 active, Lower mute), the Upper 1 & 2 sounds are assigned to the right keyboard extension while the left section is muted.
5
SPLIT Keyboard < --- no sound ----- > < ------------ Upper 1 ------------- > < ------------ Upper 2 ------------- >
CURRENT SPLIT POINT
6. Press the soft button(s) C/D TWICE to select and activate the LOWER 1 keyboard section.
The track activates for play (shown by the small keyboard icon in the track status column).
7. Play on the keyboard with the left hand below note.

This time, you will hear a sound on the left part of the keyboard. In this situation (Upper 1 & 2 & Lower 1 active), three sounds play: two layered sounds across the right keyboard extension and a single sound across the left keyboard extension C2-B3.

C D E F
G H
7
SPLIT Keyboard < - Slow Strings --- > < ------------ Piano 1 ------------- > < --------- Slow Strings ----------- >
Note: The Split Point is programmable - more about this later.

24 User Guide
9. Play on the keyboard with both hands.

Now you can play with two real time sounds on the left hand and two on the right.
Sounds shown muted (the mute icon)
MUTE OR ACTIVATE ONE OR MORE SOUNDS
To mute a sound
10. Press the corresponding soft button(s) A/B ONCE to mute the (selected) sound assigned to the Lower 2 keyboard section.
The track is muted (shown by the mute icon in the track status column).

You will hear one sound only on the left hand. To mute other sounds not shown selected (positive), press the corresponding paired soft buttons TWICE.
E D F
MUTE OR ACTIVATE ONE OR MORE SOUNDS
To mute a sound, or to activate a muted sound, it must be shown selected in the display. A selected sound is shown in negative highlight. In this example, if you have followed the steps above, the sound NYLONGTR will be shown in negative highlight.
10. Press the corresponding soft button(s) A/B ONCE to mute the (selected) sound assigned to the Lower 2 keyboard section.
SPLIT Keyboard < - Slow Strings --- > < ------------ Piano 1 ------------- > < --- Nylon Gtr ----- > < --------- Slow Strings ----------- >
10
11
C D E F
G H
To mute a sound
To mute a sound, or to activate a muted sound, it must be shown selected in the display. A selected sound is shown in negative highlight. In this example, if you have followed the steps above, the sound NYLONGTR will be shown in negative highlight.
8. Press the soft button(s) A/B TWICE to select and activate the LOWER 2 keyboard section.
ADD A SECOND SOUND ON THE LEFT HAND
You will hear one sound only on the left hand. To mute other sounds not shown selected (positive), press the corresponding paired soft buttons TWICE.
The track is muted (shown by the mute icon in the track status column).
Now you can play with two real time sounds on the left hand and two on the right.
10
11
SPLIT Keyboard < - Slow Strings --- > < ------------ Piano 1 ------------- > < --- Nylon Gtr ----- > < --------- Slow Strings ----------- >
User Guide 25

ADD A SECOND SOUND ON THE LEFT HAND

8. Press the soft button(s) A/B TWICE to select and activate the LOWER 2 keyboard section.
8
A B C
G H
Sounds shown muted (the mute icon)
User Guide 25
12. Press the paired soft buttons C/D TWICE to mute the sound assigned to the Lower 1 keyboard section. 13. Now play on the keyboard with both hands.
You will return to the situation described at point 4 on page 3 (no sound on the left hand, two sounds on the right).
12
A B C D E F
G H
13
SPLIT Keyboard < --- No sound ----- > < ------------ Piano 1 ------------- > < --------- Slow Strings ----------- >
To activate a muted sound To activate a muted sound, press the corresponding paired soft buttons once if the track is selected (negative) or twice if the track is not selected (positive).
14
A B C D E F
14. Press, for example, the paired soft buttons C/D ONCE (if the muted sound is shown selected), or TWICE if the muted sound is not selected (positive highlight).
The track (Lower 1) activates for play (shown by the small keyboard icon in the track status column).
G H
26 User Guide
16. Configure the active/mute status of the displayed tracks using the relative soft buttons A F on the left of the display.
In Multi mode, the soft buttons on the left are not paired; each button relates to the corresponding track shown in the display.
15. Press the paired soft buttons F5/F6 on the right of the display to select the MULTI keyboard mode.
You will hear a single sound, or a combination of sounds on both the left hand and right hand, depending on the active/mute status of each track. At this point, you can practice changing the overall sound combination by activating and/ or muting the sounds at will using the methods already described.
F4 F6
Play up to 8 sounds at the same time
MULTI KEYBOARD MODE
All references to the Upper and Lower keyboard sections are no longer displayed. The Multi situation shows 8 of the 16 Tracks of the current Performance. In Multi keyboard mode, you can play up to 8 Sounds in real time. The remaining 8 tracks are associated to the Style auto accompaniment tracks (explained later).
All references to the Upper and Lower keyboard sections are no longer displayed. The Multi situation shows 8 of the 16 Tracks of the current Performance. In Multi keyboard mode, you can play up to 8 Sounds in real time. The remaining 8 tracks are associated to the Style auto accompaniment tracks (explained later).
16. Configure the active/mute status of the displayed tracks using the relative soft buttons A F on the left of the display.
You will hear a single sound, or a combination of sounds on both the left hand and right hand, depending on the active/mute status of each track. At this point, you can practice changing the overall sound combination by activating and/ or muting the sounds at will using the methods already described.
In Multi mode, the soft buttons on the left are not paired; each button relates to the corresponding track shown in the display.
16
15
17
Multi (split) Keyboard < --- Sound(s) ----- > < ----------- Sound(s) ------------- >
User Guide 27

MULTI KEYBOARD MODE

15
F3 F4
Play up to 8 sounds at the same time
15. Press the paired soft buttons F5/F6 on the right of the display to select the MULTI keyboard mode.
F5
F6
16
A B C D E F
G H
17
Multi (split) Keyboard < --- Sound(s) ----- > < ----------- Sound(s) ------------- >
F3
F5
User Guide 27
3 Adjusting the volume

ADJUST THE OVERALL VOLUME OF THE INSTRUMENT
M.VOL MIC/LINE
Adjust the general volume of the instrument with the M. VOL. slider. Note: better results are obtained by adjusting the volume with mixer or amplifier controls rather than lowering the volume of the instrument. If you are using headphones, a comfortable level is around half way of the sliders travel distance.
MAX
MIN
ADJUST THE SOUND VOLUMES SEPARATELY (BALANCING)

The volume of each sound (in Full, Upp/Low or Multi setups) can be independently regulated with the corresponding sliders of the group to the left of the display. The correspondence between the sliders and the tracks is indicated by the two LEDs shown on the right of the group of sliders. The sliders can affect: A) the tracks identified by the silkscreened markings above the sliders, or B) the tracks identified by the silkscreened markings AH below the sliders. In Full Keyboard or Upper&Lower keyboard modes (situation A), refer to the markings above the sliders. The sliders (Upper 1 & 2, Lower 1 & 2) control the corresponding tracks. In Multi mode (situation B), or when Style accompaniment tracks are shown (see page 22), refer to the markings AH. Each slider corresponds to one of the displayed tracks: slider A to track 1, slider B to track 2, . slider H to track 8.
Full keyboard mode Upper/Lower mode

DRUMS BASS ACC. 1/3 ACC. 4/6 LOWER.2 LOWER.1 UPPER.2 UPPER.1
A
A B C D E F G H DRUMS BASS ACC. 1/3 ACC. 4/6 LOWER.2 LOWER.1 UPPER.2 UPPER.1
B
A B C D E F G H
Multi mode
28 User Guide
1. Press TRANSPOSE # to raise the pitch.

An insertion screen shows the current Transpose value (0 = standard pitch). Press the Transpose # button as many times as necessary until you reach the desired pitch. The LED turns on to show that the instrument is in a positive transposed status.
3. Press both TRANSPOSE buttons simultaneously.
If you would like to play a song in a different key, or a song is too high or too low for a singer or another instrument, you can transpose SK760/ 880 to play the song in an easier key.
The LED on the active button goes off and the instruments normal pitch is restored. The display shows the 0 setting for a few seconds then returns to normal.
The TRANSPOSE b/# buttons allow real time semitone adjustments (transpositions) of the overall pitch (range 24 semitones = 2 octaves).
To clear the keyboard transpose setting
1. Press TRANSPOSE # to raise the pitch.
TRANSPOSE THE INSTRUMENT UP OR DOWN
4 Transposition
An insertion screen shows the current Transpose value (0 = standard pitch). Press the Transpose # button as many times as necessary until you reach the desired pitch. The LED turns on to show that the instrument is in a positive transposed status.
An insertion screen shows the current Transpose value. Continue pressing the TRANSPOSE b button until the dialog window shows a negative reading. The LED on the b button will then turn on. (An eventual positive transpose status will be cancelled).
2. Press TRANSPOSE b to lower the pitch.
2. Press TRANSPOSE b to lower the pitch.
3. Press both TRANSPOSE buttons simultaneously.
To clear the keyboard transpose setting
The TRANSPOSE b/# buttons allow real time semitone adjustments (transpositions) of the overall pitch (range 24 semitones = 2 octaves).
The LED on the active button goes off and the instruments normal pitch is restored. The display shows the 0 setting for a few seconds then returns to normal.
An insertion screen shows the current Transpose value. Continue pressing the TRANSPOSE b button until the dialog window shows a negative reading. The LED on the b button will then turn on. (An eventual positive transpose status will be cancelled).
C#4 C4 B3
D4 C#4 C4
B3
C4
C#4
D4 C#4 C4
D#4 D4 C#4
TRANSPOSE
TRANSPOSE
TRANSPOSE
User Guide 29

4 Transposition
TRANSPOSE THE INSTRUMENT UP OR DOWN

If you would like to play a song in a different key, or a song is too high or too low for a singer or another instrument, you can transpose SK760/ 880 to play the song in an easier key.
TRANSPOSE
D4 C#4 C4
D#4 D4 C#4
C#4 C4 B3
D4 C#4 C4
TRANSPOSE
C4 C#4 D4
C#4 C4 B3
D4 C#4 C4
TRANSPOSE
User Guide 29
TRANSPOSING TRACKS BY OCTAVES

Any track, if selected, can be instantly transposed in octave steps, within the range 5 octaves.
1
A B C D E F
1. Select the track you wish to transpose. 2. Press the OCTAVE + to raise the octave setting.
An insertion screen shows the current Octave setting. Press the OCTAVE + button as many times as necessary until you reach the desired setting. The value is expressed in semitones: 12 = 1 octave, 24 = 2 octaves, etc.. The insertion screen cancels automatically after 2/ 3 seconds.
G H
OCTAVE
3. Press OCTAVE button to lower the octave setting.

The current Octave setting is shown. Continue pressing the OCTAVE button as many times as necessary until you reach the desired setting. An eventual positive Octave status will be cancelled. To clear the Track Octave setting
C5 C4 C3
C6 C5 C4
OCTAVE
4. Press both OCTAVE buttons simultaneously.

The insertion screen shows the value of 0 and the tracks normal pitch is restored.
C4 C3 C2
C5 C4 C3
OCTAVE
210 User Guide
Two headphones jacks are available under the keyboard on the extreme left of the instrument. Each jack can accept a standard pair of stereo headphones. Use the Master Volume slider to adjust the headphone volume.
Strike the Pads freely.
PLAY WITH HEADPHONES
Plug a set of headphones into the PHONES 1 jack.
Plug a set of headphones into the PHONES 1 jack.
PLAY WITH HEADPHONES
The four programmable Pads buttons (Pad 1, Pad 2, Pad 3, Pad 4) provide quick and easy ways of adding extra sounds to your playing. You can program each pad to produce an instrumental sound, a percussive sound or sample. The programmable Pads can also be assigned to the rotary slow/fast switching function.
PLAY THE PROGRAMMABLE PADS
While you play, add additional sounds from the pads in real time. The configuration of the Programmable Pads can be stored in the Programmable Performances.
Two headphones jacks are available under the keyboard on the extreme left of the instrument. Each jack can accept a standard pair of stereo headphones. Use the Master Volume slider to adjust the headphone volume.
PAD 1
PAD 2
User Guide 211

PLAY THE PROGRAMMABLE PADS

The four programmable Pads buttons (Pad 1, Pad 2, Pad 3, Pad 4) provide quick and easy ways of adding extra sounds to your playing. You can program each pad to produce an instrumental sound, a percussive sound or sample. The programmable Pads can also be assigned to the rotary slow/fast switching function.
Strike the Pads freely.

While you play, add additional sounds from the pads in real time. The configuration of the Programmable Pads can be stored in the Programmable Performances.
PAD 1
PAD 2
PAD 3
PAD 4
PAD 3
PAD 4
User Guide 211
PLAY WITH THE PEDALS

PEDAL
The rear connections panel includes four jacks for control pedals, denoted Volume, 1, 2, Damper. The Volume jack is a non-programmable port for a standard Volume Pedal (optional). The remaining three pedal jacks are programmable and preset to provide Performance functions. The default configuration of the pedals is as follows: Ped1 = Soft Ped2 = Sostenuto Ped3 = Damper (sustain) Volume = Volume The pedal jacks 1, 2 and Damper are function assignable and can be independently enabled or disabled to react with the keyboard tracks of a Performance. All three pedals (1, 2, Damper) can be programmed to accept Switch action (on/off) or Continuous (graduated levels) control pedals (Volume type).
DAMPER
VOLUME
DAMPER SOSTENUTO SOFT
VOLUME
Footswitch (on/off)
Volume Pedal (continuous)
PLAY WITH THE WHEELS

The on-board controlling devices include two wheels on the left key block, both preset for Performance functions. The default configuration of the wheels is as follows: Wheel 1 (left) = Pitch Bend Wheel 2 (right) = Modulation Wheel 1 is spring loaded to return to the central position. Wheel 2 is centre-dented in order to be able to take it exactly at the central position. The Wheels can be enabled or disabled to react with the keyboard tracks of a Performance.
WHEEL 1 WHEEL 2
Pitch Bend Modulation
212 User Guide
The Select Demo dialog window appears.
2. Select one of the elements in the list (All, Demo Song, Demo Style) with the cursor buttons / .
The selected single demo playback starts and shows up in negative highlight. When the end is reached, the demo stops.
3. Press ENTER to gain access to the selection window of the element selected in step 2 (Demo Song or Demo Style).
ESCAPE
4. To listen to a single Song or Style, select one of the Demos (Song or Style) with the corresponding soft button.
The selected single demo playback starts and shows up in negative highlight. When the end is reached, the demo stops.
4. To listen to a single Song or Style, select one of the Demos (Song or Style) with the corresponding soft button.
3. Press ENTER to gain access to the selection window of the element selected in step 2 (Demo Song or Demo Style).
2. Select one of the elements in the list (All, Demo Song, Demo Style) with the cursor buttons / .
1. Press DEMO (in the Edit/Number section) to open the Demo window.
5 Listen to the Demos (All, Song, Style)
The corresponding selection window activates showing 8 Song or Style names. An animated string of text starts to scroll across the top of the display under the title, shiwing basic technical specifications of the instrument. If you select ALL, all the Demo Songs and Demo Styles are chained into a single medley. The sequencer starts to play the first song automatically and stops when it reaches the end of the last Demo Style in memory. If you want to cancel the Select Demo display without playing the Demo Songs or Styles, press ESCAPE.
The corresponding selection window activates showing 8 Song or Style names. An animated string of text starts to scroll across the top of the display under the title, shiwing basic technical specifications of the instrument. If you select ALL, all the Demo Songs and Demo Styles are chained into a single medley. The sequencer starts to play the first song automatically and stops when it reaches the end of the last Demo Style in memory. If you want to cancel the Select Demo display without playing the Demo Songs or Styles, press ESCAPE.
The Select Demo dialog window appears.
ENTER
DEMO
PRELOAD
User Guide 213

5 Listen to the Demos (All, Song, Style) 1

DEMO PRELOAD DISK H. D.
1. Press DEMO (in the Edit/Number section) to open the Demo window.
ENTER
ESCAPE
E F
DISK
+
H. D.
G H
User Guide 213
5. Select the ALL DEMO option shown in the current selection window to chain all demos displayed (Song or Style).
Playback starts automatically from the first demo. Demos not yet played are shown in negative highlight while those played return positive. While a demo plays, all the buttons on the control panel (except DEMO, the Function buttons and ESCAPE) are disabled.
5
F1 F2 F3 F4
F5
F6 F7
F8
6. To stop a demo press the corresponding soft button, or press ESCAPE.

If you press ESCAPE, the SELECT DEMO dialogue window closes and the display returns to the last operating mode selected.

6
DEMO PRELOAD DISK H. D.
ENTER
IMPORTANT: Remember to escape DEMO mode if you want to select a Performance, Style or Song, or enter one of the Edit modes.

ESCAPE
214 User Guide
A Performance is a combination of sounds that sets the instrument automatically for real time playing (keyboard sounds), for the accompaniments (Styles) and for Songs (multitrack recording) The Performances feature single, layered and multi sounds, split and full keyboard combinations, custom effect settings and more. You can create your own Performances or load new ones from disk. The Performance memorises, in addition to the sounds, the status of the effects, the assignments of the controlling devices (trackball, pedals, pads), the MIDI channel configuration, the track status (active/ mute), the mixer settings and Tempo data. Selecting a Performance instantly changes all the sounds of the tracks and the relative Performance settings. Performances are divided into two types: those residing in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS which govern the keyboard sounds and those associated to Styles and Songs which are recalled by selecting the respective element. The structure and programming procedures of both Performance types are practically identical. In this section, well take a closer look at the RealTime Performances. SK760/880 has 64 user programmable Performances, organized into eight different banks.
STYLE REAL TIME
Select and play the Performances
SK760/880 has 64 user programmable Performances, organized into eight different banks.
Performances are divided into two types: those residing in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS which govern the keyboard sounds and those associated to Styles and Songs which are recalled by selecting the respective element. The structure and programming procedures of both Performance types are practically identical. In this section, well take a closer look at the RealTime Performances.
The Performance memorises, in addition to the sounds, the status of the effects, the assignments of the controlling devices (trackball, pedals, pads), the MIDI channel configuration, the track status (active/ mute), the mixer settings and Tempo data. Selecting a Performance instantly changes all the sounds of the tracks and the relative Performance settings.
The display shows 8 Performances to choose from, each with a different name. If the instrument is in a mode other than Style/ RealTime, press the STYLE/REALTIME button (only if the LED is not on) then any button in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS. STYLE/REALTIME returns you to the last selected Performance - use this button as a return to start button whenever you wish to have one or more sounds active across the keyboard.
2. Select the Performance called StGuitar.
Use the paired Soft buttons F7/F8 nearest to the name.
Select and play the Performances
1. If the instrument is set to Style/RealTime mode, press button 1 in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS section.
2. Select the Performance called StGuitar.
1. If the instrument is set to Style/RealTime mode, press button 1 in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS section.
A Performance is a combination of sounds that sets the instrument automatically for real time playing (keyboard sounds), for the accompaniments (Styles) and for Songs (multitrack recording) The Performances feature single, layered and multi sounds, split and full keyboard combinations, custom effect settings and more. You can create your own Performances or load new ones from disk.
ABOUT THE PERFORMANCES
6 The Performances
Use the paired Soft buttons F7/F8 nearest to the name.
The display shows 8 Performances to choose from, each with a different name. If the instrument is in a mode other than Style/ RealTime, press the STYLE/REALTIME button (only if the LED is not on) then any button in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS. STYLE/REALTIME returns you to the last selected Performance - use this button as a return to start button whenever you wish to have one or more sounds active across the keyboard.
PERFORMANCE GROUP
User Guide 215

6 The Performances
ABOUT THE PERFORMANCES

F6 F8 F4 F2 F7 F5 F3 F1
PERFORMANCE GROUP
2 3 4
STYLE REAL TIME
F1 F2 F3 F4
F5
F6 F7
F8
User Guide 215
If the STYLE LOCK button is on, selecting Performances selects live keyboard sounds only. If the STYLE LOCK button is off, selecting a Performance selects live keyboard and also accompaniment Sounds. The relative Style, Variation and Tempo are selected. Sounds are those stored in the Performance.
REAL-PERFORMANCE
PERF. GROUPS
ST. LOCK
1
8. BEAT
ST. LOCK
REAL-PERFORMANCE
Performance name
After selecting your Performance, the display returns to the power up situation showing the sounds recalled by the Performance selected.

Note: If you do not select a Performance within the first 2/3 seconds, the display returns to the previous situation with no changes.

3. Play on the keyboard and listen to the selected Performance.

In this case, two sounds are shown active for play across the entire keyboard; SteelGtr1 and SteelGtr2, respectively assigned to the Upper 1 and Upper 2 keyboard sections. Full Keyb mode is shown selected. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to make additional selections. Change keyboard mode and activate/mute the sounds recalled by the Performances using the methods described on the previous pages to modify the overall sound combination. To memorise a new situation to the current Performance of to a different one, go to page 2. 39 for an example of how to store a Performance setting.
< ------------------- SteelGuit 1 (Upper 1) ------------------- > < ------------------- SteelGuit 2 (Upper 2) ------------------- >
216 User Guide
The vast number of Sounds in the SK760/880 memory, arranged in 16 Banks of 8 Sounds each, include orchestral, percussion and contemporary musical instrument sounds. The Bank 1 Sounds are all GeneralMidi compatible, while those that occupy the positions of the remaining 15 banks are variations the Bank 1 sounds.

Note: Not all sound Banks are fully occupied - the empty slots are ready to accept user-edited sounds or disk based RAM-sounds.

ABOUT THE SK760/880 SOUNDS
You can customize any sound to your tastes with the built in sound edit capabilities:
ROM-Sounds

The ROM-Sounds are a part of the instruments permanently stored data base. These sounds are permanent and cannot be cancelled. They are based on the internal samples archive (ROMWaves).
ABOUT THE SK760/880 SOUNDS
The vast number of Sounds in the SK760/880 memory, arranged in 16 Banks of 8 Sounds each, include orchestral, percussion and contemporary musical instrument sounds. The Bank 1 Sounds are all GeneralMidi compatible, while those that occupy the positions of the remaining 15 banks are variations the Bank 1 sounds.
7 Selecting the SK760/880 Sounds
Note: Not all sound Banks are fully occupied - the empty slots are ready to accept user-edited sounds or disk based RAM-sounds.
In the more advanced Edit Sound environment, you intervene on the Sound parameters and the resulting modifications are stored to RAM. This allows you to assign the edited sound (or drumkit) to any track of any Performance. Also incoporated within the same edit is the Sample Translator which allows the loading and editing of Samples.
RAM-Sounds
You can customize any sound to your tastes with the built in sound edit capabilities:
The SK760/880 Sounds are divided in four different types: ROM-Sounds; RAM-Sounds; RAM -Sounds; Drumkits / SoundPatches.
Edit Perf Sound is a quick edit method which forms part of the Edit Performance functions. The resulting modifications are stored in the track to which the Sound (or Drumkit) is assigned, consequently, all Sounds subsequently assigned to the same track inherit the same modifications.
RAM -Sounds
Edit Perf Sound is a quick edit method which forms part of the Edit Performance functions. The resulting modifications are stored in the track to which the Sound (or Drumkit) is assigned, consequently, all Sounds subsequently assigned to the same track inherit the same modifications.
The SK760/880 Sounds are divided in four different types: ROM-Sounds; RAM-Sounds; RAM -Sounds; Drumkits / SoundPatches.
Drumkit / SoundPatch
The ROM-Sounds are a part of the instruments permanently stored data base. These sounds are permanent and cannot be cancelled. They are based on the internal samples archive (ROMWaves).
RAM-Sounds
These types of Sounds can be loaded from floppy disk (SK760/880, WK, SK, PS/GPS or WX/SX), or created with the advanced Edit Sound.
RAM -Sounds
These sounds are RAM-Sounds based on RAM samples. The Sample Translator incoporated in Edit Sound allows you to load disk-based Samples and edit them with dedicated parameters. These type of Sounds are stored in the SampleRAM. Disk based RAM -sounds can also be loaded into Sample-RAM.
Drumkit / SoundPatch
These are Sound combinations comprising the three sound types described above. Drumkits assign a different percussive Sound to each note of the keyboard. SoundPatches superimpose two Sounds, separated by a dynamic threshold (velocity switch). The structure of the Drumkit and SoundPatch can be fused, in order to obtain, for example, a Drumkit in which a percussive instrument responds with two different Sounds, each on a different dynamic level.

ROM-Sounds
In the more advanced Edit Sound environment, you intervene on the Sound parameters and the resulting modifications are stored to RAM. This allows you to assign the edited sound (or drumkit) to any track of any Performance. Also incoporated within the same edit is the Sample Translator which allows the loading and editing of Samples.
The structure of the Drumkit and SoundPatch can be fused, in order to obtain, for example, a Drumkit in which a percussive instrument responds with two different Sounds, each on a different dynamic level.
These are Sound combinations comprising the three sound types described above. Drumkits assign a different percussive Sound to each note of the keyboard. SoundPatches superimpose two Sounds, separated by a dynamic threshold (velocity switch).
These sounds are RAM-Sounds based on RAM samples. The Sample Translator incoporated in Edit Sound allows you to load disk-based Samples and edit them with dedicated parameters. These type of Sounds are stored in the SampleRAM. Disk based RAM -sounds can also be loaded into Sample-RAM.
These types of Sounds can be loaded from floppy disk (SK760/880, WK, SK, PS/GPS or WX/SX), or created with the advanced Edit Sound.
User Guide 217

7 Selecting the SK760/880 Sounds
User Guide 217
SELECT AND PLAY BANK 1 SOUNDS (GM)

Your selection will be assigned to the currently selected track of the selected Performance. The keyboard extension over which the sound will play will also depend on the current keyboard mode. To listen to the sound that you select without hearing others, mute the tracks of all the sounds not wanted, or use the SOLO button as described on page 2.21.
1
PIANO
SOUND GROUP
CHROM.
ORGAN
GUITAR
BASS
STRI
1. Press a SOUND GROUPS button.

In this example, press the PIANO 1 button. The display shows 8 Sounds to choose from.
REED
PIPE
SYN. LD
SYN. PAD
SYN. FIX
ETH
2. Select a Sound by pressing the paired Soft buttons near the Sound name in the display (buttons E/F for Piano3 in this example).
After selecting the Sound, the display returns to the previous situation showing the selected sound assigned to the selected track.
2
A B C D E F
3. Play on the keyboard and listen to the Sound.

Repeat step 2 to make additional selections.
< --------------------- Piano 3 (Upper 1) --------------------- >
218 User Guide
6. Select a Sound from the current Bank with the corresponding paired Soft buttons (buttons E/F for E.G.Piano1 in this example). 7. Play on the keyboard and listen to the Sound.
Repeat steps 4, 5 and 6 to make additional selections from other Banks and Groups.
G H
7. Play on the keyboard and listen to the Sound.
6. Select a Sound from the current Bank with the corresponding paired Soft buttons (buttons E/F for E.G.Piano1 in this example).
5. Select a different Bank using the Page/Bank buttons ( ).
SELECT AND PLAY SOUND VARIATIONS (BANK 2, 3, ..... ETC..)
Repeat steps 4, 5 and 6 to make additional selections from other Banks and Groups.
The button selects the Banks in increasing numerical order while the button selects in decreasing order. Each Sound Group consists of 16 Sound Banks capable of containing up to 8 Sounds each.
If you press the same Sound Groups button as in point 1, you can listen to variations of the same sound selected in point 2.
< ------------------ E.G. Piano1 (Upper 1) ------------------ >
PIANO
REED
CHROM.
PIPE
SYN. LD
ORGAN
User Guide 219

SELECT AND PLAY SOUND VARIATIONS (BANK 2, 3, ..... ETC..)

4
PIANO
SOUND GROUP
CHROM.
ORGAN
GUITAR
BASS
STRI

If you press the same Sound Groups button as in point 1, you can listen to variations of the same sound selected in point 2.
REED
PIPE
SYN. LD
SYN. PAD
SYN. FIX
ETH
5. Select a different Bank using the Page/Bank buttons ( ).

The button selects the Banks in increasing numerical order while the button selects in decreasing order. Each Sound Group consists of 16 Sound Banks capable of containing up to 8 Sounds each.
6
A B C D E F
G H
< ------------------ E.G. Piano1 (Upper 1) ------------------ >
SYN. PAD
GUITAR
SOUND GROUP
SYN. FIX
BASS
STRI
ETH
User Guide 219
USING THE KEYPAD TO SELECT A SOUND

The SK760/880 Sounds are identified by two numbers: the ProgramChange (PC) and the BankSelect MSB number (ControlChange 00 [CC00]). You can select a Sound by specifying the absolute values (PC and CC numbers) on the numeric keypad. In MIDI setups, a third number corresponding to the BankSelect LSB (CC 32) is sometimes necessary to select a sound of an expander connected to the SK760/880 MIDI OUT.

1
A B C D E F
G H
KEY PAD
Note: If you specify the ProgramChange on its own, the bank rests unchanged. For example, if the current Sound is 112-2-1, by specifying ProgramChange 96 or sending PC96 via MIDI, you will select Sound 96-2-1.

1. Select (if necessary) the track whose sound you wish to reassign. 2. Press the KEY PAD button to enable the numeric keypad.
An insertion window activates showing the number of Sound currently assigned to the track.
3A
EDIT / NUMBER
EFFECTS MIDI MIXER
CNT / PADS
TRACKS
SOUND
ST. / SONG
SYNTH
GENERAL
DEMO
PRELOAD
DISK H. D.
3. Specify the ProgramChange of the required Sound.

A: In the example, specify 4 then 9. B: If the required Sound belongs to a different Bank, key in a dash () which acts as a separator then specify the corresponding Bank number (Bank Select MSB). In the example, specify then 2. If necessary, add a second separator () and the third part of the message (BankSelect LSB).
EDIT / NUMBER
EFFECTS MIDI MIXER
CNT / PADS
TRACKS
SOUND
3B
ST. / SONG
SYNTH
GENERAL
DEMO
PRELOAD
DISK H. D.
4. Confirm by pressing KEY PAD or ENTER, or press ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
The KEY PAD LED turns off.
KEY PAD
ENTER
OR
ESCAPE
220 User Guide
1. Press the SOLO button and play on the keyboard.

The LED of the SOLO button turns on and the sound currently shown highlighted will play while all other sounds are automatically muted (if active).
H
2. Select any another sound by pressing the corresponding Soft button once only.
G E F
The SOLO LED turns off.
If you are playing in a situation where two or more sounds are displayed, before activating a muted sound you may want to listen to it alone to decide whether to activate it or not. In such a situation, you can isolate the sound from the rest using the SOLO button in the following manner:
3. Press the SOLO button again to return to normal operation.

SOLO
2. Select any another sound by pressing the corresponding Soft button once only.
1. Press the SOLO button and play on the keyboard.
THE SOLO BUTTON - ISOLATE A SINGLE SOUND FROM THE REST
The LED of the SOLO button turns on and the sound currently shown highlighted will play while all other sounds are automatically muted (if active).
In this example, the sound WarmPad (Lower 2) is automatically activated and the previous one (E.G.Piano1) is automatically muted. Observe that the sound plays across the full keyboard: normally Lower 2 plays on the left split in Upp/Low mode and cannot be activated when Full keyboard mode is selected. In Full keyboard mode, therefore, even sounds assigned to the Lower keyboard sections play across the full keyboard when they are Solod. In other words, the SOLO button overrides the current Split point. In Upp/Low and Multi mode, a Solod sound plays across the currently assigned keyboard extension. In this case, the SOLO button recognises the current Split Point. The SOLO button finds its principal use in Multi track situations.
3. Press the SOLO button again to return to normal operation.
< ------------------- WARMPAD (Lower 2) ------------------- >

SOLO
The SOLO LED turns off.
In this example, the sound WarmPad (Lower 2) is automatically activated and the previous one (E.G.Piano1) is automatically muted. Observe that the sound plays across the full keyboard: normally Lower 2 plays on the left split in Upp/Low mode and cannot be activated when Full keyboard mode is selected. In Full keyboard mode, therefore, even sounds assigned to the Lower keyboard sections play across the full keyboard when they are Solod. In other words, the SOLO button overrides the current Split point. In Upp/Low and Multi mode, a Solod sound plays across the currently assigned keyboard extension. In this case, the SOLO button recognises the current Split Point. The SOLO button finds its principal use in Multi track situations.
< ------------------- WARMPAD (Lower 2) ------------------- >
SOLO
User Guide 221

THE SOLO BUTTON - ISOLATE A SINGLE SOUND FROM THE REST

If you are playing in a situation where two or more sounds are displayed, before activating a muted sound you may want to listen to it alone to decide whether to activate it or not. In such a situation, you can isolate the sound from the rest using the SOLO button in the following manner:
SOLO
User Guide 221
8 Display Hold
HOLD THE DISPLAY DURING SELECTION PROCEDURES
SK760/880 powers up with the D.HOLD button active. With this function the selection window remains locked after selecting an item. If you disactivate D.HOLD (led off), after selecting an item, the display returns to the previous status automatically.
1
PIANO
SOUND GROUP
CHROM.
ORGAN
GUITAR
BASS
STRING
2. Press a button from the SOUND GROUPS, the PERFORMANCE GROUPS or the STYLE GROUPS section to open the relative selection window.
In the example, we select a Sound Groups button:
REED
PIPE
SYN. LD
SYN. PAD
SYN. FIX
ETHNIC
3. Select a Sound from the selection window.

E
The selection window remains locked after you select your sound.
G H
4. Select other sounds as required.

The display remains fixed showing the selection of sounds.
3
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
5. Press another Group button to open a different selection window and select another item. 6. Press ESCAPE to close the selection window without cancelling D. HOLD.
Press D. HOLD to cancel the function (LED off).
F6 F7
F8
4
PIANO
SOUND GROUP
CHROM.
ORGAN
GUITAR
BASS
STRING
REED
PIPE
SYN. LD
SYN. PAD
SYN. FIX
ETHNIC
5
ESCAPE
D. HOLD
OR
222 User Guide
ABOUT THE SK760/880 STYLES
The Styles are rendered more versatile by their Performances, 8 for each Style. In fact, once you select a Style, you can assign up to 8 different Performances to the Style while you play, giving you endless sound combination possibilities.
The accompaniment tracks and the keyboard tracks can be changed in the same manner and saved in the Performance (Style-Performance or Performance).
ABOUT THE SK760/880 STYLES
Styles are a collection of musical patterns representing many types of music, ranging from rock and pop to traditional, Latin and Oriental music The automatic accompaniments of the Styles are triggered by the chord information received from the SK760/880 keyboard; the accompaniment patterns change to suit the current chord.
Each Style consists of 16 tracks: the first 8 are engaged by the sequencer for the auto accompaniments, and the remaining 8 belong to the real time keyboard sections (Upper 1 & 2, Lower 1 & 2 in Upp/Low mode, tracks 1 8 in Multimode). The 8 accompaniment tracks are divided as follows: DRUMS (drum sets), BASS, ACC. 1/2/3 and ACC. 4/5/6 (accompaniments 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6). In Style/RealTime mode, press the right TRACK SCROLL button to bring the 8 automatic accompaniment tracks into view.
TRACK SCROLL
The Styles are rendered more versatile by their Performances, 8 for each Style. In fact, once you select a Style, you can assign up to 8 different Performances to the Style while you play, giving you endless sound combination possibilities.
The SK760/880 has 192 auto accompaniment Styles arranged in 12 Style Groups, each containing 2 banks of 8 Styles each. Your instrument may also contain a set of Flash User Styles. See page 2. 27 for more details. Each Style has 4 Variations, 4 Intros, 4 Fills and 4 Endings. A Style, therefore, provides a complete range of musical structures with which you can create an entire song.
The SK760/880 has 192 auto accompaniment Styles arranged in 12 Style Groups, each containing 2 banks of 8 Styles each. Your instrument may also contain a set of Flash User Styles. See page 2. 27 for more details. Each Style has 4 Variations, 4 Intros, 4 Fills and 4 Endings. A Style, therefore, provides a complete range of musical structures with which you can create an entire song.
Accompaniment tracks Sounds assigned to the accompaniment tracks
Each Style consists of 16 tracks: the first 8 are engaged by the sequencer for the auto accompaniments, and the remaining 8 belong to the real time keyboard sections (Upper 1 & 2, Lower 1 & 2 in Upp/Low mode, tracks 1 8 in Multimode). The 8 accompaniment tracks are divided as follows: DRUMS (drum sets), BASS, ACC. 1/2/3 and ACC. 4/5/6 (accompaniments 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6).
Styles are a collection of musical patterns representing many types of music, ranging from rock and pop to traditional, Latin and Oriental music The automatic accompaniments of the Styles are triggered by the chord information received from the SK760/880 keyboard; the accompaniment patterns change to suit the current chord.
The accompaniment tracks and the keyboard tracks can be changed in the same manner and saved in the Performance (Style-Performance or Performance).
9 The Styles
The arrangement patterns of the ROM Styles are fixed and cannot be modified. It is, however, possible to program your own Style patterns to create up to 32 User-programmable Styles and store them in the 4 USER GROUPS. You can also program User Styles using copies (whole or partial) of the ROM Styles. Up to 32 disk based user-programmable Styles of your choice can be loaded into the 4 USER Groups available. Press the left TRACK SCROLL button to restore the Style/RealTime display.
User Guide 223

9 The Styles
In Style/RealTime mode, press the right TRACK SCROLL button to bring the 8 automatic accompaniment tracks into view.
TRACK SCROLL
Accompaniment tracks Sounds assigned to the accompaniment tracks
The arrangement patterns of the ROM Styles are fixed and cannot be modified. It is, however, possible to program your own Style patterns to create up to 32 User-programmable Styles and store them in the 4 USER GROUPS. You can also program User Styles using copies (whole or partial) of the ROM Styles. Up to 32 disk based user-programmable Styles of your choice can be loaded into the 4 USER Groups available. Press the left TRACK SCROLL button to restore the Style/RealTime display.
User Guide 223
PLAY WITH THE STYLES

1. Press SINGLE TCH. PLAY.
The ARRANGE ON/OFF and ARRANGE MEMORY buttons will activate if not already on. When SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on, the sounds memorized in the recalled Style Performance are assigned to all the tracks. Selecting a Style changes the sounds of the accompaniment tracks as well as those assigned to the keyboard sections. Also recalled are settings relating to the keyboard mode and chord recognition mode for the current Style. If SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, selecting Styles changes the sounds of the accompaniment tracks only while those of the keyboard sounds remain unchanged.
SINGLE TCH. PLAY
ARRANGE ON / OFF
ARRANGE MEMORY
LOWER MEMORY
ARRANGE MODE
2
STYLE GROUP
8. BEAT 16. BEAT ROCK
FUNK
DANCE. 1
DANCE. 2
US
JAZZ
US. TRAD
TRAD. 1
TRAD. 2
LATIN. 1
LATIN. 2
US
2. Press a Style button in the STYLE GROUPS (8 Beat, 16 Beat, Rock, etc.).
JAZZ in this example. 8 Style names belonging to the selected Style Group are displayed in Bank 1.
3. Use the Page Scroll buttons ( ) to select Bank 2 if Bank 1 does not show the required Style.
A second bank of 8 Styles belonging to the selected Style Group is displayed.
224 User Guide
Note: You can also scroll all 16 Style tracks using the / cursor buttons.

6. Play a chord of at least three notes below the chord Split Point (note B3) to start Style play.
A fully orchestrated auto accompaniment pattern is triggered. In default conditions, the keyboards chord recognition mode is set to Fingered 1. You can change the chord recognition mode to One finger, Fingered 2 or Free 1 & 2, by entering the ARRANGE MODE options. See the ARRANGE MODE function on page 2.33 of this chapter.

5. Press the INTRO button if you want to preselect the Style introduction, then press the START/STOP button to start the accompaniment.
Youll hear the drum track start to play with an introduction (the length of the Intro will depend on the currently selected Variation). You can also preset the Ending or the Fill >< to play as an Intro.
TRACK SCROLL
6. Play a chord of at least three notes below the chord Split Point (note B3) to start Style play.
4. Select a Style with the corresponding paired soft buttons.
Youll hear the drum track start to play with an introduction (the length of the Intro will depend on the currently selected Variation). You can also preset the Ending or the Fill >< to play as an Intro.
5. Press the INTRO button if you want to preselect the Style introduction, then press the START/STOP button to start the accompaniment.
A fully orchestrated auto accompaniment pattern is triggered. In default conditions, the keyboards chord recognition mode is set to Fingered 1. You can change the chord recognition mode to One finger, Fingered 2 or Free 1 & 2, by entering the ARRANGE MODE options. See the ARRANGE MODE function on page 2.33 of this chapter.
Note: You can also scroll all 16 Style tracks using the / cursor buttons.
Buttons A/B for SWING in this example. The display returns to Style/RealTime mode showing the recalled keyboard sounds. Observe also that the keyboard mode has changed from Full to Upp/Low. Press the right Track Scroll button to check the sounds recalled for the accompaniment tracks. Observe that in this example, the tracks Acc4/5/6 are all muted. Press the left Track Scroll button to return to the keyboard sounds.
INTRO
INTRO
User Guide 225

4. Select a Style with the corresponding paired soft buttons.

4
A B C D E F
Buttons A/B for SWING in this example. The display returns to Style/RealTime mode showing the recalled keyboard sounds. Observe also that the keyboard mode has changed from Full to Upp/Low. Press the right Track Scroll button to check the sounds recalled for the accompaniment tracks. Observe that in this example, the tracks Acc4/5/6 are all muted. Press the left Track Scroll button to return to the keyboard sounds.
START / STOP

G H
TRACK SCROLL
TRACK SCROLL
KEY START
TRACK SCROLL
ENDING
INTRO
INTRO
KEY START
ENDING
START / STOP
User Guide 225
7. Press one of the VAR buttons shown off.

Note how the accompaniment pattern changes to a different Variation. The VAR buttons control the Style Variations. Each button recalls a different version of the same accompaniment. Each Variation includes different patterns for the Basic, Intro, Fill and Ending sections.
7
VAR. 1 VAR. 2 VAR. 3 VAR. 4
VAR. 1
VAR. 2
VAR. 3
VAR. 4
8. Press one of the FILL buttons.

FILL< plays the fill cycle then breaks into the previous Variation. FILL>< plays the fill cycle then continues with the current Variation. When the accompaniment is not playing, Fill >< can be preselected to play as an intro. FILL> plays the fill cycle then breaks into the next Variation (this button also incorporates the Tap Tempo function - see over). Normally the fill cycle plays once only. If you hold the FILL button pressed, it will repeat the Fill cycle continually until release.
8
FILL FILL FILL
TAP TEMPO
FILL
FILL
FILL
TAP TEMPO
TRACK SCROLL
9. Play a different chord.

Note how the accompaniment pattern is transposed.
9/10
10. Start to play a melody with the right hand.

The combination of sounds that play and the current keyboard mode will depend on the Style selected.
11. Stop the Style by pressing the Start/Stop button or the Ending button.
Start/Stop stops the Style instantly. Ending stops the Style with an ending phrase.
11
INTRO
KEY START
ENDING
ENDING
START / STOP
226 User Guide
The second bank of the User Styles corresponds to the Flash bank which contains 8 Flash User Styles. These Styles may differ from market to market.
Buttons A/B for SpgtiWSTRN in this example. Proceed as already described for the Rom Styles in the previous pages.
N.B. The recalled Flash User Style can be modified and memorised to the same Flash User Bank, or to any other User location. Refer to the Style Performance procedure on the pages which follow for details regarding how to store Performance.
Your instrument leaves the factory with a set of User Styles stored in the Flash banks of the User Style locations. These memory locations are reserved for factory use and the contents may differ depending on the various world markets. It is not possible to save data (other than Performance data) to the User flash banks, nor is it possible to erase the data contained in them. From time to time, Generalmusic may offer operating systems which contain upgrades of the User flash banks.
3. Select a Flash User Style with the corresponding paired soft buttons.
Select a Flash User Style The selection procedure is identical to the one used to select a Style, with the different that you select the Flash User Style from the second bank of the User locations (User 1).
2. Use the Page buttons (
) to select Bank 2.
1. Press the User 1 button in the STYLE GROUPS section.
8 User locations belonging to the selected User Group are displayed in Bank 1 (if User Styles have not been recorded or loaded from disk, all the User locations of Bank 1 will be empty).
SELECT AND PLAY THE FLASH MEMORY USER STYLES
8 User locations belonging to the selected User Group are displayed in Bank 1 (if User Styles have not been recorded or loaded from disk, all the User locations of Bank 1 will be empty).
1. Press the User 1 button in the STYLE GROUPS section.
2. Use the Page buttons (
The second bank of the User Styles corresponds to the Flash bank which contains 8 Flash User Styles. These Styles may differ from market to market.
) to select Bank 2.
Select a Flash User Style The selection procedure is identical to the one used to select a Style, with the different that you select the Flash User Style from the second bank of the User locations (User 1).
3. Select a Flash User Style with the corresponding paired soft buttons.
Buttons A/B for SpgtiWSTRN in this example. Proceed as already described for the Rom Styles in the previous pages.
Your instrument leaves the factory with a set of User Styles stored in the Flash banks of the User Style locations. These memory locations are reserved for factory use and the contents may differ depending on the various world markets. It is not possible to save data (other than Performance data) to the User flash banks, nor is it possible to erase the data contained in them. From time to time, Generalmusic may offer operating systems which contain upgrades of the User flash banks.
N.B. The recalled Flash User Style can be modified and memorised to the same Flash User Bank, or to any other User location. Refer to the Style Performance procedure on the pages which follow for details regarding how to store Performance.
TRAD. 2
FUNK
STYLE GROUP
DANCE. 1
LATIN. 1
DANCE. 2
User Guide 227

SELECT AND PLAY THE FLASH MEMORY USER STYLES

STYLE GROUP
FUNK DANCE. 1 DANCE. 2 USER. 1 USER. 2
TRAD. 2
LATIN. 1
LATIN. 2
USER. 3
USER. 4
LATIN. 2
USER. 3 USER. 1
USER. 2
USER. 4
User Guide 227
START A STYLE WITH KEY START

The Key Start function synchronizes the start of the automatic accompaniment with a note pressed on the keyboard below the split point without having to use START/STOP. KEY START can be used in various situations. The most common use is as follows:
1/2
ARRANGE ON / OFF ARRANGE MEMORY LOWER MEMORY
INTRO
KEY START
ENDING
1. Make sure that ARRANGE MEMORY or LOWER MEMORY are off.

Note: If ARRANGE MEMORY or LOWER
MEMORY are off, the accompaniment plays while your notes are pressed on the keyboard and stops instantly when the notes are released. If, instead, one of these two functions are active, the accompaniment or the drum track only will continue playing after releasing the keys.

3
INTRO
START / STOP
2. When the Style is not playing, press KEY START.

The KEY START LED turns on.
3. Preselect the INTRO (or FILL or ENDING) to start the Style with an Intro, and play a chord (at least 3 notes) with your left hand.
The accompaniment starts immediately (eventually preceded by the introductory pattern if selected). If you release the keys, the accompaniment stops instantly.
4
ARRANGE ON / OFF ARRANGE MEMORY LOWER MEMORY
4. Press the Arrange Memory button (LED on) and play another chord with your left hand.
The accompaniment starts playing again. If you release the keys, this time the arrangement continues to play. The Arrange Memory function memorises the last chord played.
INTRO
KEY START
ENDING
5. Press START/STOP or ENDING to stop the accompaniment.

With Start/Stop, KEY START remains active. With Ending, KEY START turns off. If you use Start/Stop to stop the accompaniment, press KEY START to turn it off.
START / STOP
228 User Guide
During the Fade cycle, the relative LED flashes. The beat is tapped out with the sound of drumsticks.
START AND STOP A STYLE WITH FADE IN/OUT
Press FADE IN/OUT while the accompaniment is running; all the track volumes gradually decrease and the accompaniment automatically stops at the end of the Fade Out cycle.
Press the button before starting the accompaniment with Start/Stop.
The Style track volumes are instantly set to zero. Use either START/STOP or KEY START to start the accompaniment. After the start, the accompaniment track volumes gradually increase and reach their programmed peak after a 2 measure (bar) cycle.
FADE I / O
START / STOP
The Style track volumes are instantly set to zero. Use either START/STOP or KEY START to start the accompaniment. After the start, the accompaniment track volumes gradually increase and reach their programmed peak after a 2 measure (bar) cycle.
Press the button before starting the accompaniment with Start/Stop.

FADE I / O
Press FADE IN/OUT while the accompaniment is running; all the track volumes gradually decrease and the accompaniment automatically stops at the end of the Fade Out cycle.
START AND STOP A STYLE WITH FADE IN/OUT
During the Fade cycle, the relative LED flashes.
The tempo adjusts itself automatically according to the current Time Signature (4/4, 3/4, etc.).
The tempo is set according to the timing of the last two taps, the relative Tempo value is displayed and the accompaniment starts automatically.
With the Style accompaniment off, beat time on the TAP TEMPO button.
START A STYLE WITH TAP TEMPO
TAP TEMPO
FILL
User Guide 229

START A STYLE WITH TAP TEMPO

With the Style accompaniment off, beat time on the TAP TEMPO button.
The tempo is set according to the timing of the last two taps, the relative Tempo value is displayed and the accompaniment starts automatically. The tempo adjusts itself automatically according to the current Time Signature (4/4, 3/4, etc.). The beat is tapped out with the sound of drumsticks.
FILL
TAP TEMPO
FADE I / O
START / STOP
FADE I / O
User Guide 229
THE FUNCTIONS OF THE STYLES

The Styles are governed by the following 8 functions which determine how the Styles play.
ARRANGE ON / OFF ARRANGE MEMORY LOWER MEMORY ARRANGE MODE
TEMPO LOCK If TEMPO LOCK is off, when a Style or a Performance is selected the tempo changes too. If the function is on, the tempo will not change. MIXER LOCK
TEMPO LOCK
MIXER LOCK
BASS TO LOWEST
HARMONY ON / OFF
ARRANGE ON/OFF When this button is on, all the accompaniment parts of a Style are enabled. If it is not on, you will only hear the Drum track when you press Start/Stop to start the Style. ARRANGE MEMORY When this button is on, the accompaniment continues to play after releasing the left hand from the keyboard. When off, releasing your left hand causes the accompaniment to stop. LOWER MEMORY If this is on, the notes of the track assigned to the left hand (Upper&Lower and Multi modes) are held even if the left hand is taken away from the keys. The Lower Memory function is useful for holding on background sounds without having to use a Damper pedal (which may be of more use with the upper sounds). In the Upper&Lower and Multi modes, the function is used to keep the Drum part playing even when you have taken your hand off the keys. ARRANGE MODE Pressing this button gains access to the chord recognition modes for the accompaniments. Refer to the Arrange mode paragraph on page 2.33 for more information.

A Performance also memorizes the track volumes. If MIXER LOCK is off, when a Style or a Performance is selected the track volumes change too. If it is on, all the volumes of the tracks assigned to the keyboard will change while the accompaniment track volumes will not. BASS TO LOWEST If BASS TO LOWEST is on, the bass part of the auto accompaniment of the current Style plays around the lowest note of the current chord. If you play a different inversion of the same chord, the lowest note also changes resulting in a different bass note being played. If off, the bass will follow the original programmed pattern of the Style. Bass To Lowest permits real time changes to the otherwise fixed bass pattern of a Style, by playing different chord inversions. HARMONY ON/OFF This button enables (LED on) or disables (LED off) the current Harmony Type selected in the HARMONY function of the Edit Tracks environment. Harmony can orchestrate your Style playing, making simple one-note melodies sound as if they are being played by a full orchestra. Harmony is associated to Styles only. Songs cannot exploit this function. For more information on the Harmony types available, see Edit Tracks in the Reference Guide.
230 User Guide
Heres how to assign a different Style Performance to the current Style.
8 Style Performance names associated to the current Style are displayed.
When Single Touch Play is on, each SK760/880 Style is associated to 8 Style Performances which you can assign at any time before or during play. The Style Performances are permanent and cannot be destroyed. They are, however, rewritable (keyboard and accompaniment sounds). Their default settings can be restored with the Restore command.
Buttons C/D for E.Guitar in this example. If Single Touch Play is off (LED off), selecting a Style Performance activates the button automatically (LED on). The display returns to Style/RealTime mode showing the keyboard sounds recalled by the selected Style Performance. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for other Style Performance selections. Use D.HOLD to lock the selection display.
A Style Performance be programmed to change the keyboard sounds as well as the accompaniment sounds, but the accompaniment patterns of the current Style remain unchanged.
4. Select a Style Performance with the corresponding paired soft buttons.

8. BEAT JAZZ
1. Press SINGLE TCH. PLAY and press a Style button in the STYLE GROUPS.
3. Press the STYLE P. button to gain access to the Style Performances.
2. Select a Style from bank 1 or 2 of the Style Group with the corresponding soft buttons.
The display returns to Style/RealTime mode showing the recalled keyboard sounds for the Style selected.
C G E D B F
Heres how to assign a different Style Performance to the current Style.
SELECT A STYLE PERFORMANCE
The display returns to Style/RealTime mode showing the recalled keyboard sounds for the Style selected.
2. Select a Style from bank 1 or 2 of the Style Group with the corresponding soft buttons.
ST. LOCK
3. Press the STYLE P. button to gain access to the Style Performances.
1. Press SINGLE TCH. PLAY and press a Style button in the STYLE GROUPS.
4. Select a Style Performance with the corresponding paired soft buttons.
A Style Performance be programmed to change the keyboard sounds as well as the accompaniment sounds, but the accompaniment patterns of the current Style remain unchanged.
Buttons C/D for E.Guitar in this example. If Single Touch Play is off (LED off), selecting a Style Performance activates the button automatically (LED on). The display returns to Style/RealTime mode showing the keyboard sounds recalled by the selected Style Performance. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for other Style Performance selections. Use D.HOLD to lock the selection display.
8 Style Performance names associated to the current Style are displayed.
SINGLE TCH. PLAY
STYLE P.
PERFORMANCE GROUP
User Guide 231

SELECT A STYLE PERFORMANCE

When Single Touch Play is on, each SK760/880 Style is associated to 8 Style Performances which you can assign at any time before or during play. The Style Performances are permanent and cannot be destroyed. They are, however, rewritable (keyboard and accompaniment sounds). Their default settings can be restored with the Restore command.
SINGLE TCH. PLAY
STYLE GROU
ROCK
8. BEAT
16. BEAT
FUNK
DANC
JAZZ
US. TRAD
TRAD. 1
TRAD. 2
LATI
US. TRAD
16. BEAT
D E
PERFORMANCE GROUP
2 3
ST. LOCK
STYLE P.
TRAD. 1
ROCK
TRAD. 2 FUNK
STYLE GROU
DANC
LATI
User Guide 231
SELECT A STYLE WITHOUT CHANGING THE KEYBOARD SOUNDS

If you want to change Style while playing without changing the keyboard sounds, select the Style with Single Touch Play off:
SINGLE TCH. PLAY
1. While playing with a Style, turn off SINGLE TCH PLAY.

When SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, selecting a Style changes the accompaniment patterns, the sounds and effects of the accompaniment tracks only - the keyboard sounds remain unchanged.
8. BEAT
16. BEAT
ROCK
JAZZ
US. TRAD
TRAD. 1
2. Press one of the buttons of the STYLE GROUPS section and select a Style from bank 1 or 2.
Selecting a Style instantly changes the automatic accompaniment patterns together with the sounds and effects of the automatic accompaniment tracks. The sounds and effects of the live keyboard tracks remain unchanged.
C D E F
G H
3. To check the change in accompaniment sounds, press the right Track Scroll button to view the accompaniment tracks.
Press the left Track Scroll button to return to the keyboard sounds. If TEMPO LOCK and MIXER LOCK are off, the tempo and track volumes also change.
3
TRACK SCROLL
TRACK SCROLL
232 User Guide
The ARRANGE MODE button gains access to several options associated to the Styles: the Auto or Fixed Chord modes, the Style Chord Recognition modes, Dynamic Arrange and Autobacking.
About the Chord Recognition modes The Chord Recognition modes generate the automatic accompaniments of the Styles in various different ways according to how many notes are pressed and where on the keyboard (above or below the split point). The programmed accompaniment patterns are always fully generated with a fully recognised chord. Major, minor and seventh chords each can generate completely different accompaniment patterns. The chord recognition modes available are: One finger - A single note played below the Split Point is interpreted as the root of a major chord.
About the Auto and Fixed Chord modes Chord recognition can be set to remain fixed regardless of the keyboard mode setting, or to change automatically according to the change in the keyboard mode. Auto Chord Mode, active by default, allows changes of the chord recognition mode according to the selected keyboard mode (Full Keyboard, Upper&Lower or Multi). Given that the keyboard mode is memorized in a Performance, the chord recognition can change along with the Performance. Fixed Chord Mode allows you to set a chord recognition mode which does change with changes in the keyboard mode (and consequently any Performance changes). The option selected remains memorized after power down.
About the Auto and Fixed Chord modes Chord recognition can be set to remain fixed regardless of the keyboard mode setting, or to change automatically according to the change in the keyboard mode. Auto Chord Mode, active by default, allows changes of the chord recognition mode according to the selected keyboard mode (Full Keyboard, Upper&Lower or Multi). Given that the keyboard mode is memorized in a Performance, the chord recognition can change along with the Performance. Fixed Chord Mode allows you to set a chord recognition mode which does change with changes in the keyboard mode (and consequently any Performance changes). The option selected remains memorized after power down.
About the Chord Recognition modes The Chord Recognition modes generate the automatic accompaniments of the Styles in various different ways according to how many notes are pressed and where on the keyboard (above or below the split point). The programmed accompaniment patterns are always fully generated with a fully recognised chord. Major, minor and seventh chords each can generate completely different accompaniment patterns. The chord recognition modes available are: One finger - A single note played below the Split Point is interpreted as the root of a major chord.
10 Arrange Mode and the chord recognition modes
About Autobacking When Autobacking is on, a quick change of chord updates the Style auto accompaniment pattern instantly without breaks in the pattern. When off, a change of chord does not update instantly but waits for the next note of the accompaniment before revising the pattern.
About Dynamic Arrange When Dynamic Arrange is active, the volume of the Style Auto accompaniments can be controlled according to the velocity applied to the chord notes. Increased chord note velocity increases the volume of the accompaniments. When Off, the accompaniment volumes remain unchanged with changes in chord note velocity.
A minor chord requires the root note and the minor third (e.g. C and Eb). A seventh chord requires the root and seventh (e.g. C with a Bb either above or below C). Fingered 1 - Needs at least three notes for full chord recognition. With less than three notes, the chord is not recognized - the notes played are considered stray. Fingered 2 - At least three notes must be played to obtain the fully programmed pattern. If less than three notes are played, the arranger recognizes the chord but triggers a partial accompaniment. Free 1 - A three note chord is recognized anywhere along the keyboard, overriding the Split Point. Less then three notes does not affect the chord recognition mechanism. Free 1 recognizes up to 4 chord notes. Free 2 - As above. Up to 6 notes are recognized. The option selected can be stored to the Performances.
User Guide 233

10 Arrange Mode and the chord recognition modes

The ARRANGE MODE button gains access to several options associated to the Styles: the Auto or Fixed Chord modes, the Style Chord Recognition modes, Dynamic Arrange and Autobacking. A minor chord requires the root note and the minor third (e.g. C and Eb). A seventh chord requires the root and seventh (e.g. C with a Bb either above or below C). Fingered 1 - Needs at least three notes for full chord recognition. With less than three notes, the chord is not recognized - the notes played are considered stray. Fingered 2 - At least three notes must be played to obtain the fully programmed pattern. If less than three notes are played, the arranger recognizes the chord but triggers a partial accompaniment. Free 1 - A three note chord is recognized anywhere along the keyboard, overriding the Split Point. Less then three notes does not affect the chord recognition mechanism. Free 1 recognizes up to 4 chord notes. Free 2 - As above. Up to 6 notes are recognized. The option selected can be stored to the Performances.
About Dynamic Arrange When Dynamic Arrange is active, the volume of the Style Auto accompaniments can be controlled according to the velocity applied to the chord notes. Increased chord note velocity increases the volume of the accompaniments. When Off, the accompaniment volumes remain unchanged with changes in chord note velocity. About Autobacking When Autobacking is on, a quick change of chord updates the Style auto accompaniment pattern instantly without breaks in the pattern. When off, a change of chord does not update instantly but waits for the next note of the accompaniment before revising the pattern.
User Guide 233
SELECTING THE ARRANGE MODE OPTIONS

1. Press the ARRANGE MODE button to gain access to the Arrange Mode environment.
The page shows the parameters of either Auto Chord Mode or Fixed Chord Mode, depending on the option currently selected.
ARRANGE MODE
2
F1 F2
2. Use the Soft buttons to select one of the two Chord Mode options.
Fixed Chord Mode - the display shows a single list of recognition modes. Auto Chord Mode - the display divides into two parts. The left part shows the options for Upper&Lower and Multi, while the right shows those for Full Keyboard.
F4
F3
F5
F6 F7
F8
F1
3. Select the preferred chord recognition mode with the cursor buttons.
If the display is divided into two parts, use the / cursor buttons to pass from left to right and vice versa. Use the / buttons to select the chord recognition options.
F2 F3 F4
F5
F6 F7
F8
4. Exit Arrange Mode by pressing either ARRANGE MODE or ESCAPE.

Note: The symbols of the recognized chord appear on the main Style display screen. If the chord is not recognized, the chord symbol is shown as the lowest note played followed by several asterisks. For example: C***** .

Note: In order for the chord to be recognized (and the relative symbol to be shown on the display) Arrange On/Off must be on.

ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ARRANGE MODE
OR
ESCAPE
234 User Guide
1. With the main Style/RealTime display showing, press Soft buttons F7/F8 to open the Split Point dialog window. 2. Rotate the DIAL, or play a note on the keyboard (corresponding to the highest note of the Lower split zone) to modify the setting.
The new Split Point is shown in the dialog window. If you entered the wrong note, simply play another.
TEMPO / DATA
3. Press ENTER to confirm the new Split Point, or ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
F8 F7
The Split Point is: (a) the point that separates the Upper and Lower keyboard sections in the Upper&Lower and Multi keyboard modes and, (b) the point below which the keyboard recognizes chords which trigger the Style automatic accompaniments (in Fingered and One Finger chord recognition modes).
Note: The Split Point is a general parameter (not linked to a particular Performance) which is conserved in memory when the instrument is turned off. The new setting is lost when the Reset All operation is carried out or if the backed-RAM loses its data due to the total discharge of the battery.
The current Split Point setting appears in the main page as an option that can be selected with the paired soft buttons F7/F8. The setting can be modified as required.
If you press ENTER, the main page will show the new Split Point setting. If you press ESCAPE the original Split Point will be restored.

3. Press ENTER to confirm the new Split Point, or ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
2. Rotate the DIAL, or play a note on the keyboard (corresponding to the highest note of the Lower split zone) to modify the setting.
1. With the main Style/RealTime display showing, press Soft buttons F7/F8 to open the Split Point dialog window.
CHANGING THE SPLIT POINT
If you press ENTER, the main page will show the new Split Point setting. If you press ESCAPE the original Split Point will be restored.
The current Split Point setting appears in the main page as an option that can be selected with the paired soft buttons F7/F8. The setting can be modified as required.

Note: The Split Point is a general parameter (not linked to a particular Performance) which is conserved in memory when the instrument is turned off. The new setting is lost when the Reset All operation is carried out or if the backed-RAM loses its data due to the total discharge of the battery.
The new Split Point is shown in the dialog window. If you entered the wrong note, simply play another.
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
User Guide 235

CHANGING THE SPLIT POINT

The Split Point is: (a) the point that separates the Upper and Lower keyboard sections in the Upper&Lower and Multi keyboard modes and, (b) the point below which the keyboard recognizes chords which trigger the Style automatic accompaniments (in Fingered and One Finger chord recognition modes).

F7
F8
OR
TEMPO / DATA
OR
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
User Guide 235
11 The Digital Signal Processor (DSP)

SK760/880 allows you to route the Performances (RealTime, Style and Song) to the on-board multieffects processor to enrich the sounds with Reverb and Modulation effects. The DSP consists of four real time controlled units which process the Performances with Reverbs and Delay/Modulation effects: two Reverb channels (A & B) and two Modulation channels (A & B) are available. In Style/RealTime mode, channel A effects are reserved for the keyboard tracks and channel B for the accompaniment tracks. Each track can be processed by two effects. When a Style is selected with the SINGLE TOUCH PLAY button off, only the effects assigned to the accompaniment tracks will change (Group B). When a Performance is selected with STYLE LOCK on, only the effects assigned to the keyboard will change (Group A). In Song mode, each track can be independently processed by either A or B channel effects. Access to the DSPs is via the EFFECTS button in the Edit section. Press the EFFECTS button and (if necessary) press ENTER to access the Effects editor to open the main Edit Effect page showing the Effect Type function currently selected. The status of the parameters on this page depends on the current mode (Style/RealTime or Song).
CHANGE THE EFFECT ASSIGNED TO A PERFORMANCE

1. Press the EFFECTS button in the EDIT section.
The first time you enter, the Edit Effect Menu appears with the Effect editor selected (other editors may or may not be available depending on the configuration of your instrument).
EFFECTS
2. With the Effect editor selected, press ENTER or the right PAGE SCROLL button to access the Effect Type page.
The Effect Type page shows the effects and relative Effect Volume levels assigned to the current Performance.
ENTER
TEMPO / DA
OR
ESCAPE
236 User Guide
4. Rotate the DIAL to select a different effect type from the selected processor (Eff1 or Eff 2).
5. Select the Vol parameter with the arrow button and regulate the general Volume level of the Effect for the Performance.
4. Rotate the DIAL to select a different effect type from the selected processor (Eff1 or Eff 2).
3. Select the effect processor (Eff1 or Eff2) and Group (A or B)
If the EFFECT TYPE function is not shown selected in the right column, press the Soft button F1 to activate the correct page. Use the / cursor buttons to select the processors (Eff1 - Reverbs, or Eff2 - Modulations). The current effect type selected appears in negative highlight.
The changes heard when you modify this parameter will depend on the current effect types selected in both processors. Repeat the operations 3, 4 and 5 for the Group B parameters (accompaniment tracks) if required. The changes made remain in memory until a new Performance or the same one is selected, or until the instrument is turned off. To save the changes to the Performance, use the STORE PERFORMANCE command, explained on page 2.39.
The DIAL scrolls through the available effects of the selected DSP. The Reverb DSP (Eff1) provides a selection of 24 effects. The Modulation DSP (Eff2) provides a selection of 32 effects.
6. Select the Effect 2 to Effect 1 parameter with the cursor button and rotate the Dial to change the quantity of feedback of the Eff2 signal into Eff1.
5. Select the Vol parameter with the arrow button and regulate the general Volume level of the Effect for the Performance.
Use the Dial to enter a value for the selected Vol parameter. Repeat the operation for the other Vol parameter is necessary.
Use the Dial to enter a value for the selected Vol parameter. Repeat the operation for the other Vol parameter is necessary.
6. Select the Effect 2 to Effect 1 parameter with the cursor button and rotate the Dial to change the quantity of feedback of the Eff2 signal into Eff1.
The DIAL scrolls through the available effects of the selected DSP. The Reverb DSP (Eff1) provides a selection of 24 effects. The Modulation DSP (Eff2) provides a selection of 32 effects.
The changes heard when you modify this parameter will depend on the current effect types selected in both processors. Repeat the operations 3, 4 and 5 for the Group B parameters (accompaniment tracks) if required. The changes made remain in memory until a new Performance or the same one is selected, or until the instrument is turned off. To save the changes to the Performance, use the STORE PERFORMANCE command, explained on page 2.39.
User Guide 237

3. Select the effect processor (Eff1 or Eff2) and Group (A or B)

If the EFFECT TYPE function is not shown selected in the right column, press the Soft button F1 to activate the correct page. Use the / cursor buttons to select the processors (Eff1 - Reverbs, or Eff2 - Modulations). The current effect type selected appears in negative highlight.
User Guide 237
PLAY WITH EFFECTS OR BYPASS THEM

You can temporarily modify the way in which a Performance is processed with the on-board effect processor by changing the On/Off setting of the Effects Bypass button. When the LED is off, the current Performance is processed by the effects; when on, the effects are bypassed. Bypass
1. To bypass the effects, press the EFFECTS BYPASS button.

The LED of the button turns on, indicating that the current Performance is no longer processed by the Effects. To activate the effects
EFFECTS BYPASS EFFECTS BYPASS
2. Press the active EFFECTS BYPASS button.

The LED of the button goes off to indicate that the current Performance is processed by the Effects.
EFFECTS BYPASS EFFECTS BYPASS
238 User Guide
Use the STORE PERFORMANCE command to save any changes you make to a RealTime Performance, a Style Performance or a Song Performance. The changes made to a RealTime Performance or Style Performance are interchangeable, that is, you can save a modified RealTime Performance to a Style Performance and vice versa. A modified Song Performance can be saved to the Song Performances only. In all cases you can create a completely new Performance and change its name. The temporary status of an unsaved Performance is lost if you select a different Performance or the same one again, or if you select a Style or Song. Changes to a Song Performance are also lost if you press START/STOP or PLAY. Saving to the power-up Performance SK760/880 powers up in Style/RealTime mode with the GrandPiano Performance selected and ready to play in Full Keyboard mode. This Performance corresponds to the first Performance location of Group button 1 of the Performance Groups. The factory-programmed status of the power-up Performance can be modified in order that SK760/880 powers-up according to a preferred setting. Whatever modifications you make (sound, keyboard mode, effect, track volume, Style tempo, etc.) and save to the GrandPiano Performance are retained after power down. You can restore the original (factory-set) status of the Performance Groups using the Restore Perfs function in Edit General.
SAVE TO THE CURRENT PERFORMANCE
Saving to the power-up Performance SK760/880 powers up in Style/RealTime mode with the GrandPiano Performance selected and ready to play in Full Keyboard mode. This Performance corresponds to the first Performance location of Group button 1 of the Performance Groups. The factory-programmed status of the power-up Performance can be modified in order that SK760/880 powers-up according to a preferred setting. Whatever modifications you make (sound, keyboard mode, effect, track volume, Style tempo, etc.) and save to the GrandPiano Performance are retained after power down. You can restore the original (factory-set) status of the Performance Groups using the Restore Perfs function in Edit General.
1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to open the Store Performance dialog window.

The type of Performance proposed by SK760/880 depends on the status of the SINGLE TOUCH PLAY button - if active a StylePerformance is suggested, if not a Performance is proposed. To save changes to the current Performance (RealTime or Style), there is no need to make any changes to the display situation because it represents the current Performance.
2. Press ENTER to confirm the operation, or ESCAPE to cancel.

With ENTER, the new settings are memorised to the current Performance. Each time this Performance is recalled, SK760/880 will be configured with precisely the same settings as those memorised.
2. Press ENTER to confirm the operation, or ESCAPE to cancel.
Use the STORE PERFORMANCE command to save any changes you make to a RealTime Performance, a Style Performance or a Song Performance. The changes made to a RealTime Performance or Style Performance are interchangeable, that is, you can save a modified RealTime Performance to a Style Performance and vice versa. A modified Song Performance can be saved to the Song Performances only. In all cases you can create a completely new Performance and change its name. The temporary status of an unsaved Performance is lost if you select a different Performance or the same one again, or if you select a Style or Song. Changes to a Song Performance are also lost if you press START/STOP or PLAY.
1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to open the Store Performance dialog window.
SAVE TO THE CURRENT PERFORMANCE
12 Store Performance
With ENTER, the new settings are memorised to the current Performance. Each time this Performance is recalled, SK760/880 will be configured with precisely the same settings as those memorised.
The type of Performance proposed by SK760/880 depends on the status of the SINGLE TOUCH PLAY button - if active a StylePerformance is suggested, if not a Performance is proposed. To save changes to the current Performance (RealTime or Style), there is no need to make any changes to the display situation because it represents the current Performance.
ESCAPE
ENTER
STORE PERF.
User Guide 239

12 Store Performance
TEMPO / DATA
STORE PERF.
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
User Guide 239
SAVE TO A DIFFERENT PERFORMANCE

Save changes to a different Performance if you want to retain the configuration of the original Performance.
1 A
STORE PERF.
1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to open the Performance Store dialog window.

If SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, the destination suggested is a Performance (situation A), if SINGLE TCH PLAY is active, the destination suggested is a Style-Performance (situation B).
B 2
2. Select the type of Performance to save to using the / cursor arrows.

These two buttons toggle between the Performance and Style zones.
3. Select a destination Group.

Rotate the Dial if you want to select a different Group (Performance or Style) in the Store to zone. The Dial scrolls through all the Performance Groups (situation A) or Style Groups (situation B). In each case, the first location (1) of the selected Group is proposed as the destination in the Perf zone.
3 A
TEMPO / DATA
240 User Guide
5. Press ENTER.
TEMPO / DATA
If the destination is a RealTime Performance (A), the display returns to the modified version of the original Performance. If the destination is a Style Performance (B), pressing ENTER opens a dialog window requesting confirmation of the Style Performance name. You can either confirm the same name or change it. Press ENTER again to confirm the new or old Style Performance name. The display returns to the modified version of the original Performance. The Performance or Style Performance that you saved will be in the destination selected in point 4. If you dont want to save your modifications, press ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
5A
ENTER
ESCAPE
5B
ENTER
TEM
ENTER
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
5. Press ENTER.
4. Move down to the next zone with the cursor arrow and select the destination Performance (1 - 8) with the Dial.
If the destination is a RealTime Performance (A), the display returns to the modified version of the original Performance. If the destination is a Style Performance (B), pressing ENTER opens a dialog window requesting confirmation of the Style Performance name. You can either confirm the same name or change it. Press ENTER again to confirm the new or old Style Performance name. The display returns to the modified version of the original Performance. The Performance or Style Performance that you saved will be in the destination selected in point 4. If you dont want to save your modifications, press ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
If you are saving to the RealTime Performances (A), the Dial scrolls through the 8 Performance destinations of the selected Group, each identified by a number and name. Empty locations have a number and no name. The destination Performance will take the name of the Performance being saved. To change the name of the RealTime Performance, refer to the procedure explained on page 1.4 of the Layout & Display chapter 1. If you are saving to the Style Performances (B), the Dial scrolls through the 8 Styles of the selected Style Group or User Group. As you scroll, each Style also shows the currently associated Style Performance in the Perf zone. To select the destination Style Performance, move down to the Perf zone and rotate the Dial. A Style Perf. destination shows a name and number, while an empty User Style destination shows a number only.
5B
5A
4B
4A
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEM
ESCAPE
ENTER
ESCAPE
ENTER
User Guide 241

4. Move down to the next zone with the cursor arrow and select the destination Performance (1 - 8) with the Dial.

4A
If you are saving to the RealTime Performances (A), the Dial scrolls through the 8 Performance destinations of the selected Group, each identified by a number and name. Empty locations have a number and no name. The destination Performance will take the name of the Performance being saved. To change the name of the RealTime Performance, refer to the procedure explained on page 1.4 of the Layout & Display chapter 1. If you are saving to the Style Performances (B), the Dial scrolls through the 8 Styles of the selected Style Group or User Group. As you scroll, each Style also shows the currently associated Style Performance in the Perf zone. To select the destination Style Performance, move down to the Perf zone and rotate the Dial. A Style Perf. destination shows a name and number, while an empty User Style destination shows a number only.
TEM
4B
TEMPO / DATA
TEMPO / DATA
TEMPO / DATA
TEM
User Guide 241
RESTORING THE ORIGINAL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS

It is possible to cancel all modifications made to the Performances and restore the factory settings. You can select the type of Performance to restore (Rest.St.Perfs, Rest. Perfs, Rest. styles, Rest. songs) or restore the default settings of all the Performances in a single step (Restore all).
GENERAL
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain access to the Edit General environment. 2. Press F5 (Restore Perfs) or F7 (Rest. St.Perfs) to cancel the changes made to the Performances or Style-Performances.
You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice.
2
F1 F2 F3 F4
F5
3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.

With ENTER, the changes are cancelled and the original Performance settings (volume, sounds, transposition, tempo, etc.) are restored. With ESCAPE, the new settings are retained.

F6 F7
F8
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a single operation, use the Restore All command.

ESCAPE
242 User Guide
LOAD THE DEMO SONG
1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive. 2. Press DISK to open the main Load page.
+
H. D
3. Specify the load operation required (example, Load Single Song).
2. Press DISK to open the main Load page.
1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
LOAD THE DEMO SONG
Have the Demo Disk ready to load the Demo Song into memory. If you dont have the supplied Demo disk, use any SK760/880 format song disk, disks of previous formats (such as WK, SK, PS, WX or SX Series), or MIDI file disks.
Use the navigational arrows ( / and / buttons) to navigate within the two columns of the display area and select the required command by combining one element from each column. For example, combine Single from the left column with Song from the right to specify Load Single Song. If you are using a MIDI file disk, specify Single MIDI File.
3. Specify the load operation required (example, Load Single Song).
Your SK760/880 is supplied with two floppy disks, one containing the operating system and one containing a Demo Song, some User Styles and some Samples. In the following pages, youll learn how to load a Song into the instruments memory and how to play it back.
13 Load and play back the supplied Demo Song
If the main Load page is not shown, use the left page scroll button ( ) to open it. If you are working with the Hard Disk, press DISK and select the HARD DISK option with soft button F2. The H.D. LED (next to the Disk button) turns on.
If the main Load page is not shown, use the left page scroll button ( ) to open it. If you are working with the Hard Disk, press DISK and select the HARD DISK option with soft button F2. The H.D. LED (next to the Disk button) turns on.
Use the navigational arrows ( / and / buttons) to navigate within the two columns of the display area and select the required command by combining one element from each column. For example, combine Single from the left column with Song from the right to specify Load Single Song. If you are using a MIDI file disk, specify Single MIDI File.
DISK
User Guide 243

13 Load and play back the supplied Demo Song
Your SK760/880 is supplied with two floppy disks, one containing the operating system and one containing a Demo Song, some User Styles and some Samples. In the following pages, youll learn how to load a Song into the instruments memory and how to play it back. Have the Demo Disk ready to load the Demo Song into memory. If you dont have the supplied Demo disk, use any SK760/880 format song disk, disks of previous formats (such as WK, SK, PS, WX or SX Series), or MIDI file disks.
DISK
H. D
User Guide 243
4. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open the File Selector.
The File selector shows one or more Blocks in the disk directory, and the directory of the destination which represents the section of RAM containing the file types currently being handled (in this example the Songs).
4
ENTER TE
ESCAPE
5. If necessary, select a Block file and press ENTER to gain access.

Now the display shows a list of Songs contained in the Block file. In this example, one Song only is listed (Children).
5
ENTER TEM
6. Select a destination (if necessary) and press ENTER twice to execute the Load Song command.
If necessary, move over to the right column and select an empty destination for the incoming file. In this example, all the destinations are empty and the first one is preselected (shown enclosed by a rectangular frame). Pressing ENTER the first time prompts a request to confirm the command. Press ENTER a second time to complete the procedure. After a short period, the Demo Song will be in memory.
ESCAPE
6
ENTER TEM
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEM
ESCAPE
7. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit DISK mode.

DISK leaves Disk mode directly. If you return to Disk, the page will be the last one selected, in this case, the file selector showing the Song directory. ESCAPE allows you to (1) leave the Block, (2) exit the file selector, (3) exit Disk mode.
7
ENTER TEMPO / DATA
DISK H. D
OR
ESCAPE
244 User Guide
3. Toggle between SOUND VIEW and PLAY VIEW with the corresponding Soft button (F5 or F6).
3. Toggle between SOUND VIEW and PLAY VIEW with the corresponding Soft button (F5 or F6).
2 Select the Song (if necessary) with the Soft button.
1 Press the SONG button.
Select and playback the Demo Song
Access to the Songs in memory is via the SONG button in the SEQUENCER.
PLAYBACK THE DEMO SONG
The selected Song is shown in negative highlight. After selection, you pass automatically to Song mode showing the play view window and the Song name on the status bar.
You can opt to see the Song in Play View mode in order to modify the playing parameters, or in Sound View mode in order to see the sounds assigned to 8 tracks of the current Song-Performance. Use the Track Scroll buttons to view the other 8 tracks of the Song.
You can opt to see the Song in Play View mode in order to modify the playing parameters, or in Sound View mode in order to see the sounds assigned to 8 tracks of the current Song-Performance. Use the Track Scroll buttons to view the other 8 tracks of the Song.
The Select Song window appears showing a list of song in memory. In this example, the list shows the demo Song (Children) that you loaded in the previous pages.
SONG
User Guide 245

PLAYBACK THE DEMO SONG

Access to the Songs in memory is via the SONG button in the SEQUENCER. Select and playback the Demo Song
SONG
1 Press the SONG button.

The Select Song window appears showing a list of song in memory. In this example, the list shows the demo Song (Children) that you loaded in the previous pages.
2
A B C D E F
2 Select the Song (if necessary) with the Soft button.

The selected Song is shown in negative highlight. After selection, you pass automatically to Song mode showing the play view window and the Song name on the status bar.
F6 F8 F4 F2 F4 F6 F2 F8 F7 F5 F3 F7 F5 F3 F1 F1
G H
F1 F2 F3 F4
F5
F6 F7
F8
F1 F2 F3 F4
F5
F6 F7
F8
User Guide 245
4. Press PLAY in the SEQUENCER to start the playback.

This button starts the Song playback (or recording). During the playback, the LED on the PLAY button is on. The song location pointer (LOC) in the display shows the current position of the Song. You can also use the START/STOP button to start the playback.
PLAY
5. Press << to rewind the Song and >> to advance.

The << and >> buttons rewind or advance one measure (bar) at a time. If you hold these buttons pressed, the Song rewinds or advances at high speed. These buttons are active either in Song play or stop status.
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
6. Rotate the DIAL to change the Song tempo.

During playback, the DIAL changes the Songs playing speed (tempo).
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
7. Press STOP in the SEQUENCER to stop the playback.

This button stops the Song playback (or recording). You can also use the START/STOP button to stop the Song. When the Song has been stopped at a position that differs to the initial Song start position, the LED on the STOP button flashes. Pressing PLAY while the STOP button is flashing starts the Song from the current position. If you press the START/STOP button again, the Song starts instantly from the beginning.
ESCAPE
STOP
PLAY
STOP
PLAY
8. Press STOP again to return to the starting position of the Song, or rewind with the << button.
When the Song is not playing and at its initial starting position, the LED on the STOP button remains on.
246 User Guide
Check the disk label for the type of data contained in the disk. Playback stops instantly.
2. Press PRELOAD.
SK760/880 Starts to scan the disk contents ten loads the first Song or MIDI File on disk into the instruments Songs memory. Shortly after, the Song (or MIDI File) starts to play back. During the playback, the second Song on disk is loaded (in background) to the Songs memory. N.B. The PRELOAD function exploits the first two locations in Song memory, while all other locations are automatically cancelled if occupied. When the first Song or MidiFile ends, a second sequence begins (there will be a short pause while the second song is accessed). Playback continues non-stop until all the Songs or MidiFiles on disk have been played. When the last Song or MidiFile reaches the end, playback stops automatically.
3. Stop the playback at any time by pressing STOP or START/STOP.

Playback stops instantly.
3. Stop the playback at any time by pressing STOP or START/STOP.
2. Press PRELOAD.
1. Insert a SK760/880 Songs disk or MidiFile data disk into the drive.
Use the PRELOAD button to play all the Songs or MidiFiles present a disk.
14 Preload
SK760/880 Starts to scan the disk contents ten loads the first Song or MIDI File on disk into the instruments Songs memory. Shortly after, the Song (or MIDI File) starts to play back. During the playback, the second Song on disk is loaded (in background) to the Songs memory. N.B. The PRELOAD function exploits the first two locations in Song memory, while all other locations are automatically cancelled if occupied. When the first Song or MidiFile ends, a second sequence begins (there will be a short pause while the second song is accessed). Playback continues non-stop until all the Songs or MidiFiles on disk have been played. When the last Song or MidiFile reaches the end, playback stops automatically.
Check the disk label for the type of data contained in the disk.
STOP
DEMO
Or
PRELOAD
User Guide 247

14 Preload
Use the PRELOAD button to play all the Songs or MidiFiles present a disk.
1. Insert a SK760/880 Songs disk or MidiFile data disk into the drive.
INTRO
DISK
START / STOP KEY START
H. D.
ENDING
DEMO
PRELOAD
DISK H. D.
STOP
INTRO
KEY START
ENDING
Or
START / STOP
User Guide 247
4. Start the playback from the point it was stopped by pressing PLAY. 5. Press the STOP button twice to stop and escape from the PLAY ALL SONGS function.
To return to Style/RealTime mode, press the STYLE/REALTIME button.
PLAY
STOP
248 User Guide
Automatic loading of Songs at power up

F8 F7
WARNING - The automatic AUTOLOAD.BLK loading procedure replaces all the data conserved in System RAM.

1. Press the SONG BUTTON.

H
You will see up to sixteen Song choices in the display. (If necessary, load Song data into memory using the Load All Song operation).
C G E D F
2. Select the desired SONG with the corresponding Soft button. 3. Press PLAY to start the SONG playback.
A B
5. Press the F8 soft button to activate the SCORE CONTROLS.
SK760/880 can display Lyrics when playing SK760/880, WK, SK & PS Series disks with songs containing Lyrics tracks. There are a wide variety of disks that display lyrics when played.
4. Press the SCORE button and the score will appear.
2. Select the desired SONG with the corresponding Soft button.
If your SK760/880 has no Songs with lyrics in memory, it is possible to load a Block of data (including Song data) automatically from disk at power up. If you have one or more Songs disks (1.44 Mb format), insert the disk into the drive of your computer and change the name of the Block file containing Song data to: AUTOLOAD.BLK (use capital letters only). At power up, if the floppy-disk containing the AUTOLOAD.BLK file is inserted in the drive, the Block is loaded in RAM automatically.
1. Press the SONG BUTTON.
Automatic loading of Songs at power up
DISPLAY SONG LYRICS
15 Multimedia
You will see up to sixteen Song choices in the display. (If necessary, load Song data into memory using the Load All Song operation).
If your SK760/880 has no Songs with lyrics in memory, it is possible to load a Block of data (including Song data) automatically from disk at power up. If you have one or more Songs disks (1.44 Mb format), insert the disk into the drive of your computer and change the name of the Block file containing Song data to: AUTOLOAD.BLK (use capital letters only). At power up, if the floppy-disk containing the AUTOLOAD.BLK file is inserted in the drive, the Block is loaded in RAM automatically.
4. Press the SCORE button and the score will appear.
SK760/880 can display Lyrics when playing SK760/880, WK, SK & PS Series disks with songs containing Lyrics tracks. There are a wide variety of disks that display lyrics when played.
5. Press the F8 soft button to activate the SCORE CONTROLS.
3. Press PLAY to start the SONG playback.
WARNING - The automatic AUTOLOAD.BLK loading procedure replaces all the data conserved in System RAM.
1/2
3/4
User Guide 249

15 Multimedia
DISPLAY SONG LYRICS
1/2
SONG
SONG
F6 F5
E F
3/4
PLAY
PLAY
SCORE
SCORE
F5
F6 F7
F8
User Guide 249
6. Use the DIRECTIONAL ARROWS to highlight the desired viewing choices (All, Lyrics 1, 2, 3, 4, Chord).
Press the ENTER button to view the results.
6
ENTER TEMPO / DATA
7. Press ESCAPE or SCORE to return to the main Song Playback page.

ESCAPE
TO DISPLAY LYRICS ON AN EXTERNAL MONITOR

Connect one of the video outputs to a domestic TV or to a monitor by means of the dedicated cable supplied with the AV board (optional). Tune the TV to the AV channel. To select the AV channel, consult the owners manual of the television set. Computer monitors or televisions normally operate in AV mode. In Song mode, press SCORE to display the Score. Press F8 (Score controls...) to open the Score controls dialog window and move the cursor to the Echo LCD parameter. Set the Echo LCD parameter to OFF. Echo LCD = OFF: only the Score or the Lyrics is displayed on the external monitor. Echo LCD = ON: the monitor displays exactly what is shown on the display, including all the controls. Move the cursor to View mode and select a combination of colors for the lyrics and the screen. Move the cursor to Video mode and select the RGB or CV (Composite Video) mode. To view on RGB monitors, set this parameter to RGB. U.S.A. models normally operate in CV and transmit in Composite. Move the cursor to Y shift and regulate the vertical alignment of the image. Press ENTER to close the dialog window and return to the Score View page.
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
SCORE
OR
250 User Guide
1. Press the SONG button.
2. Select an empty location with the corresponding Soft button or Function button.
F4 F5
3. Select QuickRec with the soft button F2.
8. BEAT
16. BEAT
JAZZ
US. TRAD
4. Select a preferred Style to use as the provider of the backings for the Song.
C A B
If you want the Style to govern the Performance sounds, press SINGLE TCH PLAY before selecting the Style (Arrange On/Off and Lower Memory activate automatically if off). To maintain the current Performance, select the Style with SINGLE TCH PLAY Off then turn on the accompaniment controls (Arrange On/Off and Lower Memory) if necessary.
Quick Rec Recording
1. Press the SONG button.
SK760/880 allows you to record a simple multitrack Song using the QUICK REC recording method and the existing Styles for automatic accompaniments. In practice, the Quick Rec method can record from 1 to 8 real time tracks accompanied by all the backing tracks of a Style to create a multitrack Song of up to 16 tracks. You can then play along with your recorded Song in playback with one or more tracks not used in the recording.
The RECORD ST./SONG button turns on (LED on). A new Song and Song Performance is created based on the Performance selected at the time of entering Quick Rec mode. The display appears in negative highlight with the selected track in positive.
3. Select QuickRec with the soft button F2.
The Song Banks display shows empty songs as User locations. If not, you can use the Restore All Songs function (in Edit General) to clear all songs in memory.
2. Select an empty location with the corresponding Soft button or Function button.
The Song Banks display shows empty songs as User locations. If not, you can use the Restore All Songs function (in Edit General) to clear all songs in memory.
16 Record a Song (Quick rec.)
1/2
8. BEAT
16. BEAT
Quick Rec Recording

ROCK
FUNK
4. Select a preferred Style to use as the provider of the backings for the Song.
The RECORD ST./SONG button turns on (LED on). A new Song and Song Performance is created based on the Performance selected at the time of entering Quick Rec mode. The display appears in negative highlight with the selected track in positive.
SK760/880 allows you to record a simple multitrack Song using the QUICK REC recording method and the existing Styles for automatic accompaniments. In practice, the Quick Rec method can record from 1 to 8 real time tracks accompanied by all the backing tracks of a Style to create a multitrack Song of up to 16 tracks. You can then play along with your recorded Song in playback with one or more tracks not used in the recording.
JAZZ
If you want the Style to govern the Performance sounds, press SINGLE TCH PLAY before selecting the Style (Arrange On/Off and Lower Memory activate automatically if off). To maintain the current Performance, select the Style with SINGLE TCH PLAY Off then turn on the accompaniment controls (Arrange On/Off and Lower Memory) if necessary.
US. TRAD
TRAD. 1
TRAD. 2
STYLE GROUP
User Guide 251

16 Record a Song (Quick rec.)
1/2
SONG
D E
DANCE. 1
LATIN. 1
DANCE. 2
LATIN. 2
F2
SONG
F3
F1
USER. USER.
F1 F2 F3 F4
F5
STYLE GROUP
ROCK
FUNK DANCE. 1 DANCE. 2 USER.
TRAD. 1
TRAD. 2
LATIN. 1
LATIN. 2
USER.
User Guide 251
5. Select the preferred keyboard mode.

Full allows you to record one or two keyboard sounds across the entire keyboard. Upp/Low allows you to record up to two keyboard sounds on the left and two on the right on a split keyboard. Set Multi (as in the example) if you want to view all 8 keyboard tracks of the Performance in order to set more than 4 sounds for simultaneous recording. The tracks already activated for the recording are shown set for key-play (with a small keyboard icon together with the MIDI status icon [ ] - see page 1.7 of chapter 1).
5
F1 F2 F3 F4
F5
F6 F7
F8
6
A B C D
6. Activate, if necessary, other tracks to record with.

Press the corresponding soft button repeatedly, first to select, then to activate a track. The track status icon changes from mute to play. In the example, track 2 is activated by pressing soft button B twice. If you dont want to record with one or more of the currently activated tracks, simply mute them. You can also change the sounds of one or more tracks of both the keyboard sounds as well as the accompaniment sounds. Use the Track Scroll buttons (or the / buttons) to view the accompaniment tracks.
E F
G H
STORE PERF.
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
7. If you have changed something (keyboard mode, sound, track status, etc.), PRESS STORE PERF + ENTER to store the changes to the current Performance.
IMPORTANT: If you dont store the changes, they will be lost when to start the recording.
252 User Guide
9. When you have finished, stop the recording either with STOP or START/STOP.
9. When you have finished, stop the recording either with STOP or START/STOP.
8. Press either PLAY or START/STOP or KEY START to start the recording and start to play.
PLAY starts the recording for the real time tracks only. START/STOP starts the recording and engages the Style accompaniment tracks at the same time. KEY START allows you to start the recording (Style and real time tracks) by playing on the keyboard. You can also start the recording with an Intro by preselecting the INTRO, FILL or ENDING button before record start. Use START/STOP or KEY START to trigger the Intro. As the recording proceeds, you can select other Styles, introduce the Fills, change Performances, activate or deactivate other real time tracks, etc..
STOP stops the sequencer and the recording of both the accompaniment and keyboard tracks, taking the Song pointer (locator) to the starting position [1 1 1]. START/STOP stops the accompaniment tracks but not the sequencer, allowing you to continue recording the real time tracks without accompaniment. The Song Pointer continues to monitor the recording. To stop the recording completely, press STOP. The RECORD ST./SONG button LED will now turn off. When the sequencer stops recording, the display reverts to the Play View situation showing the songs parameters. The icon of the recorded tracks are shown with note symbols. To start the playback and to play along with the Song, press PLAY or START/STOP. See over.
STOP stops the sequencer and the recording of both the accompaniment and keyboard tracks, taking the Song pointer (locator) to the starting position [1 1 1]. START/STOP stops the accompaniment tracks but not the sequencer, allowing you to continue recording the real time tracks without accompaniment. The Song Pointer continues to monitor the recording. To stop the recording completely, press STOP. The RECORD ST./SONG button LED will now turn off. When the sequencer stops recording, the display reverts to the Play View situation showing the songs parameters. The icon of the recorded tracks are shown with note symbols. To start the playback and to play along with the Song, press PLAY or START/STOP. See over.
STOP
PLAY
OR
Recorded track icon
User Guide 253

8. Press either PLAY or START/STOP or KEY START to start the recording and start to play.

8
PLAY
INTRO
KEY START
ENDING
PLAY starts the recording for the real time tracks only. START/STOP starts the recording and engages the Style accompaniment tracks at the same time. KEY START allows you to start the recording (Style and real time tracks) by playing on the keyboard. You can also start the recording with an Intro by preselecting the INTRO, FILL or ENDING button before record start. Use START/STOP or KEY START to trigger the Intro. As the recording proceeds, you can select other Styles, introduce the Fills, change Performances, activate or deactivate other real time tracks, etc..
OR
START / STOP
OR
INTRO
KEY START
ENDING
STOP
OR
START / STOP
INTRO
OR
INTRO
START / STOP
KEY START
START / STOP KEY START
Recorded track icon
OR
ENDING
ENDING
User Guide 253
PLAY ALONG WITH YOUR RECORDED SONG

In Song playback mode, you can play along with your recorded Song by activating one or more tracks not used for the recording. It is also possible to disengage a recorded track from the sequencer and use it to play in real time. Naturally, you can also mute the tracks you do not wish to hear. The operations can be carried out before or after start, but remember, if you start after modifying the track status, the tracks will revert to their previous status unless you store the Performance. In the example below, the changes are carried out during playback.
1
INTRO KEY START ENDING
PLAY
1. Start the playback of the selected Song with PLAY or START/STOP. 2. During playback, press the soft button of the track you wish to play along with as many times as necessary until it is shown set for key-play then start to play.
If the track contains recorded notes (shown with the seq.-play icon ): press the relative soft button once to select the track; once again to mute the track and; once again to set it to key-play. The graphic example opposite illustrates how to disengage a recorded track and activate it for real time playing. If the track was not used for the recording, it will be shown either as a muted track ( ) ). In this case: or in key-play status ( press the relative soft button repeatedly to toggle from muted to key-play and vice versa.
OR
START / STOP
2
A B C D E F
G H
3
STOP
INTRO
KEY START
ENDING
3. Press STOP or START/STOP to stop the playback.
OR
START / STOP
254 User Guide
1. With the Song Play View page showing, press F1 (Jukebox...) to access the Jukebox display.
4. Press F8 (Execute) to start the playback of the Jukebox list.

The Play View page of the Song appears and the status bar shows the indication: Jukebox active. You can interrupt the Jukebox at any time with STOP.
F2
1. With the Song Play View page showing, press F1 (Jukebox...) to access the Jukebox display.
The Jukebox function chains the songs of your choice and plays them back as a medley with a single command.
PLAY SONGS USING JUKEBOX
The left part of the display shows the list of Songs in memory. The right part shows the Jukebox list. The negative highlight cursor shows which song is selected in the Song list. The frame on the right shows the destination in the Jukebox list. Pass from left to right and vice versa with the directional arrows.
If you want to substitute one of the names in the Jukebox list, move the cursor to the right part of the display, select the name to change; move the cursor back to the left part, select the Song to insert and press INSERT or ENTER. Take the cursor to the right and select a new location for the next Song. Return to the left part and carry out the selection.
2. Select a Song from the left part to include in the Jukebox list and press the INSERT soft button (F5) (or ENTER) to insert the Song in the list.
3. Repeat the procedure for other Songs and press INSERT (or ENTER) each time to compile the list.
The right part of the display shows the name of the Song added to the list and the frame advances one step automatically.
The right part of the display shows the name of the Song added to the list and the frame advances one step automatically.
3. Repeat the procedure for other Songs and press INSERT (or ENTER) each time to compile the list.
2. Select a Song from the left part to include in the Jukebox list and press the INSERT soft button (F5) (or ENTER) to insert the Song in the list.
4. Press F8 (Execute) to start the playback of the Jukebox list.
If you want to substitute one of the names in the Jukebox list, move the cursor to the right part of the display, select the name to change; move the cursor back to the left part, select the Song to insert and press INSERT or ENTER. Take the cursor to the right and select a new location for the next Song. Return to the left part and carry out the selection.
The left part of the display shows the list of Songs in memory. The right part shows the Jukebox list. The negative highlight cursor shows which song is selected in the Song list. The frame on the right shows the destination in the Jukebox list. Pass from left to right and vice versa with the directional arrows.
The Play View page of the Song appears and the status bar shows the indication: Jukebox active. You can interrupt the Jukebox at any time with STOP.
2/3
User Guide 255

PLAY SONGS USING JUKEBOX

The Jukebox function chains the songs of your choice and plays them back as a medley with a single command.
F1
F2
F1
F4
F6
F2
F8 F4 F6 F2 F8 F7 F5 F3 F1 F7 F5 F3 F1
2/3
F1
F2 F3
F4
F5
F6 F7
F8
F1 F2 F3 F4
F5
F6 F7
F8
User Guide 255
17 Save your programmed data to disk

The SK760/880 RAM is backed by a rechargeable battery to safeguard your programmed data when the instrument is turned off. For security reasons, however, it is necessary to store your data to floppy disk (or Hard disk) with the Save command. The RAM should be considered as a work area which can be continually updated, not as a data storage device. Have a new or used disk ready to save data to. These can be SK760/880 format disks (or standard MSDOS disks for the storage of MIDI files). You can also save MIDI Files to SK760/880 format disks. How to save MIDI files is discussed in the Disk chapter of the Reference Guide. Check that the floppy disk is not write protected - if so, remove the protection beforehand. If you forget to do this, the instrument will prompt you with an appropriate message when you attempt to save to the disk. Save operations are characterized by the option of creating of a new Block if necessary.
THE SAVE PROCEDURE

The following example shows how to save the Song that you recorded with the Quick Rec method to Disk.

WARNING - Do not save data to the original disks supplied with the instrument. As a precautionary measure against data loss, always check that your original disks are write protected. Make back-up copies of the supplied demo disks and store the originals in a safe place.

1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive. 2. Press DISK to open the main Save page.
If the main Save page is not shown, use the page scroll buttons ( ) to open it. If you are working with the Hard Disk, press DISK and select the HARD DISK option with soft button F2.
DISK H. D
256 User Guide
5. If necessary, select the Song to save and its destination on disk.

A selected file is shown in negative highlight. Use the cursor arrows to select a different file. In the example, Song_02 is selected. An empty destination is shown as a broken line. A preselected destination is shown enclosed by a rectangular frame.
ESCAPE
6. Press ENTER.
Youll be prompted to create a new Block. The name MAIN is suggested automatically. Use the keyboard as the source of alphanumeric data to give the block a name.
5. If necessary, select the Song to save and its destination on disk.
3. Specify the Save operation required (example, Save Single Song).
The display shows the directory of the songs present in RAM and the floppy disk directory. In the example, the instruments RAM directory is shown with 2 songs (with generic names). If the disk is new (no Blocks present), the directory will be empty. In the illustrated example, a new disk is used. If the disk is a used one, what appears in the directory will depend on the contents. One or more Block files may be present.
The display shows the directory of the songs present in RAM and the floppy disk directory. In the example, the instruments RAM directory is shown with 2 songs (with generic names). If the disk is new (no Blocks present), the directory will be empty. In the illustrated example, a new disk is used. If the disk is a used one, what appears in the directory will depend on the contents. One or more Block files may be present.
A selected file is shown in negative highlight. Use the cursor arrows to select a different file. In the example, Song_02 is selected. An empty destination is shown as a broken line. A preselected destination is shown enclosed by a rectangular frame.
ENTER
TEMP
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEMP
ESCAPE
6. Press ENTER.
Youll be prompted to create a new Block. The name MAIN is suggested automatically. Use the keyboard as the source of alphanumeric data to give the block a name.
Use the navigational arrows ( / and / buttons) to navigate within the two columns of the display area and select the required command by combining one element from each column. For example, combine Single from the left column with Song from the right to specify Save Single Song. If you are using a MIDI file disk, specify Single MIDI File.
ESCAPE
ENTER
ENTER
TEMP
TEMP
User Guide 257

3. Specify the Save operation required (example, Save Single Song).

Use the navigational arrows ( / and / buttons) to navigate within the two columns of the display area and select the required command by combining one element from each column. For example, combine Single from the left column with Song from the right to specify Save Single Song. If you are using a MIDI file disk, specify Single MIDI File.
User Guide 257
7. Confirm the new Block name with ENTER.

The floppy disk directory now shows the first 8 empty Song locations (within the new block). Up to 16 locations are available by scrolling with the cursor arrow.
7
ENTER TEMP
8. If necessary, select a destination and press ENTER twice to execute the Save Single Song command.
Pressing ENTER the first prompts a request to confirm the command (Are you sure?). Press ENTER a second time to complete the procedure. After a short period, the Song will be saved to disk. Remember that if you save to an existing file, it will be overwritten by the incoming one. Whenever possible, try to save to an empty location (shown as a broken line) to safeguard existing data on the storage device.
ESCAPE
8
ENTER TEMP
ESCAPE
9
ENTER TEMPO / DATA
DISK H. D
9. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit DISK mode.
OR
ESCAPE
258 User Guide
2. Press the Restore Songs soft button (F6) to cancel all the Songs (and relative Song-Performances) in RAM.
2. Press the Restore Songs soft button (F6) to cancel all the Songs (and relative Song-Performances) in RAM.
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain access to the Edit General environment.
If you have loaded disk-based Songs or recorded Songs and used up all the memory dedicated to the storage of Songs, there is a quick and easy way of clearing memory to make room for other Songs using the Restore Songs operation. Naturally, you must remember to save your Songs to disk before proceeding with the restore procedure.
RESTORING THE SONGS MEMORY
With ENTER, the Songs are cancelled from memory. With ESCAPE, the song data are retained.
With ENTER, the Songs are cancelled from memory. With ESCAPE, the song data are retained.


F8 F7
ESCAPE
ENTER
GENERAL
User Guide 259


If you have loaded disk-based Songs or recorded Songs and used up all the memory dedicated to the storage of Songs, there is a quick and easy way of clearing memory to make room for other Songs using the Restore Songs operation. Naturally, you must remember to save your Songs to disk before proceeding with the restore procedure.
GENERAL
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain access to the Edit General environment.
TEMPO / DATA
F1 F2 F3 F4
F4
F6 F2 F5 F3 F1
F5
F6 F7
F8
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
User Guide 259
18 MIDI
ABOUT MIDI
MIDI (Musical Instruments Digital Interface) is a system of communication between electronic musical instruments and computers. This section explains some of the more important MIDI features of your SK760/880. If you wish to delve further into MIDI and all the possibilities offered, you should refer to specialised MIDI literature available in all music outlets. All MIDI programming tasks referred to are carried out in the MIDI Edit environment (unless otherwise specified), accessed by pressing the MIDI button in the EDIT section. Some examples are discussed here while for the rest, you should refer to the Edit MIDI chapter of the Reference manual. With MIDI it is possible to: control another musical instrument (expander, keyboard, etc.) with SK760/880; control SK760/880 with a master keyboard or other controlling device (guitar controller, wind controller, drum pads...); connect SK760/880 to an external sequencer to program Songs and Styles. MIDI connection rules An instrument which controls another instrument is called the master, while an instrument that is controlled by a controlling device is called the slave. The MIDI OUT of the master is connected to the MIDI IN of the slave. To program Songs on an external sequencer, connect the MIDI OUT of the SK760/880 to the MIDI IN of the sequencer; the MIDI OUT of the sequencer to the MIDI IN of the SK760/880. Do not connect the same MIDI port between two instruments. The MIDI ports Your SK760/880 is fitted with a twin set of MIDI ports: Two MIDI OUTs (A & B) Two MIDI INs (A & B) Two MIDI THRUs (A & B). The MIDI THRU port The MIDI THRU port permits the connection of several slave instruments in series, as shown in the illustration below (Fig. 1). Slave 1 and Slave 2 are controlled by the single Master. Slave 2 does not receive Slave 1 data, which only acts as a through device.
SK760/880 MIDI interface and Computer port
COMPUTER THRU B OUT B IN B THRU A OUT A IN A
MIDI
MASTER OUT
MIDI cable
SLAVE 1 IN
internal course
MIDI cable
SLAVE 2 IN
THRU
Fig. 1 - Connection diagram of a master keyboard and two expanders, slave 1 and slave 2 ( or other instruments). The data generated by the Master is received at the MIDI IN of Slave 1 and sent to the sound engine of Slave 1 and to the MIDI IN of Slave 2.

260 User Guide
1. Press the MIDI button in the EDIT section.
2. Select the track whose channel you wish to change using the corresponding Soft buttons.
Use the Track Scroll buttons, or the / cursor buttons to bring other tracks into view.
The first parameter represents the MIDI IN port (A or B), then the IN channel followed by the OUT port (A or B) and OUT channel.
4 Rotate the DIAL to change the setting of the selected parameter.

MIDI OUT channel (1...16) MIDI OUT port (A or B)
Repeat the procedure for other parameters and other tracks.
The MIDI channel is the principal channel assignable to a track and used to transmit and receive track MIDI messages (note data, bank change/ program change, etc.). The SK760/880 is able to transmit and receive via two groups of MIDI channels: A and B (MIDI A ports and MIDI B ports). Each group can handle 16 MIDI channels. One MIDI channel is freely assignable to each SK760/ 880 track from the 32 channels available (A1...A16, B1...B16). Each track of every Performance can be independently assigned a MIDI receive channel and a MIDI transmit channel. The receive and transmit channels do not necessarily have to be the same.
3. Select the parameter to change with the cursor arrow.

2
1. Press the MIDI button in the EDIT section.
3/4
How to assign the MIDI channels
THE MIDI CHANNELS
You enter in Edit MIDI with the display showing the current MIDI channel and port (A or B) configuration for the first 8 tracks of the current Performance.
You enter in Edit MIDI with the display showing the current MIDI channel and port (A or B) configuration for the first 8 tracks of the current Performance.
2. Select the track whose channel you wish to change using the corresponding Soft buttons.
How to assign the MIDI channels
4 Rotate the DIAL to change the setting of the selected parameter.
3. Select the parameter to change with the cursor arrow.
Repeat the procedure for other parameters and other tracks.
The first parameter represents the MIDI IN port (A or B), then the IN channel followed by the OUT port (A or B) and OUT channel.
3/4
MIDI IN port (A or B)
MIDI
User Guide 261

THE MIDI CHANNELS

The MIDI channel is the principal channel assignable to a track and used to transmit and receive track MIDI messages (note data, bank change/ program change, etc.). The SK760/880 is able to transmit and receive via two groups of MIDI channels: A and B (MIDI A ports and MIDI B ports). Each group can handle 16 MIDI channels. One MIDI channel is freely assignable to each SK760/ 880 track from the 32 channels available (A1...A16, B1...B16). Each track of every Performance can be independently assigned a MIDI receive channel and a MIDI transmit channel. The receive and transmit channels do not necessarily have to be the same.
MIDI IN port (A or B) MIDI OUT channel (1...16)
MIDI OUT channel (1...16) MIDI OUT port (A or B)
TEMPO / DATA
MIDI
TEMPO / DATA
MIDI OUT channel (1...16)
User Guide 261
THE MIDI CONFIGURATION

Each track of a Performance can be independently configured with regards to how the track handles keyboard data, MIDI IN and MIDI OUT data and the information directed to the internal sound engine. Each parameter (MIDI IN, MIDI OUT, Keyboard and Sound Engine) can be independently enabled/disabled for the track selected. How to configure a track
MIDI IN
keyboard/ Common Channel
internal sound generator
MIDI OUT
1. After entering Edit MIDI, press the soft button F2 (or the page button) to open the Configuration page.
The display shows the current configuration of the first 8 tracks of the current Performance.
MIDI
2. Select the track whose configuration you wish to change using the corresponding Soft button.
3. Select the parameter to enable/disable with the cursor arrow.

The first parameter represents the assigned MIDI IN port (A or B), then the keyboard followed by the internal sound engine and OUT port.
2 3/4
4 Rotate the DIAL to disable or enable the selected parameter.

For example, if you set the MIDI IN port to OFF, the track cannot receive MIDI IN data. Or, if you set the keyboard to off, the track is muted but still available for MIDI IN data. Or, if you disable the sound engine, the track cannot play the internal sounds but can play external sounds via MIDI OUT. Finally, if yo set the OUT port to off, the track cannot trasmit data via MIDI OUT. The on/off combinations of the 4 available elements provide endless MIDI configurations. Repeat the procedure for other parameters and other tracks.

TEMPO / DATA
262 User Guide
The connection via the COMPUTER port allows the control of 16 MIDI channels (group A), while MIDI connections can control 32 (groups A & B).

PC2
a fast PC communication suitable for 80486, Pentium or faster processor.
Note: The COMPUTER port and PEDALBOARD connector cannot be used at the same time. Connecting one excludes the other automatically.

When the COMPUTER port is in use, the MIDI ports can be used to connect to other musical instruments.
COMP.
THE COMPUTER PORT
The Computer function (in Edit General - P.brd/ Computer editor) offers three communication modes to choose from:
MIDI OUT A
CH. A1...A16
MIDI cable
Fig. 2 - Connection of SK760/880 and computer via the COMPUTER port. Connection of an expander at MIDI OUT A of SK760/880.
Your SK760/880 is fitted with a COMPUTER port which allows two way communications between the instrument and a computer (PC or MAC) without the need of a MIDI interface. A cable to connect the instrument to your computers (IBM/compatible or Macintosh) serial port can be obtained from your Generalmusic outlet or computer outlet.
Figure 2 shown below illustrates a simple connection possibility between the SK760/880, a Computer and an expander.
PC1
WK
The connection via the COMPUTER port allows the control of 16 MIDI channels (group A), while MIDI connections can control 32 (groups A & B).
Note: The COMPUTER port and PEDALBOARD connector cannot be used at the same time. Connecting one excludes the other automatically.
CH. 1
RS-232/ MODEM
MIDI IN
WK
Fig. 2 - Connection of SK760/880 and computer via the COMPUTER port. Connection of an expander at MIDI OUT A of SK760/880.
Macintosh for any Apple Macintosh computer; PC1 a slow PC communication suitable for 80386, or earlier models;
MIDI OUT A
COMP.
MIDI cable
CH. A1...A16
CH. 1
When the COMPUTER port is in use, the MIDI ports can be used to connect to other musical instruments.
PC2
Macintosh for any Apple Macintosh computer;
MIDI IN
RS-232/ MODEM
a fast PC communication suitable for 80486, Pentium or faster processor.
a slow PC communication suitable for 80386, or earlier models;
User Guide 263

THE COMPUTER PORT

Your SK760/880 is fitted with a COMPUTER port which allows two way communications between the instrument and a computer (PC or MAC) without the need of a MIDI interface. A cable to connect the instrument to your computers (IBM/compatible or Macintosh) serial port can be obtained from your Generalmusic outlet or computer outlet.
Figure 2 shown below illustrates a simple connection possibility between the SK760/880, a Computer and an expander. The Computer function (in Edit General - P.brd/ Computer editor) offers three communication modes to choose from:
COMPUTER
EXPANDER
COMPUTER
EXPANDER
User Guide 263
MIDI FILTERS
The SK760/880 MIDI Filters allow you to block the reception and transmission of unwanted MIDI messages from the MIDI data stream. For example, if you were playing a midi file from an external sequencer using the E. Piano 2 sound from the SK760/880, you might find that every time you start the playback of the sequence, the sound switches to, for example, Piano1. This occurs because of the presence of a Program change message at the beginning of the Song. This problem can be overcome by selecting the Program change MIDI IN Filter Program which filters off all program change messages from the MIDI IN data stream. In another example, whenever you select a Sound from the SK760/880 panel, a Program Change message would also be sent to an expander connected to the SK760/880 MIDI OUT, causing the expanders sound to be changed at the same time. To avoid changing the external sound every time you select a SK760/880 sound, you would select a Program Change MIDI OUT Filter to exclude all program change messages from the MIDI OUT data stream.
MIDI LOCK
This feature allows you to lock the MIDI settings of the instrument. Normally, the MIDI Channels, MIDI Configuration and MIDI Filters are memorized for each Performance. This means that every time you recall a different Performance, the instruments MIDI settings will change according to the way they were set for the recalled Performance. MIDI Lock allows you to override the individual Performance settings, permitting you to select any Performance without changing the current settings. After enabling the MIDI Lock function (soft button F8 - option in negative highlight), you may adjust the MIDI settings as you wish. All subsequent changed made to the MIDI settings will remain in memory until you change them again, or until you disable the MIDI Lock function. Other MIDI features Very briefly, your SK760/880 offers the following additional MIDI features: Common channel: this channel is primarily used for the sending and receiving of PERFORMANCE messages. A Program Change message received on the Common channel will not change one of the individual sound on the keyboard. Instead, it will be interpreted as a PERFORMANCE CHANGE message. MIDI Dump: a means of sending all information currently residing in the instruments memory to another SK760/880, or an external data storage device. The SK760/880 can also receive a DUMP from an external source. System Exclusive: your SK760/880 can be enabled or disabled for the transmission/reception of System Exclusive messages. SMF Save Format: this function allows you to set SK760/880 to save MIDI files as format 0 or format 1.
264 User Guide
Local On/Off: a switch which isolates the SK760/ 880 as a whole from its internal sound engine allowing SK760/880 to be used as a MIDI controller.
MIDI In Fix Velocity: allows you to receive velocity as transmitted, or to fix a set velocity value for all note data, useful for instruments that are not able to transmit velocity messages.
General MIDI: a GeneralMIDI compatibility on/ off switch.
How to perform MIDI PANIC If your machine locks up while working with MIDI, carry out the MIDI Panic operation by pressing the two buttons to the right of the display.
The SK760/880 features a hidden MIDI PANIC button. This function can be used in the event of problems or lock-ups during MIDI transmission or reception.
MIDI PANIC
MIDI Panic sends All Notes Off and Reset all Controllers commands on all active channels.
User Guide 265

General MIDI: a GeneralMIDI compatibility on/ off switch.

MIDI PANIC
The SK760/880 features a hidden MIDI PANIC button. This function can be used in the event of problems or lock-ups during MIDI transmission or reception. How to perform MIDI PANIC If your machine locks up while working with MIDI, carry out the MIDI Panic operation by buttons to the right of pressing the two the display.
MIDI In Fix Velocity: allows you to receive velocity as transmitted, or to fix a set velocity value for all note data, useful for instruments that are not able to transmit velocity messages. Local On/Off: a switch which isolates the SK760/ 880 as a whole from its internal sound engine allowing SK760/880 to be used as a MIDI controller.
MIDI Panic sends All Notes Off and Reset all Controllers commands on all active channels.
User Guide 265
266 User Guide
Reference Guide
3 Disk & Hard Disk 4 Preload 5 Selection/Help 6 Songs MIDI Files & Song Recording 7 Edit Song 8 User Style recording 9 Edit Style 10 Edit Effects 11 Edit MIDI 12 Edit Mixer 13 Edit Controllers/Pads 14 Edit Tracks 15 Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch 16 Edit Sound/Sample Translator 17 Edit General 17 Edit General 16 Edit Sound/Sample Translator 15 Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch 14 Edit Tracks 13 Edit Controllers/Pads 12 Edit Mixer 11 Edit MIDI 10 Edit Effects 9 Edit Style 8 User Style recording 7 Edit Song 6 Songs MIDI Files & Song Recording 5 Selection/Help 4 Preload 3 Disk & Hard Disk
Reference Guide
Reference Guide
Floppy disks and the Hard disk

Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
3 Disk & Hard disk
Song disks of other formats, such as the WK3 and PS1500 Series, are recognized if the data
GENERAL INFORMATION
SK760/880 is able to initialize disks for every format. It is also possible to load Ram-Sounds, Styles and Songs from WK, SK, PS, WX and SX Series disks.
Working with disks provides you with a means of building a library of Performances, Styles, Sounds and Songs that you can load into the SK760/880 RAM memory at any time. As you become more familiar with your SK760/880, youll discover the practical uses of working with disks, because of the flexibility and power that they offer.
SK760/880 cannot read Song, Style and Sound data disks originating from non-Generalmusic instruments. Song exchanges with other instruments requires that the Song be saved as a MIDI file on MS-DOS formatted disks (1.44 Mb or 720 Kb formats).
Floppy disk formats
SK760/880 recognizes the following formats: SK760/880 expanded format (1.6 Mb); standard MS-DOS (1.44Mb); Atari ST/Falcon format (720 Kb).
The SK760/880 can handle floppy disks and hard disks of the following types. Floppy disks: 3.5" high density (HD) and double density (DD). Hard disk: a 2,5 IDE or E-IDE unit with a capacity of 2 Gigabytes (max.). Installation requires the Generalmusic HDisk kit which also expands the System-RAM. A Hard disk has faster access times and more convenient than floppies. The SK760/880 with a factory installed Hard disk is write-protected to avoid accidental cancellation of the files it contains. However, the protection can be deactivated (see Hard Disk Protection option in the Disk Utility page).
The SK760/880 can handle floppy disks and hard disks of the following types. Floppy disks: 3.5" high density (HD) and double density (DD). Hard disk: a 2,5 IDE or E-IDE unit with a capacity of 2 Gigabytes (max.). Installation requires the Generalmusic HDisk kit which also expands the System-RAM. A Hard disk has faster access times and more convenient than floppies. The SK760/880 with a factory installed Hard disk is write-protected to avoid accidental cancellation of the files it contains. However, the protection can be deactivated (see Hard Disk Protection option in the Disk Utility page). Files & the block
User Styles Songs
SK760/880 recognizes the following formats: SK760/880 expanded format (1.6 Mb); standard MS-DOS (1.44Mb); Atari ST/Falcon format (720 Kb).
Working with disks provides you with a means of building a library of Performances, Styles, Sounds and Songs that you can load into the SK760/880 RAM memory at any time. As you become more familiar with your SK760/880, youll discover the practical uses of working with disks, because of the flexibility and power that they offer.
Group 1 ... Group 16
SK760/880 is able to initialize disks for every format. It is also possible to load Ram-Sounds, Styles and Songs from WK, SK, PS, WX and SX Series disks.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Song disks of other formats, such as the WK3 and PS1500 Series, are recognized if the data
Files & the block
Data is stored on disks in the form of Files (a Song, a Performance, a Style, a Setup or a Block).
Files are organized in sub-directories which are contained in a Block. The Block reflects the structure of the instruments internal RAM, as illustrated below.
Block
1 ... 16
Real-Perf
Group 1 ... Group 8
Songs
Style-Perf
User Styles
Sounds
Setup
Illustration showing how data is organized in RAM and disks.
Floppy disks can contain more than one Block, but as a unit of storage, the Block is more suitable for Hard Disks. When you load a Block using the Load Single Block command, the entire contents of RAM are updated.
Floppy disks and the Hard disk
RAMlock) (1 B
Disk & Hard Disk
Floppy disk formats
When you load a Block using the Load Single Block command, the entire contents of RAM are updated.
Floppy disks can contain more than one Block, but as a unit of storage, the Block is more suitable for Hard Disks.
Illustration showing how data is organized in RAM and disks.
Files are organized in sub-directories which are contained in a Block. The Block reflects the structure of the instruments internal RAM, as illustrated below.
Data is stored on disks in the form of Files (a Song, a Performance, a Style, a Setup or a Block).
conforms to the GMX format, a General MIDI eXtended format by Generalmusic which renders the first three banks of all SK760/880 Series instruments fully compatible.
Block
1 ... 16
Sounds
RAMlock) (1 B
Real-Perf
Style-Perf
Group 1 ... Group 8
Setup
Disk & Hard Disk 31

3 Disk & Hard disk
conforms to the GMX format, a General MIDI eXtended format by Generalmusic which renders the first three banks of all SK760/880 Series instruments fully compatible. SK760/880 cannot read Song, Style and Sound data disks originating from non-Generalmusic instruments. Song exchanges with other instruments requires that the Song be saved as a MIDI file on MS-DOS formatted disks (1.44 Mb or 720 Kb formats).
Block n Block 3 Block 2 Block 1
User Styles
Songs
Sounds
1 ... 16
DISK cks) (n Blo

Real-Perf Style-Perf
Group 1 ... Group 8 Group 1 ... Group 12
Setup
Block n Block 3 Block 2 Block 1

Real-Perf
Group 1 ... Group 8
Songs
1 ... 16
Style-Perf
User Styles
Sounds
Setup
DISK cks) (n Blo
31
File Types The types of File encountered when working in the SK760/880 Disk environment are identified by a name and, in some cases an extension. The table which follows summarizes the file types encountered:
Type of File Block Setup Sound Style-Perf. User Style Song Description All file types except MIDI files. General settings for MIDI channels video, pedals & pads. RAM-Sound and RAM -Sound.
File Quantity Files can be handled as Single elements, as a Group of files or as an entire set of file types (All), as shown in the following table:
FILE QUANTITY Single Group A single file. All the files assigned to one of the buttons of the Style Groups (ROM and User), Performance Groups or Sound Groups. It is also possible to load to 2 virtual Song Groups. All Groups of a file type (all Sounds, All Performances, All Styles, etc.).
Performances Real Perf Groups. ROM Style Perf banks excluding USER. USER Styles and relative Style-Perfs. SK760/880, WK4, SK, PS format; WX2 format (Name.WXS); SX2 format (Name.SXS). MIDI files (Name.MID) Format 0 or 1.
All
The DISK commands The Disk commands are specified in the main Disk pages by combining the File Quantity in one column with the File Type in the other: select the file quantity (Single, Group, All); select the file type (Sound, Performance, Song, etc.). Example: To load a single Song, specify SINGLE and SONG in the main LOAD page. Load, Save, Erase Copy, Move operations Data stored in floppy disk, hard disk or RAM can be Loaded, Saved, Erased, Copied or Moved using one of the following methods: as single elements (Single Song, Single User Style, Single Performance, Single MidiFile, etc.); as a Group of files (User Style Group, Song Group, etc.); as an ALL data set containing file types of all Groups (All Songs, All Sounds, All Style Groups, All Performance Groups, etc.).
MIDI file
The Main DISK pages The Disk commands a spread across 7 main pages, each identifying a principal Disk operation:
1. Load 2. Save 3. Erase 4. Copy Loads data to RAM. Saves data to disk. Erases data from RAM or disk. Copies data from floppy disk to hard disk or vice versa, from disk to disk or from RAM to RAM. Moves data from floppy disk to hard disk or vice versa, from disk to disk or from RAM to RAM.
5. Move
6. Floppy Utility Useful functions for floppy disks (formatting, disk name). 7. H Disk Utility Useful functions for the Hard disk (formatting, HD check, restore, backup, protection).

32 Reference Guide
The table below shows the valid commands for each file type:
File Type Block Setup Sound Real Perfs Style Perfs User Styles Song MIDIFile Command Single Single Single, Group, All Single, Group, All Single, Group, All Single, Group, All Single, Group, All Single
The file selector is divided into two columns showing (a) the source file directory (a contents list) and (b) the destination directory. All Disk operations, except the Erase command and the Utility, copy or move files from a source to a destination (e.g. from disk to RAM). The direction of the copy or move operation is shown in the status bar by an arrow pointing the direction and the names of the source and destination files.
source device
The source device can be a floppy disk, the Hard Disk or RAM. The device is selected with the Soft buttons F1, F2 and F3. Empty locations are represented by a broken line. If you select a destination already occupied by a file, the existing file is replaced by the incoming one.
MIDIFile Song User Styles Style Perfs Single, Group, All Single, Group, All Single, Group, All Single
quantity
directory file type refresh
available memory
Main Load page
Some file types cannot be handled more than one at a time. MIDI Files, for example, can only be handled using the SINGLE MIDI FILE command. Some files can be handled as Single elements, Groups and All sets, while others are limited to Single and All sets only.
(a)
(b)
Source Directory
Destination Directory
Load Single Song File selector

Disk & Hard Disk
Setup
Block
File Type
The table below shows the valid commands for each file type:
Limitations
Single
source device
destination page selection device ) ( selection device
Real Perfs
Sound
Main Load page
quantity
Single, Group, All
Single
Command
Single, Group, All
destination page selection device device ) ( selection
directory file type refresh
available memory
Load Single Song File selector
Empty locations are represented by a broken line. If you select a destination already occupied by a file, the existing file is replaced by the incoming one.
The source device can be a floppy disk, the Hard Disk or RAM. The device is selected with the Soft buttons F1, F2 and F3.
The direction of the copy or move operation is shown in the status bar by an arrow pointing the direction and the names of the source and destination files.
The file selector is divided into two columns showing (a) the source file directory (a contents list) and (b) the destination directory. All Disk operations, except the Erase command and the Utility, copy or move files from a source to a destination (e.g. from disk to RAM).
The File Selector corresponds to the second level of disk operations and is accessed by confirming the command specified in the main page. Once in the file selector, you can select the source files and respective destinations.
The file selector
Source Directory
(a)
Disk & Hard Disk 33

Limitations

The file selector The File Selector corresponds to the second level of disk operations and is accessed by confirming the command specified in the main page. Once in the file selector, you can select the source files and respective destinations.
Some file types cannot be handled more than one at a time. MIDI Files, for example, can only be handled using the SINGLE MIDI FILE command. Some files can be handled as Single elements, Groups and All sets, while others are limited to Single and All sets only.
Destination Directory
(b)
33
The general Disk procedure

Use the following procedure as a reference for all the Disk operations. Some specific examples are also explained in this chapter.
1. If you are working with floppy disks, insert a disk into the drive.
If you are working with the Hard Disk (optional accessory), simply press DISK.
2. Press DISK and go to the page relating to the desired Disk function (Load, Save, Erase, Copy, Move, Utility).
Use the buttons to scroll through the main disk pages. The example shows the main Load page.
3. Select, if necessary, the device being handled with the soft buttons F1, F2, F3.
Load and Save operations show the Floppy Disk and Hard Disk options. If you are working with the Hard disk, the H.D. LED will turn on during the course of an operation. Erase, Copy and Move operations show the RAM option in addition to Floppy and Hard Disk. Utility is an exception, discussed afterwards.
DISK H. D
3
F1 F2 F3 F4
F5
F6 F7
F8
34 Reference Guide
Note: At this point, to exit from Edit Disk, press DISK. Escape exits the File selector.

6. Select a Block and press ENTER to gain access.
4. Specify the desired command with the directional arrows (for example, Load Single Song).
Use the button to move into the quantity column and select the file quantity (Single, Group, All) with the / buttons. Pass over to the other column with the button and select the file type (Sound, Performance, Song, etc.) with the / buttons.
At the bottom of both columns, information regarding the selected file will appear. In this case, the left column shows the date that the file was created and its dimensions expressed in Kb (d). The right column is blank and represents the empty destination.
The contents of the opened Block reveals the file type selected in step 4 (in this case, several Songs in numerical order).
6. Select a Block and press ENTER to gain access.
Note: At this point, to exit from Edit Disk, press DISK. Escape exits the File selector.
The Wait Please message appears for an instant before opening the File Selector. The file selector now shows the source directory consisting of one or more Blocks to choose from, and the destination directory representing the sector of RAM corresponding to the file type being handled (in this case the Song memory). This display example shows the floppy disk directory (a) with a single Block file, and the instruments RAM directory (b) showing the empty Song memory. The disk name is shown at the top of the left column (c). If the disk has no name, either NO NAME or UNTITLED or other will be shown.
The Wait Please message appears for an instant before opening the File Selector. The file selector now shows the source directory consisting of one or more Blocks to choose from, and the destination directory representing the sector of RAM corresponding to the file type being handled (in this case the Song memory). This display example shows the floppy disk directory (a) with a single Block file, and the instruments RAM directory (b) showing the empty Song memory. The disk name is shown at the top of the left column (c). If the disk has no name, either NO NAME or UNTITLED or other will be shown.
The contents of the opened Block reveals the file type selected in step 4 (in this case, several Songs in numerical order).
At the bottom of both columns, information regarding the selected file will appear. In this case, the left column shows the date that the file was created and its dimensions expressed in Kb (d). The right column is blank and represents the empty destination.
ESCAPE
ENTER
ESCAPE
ENTER
TE
TE
(c)
Disk & Hard Disk 35

4. Specify the desired command with the directional arrows (for example, Load Single Song).

Use the button to move into the quantity column and select the file quantity (Single, Group, All) with the / buttons. Pass over to the other column with the button and select the file type (Sound, Performance, Song, etc.) with the / buttons.
(d)
(c)
ENTER
TE
ESCAPE
(a)
(b)
(a)
(b)
ENTER
TE
ESCAPE
(d)
Disk & Hard Disk
35
7. If necessary, select the source file.

Use the / buttons to select the source file from the active column. If you are not in the desired column, move over with the / buttons.
7/8
8. If necessary, select the destination.

Move into the destination column with the / buttons and use the / buttons to select a destination. Empty locations are identified by a broken line. If you select an existing file, it will be erased by the incoming file.
ENTER
TEM
9. Press ENTER to confirm your choice.

You will be prompted with Are you sure?.
ESCAPE
10. Press ENTER again to execute the command, or ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
With ENTER, the command is executed and a dialog window opens showing a message relating to the current operation: For example, if you are loading a single Song, the message will say: Loading Single Song.... When the dialog window closes, the operation has been executed.
10
ENTER TEM
ESCAPE
11. Repeat steps 7, 8, 9 and 10 until your destination is organized according to your requirements.
To select another file from a different block, return to the source column, press Escape to escape the current Block, press Escape again to exit the File Selector, select another Block, press Enter to gain access and continue as already described.
11
12. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit Disk.

Pressing DISK escapes the Disk operations and remembers the last page selected. Pressing ESCAPE allows you to (1) close the current Block, (2) close the file selector and (3) escape from Disk.
12
ENTER TEMPO / DATA
DISK H. D
or
ESCAPE
36 Reference Guide
THE GENERAL LOAD PROCEDURE

1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive. 2. Press DISK to open the main Load page.
If the main Load page is not shown, use the left page scroll button ( ) to open it.
4. When you have finished, press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit Disk.
THE GENERAL LOAD PROCEDURE
Have a disk ready containing the data you wish to load. These can be SK760/880 format disks, disks of previous formats, such as WX or SX Series, and MIDI file disks. If you are working with the Hard Disk, press DISK and select the HARD DISK option with soft button F2 and proceed from point 3 below.
NOTE: All Load Single operations also feature a SEARCH RESOURCE function which allows you to search for a single element (Block, Sound, Real Perf, Style Perf, User Style, Song, MIDI File). How to use the Search Resource is explained at the end of this chapter.
From here, proceed as described for the Load operations on the pages which follow.
2. Press DISK to open the main Load page.
The load operations operate in the direction Source > RAM where the source can be Floppy disk or Hard disk.
Load Operations
If the main Load page is not shown, use the left page scroll button ( ) to open it.
3. Specify the load operation required (example, Load SingleSong) then press ENTER to open the File Selector.
3. Specify the load operation required (example, Load SingleSong) then press ENTER to open the File Selector.
NOTE: All Load Single operations also feature a SEARCH RESOURCE function which allows you to search for a single element (Block, Sound, Real Perf, Style Perf, User Style, Song, MIDI File). How to use the Search Resource is explained at the end of this chapter.
From here, proceed as described for the Load operations on the pages which follow.
ESCAPE
ENTER
DISK
TE
Disk & Hard Disk 37

Load Operations
The load operations operate in the direction Source > RAM where the source can be Floppy disk or Hard disk. Have a disk ready containing the data you wish to load. These can be SK760/880 format disks, disks of previous formats, such as WX or SX Series, and MIDI file disks. If you are working with the Hard Disk, press DISK and select the HARD DISK option with soft button F2 and proceed from point 3 below.
H. D
ENTER
or
ESCAPE
DISK
TEMPO / DATA
DISK H. D
ENTER
TE
H. D
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
DISK
H. D
or
ESCAPE
Disk & Hard Disk
37
LOAD SINGLE
The Load Single command offers the following possibilities: Load Single Block Rewrites the entire contents of RAM. Block data contains: Setup file, Sounds, Performances, Style Performances, User Styles (and relative Performances), Songs (and relative Performances). Load Single Setup Loads a Setup file into RAM. Setup files contain information relating to the status of the instruments general functions (Tuning/Scale, Audio Mic/Line settings, the MIDI Lock status, MIDI lock configurations, Pedals/Pads Lock status, Pedals and Pads configuration). Load a disk-based Setup file when you want to change the general status of the instrument in a single step instead of programming the individual parameters that constitute a Setup file. Loading a Setup file into RAM does not affect other data. Only one Setup file resides in each Block. Load Single Song Loads Songs to RAM one at a time. This operation allows you to choose single Song files from various different blocks and load to RAM in a preferred order. SK760/880 can load Songs from disk in its own format (Song), in previous compatible formats (WK, SK, PS, WX, SX), in standard MIDI file format 0 or 1 and in Tune1000 format. Load Single MIDI File Loads disk-based MIDI files to RAM one at a time Loading MIDI Files into RAM automatically converts the files into SK760/880 format Songs. The Load MIDI File procedure is almost identical to Load Single Song. In this case instead of Song names, youll see a list of files in the source directory with the .MID extension. In some

cases, other names appear which represent subdirectories containing other MIDI Files. Important: When you load a MIDI File, track 17 is created automatically in order to be able to play along with the Song in playback. Load Single Sound Loads single disk-based sounds to the Sound Bank destinations. Loads Ram-Sounds as well as RAM -Sounds. The Load Single Sound procedure is characterized by an increased number of steps, owing to the fact that there are 16 Sound Groups, each consisting of 8 Banks of 16 slots. You can choose to load your RamSounds anywhere you want, but it is recommended that you load to the original Sound Group to facilitate future selection. Load Single Sound also features a Sound Search function. Owing to the large SK760/880 Sound library, you might find it easier to pass directly to a Sound bank by specifying the name of a Sound that occupies a particular bank. From there, you can then easily select a destination for the Sound being loaded. The Sound Search procedure is explained in detail on pages 3.33 & 3.34. Load Single Performance Loads a single Performance (RealTime) to any of the 64 locations of the Performance Groups (1-8). The incoming Performances overwrite those in RAM. The original factory-set Performances can be restored at any time with the Restore Perf. operation. Load Single User Style Loads a single User Style and associated User Style Performances to any location in the USER Style Groups (1-4).
38 Reference Guide
Press ESCAPE to close the message and try again, this time selecting the correct destination.
If you attempt to load to a destination other than the correct one, a user message will inform you of your error with the following message:
Loads a single bank of up to 8 user-programmed Style Performances to the original ROM Style Performance bank. These Performances cannot be loaded to locations other than the original source Style Performance bank. For example, the Style Performances of Style 59 (U.S.Trad) cannot be loaded to any other location of the ROM Styles.
Load Single Style Performance
Disk & Hard Disk 39

Load Single Style Performance

Loads a single bank of up to 8 user-programmed Style Performances to the original ROM Style Performance bank. These Performances cannot be loaded to locations other than the original source Style Performance bank. For example, the Style Performances of Style 59 (U.S.Trad) cannot be loaded to any other location of the ROM Styles. If you attempt to load to a destination other than the correct one, a user message will inform you of your error with the following message:
Press ESCAPE to close the message and try again, this time selecting the correct destination.
Disk & Hard Disk
39
LOAD SINGLE SOUND PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)

Use the Demo Disk 01 supplied with the instrument to load a Sample to memory. For this procedure, your instrument requires additional Sample RAM. If your SK760/880 does not have additional S-RAM, use any SK760/880 Sounds disk containing edited sounds, or have your instrument upgraded with optional S-RAM.
1/2
ENTER TEM
DISK H. D
ESCAPE
1. Insert the supplied Demo Disk 01 in the disk drive and press DISK. 2. Select SINGLE SOUND from the Load page then press ENTER to gain access to the File Selector.
The floppy disk directory may show the presence of several blocks, one containing the Sample, another User Styles, etc.. The instruments RAM directory shows the ROM sounds of the first Group (Piano).
3
ENTER TEM
ESCAPE
3. Select (if necessary) the Sample Block and press ENTER to gain access.
In this example, the disk directory shows the presence of one Percussive Sample (GRV.bpm 106 ) with Pr. Change and Bank Select number 114-6.
4. Select (if necessary) the Sample and its corresponding destination in RAM (114-6).
Use the buttons to scroll the Sound Groups (1, 2, 15, 16). In this case, scroll to Group 15 (Percussive - example A). Use the directional / arrows to scroll to the desired Bank (in this case, bank 6) and destination (Program Change 114 - example B).
B 5
ENTER TEM
5. Press ENTER twice to load the Sample file to memory.

Note: It is recommended to load Sounds and Samples to their original locations to facilitate the on-board file search facilities, but you are free to load them to any Group.

ESCAPE
310 Reference Guide
Load Group offers the following possibilities: Load Group Real Perf
Loads a Group of Performances consisting of up to 8 user-programmed RealTime Performances to any Real Performance destination. Load Group User Style
Loads a Group of Performances consisting of up to 8 user-programmed RealTime Performances to any Real Performance destination.
Disk & Hard Disk
Load Group Real Perf
Load Group offers the following possibilities:
The Load Group command offers a quick way of loading a Groups of 8 elements at a time.
LOAD GROUP
Warning: The Group currently in memory is overwritten by the incoming Group. If, for example, the User Style Group you are loading contains only one User Style, all User Styles of the destination Group currently in RAM will be cancelled and replaced by the new Group. Be sure that your Group data are safely saved to Disk or Hard Disk before proceeding.
Loads Songs as virtual Groups (Song Group 1 and Song Group 2 found in the Disk environment only). Each virtual group corresponds to the first 8 or second 8 locations of the Song memory. In fact, in normal conditions when you press the Song button to select a Song, the song selection display shows two columns, left and right. The left column corresponds to the virtual SongsGroup 1 and the right to Songs-Group 2. This feature is particularly useful for the WX Series Songs disks which contain Song Groups containing up to 8 Songs each.
Load Group User Style
Load Group Song
Loads a Group of up to 8 User Styles (and corresponding Performances) to any User Group destination.
Loads a Group of up to 8 User Styles (and corresponding Performances) to any User Group destination. Press ESCAPE to close the user message and try again, this time selecting the correct destination.
Loads Songs as virtual Groups (Song Group 1 and Song Group 2 found in the Disk environment only). Each virtual group corresponds to the first 8 or second 8 locations of the Song memory. In fact, in normal conditions when you press the Song button to select a Song, the song selection display shows two columns, left and right. The left column corresponds to the virtual SongsGroup 1 and the right to Songs-Group 2. This feature is particularly useful for the WX Series Songs disks which contain Song Groups containing up to 8 Songs each.
Load Group Song
If you attempt to load to a destination other than the correct one, a user message will inform you of your error with the following message:
Loads a Group of 8 Style Performance banks, each bank containing up to 8 user-programmed Style Performances. Unlike other Groups, the Style Groups cannot be switched - they must be loaded to their original locations in memory. For example, Group 8 (US. TRAD) cannot be loaded to any other location in RAM other than Group 8.
Load Group Style Perf
Disk & Hard Disk

311
LOAD GROUP

Load Group Style Perf Loads a Group of 8 Style Performance banks, each bank containing up to 8 user-programmed Style Performances. Unlike other Groups, the Style Groups cannot be switched - they must be loaded to their original locations in memory. For example, Group 8 (US. TRAD) cannot be loaded to any other location in RAM other than Group 8. If you attempt to load to a destination other than the correct one, a user message will inform you of your error with the following message:
The Load Group command offers a quick way of loading a Groups of 8 elements at a time.

Warning: The Group currently in memory is overwritten by the incoming Group. If, for example, the User Style Group you are loading contains only one User Style, all User Styles of the destination Group currently in RAM will be cancelled and replaced by the new Group. Be sure that your Group data are safely saved to Disk or Hard Disk before proceeding.

Press ESCAPE to close the user message and try again, this time selecting the correct destination.
311
LOAD GROUP USER STYLE PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)

Use the Demo Disk 01 to load a User Style Group to memory.
DISK H. D
1. Insert the supplied Demo Disk 01 in the disk drive and press DISK. 2. Select GROUP USER STYLE from the main Load page then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SELECTOR.
The floppy disk directory may show the presence of several blocks, one containing the Sample, another User Styles, etc..
ESCAPE
2
ENTER TEM
3. Select the Styles Block and press ENTER to gain access.

In this example, the disk directory shows the presence of two User Style Groups (User 3 and User 4).
3
ENTER TEM
4. Select the User Group that you wish to load and its corresponding destination in RAM (1, 2, 3 or 4). 5. Press ENTER twice to load the User Style Group file to memory.
User Style Groups can be interchanged. For example, User Group 3 on floppy disk can be loaded to User Group 1 in RAM.
ESCAPE
4
ENTER TEM
ESCAPE
5
ENTER TEM
ESCAPE
312 Reference Guide
Load All Song: loads up to 16 Songs;
LOAD ALL SONG PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)
Use Load All to load an entire set of file types in a single step.
Disk & Hard Disk
LOAD ALL
Warning: Use Load ALL with care. If, for example, the disk-based All User Style data contains only one User Style, all your User Styles currently in RAM will be irremediably lost through cancellation by the incoming file. Be absolutely sure, therefore, that your Sounds, Songs, Styles and Performances are safely stored to Disk or Hard Disk before using the Load ALL procedures.
2. Select the Block containing the Songs required from the source directory then press ENTER twice to start the loading procedure.

Load All Song: loads up to 16 Songs;
The Load All procedure offers the following possibilities:
1. Select ALL SONG from the main Load page then press ENTER to gain access to the File Selector
Load All Real Perf: loads 8 Groups of Real Performances;
Load All User Style: loads 4 Groups of User Styles (including all associated User Style Performances).
Load All Style Perf: loads 12 Groups of Rom Style Performance banks, each containing up to 8 Style Performances;
Load All Style Perf: loads 12 Groups of Rom Style Performance banks, each containing up to 8 Style Performances;
Load All User Style: loads 4 Groups of User Styles (including all associated User Style Performances).
Load All Real Perf: loads 8 Groups of Real Performances;

ENTER TEM
LOAD ALL SONG PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)
Load All Sound: an unspecified number of RamSounds and RAM -Sounds;
1. Select ALL SONG from the main Load page then press ENTER to gain access to the File Selector
The Load All procedure offers the following possibilities:

ESCAPE
2. Select the Block containing the Songs required from the source directory then press ENTER twice to start the loading procedure.
Warning: Use Load ALL with care. If, for example, the disk-based All User Style data contains only one User Style, all your User Styles currently in RAM will be irremediably lost through cancellation by the incoming file. Be absolutely sure, therefore, that your Sounds, Songs, Styles and Performances are safely stored to Disk or Hard Disk before using the Load ALL procedures.
Load All Sound: an unspecified number of RamSounds and RAM -Sounds;
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEM
Disk & Hard Disk

313
LOAD ALL

Use Load All to load an entire set of file types in a single step.

ENTER
TEM
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEM
ESCAPE
313
LOAD WX/SX SONGS AND STYLES

SK760/880 can load Songs and Styles from the following previous format disks: WX2, WX400, WX Expander, SX2, SX3 The loading procedures are identical to those used for SK760/880 Songs and Styles. The Blocks however show the .WXS extension instead of .BLK. Furthermore, WX2/SX2 disks contain one Block only. WX Songs disks contain Song Groups consisting of up to 8 Songs each. For this purpose, the SK760/880 Disk environment contains two virtual Songs Groups (1 and 2) specific for the WX Series disks. Refer to the Load Group procedure explained on page 3.12.
314 Reference Guide
The Save procedures operate in the direction RAM > Destination where the destination can be Floppy disk or Hard disk. The SK760/880 RAM is backed by a rechargeable battery to safeguard the data when the instrument is turned off. For security reasons, however, it is necessary to store your data to floppy disk or Hard disk with the Save command. The RAM should be considered as a work area which can be continually updated, not as a data storage device.
F4 F6 F2 F8
WARNING - Do not save data to the original disks supplied with the instrument. As a precautionary measure against data loss, always check that your original disks are write protected.

THE GENERAL SAVE PROCEDURE

1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive. 2. Press DISK to open the main Save page.
The Save procedures operate in the direction RAM > Destination where the destination can be Floppy disk or Hard disk.
Have a new or used disk ready to save data to. These can be SK760/880 format disks or standard MS-DOS disks for the exclusive storage of MIDI files. You can also save MIDI Files to SK760/880 format disks.
Save operations are characterized by an additional option: the creation of a new Block if necessary.

Check that the floppy disk is not write protected if so, remove the protection beforehand. If you forget to do this, the instrument will prompt you with an appropriate message when you attempt to save to the disk.
Check that the floppy disk is not write protected if so, remove the protection beforehand. If you forget to do this, the instrument will prompt you with an appropriate message when you attempt to save to the disk.
Save operations are characterized by an additional option: the creation of a new Block if necessary.
Have a new or used disk ready to save data to. These can be SK760/880 format disks or standard MS-DOS disks for the exclusive storage of MIDI files. You can also save MIDI Files to SK760/880 format disks.

2. Press DISK to open the main Save page.
THE GENERAL SAVE PROCEDURE
The SK760/880 RAM is backed by a rechargeable battery to safeguard the data when the instrument is turned off. For security reasons, however, it is necessary to store your data to floppy disk or Hard disk with the Save command. The RAM should be considered as a work area which can be continually updated, not as a data storage device.
Save operations
WARNING - Do not save data to the original disks supplied with the instrument. As a precautionary measure against data loss, always check that your original disks are write protected.
Disk & Hard Disk

DISK
F7
F5
F3
F1
H. D
315
Save operations
DISK H. D
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
Disk & Hard Disk
315
3. Specify the Save operation required (example, Save All Song) then press ENTER to open the File Selector. 4. Select an existing Block to save to or empty destination to create a new Block.
Save to an existing Block to backup your data after a work session when the destination Block and RAM block are of the same origin. Select an empty destination (shown as a broken line with .BLK extension) to create new block.
3
ENTER TEMP
ESCAPE
5. Press ENTER.
If you selected an existing Block, the operation will proceed depending on specified command. If you save to an empty location, youll be prompted to create a new Block. Use the keyboard and the numeric keypad as the sources of alphanumeric data to give the block a name (see Data Entry procedures in chapter 1). The extension .BLK is created automatically. Confirm the new name with ENTER.
5/6/7
ENTER TEMP
6. Press ENTER to confirm the Save operation.

The existing Block will be updated or the new Block will be created and the file(s) will be saved to the Block. Remember that if you save to an existing file, it will be overwritten by the incoming one. Whenever possible, try to save to an empty location (shown as a broken line) to safeguard existing data on the storage device.
ESCAPE ESCAPE
ENTER
TEMP
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
DISK H. D
or
ESCAPE
316 Reference Guide
Save Single Block
Save Single Setup If you attempt to save to a destination other than the correct one, a user message will inform you of your error with the following message:
You can create different Setup files for particular occasions. For example, one for home sessions, one for live shows, one for piano-bar work, etc. Save Single Song Save Single Style Performance


Saves Songs to disk one at a time. If you have already loaded some MIDI Files to RAM, use this procedure to convert the files to SK760/880 format songs.

Disk & Hard Disk
Save Single Block
The Save Single command offers the following possibilities:
Hint: A Block can hold up to 16 Songs divided into two virtual groups. If no empty locations are shown, it means that the block is fully occupied. In this case, either overwrite an existing Song that you dont mind losing, or close the Block with ESCAPE, then select an empty location and press ENTER to create a new Block.
Saves the entire contents of RAM to disk or Hard disk in a single step. Block data contains: a Setup file, Sounds, Performances, ROM Style Performances, User Styles (and relative Performances) and Songs (and relative Performances), all housed in their respective Groups.
Single MIDI File
Saves a SK760/880 Song to disk (MS-Dos format) as a MIDI File in order to exchange the song with other instruments or computers. SK760/880 saves Songs as SMF1 or SMF0 format MIDI files. Set the SMF Save Format parameter in the General Set function of Edit MIDI. If you want to save GM compatible MIDI files, set the General MIDI parameter to ON in the General set function of Edit MIDI.
Save Single Setup
Saves a Setup file to a Block on floppy disk or Hard Disk. The Setup corresponds to the configuration of the instruments global parameters (Edit General status) that determine how the machine operates, regardless of the contents of RAM. Saving a Setup file to a Block overwrites the existing Setup file without affecting other data. Only one Setup file can be saved in each Block.
You can create different Setup files for particular occasions. For example, one for home sessions, one for live shows, one for piano-bar work, etc.
Saves a Setup file to a Block on floppy disk or Hard Disk. The Setup corresponds to the configuration of the instruments global parameters (Edit General status) that determine how the machine operates, regardless of the contents of RAM. Saving a Setup file to a Block overwrites the existing Setup file without affecting other data. Only one Setup file can be saved in each Block.
SAVE SINGLE
Note: If you assign a new block the name AUTOLOAD, you can load the Block into RAM automatically on a future occasion by turning the instrument on with the floppy disk inserted in the drive. Naturally, only one Block with the name AUTOLOAD can exist in a disk.
Note: If you assign a new block the name AUTOLOAD, you can load the Block into RAM automatically on a future occasion by turning the instrument on with the floppy disk inserted in the drive. Naturally, only one Block with the name AUTOLOAD can exist in a disk.

Saves Songs to disk one at a time. If you have already loaded some MIDI Files to RAM, use this procedure to convert the files to SK760/880 format songs.
Saves the entire contents of RAM to disk or Hard disk in a single step. Block data contains: a Setup file, Sounds, Performances, ROM Style Performances, User Styles (and relative Performances) and Songs (and relative Performances), all housed in their respective Groups.

Save Single Style Performance
Saves a single bank of up to 8 user-programmed Style Performances. These Performances cannot be loaded to locations other than the original source Style Performance bank. For example, the Style Performances of Style 59 (U.S.Trad) cannot be saved to any other location of the ROM Styles. If you attempt to save to a destination other than the correct one, a user message will inform you of your error with the following message:
Save Single Song
Hint: A Block can hold up to 16 Songs divided into two virtual groups. If no empty locations are shown, it means that the block is fully occupied. In this case, either overwrite an existing Song that you dont mind losing, or close the Block with ESCAPE, then select an empty location and press ENTER to create a new Block.
Saves a SK760/880 Song to disk (MS-Dos format) as a MIDI File in order to exchange the song with other instruments or computers. SK760/880 saves Songs as SMF1 or SMF0 format MIDI files. Set the SMF Save Format parameter in the General Set function of Edit MIDI. If you want to save GM compatible MIDI files, set the General MIDI parameter to ON in the General set function of Edit MIDI.
Single MIDI File
Saves a single bank of up to 8 user-programmed Style Performances. These Performances cannot be loaded to locations other than the original source Style Performance bank. For example, the Style Performances of Style 59 (U.S.Trad) cannot be saved to any other location of the ROM Styles.
Saves a single User Style and associated User Style Performances to any location in the USER Style Groups (1-4) present on disk or Hard disk.
Save Single User Style
Saves a single user-programmed Performance (RealTime) to any of the 64 locations of the Performance Groups (1-8) on disk or Hard disk. The incoming Performances overwrite those present on the storage device.
Save Single Performance
Disk & Hard Disk

317
SAVE SINGLE

Save Single Performance

The Save Single command offers the following possibilities:
Saves a single user-programmed Performance (RealTime) to any of the 64 locations of the Performance Groups (1-8) on disk or Hard disk. The incoming Performances overwrite those present on the storage device.

Save Single User Style

Saves a single User Style and associated User Style Performances to any location in the USER Style Groups (1-4) present on disk or Hard disk.
317
Performances are converted into track data (Bank Select MSB and LSB, Program Change, Volume, Pan, CC91 and CC93 for the depth of the effects). If a Score is present, the text is converted into Lyric events and the chord symbols into Text events. The save procedure is almost identical to Save Single Song. In this case youll see a list of files in the destination directory with the .MID extension. In some cases, other names appear which represent sub-directories containing other MIDI Files. Empty locations are shown as a broken line with the .MID extension. The .MID extension is attached to the original SK760/880 Song name automatically. Have an MS-DOS or Atari ST/Falcon format disk ready. Use the Format MS-DOS disk (1.44 Mb) and Format MS-DOS/Atari (720 KB) functions in the Utility Disk page to format your new disks. Save Single Sound Saves single Ram-Sounds as well as RAM Sounds to disk or hard disk to build a library of Sounds for future use. The Save Single Sound procedure is characterized by an increased number of steps, owing to the fact that there are 16 Sound Groups, each consisting of 8 Banks of 16 slots. You can choose to save your Ram-Sounds anywhere you want, but it is recommended that you save to the same location as the original RAM position to facilitate future selection. Bear in mind that the RAM-Sound will take the ProgramChange number of the chosen destination, therefore, if you save 19-7 SwOrgan to, say, destination 25-16, the Sound will be shown with the new ProgramChange number on a future load operation, not with the old.

Note: You can also use the Sound Search function to pass directly to a particular Sound and sound Bank. The Sound Search procedure is explained in detail on pages 3.33 & 3.34.

318 Reference Guide
3. Select the SK760/880 Song to save as a MIDI file from the RAM directory and select a .MID destination in disk.
If necessary, enter a Block (or sub-directory shown with the .<DIR> extension) to gain access to other MIDI File locations.
You can create a new Block in the destination device as already discussed in the General Save procedure.
4. Press ENTER twice to start the conversion process.
4. Press ENTER twice to start the conversion process.
3. Select the SK760/880 Song to save as a MIDI file from the RAM directory and select a .MID destination in disk.
2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard disk).
1. Select SINGLE MIDI FILE from the main Save page then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SELECTOR.
SAVE MIDI FILE PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)
You can create a new Block in the destination device as already discussed in the General Save procedure.
If necessary, enter a Block (or sub-directory shown with the .<DIR> extension) to gain access to other MIDI File locations.
Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk. Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk.
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEMP
Disk & Hard Disk

ENTER TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
F2
F1
F2
F1
319
SAVE MIDI FILE PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)

1
ENTER TEMP
1. Select SINGLE MIDI FILE from the main Save page then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SELECTOR. 2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard disk).
ESCAPE
2
F2 F1 F2
F1
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
Disk & Hard Disk
319
SAVE GROUP
The Save Group command offers a quick way of saving a Group of 8 elements in a single step.

If you attempt to save to a destination other than the correct one, a user message will inform you of your error with the following message:
Warning: The Group currently on disk or hard disk is overwritten by the incoming Group. If, for example, the User Style Group you are saving contains only one User Style, all User Styles of the destination Group currently on disk will be cancelled and replaced by the new Group. Be sure of the contents of the Group data being overwritten before proceeding.

Save Group offers the following possibilities: Save Group Real Perf Saves a Group of Performances consisting of up to 8 user-programmed RealTime Performances to any Real Performance destination on disk or hard disk. Save Group User Style Saves a Group of up to 8 User Styles (and corresponding Performances) to any User Group destination on disk or hard disk. Save Group Song Saves Songs as virtual Groups (Song Group 1 and Song Group 2 found in the Disk environment only). Each virtual group corresponds to the first 8 or second 8 locations of the Song memory. The left column corresponds to the virtual SongsGroup 1 and the right to Songs-Group 2. Save Group Style Perf Saves a Group of 8 Style Performance banks to disk or hard disk, each bank containing up to 8 user-programmed Style Performances. Unlike other Groups, the Style Groups cannot be switched - they must be saved to their original locations. For example, Group 8 (US. TRAD) cannot be saved to any other location on disk other than Group 8.

320 Reference Guide

ENTER TEMP
3. Select the destination Block then press ENTER to gain access.

If necessary, select an empty location to create a new Block using the method already discussed in the General Save procedure.
4. Select the Group file from the RAM directory and its destination then press ENTER twice to execute the command.
4. Select the Group file from the RAM directory and its destination then press ENTER twice to execute the command.
3. Select the destination Block then press ENTER to gain access.
1. Select GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE from the main Save page then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SELECTOR.
SAVE GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE (EXAMPLE)
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
ENTER
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEMP
TEMP
Disk & Hard Disk

F2
F1
F2
F1
321
SAVE GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE (EXAMPLE)

1. Select GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE from the main Save page then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SELECTOR.
ENTER
TEMP
ESCAPE
2
F2
F1
F1 F2
3
ENTER TEMP
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEMP
ESCAPE
Disk & Hard Disk
321
SAVE ALL
Use Save All to save an entire set of file types contained in RAM in a single step.

Warning: Use Save ALL with care as this procedure overwrites all data at the destination. Be absolutely sure, therefore, of the file content in disk before using the Save ALL procedures.

The Save All procedure offers the following possibilities: Save All Song: saves up to 16 Songs; Save All Sound: saves an unspecified number of Ram-Sounds and RAM -Sounds (16 Groups); Save All Real Perf: saves 8 Groups of Real Performances; Save All Style Perf: saves 12 Groups of Rom Style Performance banks, each containing up to 8 Style Performances; Save All User Style: saves 4 Groups of User Styles (including all associated User Style Performances).
ENTER
TEMP
ESCAPE
SAVE ALL SONG PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE).

1. Select ALL SONG from the main Save page then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SELECTOR. 2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard disk).
2
F2 F1 F2
F1
3/4
ENTER TEMP
3. Select the destination Block in the disk directory.

ESCAPE
4. Press ENTER twice to start the saving procedure.
322 Reference Guide
The example which follows shows how to Erase a single Song from RAM.
1. Press DISK to open the main Erase page.
2. Select the ERASE command required from the main page. 3. Select the source device to erase from.
4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector.
When you pass to the Erase page, you can choose the device to erase data from with the corresponding soft buttons: Floppy disk = F1 Hard Disk = F2 RAM = F3
In this case, select the RAM option with soft button F3. If you are erasing from a floppy disk, insert the disk into the drive and check that the Floppy Disk option is selected (soft button F1). If you are erasing from the Hard Disk, select the Hard Disk option with soft button F2.
1. Press DISK to open the main Erase page.
If the main Erase page is not shown, use the page scroll ( ) buttons to open it.
3. Select the source device to erase from.
The Erase File Selector does not operate between source and destination directories as in the load and save file selector, but on a single directory contained in the device you are cancelling files from.
2. Select the ERASE command required from the main page.
The example which follows shows how to Erase a single Song from RAM.
The Erase File Selector does not operate between source and destination directories as in the load and save file selector, but on a single directory contained in the device you are cancelling files from.
Use the Erase command to cancel files no longer needed from a data storing device (Disk or Hard Disk) or from RAM to make room for other files.
Erase operations
In this case, select the RAM option with soft button F3. If you are erasing from a floppy disk, insert the disk into the drive and check that the Floppy Disk option is selected (soft button F1). If you are erasing from the Hard Disk, select the Hard Disk option with soft button F2.
When you pass to the Erase page, you can choose the device to erase data from with the corresponding soft buttons: Floppy disk = F1 Hard Disk = F2 RAM = F3
If the main Erase page is not shown, use the page scroll ( ) buttons to open it.
3/4
1/2
Disk & Hard Disk

F2
F3
F1
DISK
ESCAPE
ENTER
H. D
323
TEMPO
Erase operations
Use the Erase command to cancel files no longer needed from a data storing device (Disk or Hard Disk) or from RAM to make room for other files.
1/2
DISK
H. D
3/4
F1
F2
F3
ENTER
TEMPO
ESCAPE
Disk & Hard Disk
323
5. If necessary, select the Block containing the file to erase then press ENTER to access the Block. 6. Select the file to erase. 7. Press ENTER twice to erase the file from the directory.
5
ENTER TEM
ESCAPE
6/7
ENTER
TEM
ESCAPE
324 Reference Guide
Models without a Hard disk can copy from floppy to floppy or from RAM to RAM.
ENTER TEMPO / DATA
To copy a file from one floppy disk to another, first load the file to RAM, then save it to the other floppy.
The example which follows shows how to copy a single Sound file from Floppy disk to Hard Disk, and provides sufficient information which you can apply to all Copy situations.
1. Press DISK to open the main Copy page.
1. Press DISK to open the main Copy page.
The example which follows shows how to copy a single Sound file from Floppy disk to Hard Disk, and provides sufficient information which you can apply to all Copy situations.
To copy a file from one floppy disk to another, first load the file to RAM, then save it to the other floppy.
Models without a Hard disk can copy from floppy to floppy or from RAM to RAM.
Use the Copy command to copy a file from one location to another within the same device, or from the Hard Disk to floppy (bypassing the RAM) and vice versa. The source file remains intact.
In this case, use the button to pass to the source directory and, if necessary, select Floppy Disk (F1). Then use the button to pass to the destination directory and select the Hard disk (F2) as the destination. Entering the Hard disk for the first time takes some time, depending on the number of files already present. A Please Wait message appears during the scanning period. Selecting Floppy disk or RAM automatically assigns the same device to source and destination.
Copy operations
If the main Copy page is not shown, use the page scroll ( ) buttons to open it.
3. Select the source and destination devices with soft buttons F1, F2 or F3 and directional arrows.
2. Select the COPY command required from the main page.
2. Select the COPY command required from the main page.
3. Select the source and destination devices with soft buttons F1, F2 or F3 and directional arrows.
If the main Copy page is not shown, use the page scroll ( ) buttons to open it.
In this case, use the button to pass to the source directory and, if necessary, select Floppy Disk (F1). Then use the button to pass to the destination directory and select the Hard disk (F2) as the destination. Entering the Hard disk for the first time takes some time, depending on the number of files already present. A Please Wait message appears during the scanning period. Selecting Floppy disk or RAM automatically assigns the same device to source and destination.
1/2
3/4
Disk & Hard Disk

ESCAPE
DISK
F4
F6
F2
F8
F7
F5
F3
F1
H. D
325
Copy operations
Use the Copy command to copy a file from one location to another within the same device, or from the Hard Disk to floppy (bypassing the RAM) and vice versa. The source file remains intact.
1/2
DISK H. D
3/4
F1
F2 F3
F4
F5
F6 F7
F8
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
Disk & Hard Disk
325
5. If necessary, select the source Block containing the desired file and press ENTER to gain access. 6. Select the File to Copy from the source directory. 7. Pass into the destination directory to select the destination
If necessary, select a Block in the Hard disk and press ENTER to access then select a destination.
ENTER
TEM
ESCAPE
8. Press ENTER twice to copy the file to the destination.

Note: It is not possible to copy a file to itself. Attempting to do so prompts the following message:

6/7
Press ENTER or ESCAPE to close the window and repeat the operation by copying to a different destination.
8
ENTER TEM
ESCAPE
326 Reference Guide
WARNING - Use the Move function only in
Models without a Hard disk can move files from within the same floppy or within RAM. To move a file from one floppy disk to another, first load the file to RAM, then save it to the other floppy. The example which follows shows how to use the Move operation within RAM (Move Single Sound), and provides sufficient information which you can apply to all Move situations.
3. Select the source and destination devices with soft buttons F1, F2 or F3.
Use the Move command to shift a file from one location to another within the same device, or from the Hard Disk to floppy (bypassing the RAM) and vice versa. This option cancels the file at the source.
Move operations
WARNING - Use the Move function only in cases where the original file is to be cancelled.
In this case, select RAM as the device to work in. Selecting Floppy disk or RAM automatically assigns the same device to source and destination.

To move a file from one floppy disk to another, first load the file to RAM, then save it to the other floppy.
2. Select the MOVE command required from the main page.
The example which follows shows how to use the Move operation within RAM (Move Single Sound), and provides sufficient information which you can apply to all Move situations.
If the main Move page is not shown, use the page scroll ( ) buttons to open it.
1. Press DISK to open the main Move page.
1. Press DISK to open the main Move page.
3. Select the source and destination devices with soft buttons F1, F2 or F3.
2. Select the MOVE command required from the main page.
Models without a Hard disk can move files from within the same floppy or within RAM.
In this case, select RAM as the device to work in. Selecting Floppy disk or RAM automatically assigns the same device to source and destination.
cases where the original file is to be cancelled.
If the main Move page is not shown, use the page scroll ( ) buttons to open it.
3/4
1/2
Disk & Hard Disk

F2
F3
F1
DISK
ESCAPE
ENTER
H. D
327
TEM
Move operations
Use the Move command to shift a file from one location to another within the same device, or from the Hard Disk to floppy (bypassing the RAM) and vice versa. This option cancels the file at the source.
1/2
DISK H. D
3/4

F1
ENTER TEM
F2
F3
ESCAPE
Disk & Hard Disk
327
5. If necessary, select a Block containing the desired file then press ENTER to access the Block. 6. Select the File to Move from the source directory. 7. Pass into the destination directory and select the destination.
In this case, use the Page scroll buttons to scroll through the Sound Groups and the / directional arrows to scroll through the individual Sound Group locations.
5
ENTER TEM
ESCAPE
6/7
8. Press ENTER twice to Move the Sound file to the selected destination.
The file at the original location (in this case, 19-7) is cancelled and moved to the new location (in this case, 17-8).

Note: It is not possible to move a file to itself. Attempting to do so prompts the following message:

Press ENTER or ESCAPE to close the window and repeat the operation by moving to a different destination.
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
328 Reference Guide
After pressing DISK, use the page scroll button to pass to the last two Disk pages: Floppy Disk Utility and Hard Disk Utility. These pages provide useful functions for disk and hard Disk formatting and servicing. The Floppy Disk Utility page options include: Format Work Disk (1.62 MB);
FORMAT WORK DISK (1.62 MB)

This operation force-formats a 3.5 HD floppy disk for SK760/880 use. This extended format procedure prepares the disk with a capacity of 1.62 megabytes (compared with the standard 1.4 of MS-DOS disks). This format cannot be read by computers.
Format Ms-Dos Disk (1.44 MB);

1. Insert a new floppy disk into the drive.

You can also use a formatted disk, provided that you are not interested in conserving its contents.
Format Ms-Dos/Atari (720 KB)

Change Disk Name

The Hard Disk Utility options include:

3. Press ENTER to start the formatting procedure.

The Hard Disk Utility options include: Hard Disk Check-Recovery

All the Disk initializing procedures cancel the entire contents of a used disk - be absolutely sure that the contents include files that you dont mind losing.

WARNING:
FORMAT MS-DOS DISK (1.44 MB)

This operation formats a 3.5 HD floppy disk in MS-DOS format (capacity: 1.44 megabytes). This format permits file exchange with computers running MS-DOS, Windows, OS/2, Macintosh, Atari, Amiga, and all computers capable of reading MS-DOS format disks. The procedure is identical to that described for the Format work disk (1.62 Mb) operation.

Floppy Disk Utility page
The Floppy Disk Utility page options include:
These pages provide useful functions for disk and hard Disk formatting and servicing.
After pressing DISK, use the page scroll button to pass to the last two Disk pages: Floppy Disk Utility and Hard Disk Utility.
Disk & Hard Disk
Utility
Hard Disk Back-up
Hard Disk Restore
Hard Disk Restore
Hard Disk Protection
Hard Disk Sleep Time
Change Disk Name
Format Ms-Dos/Atari (720 KB)
Format Ms-Dos Disk (1.44 MB);
Format Work Disk (1.62 MB);
3. Press ENTER to start the formatting procedure.
Hard Disk Check-Recovery Hard Disk Sleep Time Hard Disk Protection Hard Disk Back-up
2. Select Format work disk (1.62 Mb).

The following dialog window appears:
Floppy Disk Utility page
This operation formats a 3.5 HD floppy disk in MS-DOS format (capacity: 1.44 megabytes). This format permits file exchange with computers running MS-DOS, Windows, OS/2, Macintosh, Atari, Amiga, and all computers capable of reading MS-DOS format disks. The procedure is identical to that described for the Format work disk (1.62 Mb) operation.
FORMAT MS-DOS DISK (1.44 MB)
2. Select Format work disk (1.62 Mb).
1. Insert a new floppy disk into the drive.
This operation force-formats a 3.5 HD floppy disk for SK760/880 use.
FORMAT WORK DISK (1.62 MB)
This extended format procedure prepares the disk with a capacity of 1.62 megabytes (compared with the standard 1.4 of MS-DOS disks). This format cannot be read by computers.
WARNING: All the Disk initializing procedures cancel the entire contents of a used disk - be absolutely sure that the contents include files that you dont mind losing.
You can also use a formatted disk, provided that you are not interested in conserving its contents.
Disk & Hard Disk

329
Utility
329
FORMAT MS-DOS/ATARI DISK (720 KB)

This operation formats a 3.5 DD floppy disk in MS-DOS / Atari ST format (capacity: 720 kilobytes), suitable in particular for MIDI file exchanges. The procedure is identical to that described for the Format work disk (1.62 Mb) operation.
FORMAT HARD DISK

This operation formats the Hard disk and is used in two cases: 1) as an essential operation after installing a new Hard disk kit (if you install a Hard Disk supplied by Generalmusic, do not format the unit as it will contain factory loaded files); 2) when a rapid cancellation of the HD contents is required.
CHANGE DISK NAME

Use this operation to assign a name to a floppy disk. Giving your disks a specific name allows quick recognition of the contents during a search through disks without labels. If you write the disks name on the index label, you can reduce the search times even further. SK760/880 assigns a generic code name to disks formatted with the Utility formatting procedures the name depending on the size. For example, a 1.62 Mb work disk will be assigned a code name such as the one shown below:
1. From page 6 of the Utility page, press the page scroll button ( ) to page to page 7. 2. Select (if necessary) the Format hard disk function.
Use the standard name entry procedure to give your disks a name. Confirm the entry with ENTER or cancel with Escape.
Hard Disk Utility page

330 Reference Guide
4. Press the Soft button F1 (not ENTER) to start the hard-disk format procedure, or ESCAPE to cancel.

HARD DISK CHECK/RECOVERY

In this case, the message shows no errors. In cases where errors exist, make a note of the numbers shown in the dialog window as they are useful to provide information for technical assistance. If the Hard disk is damaged, attempting to access it prompts a message similar to the following:
If the Hard disk is damaged, attempting to access it prompts a message similar to the following:
Use the following recovery procedure as soon as possible.
1. Enter Edit Disk and go to the Hard Disk Utility page.
This procedure can restore a damaged Hard Disk to its original status. Damage to the Hard Disk can be caused by: a power failure during a Save operation; physical defects of the disk.
This procedure can restore a damaged Hard Disk to its original status. Damage to the Hard Disk can be caused by: a power failure during a Save operation; physical defects of the disk.
1. Enter Edit Disk and go to the Hard Disk Utility page.
Use the following recovery procedure as soon as possible.
HARD DISK CHECK/RECOVERY
4. Press the Soft button F1 (not ENTER) to start the hard-disk format procedure, or ESCAPE to cancel.
3. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
As a security measure, a second confirmation request appears (for security reasons):
Options: Off (always on), 5 sec ... 60 sec.
2. Select Hard disk check/recovery .
To avoid hearing the noise caused by the rotation of the hard disk, you can set this parameter to turn the hard disk off after an operation.
HARD DISK SLEEP TIME
3. Press ENTER to start the recovery of the data.
WARNING - Never turn off the instrument while the Hard disk or disk drive are writing data (Save, Copy, Move, Erase operations).
Error found - Code relating to the error found. None appears in cases where no errors are encountered.
Check version - Version of the test program and data recovery.
In this case, the message shows no errors. In cases where errors exist, make a note of the numbers shown in the dialog window as they are useful to provide information for technical assistance.
Shortly after, another dialog window appears similar to the one below:
Disk & Hard Disk

331

2. Select Hard disk check/recovery .

As a security measure, a second confirmation request appears (for security reasons):
3. Press ENTER to start the recovery of the data.

Shortly after, another dialog window appears similar to the one below:
Check version - Version of the test program and data recovery.
Error found - Code relating to the error found. None appears in cases where no errors are encountered.

WARNING - Never turn off the instrument while
the Hard disk or disk drive are writing data (Save, Copy, Move, Erase operations).

HARD DISK SLEEP TIME

To avoid hearing the noise caused by the rotation of the hard disk, you can set this parameter to turn the hard disk off after an operation.
Options: Off (always on), 5 sec ... 60 sec.
Disk & Hard Disk
331
HARD DISK PROTECTION

As a safety measure to prevent unwanted file loss, use the Hard Disk Protection function to protect your hard disk Note: All SK760/880 instruments with factory fitted Hard Disks leave the factory with the Hard Disk Protection active. In order to use the Save, Erase or Move operations on the Hard Disk, the protection must be removed. Select the Hard Disk Protection function and press ENTER to activate the protection function. Use the right/left cursor arrows to toggle between the two options (Unprotect/Protect). Press ENTER to save the selected status to memory.
HARD DISK BACKUP

This option allows you to backup part or all the Hard disk data to floppy disk in compressed or decompressed form. By default, the Compress option is selected. At the end of a work session, always remember to copy all newly elaborated data present on Hard disk to floppy disks. Should the Hard disk suffer damage and data loss, you will always be able to recuperate the data from disks. How to back up your Hard Disk data
1. Have some empty formatted data disks ready.

As a general rule, 1000 Kb of Hard Disk data are compressed to approx. 50% of the original value in the case of Songs, and 30% in the case of Sounds. Use this conversion to calculate approximately how many disks you will require to backup your data. The size of each selected Block file is shown at the bottom of the directory.
2. Select Hard Disk Backup and press ENTER to activate the function.
Selecting this function opens a second level display showing the Hard disk directory on the left and a column on the right where you can prepare a list of data to backup and compress. The backup list can consist of Block files only, not individual files normally found in a block.
Hard Disk not protected
Hard Disk protected

Hard Disk Backup - list
332 Reference Guide
4. Press EXECUTE to start the backup process.

See EXECUTE below.
Overwrite (F1)
Select OVERWRITE (F1) if you want to overwrite data on disks previously used for other backups. This function is selected by default. If the Backup procedure requires more than one disk, a dialogue appears requesting the insertion of disk n. 2 and so on..
Deselect this function if you want the backup floppies to retain any data currently stored in them.
Compress (F2)
Select COMPRESS (F2) to compress the files of the backup list. This function is selected by default.
Delete (F5)
The Delete option does not cancel a Block from the Hard Disk directory.
Reset (F6)
3. Prepare a list containing the block(s) to backup.
The cursor moves down to the next empty location automatically.
Select RESET (F6) to cancel a list containing two or more Blocks in a single step.
Execute (F8)
If you attempt to insert a Block that has already been inserted, an appropriate warning is displayed. Press ESCAPE to cancel the warning and select a different Block.
Select DELETE (F5) to cancel a block from the list.
The Delete option does not cancel a Block from the Hard Disk directory.
Select DELETE (F5) to cancel a block from the list.
If you attempt to insert a Block that has already been inserted, an appropriate warning is displayed. Press ESCAPE to cancel the warning and select a different Block.
Insert a disk into the drive and press ENTER to start saving to the disk.
When the Backup has finished, a message is displayed saying: Operation completed.
Compress (F2)
If the Backup procedure requires more than one disk, a dialogue appears requesting the insertion of disk n. 2 and so on..
Disk & Hard Disk
Reset (F6)
Repeat the operation for other blocks
Delete (F5)
This function is selected by default.
Select COMPRESS (F2) to compress the files of the backup list.
Deselect this function if you want the backup floppies to retain any data currently stored in them.
This function is selected by default.
Select OVERWRITE (F1) if you want to overwrite data on disks previously used for other backups.
Overwrite (F1)
4. Press EXECUTE to start the backup process.
See EXECUTE below.
Repeat the operation for other blocks
Select a Block with the Up/Down cursor arrows and press ENTER to insert it into the list.
Insert a disk into the drive and press ENTER to start saving to the disk.
Press EXECUTE (F8) to start the backup process.
Use Select All (F7) to select all the Block contained in the Hard disk
Select All (F7)
Operation completed.
When the Backup has finished, a message is displayed saying:
After a short period, the unit is ready to backup the data and a dialog appears requesting you to insert Disk n. 1:
Disk & Hard Disk

333
3. Prepare a list containing the block(s) to backup.

Select All (F7)
Select a Block with the Up/Down cursor arrows and press ENTER to insert it into the list. The cursor moves down to the next empty location automatically.
Use Select All (F7) to select all the Block contained in the Hard disk
Execute (F8)
Press EXECUTE (F8) to start the backup process.

After a short period, the unit is ready to backup the data and a dialog appears requesting you to insert Disk n. 1:
333
HARD DISK RESTORE

Use the HARD DISK RESTORE function to load backup data from floppy disk back into the Hard Disk. How to restore backup data to the Hard disk
4. Prepare a list containing the block(s) to restore.

Select a Block with the Up/Down cursor arrows and press ENTER to insert it into the list. The cursor moves down to the next empty location automatically. Repeat the operation for other blocks If you attempt to insert a Block that has already been inserted, an appropriate warning is displayed. Press ESCAPE to cancel the warning and select a different Block.
1. Insert the Floppy disk containing the backup file or files into the drive. 2. Select Hard Disk Restore and press ENTER to activate the function.
The floppy disk may contain more than one backup file (shown with the .AR extension),
5. Press EXECUTE to start the hard disk restore process.

When the Hard Disk restore procedure is finished, a message is displayed saying: Operation completed.
3. Select the file to restore to the Hard disk and press ENTER to confirm.
Confirming the backup file selection opens a second level display showing the Floppy disk directory on the left and a column on the right where you can prepare a list of backup data to decompress.
If the Hard disk restore procedure requires more than one disk, a dialogue apppears requesting the insertion of disk n. 2 and so on..
Delete (F5)
Select DELETE (F5) to cancel a block from the list. The Delete option does not cancel a Block from the Restore directory.
Reset (F6)
Select All (F7)
Use Select All (F7) to select all the Blocks contained in the Restore directory.
Execute (F8)
Press EXCECUTE (F8) to start the restore process.
Hard Disk Restore - list

334 Reference Guide
Pressing the F5 Soft button opens the following dialog window:

You can also see the new directory by closing the Edit Disk environment with ESCAPE then re-entering Edit Disk.
FREE MEMORY (F6)
Pressing the F5 Soft button opens the following dialog window:
This option displays the amount of memory remaining in the floppy disk, Hard disk, SystemRAM, volatile Sample-RAM and in the Backed Sample-RAM.
This option displays the amount of memory remaining in the floppy disk, Hard disk, SystemRAM, volatile Sample-RAM and in the Backed Sample-RAM.
Select the type of Sample-RAM with the cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm. You can also see the new directory by closing the Edit Disk environment with ESCAPE then re-entering Edit Disk. Once a RAM -Sound is loaded into memory, a flag is applied to it to indicate which SampleRAM contains the sounds associated sample.
When you save the RAM -Sound, the flag is retained in the disk. When you load the Sounds again with the Load All Sound or Load Single Block operations, the RAM -Sounds are directed to the Sample-RAM indicated by the flag.

The samples saved in a Block with successive Save Single Sound operations may be too large to reside in the Backed S-RAM. In this case, the instrument attempts to load all the samples into the Volatile S-RAM. If in this case also the samples are too large for the available memory, the loading operation will be interrupted.

Note -
FREE MEMORY (F6)
Updates the current directory after changing a disk inserted in the drive, allowing the instrument to recognize the disk change.
NEW FL. DISK (F5)
This section explains the various options found in the main Disk pages and in the File Selector, some of which are permanent, others specific to a particular command or disk page.
Additional functions
When you save the RAM -Sound, the flag is retained in the disk. When you load the Sounds again with the Load All Sound or Load Single Block operations, the RAM -Sounds are directed to the Sample-RAM indicated by the flag.
Once a RAM -Sound is loaded into memory, a flag is applied to it to indicate which SampleRAM contains the sounds associated sample.
Select the type of Sample-RAM with the cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm.
The Sample-RAM option, which appears in all the main Disk pages except Utility, selects the type of Sample-RAM required to access.
This option is active only if the instrument has been installed with one or both optional Sample RAM kits.
SAMPLE-RAM... (F8)
Note - The samples saved in a Block with successive Save Single Sound operations may be too large to reside in the Backed S-RAM. In this case, the instrument attempts to load all the samples into the Volatile S-RAM. If in this case also the samples are too large for the available memory, the loading operation will be interrupted.
Disk & Hard Disk

335
Additional functions
This section explains the various options found in the main Disk pages and in the File Selector, some of which are permanent, others specific to a particular command or disk page.
SAMPLE-RAM... (F8)
This option is active only if the instrument has been installed with one or both optional Sample RAM kits. The Sample-RAM option, which appears in all the main Disk pages except Utility, selects the type of Sample-RAM required to access.
NEW FL. DISK (F5)

Updates the current directory after changing a disk inserted in the drive, allowing the instrument to recognize the disk change.
Disk & Hard Disk
335
BLOCK RENAME (F7)

This option, which appears in all File Selectors, allows you to modify the name of the selected Block. Use the standard method of name entry as described in the Data Entry paragraph in Chapter 1.
SEARCH RESOURCE (F4)

This option appears in all second level pages of all Single File operations. The second level pages are those that appear after confirming a File Selector selection. The Search Resource function is particularly useful if your instrument is fitted with a Hard Disk containing a large number of files. For example, if you do not remember in which Block of the Hard disk you stored a user-programmed Sound, or you want to go directly to a Block name without scrolling through the entire Hard Disk contents, press the Sound Search option to open an insertion window where you can specify a name.
BLOCK SIZE (F8)

This option, which appears in all File selectors, determines the dimensions of the currently selected Block. The information appears under the directory of the active File Selector. The dimensions of the same Block residing in RAM and in disk can differ by a few kilobytes, due to the fact that some Setup data in RAM is not saved to disk.
The name can be of the particular file you are looking for, or part of the entire name. For example, if your Sound name includes the word organ or a Block contains a particular sequence of letters, you can search for all files which include the inserted name. Press ENTER to start the search and the first Sound which includes the written name will appear, showing its location:
336 Reference Guide
Sound Search will also inform you of the absence a specified name by showing Not Found.
When you find the file you are looking for, press ENTER to pass directly to the file location or ESCAPE to abort the search operation.
If the displayed file is not the one you are looking for, use the F7 to Previous and F8 to Next options are required.
This option recalls the next Sound on the search list containing the string of characters specified in the Sound Search option.
SEARCH NEXT (F8)
3. Press ENTER.
2. Insert the string of characters that relate to the Sound you are looking for.
1. Press Soft button F7.
The function recalls the nearest Sound having the string of characters specified in the active zone.
The Sound Search function appears in the third level directory displays for the following operations:
SOUND SEARCH... (F7)
The cursor goes directly to the first Sound found containing the specified characters.
2 or 3 letters are sufficient.
Load Single Sound; Save Single Sound; Erase Single Sound; Copy Single Sound;: Move Single Sound.
Disk & Hard Disk

337
If the displayed file is not the one you are looking for, use the F7 to Previous and F8 to Next options are required.

SOUND SEARCH... (F7)

The Sound Search function appears in the third level directory displays for the following operations: Load Single Sound; Save Single Sound; Erase Single Sound; Copy Single Sound;: Move Single Sound. The function recalls the nearest Sound having the string of characters specified in the active zone.
When you find the file you are looking for, press ENTER to pass directly to the file location or ESCAPE to abort the search operation. Sound Search will also inform you of the absence a specified name by showing Not Found.
1. Press Soft button F7.

2. Insert the string of characters that relate to the Sound you are looking for.
2 or 3 letters are sufficient.
3. Press ENTER.
The cursor goes directly to the first Sound found containing the specified characters.
SEARCH NEXT (F8)

This option recalls the next Sound on the search list containing the string of characters specified in the Sound Search option.
Disk & Hard Disk
337
General disk handling information

If youre new to working with floppy disks and are not sure as to how you should handle these delicate accessories, please read this section for some useful information. Inserting a Disk into the disk drive Floppy disks must be inserted into the disk drive label side up and shutter first. Push the disk firmly into the drive until it clicks into place. The Write Protect Tab Floppy disks contain a write protect tab which allows you to protect valuable data from being accidentally overwritten. To prevent writing data to disk and so avoid accidental erasure, slide the tab fully down to open the window. To permit writing data to disk, slide the tab fully up to close the window.
Disk not protected
Disk protected
Use a pen or other pointed object to set the tab as shown. Handling Floppy Disks When handling floppy disks, certain precautions should be taken to avoid damage or data loss. Do not open the metal protection shutter or touch the surface of a disk If your SK760/880 has to be transported, make sure that a floppy disk is not inserted in the disk drive. Vibration may cause the disk drive head to scratch the disk, rendering it unusable. Do not store or place floppy disks in close proximity of television sets, computer monitors, loudspeakers, or other devices that are potential sources of magnetic fields. Doing so may render the disk unusable. Do not store or place floppy disks in locations subject to extremes of temperature and humidity, direct sunlight, or excessive dust and dirt. Do not place objects on top of a floppy disk. Return disks to their protective cases after use.
Avoid forcing a disk into the drive and hold the disk straight while inserting it. Ejecting a Floppy Disk Before ejecting a disk, make sure that the disk drive operating led is off and that the SK760/880 display is not currently showing a Loading or Saving message. To extract the disk, press the eject button and remove the disk.
338 Reference Guide
It is advisable to keep backup copies of all your disk data. Backup is technical jargon for a second copy. Backup copies stored in a safe place are extremely important. Disks can become damaged or lost, so please backup your work.
Should you accidentally erase some files from RAM, or should the hard disk suffer damage and data loss, you will always be able to recuperate the data from your disks.
At the end of a work session, always remember to copy all elaborated data present on RAM or Hard disk to Floppy Disks.
Disk & Hard Disk
Backup copies
Do not use the disk drive for about 5 minutes.
4. After approximately 10 seconds, eject the disk.
3. Execute a load function. An error message will appear. This is normal.
2. Insert the cleaning disk into the disk drive.
1. Moisten the cleaning disk with cleaning fluid.
After a prolonged period of use, disk save and load errors may become frequent due mainly to dirty disk drive heads, indicating that the disk drive head may need cleaning. This can be done using a good-quality fluid-type head cleaning kit for 3.5 inch (double-sided) disk drives. Do not use a cleaning kit intended for single-sided disk drives.
Disk Drive Head Cleaning
Disk & Hard Disk

339
Backup copies

Disk Drive Head Cleaning After a prolonged period of use, disk save and load errors may become frequent due mainly to dirty disk drive heads, indicating that the disk drive head may need cleaning. This can be done using a good-quality fluid-type head cleaning kit for 3.5 inch (double-sided) disk drives. Do not use a cleaning kit intended for single-sided disk drives.
At the end of a work session, always remember to copy all elaborated data present on RAM or Hard disk to Floppy Disks. Should you accidentally erase some files from RAM, or should the hard disk suffer damage and data loss, you will always be able to recuperate the data from your disks. It is advisable to keep backup copies of all your disk data. Backup is technical jargon for a second copy. Backup copies stored in a safe place are extremely important. Disks can become damaged or lost, so please backup your work.
1. Moisten the cleaning disk with cleaning fluid. 2. Insert the cleaning disk into the disk drive. 3. Execute a load function. An error message will appear. This is normal. 4. After approximately 10 seconds, eject the disk.
Do not use the disk drive for about 5 minutes.
339
Precautions to observe when using SK760/880 disks with a computer In name write situations, the SK760/880 allows file names of up to 10 characters, except the Block which accepts 8, in compatibility with MS-DOS and Windows 3.1 OS. Block files also include the extension .BLK. If your files are to be used in MS-DOS devices (IBM PCs and compatibles), bear in mind the 8 character limit of these systems when naming your files. In the Macintosh, OS/2 and Windows 95 systems, file names can include more that 8 characters. When a name is modified on a computer, the following rules should be remembered: do not change the Block file extension. avoid Block names longer that 8 characters. the maximum number of files in a Block cannot exceed the limit imposed by the SK760/ 880 RAM. do not change the names of the permanent files contained in the Blocks (e.g. the ROM Style Group names). SK760/880 requires standard names to recognize the structure of the data.
Furthermore, owing to some limitations of MSDOS, Windows 3.1 and Atari, it is essential to bear in mind the following advice: do not insert spaces within a file name (e.g.: MY FILE.BLK). To separate a name into two parts, you can either: 1) separate two parts by the underscore symbol (e.g.: MY_FILE.BLK). 2) Use Uppercase (capital) letters for the first letters of both parts of the name, lowercase for the others (e.g.: MyFile.BLK). do not assign two files the same name using uppercase and lowercase letters (e.g. MYFILE and myfile). The aspect of the Blocks are as folders (Macintosh, Atari) or sub-directories (MS-DOS, Windows, OS/2). Other sub-directories or folders can be found in a Bloc.
340 Reference Guide
It is also possible to prepare a Preload list consisting of Songs and MIDI files, provided that both files types are present on the source device (floppy or Hard disk); you can select files from different Blocks.
Preload: Song or MIDI File playback from disk
It is also possible to prepare a Preload list consisting of Songs and MIDI files, provided that both files types are present on the source device (floppy or Hard disk); you can select files from different Blocks.
Furthermore, if the Auto Preload option is enabled, Preload loads a Song together with all associated RAM-Sounds and RAM -Sounds to ensure the correct playback.
The Preload function is a background loading facility which allows you to playback all the Songs and/or MIDI Files contained in a floppy disk or Hard disk with a single command, without having to load all the data to memory beforehand.
This will, however, cancel the Preload operation.

THE PRELOAD FUNCTION
4 Preload
Note: if the disk or Hard disk contains more than one Block, only the songs contained in the first Block will be played while those of other Blocks are ignored.
3. Press STOP at any time during playback to stop the current song and return to the Song view page.
THE PRELOAD FUNCTION
The Preload function is a background loading facility which allows you to playback all the Songs and/or MIDI Files contained in a floppy disk or Hard disk with a single command, without having to load all the data to memory beforehand.

PLAYBACK ALL THE SONGS OR MIDI FILES ON DISK

If you have a SK760/880 Songs disk, or have purchased a MIDI File data disk, or your Hard disk contains Song files, you can playback all the files in a Block with a single command, without having to load them to memory beforehand. Preload plays back up to 16 Songs or MIDI files one after the other.
Note: if the disk or Hard disk contains more than one Block, only the songs contained in the first Block will be played while those of other Blocks are ignored.

Furthermore, if the Auto Preload option is enabled, Preload loads a Song together with all associated RAM-Sounds and RAM -Sounds to ensure the correct playback.
1. Insert the disk into the disk drive and press PRELOAD.
After short disk scanning period, the first Song on the disk starts to play. During playback, the background loading procedure for the second song begins (the message Preloading Song appears for an instant).
2. During playback, press PRELOAD to enter the Preload display.

3. Press STOP at any time during playback to stop the current song and return to the Song view page.
Preload: Song or MIDI File playback from disk
2. During playback, press PRELOAD to enter the Preload display.
1. Insert the disk into the disk drive and press PRELOAD.
If you have a SK760/880 Songs disk, or have purchased a MIDI File data disk, or your Hard disk contains Song files, you can playback all the files in a Block with a single command, without having to load them to memory beforehand. Preload plays back up to 16 Songs or MIDI files one after the other.
PLAYBACK ALL THE SONGS OR MIDI FILES ON DISK
This will, however, cancel the Preload operation.
Once you have entered the Preload display, you will have access to the available options using the corresponding Soft buttons F1F8.
Playback stops automatically when the last Song or MIDI File reaches the end.
Playback continues non-stop until all the Songs or MIDI Files on disk have been played. During playback, the Song view page is shown, where you can select a track and set it to key-play in order to play along with the Song. Use the << and >> buttons to advance or rewind the Song at will.
After short disk scanning period, the first Song on the disk starts to play. During playback, the background loading procedure for the second song begins (the message Preloading Song appears for an instant).
Preload 41

4 Preload
Playback continues non-stop until all the Songs or MIDI Files on disk have been played. During playback, the Song view page is shown, where you can select a track and set it to key-play in order to play along with the Song. Use the << and >> buttons to advance or rewind the Song at will. Playback stops automatically when the last Song or MIDI File reaches the end.

Once you have entered the Preload display, you will have access to the available options using the corresponding Soft buttons F1F8.
Preload 41
Create a Preload list

1. If the Preload window is not showing, press PRELOAD with a disk inserted in the drive, press PRELOAD again then press RESET LIST (F4). Reset List cancels all the Songs from the current list and stops playback instantly. The PRELOAD window shows the Songs or MIDI files disk directory on the left, and the destination directory on the right, represented by the Preload list. 2. If necessary select the source device using the Soft buttons F1 (Floppy disk) and F2 (Hard disk). 3. Select the type of file to include in the list using the soft buttons F5 (SONG) and F6 (SMF, Standard MIDI File). 4. Use the cursor buttons to select the Song or MIDI file to include in the list and press ENTER. The selected file is added to the first available space in the list and the destination frame moves one step forward. If the disk contains more than one Block, press ESCAPE to exit from the current directory, select another block and press ENTER to gain access. 5. Select other files and press ENTER each time to include them in the list.
Return the cursor to the right again and select an empty location for the next file on the list. Return the cursor to the left to select the next file and continue as before until your list is complete. You can fill the list in a single step using the Select All function (F7). 7. Press F8 (Play) to start the playback of the Songs in the list. During playback, the Song View page is shown. You can select a track and set it to key-play in order to play along with the Song. Use the << and >> buttons to advance or rewind the Song at will. Press STOP only if you want to stop playback, otherwise you will cancel the Preload operation.
IMPORTANT: If you are working from Floppy disk, do not extract the disk during the file insertion procedure; doing so will provoke the cancellation of the list.
6. If you want to change an inserted file, take the cursor over to the right of the display, select the file that needs replacing, return the cursor over to the left, select the file to insert and press ENTER.
Preload display showing a list of 8 Song files

42 Reference Guide
FLOPPY DISK (F1)
HARD DISK (F2)
SELECT ALL (F7)
AUTO PRELOAD (F3)
Starts the playback of the Songs contained in the list, after a short period. If the songs shown originate from Midi files, the preloading period takes more time due to the conversion process. During playback, you can advance or rewind the Song using the << and >> buttons. You can select one or more tracks, set them to key-play and play along with the Song. It is not possible, however, to select the Song-Performances. To stop the playback, press the STOP button. The instant you start the playback, all Songs currently residing in memory are cancelled, except the one currently playing. Preload exploits the Song memory locations 1 and 2 for playback and stand-by of the background loaded files. If the Auto Preload option is selected, a Song will load with its associated RAM Sounds and
If the Auto Preload option is not selected, the Songs associated RAM-Sounds and RAM Sounds will not be loaded.
RESET LIST (F4)
SONG (F5)
FLOPPY DISK (F1)
When this option is selected, the left part of the display shows SK760/880 or WX/SX format Songs only.
Selects the floppy disk. The list on the left corresponds to the disk directory showing the files contained in the disk (Block files or Song/SMF files). The files that appear depend on whether the SONG (F5) or SMF (F6) option is selected.
Cancels the current list and stops the playback instantly.
AUTO PRELOAD (F3)
Selects the Hard disk (if installed). The list on the left corresponds to the Hard disk directory showing the files contained in the disk (Block files or Song/SMF files). The files that appear depend on whether the SONG (F5) or SMF (F6) option is selected.
When this option is selected (negative highlight), Songs are loaded into memory together with all associated RAM-Sounds and RAM Sounds. If there is not sufficient memory in RAM to accept the associated Sounds, ROM Sounds will be used instead and the Song may playback incorrectly.
If the Auto Preload option is not selected, the Songs associated RAM-Sounds and RAM Sounds will not be loaded.
When this option is selected (negative highlight), Songs are loaded into memory together with all associated RAM-Sounds and RAM Sounds. If there is not sufficient memory in RAM to accept the associated Sounds, ROM Sounds will be used instead and the Song may playback incorrectly.
Selects the Hard disk (if installed). The list on the left corresponds to the Hard disk directory showing the files contained in the disk (Block files or Song/SMF files). The files that appear depend on whether the SONG (F5) or SMF (F6) option is selected.
Selects all the files shown in the left part of the display and inserts them directly into the list. The list can contain a maximum of 16 files. If the SMF option is selected, Select All inserts all MIDI files present in the current directory. The list will show the Song names without the .MID extension.
PLAY (F8)
SONG (F5)
Cancels the current list and stops the playback instantly.
Selects the floppy disk. The list on the left corresponds to the disk directory showing the files contained in the disk (Block files or Song/SMF files). The files that appear depend on whether the SONG (F5) or SMF (F6) option is selected.
When this option is selected, the left part of the display shows SK760/880 or WX/SX format Songs only.
RESET LIST (F4)
HARD DISK (F2)
The Preload functions
If the Auto Preload option is selected, a Song will load with its associated RAM Sounds and
Preload exploits the Song memory locations 1 and 2 for playback and stand-by of the background loaded files.
The instant you start the playback, all Songs currently residing in memory are cancelled, except the one currently playing.
To stop the playback, press the STOP button.
During playback, you can advance or rewind the Song using the << and >> buttons. You can select one or more tracks, set them to key-play and play along with the Song. It is not possible, however, to select the Song-Performances.
Starts the playback of the Songs contained in the list, after a short period. If the songs shown originate from Midi files, the preloading period takes more time due to the conversion process.
PLAY (F8)
If the SMF option is selected, Select All inserts all MIDI files present in the current directory. The list will show the Song names without the .MID extension.
Selects all the files shown in the left part of the display and inserts them directly into the list. The list can contain a maximum of 16 files.
SELECT ALL (F7)
When this option is selected, the left part of the display shows the MIDI files contained in the disk, identified by the extension .MID, together with any other sub-directories present (shown with the .<DIR> extension).
SMF (F6)
Preload 43

The Preload functions

SMF (F6)
When this option is selected, the left part of the display shows the MIDI files contained in the disk, identified by the extension .MID, together with any other sub-directories present (shown with the .<DIR> extension).
Preload 43
RAM -Sounds contained in the Block housing the Song. If there is not sufficient memory in RAM for the operation, the Song will play incorrectly using ROM-Sounds.

Hint: When the samples of a Song are loaded,
the Auto Preload utilizes the free Sample-RAM, then starts to substitute the samples of the Song in playback with the samples of the new Song. At a certain point, the Song in playback will start to play incorrectly. It is advisable, therefore, to avoid using an excessive amount of samples (not more than half the available Sample-RAM).

44 Reference Guide
Note: When you select a Performance, SK760/
Selection via MIDI
CC00 [48] - PC [0...7] CC00 [48] - PC [8...15] ... CC00 [48] - PC [56...63] Name of the selected Performance group
Performance 1...8
Selection/Help 51
Selection
Performance 57...64
SELECTING PERFORMANCES
Performance 9...16
Panel selection
Message...
selects...
Panel selection is preferable when playing live. If the STYLE LOCK button is off, selecting Performances from the Performance Groups also changes the Style, the Variation and Tempo.
SK760/880 must receive the relative selection messages on the Common Channel. Send Control Change 00 (value = 48) and Program Change messages in rapid succession to SK760/880.
2. Select a Performance with the corresponding Soft button.
880 sends CC00 [value 48]-PC messages in rapid succession on the Common Channel . The BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan messages of the tracks are sent on the normal MIDI channels.

1. Press one of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS buttons to open a Select Performance window.
5 Selection/Help
Note: When you select a Performance, SK760/ 880 sends CC00 [value 48]-PC messages in rapid succession on the Common Channel . The BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan messages of the tracks are sent on the normal MIDI channels.
2. Select a Performance with the corresponding Soft button.

Performance (selected with the corresponding Soft button)
Selection via MIDI
1. Press one of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS buttons to open a Select Performance window.
Panel selection is preferable when playing live. If the STYLE LOCK button is off, selecting Performances from the Performance Groups also changes the Style, the Variation and Tempo.
Message...
selects...
Panel selection
CC00 [48] - PC [8...15]
CC00 [48] - PC [0...7]
Performance 9...16
SELECTING PERFORMANCES
CC00 [48] - PC [56...63]
...
Performance 1...8
Performance 57...64
Performance (selected with the corresponding Soft button)
Selection/Help 51

5 Selection/Help
Name of the selected Performance group
Selection
SELECTING STYLES
Panel selection 1. Press one of the STYLE GROUPS buttons to open a Style Select window. 2. Use the Page scoll buttons ( ) to pass to the second bank of Rom Styles or to return to the first bank. 3. Select a Style with the corresponding Soft button.

Selecting Styles via MIDI SK760/880 must receive the relative selection messages on the Common Channel. The Common Channel is set in Edit MIDI To select ROM Styles, send Control Change 00 (value = 32) and a Program Change. To select USER Styles, send Control Change 00 (value = 44) and a Program Change.
Message.. CC00 [32] - PC [0...15] ... CC00 [32] - PC [112..127] US.TRAD - Style 113...128 CC00 [33] - PC [015]
selects... 8 BEAT - Style 1...16
Note: When you select a Style, SK760/880 sends CC00 [value 32, 33 or 44]-PC messages in rapid succession on the Common Channel . The BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan messages of the tracks are sent on the normal MIDI channels.

TRAD 1 - Style 129144
Recalling Styles by selecting the Performances If the LED of the STYLE LOCK button is OFF when you select a Performance, you also recall a Style, Variation and Tempo. If STYLE LOCK is ON, the current Style rests unchanged when you select a Performance. As well as track data (Bank Select, Program Change, Volume, Pan) the Programmable Performances memorize (a) the selection of a Style, (b) the selection of a Variation of the Style, (c) the Tempo. 1. Deactivate the STYLE LOCK button. 2. Press one of the PERFORMANCE buttons of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS to open a Select Performance window. 3. Select a Performance with the corresponding Soft button. The memorized Style and Variation will be recalled.
CC00 [33] - PC [4863] LATIN 2 - Style 177192 CC00 [44] - PC [0...7] CC00 [44] - PC [24...31] USER 1 - Style 1...8 ... USER 4 - Style 25...32
Name of the selected Style Group
Style (select with the corresponding Soft buttons)
52 Reference Guide
SELECTION VIA MIDI
Message... CC00 [36] - PC [0...7] CC00 [40] - PC [0...7]

STYLE P.
selects...
ROM Style-Perfs 1...8 User Style-Perfs 1...8
2. Select a Style-Performance with the corresponding Soft button.
To select a Style-Performance (ROM or User) via MIDI, the selection message must be sent to SK760/880 on the Common Channel. Send the Control Change 00 [Value 36 for ROM, value 40 for User] and a Program Change message in rapid succession.

1. In Style mode, press the STYLE.P button to open the Select Style-Performances window.
To select a ROM Style-Performance or a User Style-Performance, the Single Touch Play button should be on. If this button is not on, selecting a Style Performance sets S.T. PLAY to on automatically.
Selection/Help 53
Panel selection
SELECTING STYLE-PERFORMANCES
Note: If a Style-Performance is selected in record mode, the selection number specified is recorded in the Master Track.
Note: If a Style-Performance is selected in record mode, the selection number specified is recorded in the Master Track.
SELECTION VIA MIDI
Note: When you select a Style-Performance, SK760/880 sends CC00 [value 36 or 40]-PC messages in rapid succession on the Common Channel. The BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan messages of the tracks are sent on the normal MIDI channels.
To select a Style-Performance (ROM or User) via MIDI, the selection message must be sent to SK760/880 on the Common Channel. Send the Control Change 00 [Value 36 for ROM, value 40 for User] and a Program Change message in rapid succession.
2. Select a Style-Performance with the corresponding Soft button.

Style Performances (select with the corresponding Soft button)
CC00 [36] - PC [0...7]
Message...
Note: When you select a Style-Performance, SK760/880 sends CC00 [value 36 or 40]-PC messages in rapid succession on the Common Channel. The BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan messages of the tracks are sent on the normal MIDI channels.
selects...
ROM Style-Perfs 1...8
1. In Style mode, press the STYLE.P button to open the Select Style-Performances window.
CC00 [40] - PC [0...7]
User Style-Perfs 1...8
Style Performances (select with the corresponding Soft button)
Selection/Help 53

SELECTING STYLE-PERFORMANCES

Panel selection To select a ROM Style-Performance or a User Style-Performance, the Single Touch Play button should be on. If this button is not on, selecting a Style Performance sets S.T. PLAY to on automatically.
STYLE P.
SELECTING SOUNDS
Recall Sounds by selecting Performances or Styles Refer to the previous sections relating to the selection of Performances or Styles. While playing, Sounds are instantly recalled by selecting Performances or Styles. Program your Performances or Style-Performances accordingly before you play. Panel selection 1. Press one of the SOUND GROUPS buttons to open a Sound Select window. 2. Scroll through the Banks with the buttons. The Bank number corresponds to the Control Change 00 MIDI message (CC00/ BankSelect MSB). 3. Select a Sound with the corresponding Soft button.

Name of the selected Sound Group
Bank (select it with )
ProgramChange CC00/BankSelect MSB
Note: When you select a Sound, SK760/880 sends CC00-CC32-PC messages in rapid succession on the MIDI channel assigned to the track.

Selecting with the Numeric keypad It is possible to specify a Sound selection message on the numeric keypad (EDIT/NUMBERS section). This section can send a MIDI message consisting of Control Change 00 (CC00/ BankSelect MSB), Control Change 32 (CC32/ BankSelect LSB), ProgramChange (PC) to an external unit connected to the SK760/880 MIDI OUT. To select a SK760/880 Sound, it is sufficient to specify the message CC00-PC. The CC32 message can be ignored. The keypad insertion zone will close automatically after a few seconds of inactivity.
54 Reference Guide
When working with an external sequencer, messages must be entered in the order CC00CC32-PC. If it is intended to select only the SK760/880 Sounds, the PC32 part of the message can be ignored.

PC/ProgramChange
CC00/BankSelect MSB
Selection/Help 55
4.
Note: Sound selection messages are transmitted and received via MIDI in the order CC00-CC32-PC with the ProgramChange last. For practical purposes, the reverse order has been adopted for the panel selection procedure, given that the ProgramChange on its own is sufficient to select all the Sounds of the current Bank.
5.
3.
2.
1.
Keypad selection procedure
Select the track to which a Sound is to be assigned. Press KEY PAD (LED on) to activate the EDIT/NUMBERS section as a numeric keypad. An insertion zone opens in the display showing the number of the current sound assigned to the track. Specify the Program Change number of the Sound to select. If the Sound belongs to a different Bank, add a separating hyphen (symbol -) followed by the corresponding bank number (BankSelect MSB). In MIDI situations, if necessary, add another separating hyphen and a BankSelect MSB number (not for SK760/880 internal Sounds). Confirm the entry with KEY PAD or ENTER, or press ESCAPE to cancel the entry. The LED on the KEY PAD button goes off. Press STORE PERF followed by ENTER to memorize the modification to the current Performance.
When working with an external sequencer, messages must be entered in the order CC00CC32-PC. If it is intended to select only the SK760/880 Sounds, the PC32 part of the message can be ignored.
Note: Sound selection messages are transmitted and received via MIDI in the order CC00-CC32-PC with the ProgramChange last. For practical purposes, the reverse order has been adopted for the panel selection procedure, given that the ProgramChange on its own is sufficient to select all the Sounds of the current Bank.
CC00/BankSelect MSB PC/ProgramChange
PC/ProgramChange
CC00/BankSelect MSB
Insertion Zone
Selection/Help 55

Keypad selection procedure

1. Select the track to which a Sound is to be assigned. 2. Press KEY PAD (LED on) to activate the EDIT/NUMBERS section as a numeric keypad. An insertion zone opens in the display showing the number of the current sound assigned to the track. 3. Specify the Program Change number of the Sound to select. If the Sound belongs to a different Bank, add a separating hyphen (symbol -) followed by the corresponding bank number (BankSelect MSB). In MIDI situations, if necessary, add another separating hyphen and a BankSelect MSB number (not for SK760/880 internal Sounds). 4. Confirm the entry with KEY PAD or ENTER, or press ESCAPE to cancel the entry. The LED on the KEY PAD button goes off. 5. Press STORE PERF followed by ENTER to memorize the modification to the current Performance.

Insertion Zone
CC32/BankSelect LSB
CC00/BankSelect MSB PC/ProgramChange
CC32/BankSelect LSB
Selection via MIDI The Sound selection message must be received on the MIDI channel assigned to the track to which the Sound is assigned. To select a SK760/880 Sound, you must send a Control Change 00 (CC00/BankSelect MSB) and Program Change (PC) message. The relative numbers are also displayed in the main page (Multi mode) and the selection window that appears when you select a SOUND GROUPS button. The Sound table in the Appendix lists all the SK760/880 Sounds and corresponding MIDI selection messages.
56 Reference Guide
Message.. CC00 [55] - PC [0...15]
selects... Song 1...16
Selection/Help 57
Message..
SELECTION VIA MIDI
2. Select a Song with the corresponding Soft button.
1. Press the SONG button to open the Select Song window.
Selecting a Song sets SK760/880 to Song mode.
Panel selection
SELECTING SONGS
Note: When you select a Song, SK760/880 sends CC00 [value 55]-PC messages in rapid succession on the Common Channel . The BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan messages of the tracks are sent on the normal MIDI channels.
selects...
CC00 [55] - PC [0...15]
Song 1...16
Song (select with the corresponding Soft buttons)
Selection/Help 57

SELECTING SONGS

Panel selection Selecting a Song sets SK760/880 to Song mode. 1. Press the SONG button to open the Select Song window. 2. Select a Song with the corresponding Soft button.

Note: When you select a Song, SK760/880 sends CC00 [value 55]-PC messages in rapid succession on the Common Channel . The BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan messages of the tracks are sent on the normal MIDI channels.

Song (select with the corresponding Soft buttons)
SELECTION VIA MIDI
SELECTING SONG-PERFORMANCES
Panel selection To select a Song Performance, SK760/880 must be set to Song mode.
F1
1. Press the SONG P. button with the F4 Soft button to open the Song-Performance selection window. 2. Select a Song-Performance with the corresponding Soft button.

F2 F3 F4
F5
F6 F7
F8
Note: When you select a Song-Performance, SK760/880 sends CC00 [value 64]-PC messages in rapid succession on the Common Channel.. The BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan messages of the tracks are sent on the normal MIDI channels.

Note: If PLAY or STOP are pressed, the SongPerformance recorded in the Song is recalled (the initial one or the most recent one). All temporary modifications will, therefore, be cancelled.

Note: If a Song-Performance is selected in record mode, the selection number specified is recorded in the Master Track.

SELECTION VIA MIDI

To select a Song-Performance via MIDI, the selection message must be sent to SK760/880 on the Common Channel. Send the Control Change 00 [Value 64] and a Program Change message in rapid succession.
Message... CC00 [64] - PC [0...7] selects... Song-Perfs 1...8 Song-Performance (select with the corresponding Soft buttons
58 Reference Guide
Use Display Hold when selecting Sounds, Styles, Programmable Performances and Songs.
Use ESCAPE to close the current selection window without deactivating D. HOLD.
D. HOLD remains active (LED on) until the button is pressed again.
The LED of the button turns on to indicate the activation of the function.
You can select items from a selection display without closing the selection window by pressing the D. HOLD button.
Display Hold
Selection/Help 59
CONTRAST
UNDO
HELP
D. HOLD
KEY PAD
EFFECTS OFF remains active (LED on) until the button is pressed again.
The LED of the button turns on to indicate the activation of the function. When the LED is on, the effects are bypassed and the current Performance, Style or Song plays dry (i.e. without effects).
You can choose to select and play your Performances, Styles and Songs without the programmed effects by activating the EFFECTS OFF button.
Effects Off
EFFECTS BYPASS
Selection/Help 59

Display Hold
Effects Off
You can choose to select and play your Performances, Styles and Songs without the programmed effects by activating the EFFECTS OFF button. The LED of the button turns on to indicate the activation of the function. When the LED is on, the effects are bypassed and the current Performance, Style or Song plays dry (i.e. without effects).
EFFECTS BYPASS
You can select items from a selection display without closing the selection window by pressing the D. HOLD button. The LED of the button turns on to indicate the activation of the function.
CONTRAST UNDO HELP D. HOLD KEY PAD
D. HOLD remains active (LED on) until the button is pressed again. Use ESCAPE to close the current selection window without deactivating D. HOLD. Use Display Hold when selecting Sounds, Styles, Programmable Performances and Songs. EFFECTS OFF remains active (LED on) until the button is pressed again.
Help
SK760/880 incorporates an on-line-help system which provides brief information on the basic functions of the instrument. This feature is particularly helpful if you get stuck and do not have access to the owners manual at the time. Also incorporated is a PANIC function which helps to unlock the instrument in MIDI situations. Generally, pressing HELP opens a page showing information regarding the currently set mode. Therefore, if you are in Style/Performance mode, press HELP to get information concerning the default situation (main page). Similarly, if you are currently working in one of the Edit environments, (Edit Effects, for example), press HELP to get information on the Effects section. Some Help pages consist of a General information page and one or more Detail pages which provide detailed information regarding the current topic.
HOW TO USE HELP

1. Press the HELP button when you want general information regarding the current mode. A GENERAL page will open showing information regarding the current operating mode. 2. If available, press DETAILS (F7/F8) to open a sub-page with specific details concerning the current help topic. Depending on the current mode, a NEXT page (F3/F4) may or not be available. Once you have entered a NEXT page, the PREVIOUS option (F1/F2) will be available. Options not available will be shown with broken lines. 3. To return to a GENERAL page, press F5/F6. 4. To pass to another HELP topic, regardless of the current operating mode, press NEXT (F3/ F4) or PREVIOUS (F1/F2). 5. Press ESCAPE to close the current HELP page.
Help - General Default - main page information

Help - EDIT Midi - Details information
510 Reference Guide
ABOUT SONGS
ABOUT STANDARD MIDI FILES
ABOUT SONGS
6 Songs, MIDI files & Song recording
A Standard MIDI File is a storage format created to maintain data compatibility among different devices complying with the Standard MIDI File format. This format allows Songs to be exchanged between different instruments and computers. If you save your recorded Songs as MIDI files on an MS-DOS disk, you can be certain that all the most recent generation of instruments and sequencers/computers will be able to load and read your SK760/880 Songs.
ABOUT STANDARD MIDI FILES
A Song is a multitrack recording of several instrumental parts, each corresponding to a track. SK760/880 can load Songs from disk in its own format (Song), in previous compatible formats (WK, SK, PS, WX, SX), in standard MIDI file format 0 or 1 and in Tune1000 format. SK760/880 Songs are free, that is, tracks can be recorded starting from any point, without start or end segment limitations, which characterize most sequencers. Your recorded Songs can also be saved as MIDI Files. Tracks contain MIDI events, that is, notes and control data. Control data can include PitchBend and Aftertouch messages, ProgramChange and BankSelect messages for sound changes, ControlChange messages to control the effects sends, Sustain pedal and other control parameters. MIDI events recorded on tracks are not the internal Wave sounds, but messages which activate the SK760/880 internal sound generator or an expander controlled by SK760/880. A Song is a MIDI event list a list for each track. General control messages are recorded in the Master Track. These messages relate to the instrument in general, such as effects change or Performance selections.
A Song is a multitrack recording of several instrumental parts, each corresponding to a track. SK760/880 can load Songs from disk in its own format (Song), in previous compatible formats (WK, SK, PS, WX, SX), in standard MIDI file format 0 or 1 and in Tune1000 format. SK760/880 Songs are free, that is, tracks can be recorded starting from any point, without start or end segment limitations, which characterize most sequencers. Your recorded Songs can also be saved as MIDI Files. Tracks contain MIDI events, that is, notes and control data. Control data can include PitchBend and Aftertouch messages, ProgramChange and BankSelect messages for sound changes, ControlChange messages to control the effects sends, Sustain pedal and other control parameters. MIDI events recorded on tracks are not the internal Wave sounds, but messages which activate the SK760/880 internal sound generator or an expander controlled by SK760/880. A Song is a MIDI event list a list for each track. General control messages are recorded in the Master Track. These messages relate to the instrument in general, such as effects change or Performance selections.
A Standard MIDI File is a storage format created to maintain data compatibility among different devices complying with the Standard MIDI File format. This format allows Songs to be exchanged between different instruments and computers. If you save your recorded Songs as MIDI files on an MS-DOS disk, you can be certain that all the most recent generation of instruments and sequencers/computers will be able to load and read your SK760/880 Songs.
GMX format GMX refers to the General MIDI eXtended format, specifically created by Generalmusic, which renders the first three sound banks of the SK760/ 880 with previous series instruments (WK, SK, PS) completely compatible. To program SK760/880 Songs that are perfectly compatible with all WK, SK, PS Series instruments, use the Sounds of the first three Sound banks and record the Songs using 16 tracks only (MIDI channels A1A16).
General MIDI To facilitate compatibility between different makes of instruments, MIDI files should be in General MIDI standard, a common platform for sounds and the way they are selected. General MIDI stipulates common standards regarding the listing of sounds, Program Change numbers for sound selection, the percussive sound configuration in the Drumkits, the assignment of MIDI channel 10 to the Drumkits, a minimum polyphony (24) and a maximum number of tracks (16). In SK760/880, Sound Banks 1 and Drumkit Bank 2 are fully GM compatible. SK760/880 recognizes GM compatible MIDI Files, thanks to a messages contained in the MIDI File (General MIDI ON flag). If this message is not detected, sounds that differ to a Drumkit may be assigned to MIDI channel 10. To ensure correct loading of GM compatible MIDI files that do not contain the General MIDI ON flag, be sure that the General MIDI parameter is set to ON in the General Set parameter of Edit MIDI before loading. SK760/880 can save GM compatible MIDI Files when the General MIDI parameter is set to ON. MIDI Files loaded into the SK760/880 memory are converted to SK760/880 Songs.
Songs 61

6 Songs, MIDI files & Song recording

General MIDI To facilitate compatibility between different makes of instruments, MIDI files should be in General MIDI standard, a common platform for sounds and the way they are selected. General MIDI stipulates common standards regarding the listing of sounds, Program Change numbers for sound selection, the percussive sound configuration in the Drumkits, the assignment of MIDI channel 10 to the Drumkits, a minimum polyphony (24) and a maximum number of tracks (16). In SK760/880, Sound Banks 1 and Drumkit Bank 2 are fully GM compatible. SK760/880 recognizes GM compatible MIDI Files, thanks to a messages contained in the MIDI File (General MIDI ON flag). If this message is not detected, sounds that differ to a Drumkit may be assigned to MIDI channel 10. To ensure correct loading of GM compatible MIDI files that do not contain the General MIDI ON flag, be sure that the General MIDI parameter is set to ON in the General Set parameter of Edit MIDI before loading. SK760/880 can save GM compatible MIDI Files when the General MIDI parameter is set to ON. MIDI Files loaded into the SK760/880 memory are converted to SK760/880 Songs. GMX format GMX refers to the General MIDI eXtended format, specifically created by Generalmusic, which renders the first three sound banks of the SK760/ 880 with previous series instruments (WK, SK, PS) completely compatible. To program SK760/880 Songs that are perfectly compatible with all WK, SK, PS Series instruments, use the Sounds of the first three Sound banks and record the Songs using 16 tracks only (MIDI channels A1A16).

Songs 61
SONG-PERFORMANCES
Normally, Sound change messages (ProgramChange and BankSelect) are inserted in the single track. Effects change messages are inserted in the Master Track. Using the Song-Performance is an alternative and rapid method of changing Sounds and Effects. Song-Performances instantly reset the instrument, therefore, they are very useful during a real time Song recording. Generally, when programming a Song from an external computer, it is convenient to insert all the messages in the tracks, while during a real time Song recording, it is better to program several Song-Performances and select them during the recording. The selection message is recorded in the Master Track as a ProgramChange. Each Song contains up to 8 Performances, which are loaded and memorized with the corresponding Song. When a MIDI file is saved, Performances are converted in track data (ProgramChange, Pan, Volume, effects send). To select Song Performances, refer to the Selection chapter of the Reference Gide.
Song Playback/Jukebox
SEQUENCER
SCORE
SONG
STOP
PLAY
Song playback control buttons
PLAYBACK CONTROL BUTTONS

The buttons which control the playback of Songs in memory are in the SEQUENCER section. PLAY This button starts the Song playback (or recording). During the playback, the LED on the PLAY button is on. The location (LOC) in the display shows the current position of the Song. If the Song is not playing, pressing PLAY starts the Song from the current position. <</>> The << and >> buttons rewind or advance one measure (bar) at a time. If you hold these buttons pressed, the Song rewinds or advances at high speed. These buttons are active either in Song play or stop status. During playback, the DIAL changes the Songs playing speed (tempo). STOP This button stops the Song playback (or recording). When the Song has been stopped at a position that differs to the initial Song start position, the LED on the STOP button flashes. When the Song is not playing and at its initial starting position, the LED on the STOP button remains on.
PROGRAMMING SONG-PERFORMANCES
The method used to program Song-Performances is identical to that used for the Performances of the Performance Groups (Real). Refer to the Store Performance procedure discussed on page 2.38 in the Quick Guide. A Song has a maximum of 32 tracks.

Note: After having programmed or modified a
Song-Performance, press STORE PERFORMANCE to save it to RAM. The selection of another or the same Performance or pressing STOP and PLAY, will erase the modifications.

62 Reference Guide
The main page of Song mode (Play View) contains position pointers and performance control parameters. SONG VIEW/PLAY VIEW
Note: The starting tempo can be changed by modifying the Master Track in Edit Song, or by using the DIAL in Play View. The selected value remains in memory.

Locator (Song position pointer) This section shows the current Song position expressed in measures and beats. When the Song is not playing, the Locator can be modified in the Play View page in order to select a starting point for the playback. It can be also modified with the [<<] and [>>] buttons regardless of the status of the sequencer (playing or off). Locator (programmable) Repeats the same information of the locator shown in the status bar, but also contains the sequencer resolution (or tick). When the sequencer is off, the three parts can be individually modified (if selected) by rotating the DIAL. Play/Rec mode You can opt to see the Song in Play View mode in order to modify the playing parameters, or in Sound View mode in order to see the sounds assigned to the tracks of the current Song-Performance. You can pass from one mode to another by pressing the corresponding Soft button (F5 or F6).
Sound View page

There are three Play or Record options to choose from: Linear: the Song starts at the point indicated by the locator and stops at the natural Song end.

Play View page
SONG VIEW/PLAY VIEW
The main page of Song mode (Play View) contains position pointers and performance control parameters.
Sound View page
You can opt to see the Song in Play View mode in order to modify the playing parameters, or in Sound View mode in order to see the sounds assigned to the tracks of the current Song-Performance. You can pass from one mode to another by pressing the corresponding Soft button (F5 or F6). Locator (programmable)
The [i] or [e] symbols, shown after the tempo value, are an indication of the status of the synchronizing MIDI clock: [i] = internal (SK760/SK880) or [e] = external (external sequencer connected to the SK760/SK880 MIDI IN). The synchronization is programmed in Edit MIDI, General settings page.

Play View page
Play view parameters
There are three Play or Record options to choose from:
Play/Rec mode
When the sequencer is off, the three parts can be individually modified (if selected) by rotating the DIAL.
Repeats the same information of the locator shown in the status bar, but also contains the sequencer resolution (or tick).
This section shows the current Song position expressed in measures and beats. When the Song is not playing, the Locator can be modified in the Play View page in order to select a starting point for the playback. It can be also modified with the [<<] and [>>] buttons regardless of the status of the sequencer (playing or off).
Locator (Song position pointer)
The [i] or [e] symbols, shown after the tempo value, are an indication of the status of the synchronizing MIDI clock: [i] = internal (SK760/SK880) or [e] = external (external sequencer connected to the SK760/SK880 MIDI IN). The synchronization is programmed in Edit MIDI, General settings page.
Metronomic Tempo. The value represents the playing speed (beats per second) at the current song position. During the playback, the Tempo can be modified with the DIAL.
Tempo
Linear: the Song starts at the point indicated by the locator and stops at the natural Song end.
Note: The starting tempo can be changed by modifying the Master Track in Edit Song, or by using the DIAL in Play View. The selected value remains in memory.
Songs 63

Play view parameters
Tempo Metronomic Tempo. The value represents the playing speed (beats per second) at the current song position. During the playback, the Tempo can be modified with the DIAL.
Songs 63
Forced stop: the Song starts at the point indicated by the locator and stops at the specified End. Loop: the Song starts at the point indicated by the locator, stops at the End, then repeats from the Starting point. The loop repeats continuously until stopped with the Stop button.
Play view Soft buttons

JUKEBOX... (F1) Recalls the Jukebox function (explained afterwards). OPTION... (F2) Metronome options. Countdown - activates a one measure lead into the recording of a sequence during which events cannot be captured. Options: On, Off. Metr. volume - Sets the metronome volume. Options: Off, 10...127. SOUND VIEW (F5) Recalls the Sound View page, where you can see and change the sounds of the current Performance. PLAY VIEW (F6) Recalls the Record View page, where you can control the record/playback parameters. ERASE... (F7) Track or Song erase parameter. Track- Cancels the selected track. Song - Cancels all tracks (all Song) leaving an empty Song, ready to start another recording.. The Song-Performances are not cancelled. METRONOME (F8) Activates/deactivates the metronome.
Start Determines the start measure and can be modified only if the Play mode is set to Loop. If Loop is selected, this parameter indicates the starting point of the loop. Modify this parameter when it is in a selected state, or when the Song has already been recorded, by rotating the DIAL. End Determines the end measure and can be modified only if the Play mode is set to Forced stop or Loop. If Loop is selected, this parameter indicates the point at which the sequence ends before looping back to the Start locator. If Forced stop is selected, it indicates the automatic Stop point. This parameter can be modified when it is in a selected state by rotating the DIAL. Time Signature (programmable with an empty Song) This parameter can only be modified before recording the Song. Start Tempo (programmable when the Song is off) Determines the starting tempo of a Song. This parameter can be modified when the Song is off. The value of the setting is recorded in the Master Track, as the Start Parameter. Song memory (not programmable) Shows the Song dimensions expressed in Kilobytes. Each Song is limited to 400 kb of memory, independent of the memory remaining in the System RAM.

64 Reference Guide
Removes all the names from the Jukebox list. All Song (F7)
Execute (F8)
To stop the playback of Jukebox press STOP.
All Song (F7)
Starts the playback of the Jukebox. Once pressed, this button appears in the Play View page of the Song.
Execute (F8)
Includes all the Songs contained in memory to the Jukebox list. An existing list will be cancelled and substituted with the new.
To stop the playback of Jukebox press STOP.
Starts the playback of the Jukebox. Once pressed, this button appears in the Play View page of the Song.
Includes all the Songs contained in memory to the Jukebox list. An existing list will be cancelled and substituted with the new.
Removes all the names from the Jukebox list.
Reset list (F6)
Inserts the Song selected in the left part of the display into the Jukebox list on the right, moving the names which follow afterwards one step forward. This command can be used instead of ENTER to insert a Song without cancelling another at the same location.
Insert (F5)
Removes a selected Song from the Jukebox list.
Delete (F4)
Jukebox Soft buttons
Songs 65

Jukebox Soft buttons

Delete (F4) Removes a selected Song from the Jukebox list. Insert (F5) Inserts the Song selected in the left part of the display into the Jukebox list on the right, moving the names which follow afterwards one step forward. This command can be used instead of ENTER to insert a Song without cancelling another at the same location. Reset list (F6)
Songs 65
Recording a Song
SK760/880 offers two principal Song recording methods: Quick Rec and Record. Quick Rec recording The Quick Rec method exploits existing Styles in order to record your keyboard tracks with automatic accompaniments. This method is a quick and easy way of recording which does not involve the more advanced options common to the more traditional Song Record method explained afterwards. The Quick Rec method is an excellent way of recording backing tracks for vocalists. Record method The more traditional Record method allows you to record one track at a time and does not exploit existing structures. For example, to record a Drum track, you must build the drum accompaniment note for note using the individual percussive instruments of a Drumkit assigned to one of the tracks. 3. Select a Style and set the accompaniment controls (MIXER LOCK, TEMPO LOCK, ARRANGE ON/OFF, ARRANGE MEMORY, LOWER MEMORY, ARRANGE MODE OPTIONS). 4. Program the Performance as required and save the changes with STORE PERFORMANCE. 5. If necessary, activate KEY START, INTRO, FILL or ENDING. 6. Press START/STOP to start the recording. The PLAY button activates automatically. 7. Play the keyboard sounds with the automatic accompaniment, using the Fills and Intro at will. 8. Conclude your song (use the Ending). 9. Press STOP. The LED on the RECORD button goes off. At this point it is possible to modify the song recording in Edit Song, or to record other tracks using the normal Record method described on the next page.
THE QUICK REC METHOD

(N.B. See also page 2.50). 1. Press SONG to open the Songs dialog window and select a free location (User). 2. Select the QuickRec option from the New Song dialog window by pressing the soft button F2. The RECORD LED lights up and the Quick Record page activates showing a negative highlight page. A new Song and Song Performance is created based on the starting Performance (if modifications were previously applied, entering record mode saves the modifications to the new Song-Performance).
tracks QuickRecord page
menu
66 Reference Guide
1. Press SONG. In the Select Song dialog window and select an empty location (User see display example below). 2. In the New Song dialog window, select the Record option.
3. The LED of the RECORD (ST/SONG) button lights up and the display shows the Record View page for Song mode in negative highlight. 4. Program the recording options. Time Signature to modify the time signature (metronome). Press F1 (Rec Mode) to open the Rec Mode dialog window, select the mode required and press ENTER to confirm.
Song name
5. Select and program the initial Song parameters: Time Signature to modify the time signature (metronome). 4. Program the recording options. Tempo to modify the playing speed.
free locations
Select Song window
3. The LED of the RECORD (ST/SONG) button lights up and the display shows the Record View page for Song mode in negative highlight.
Song name
2. In the New Song dialog window, select the Record option.
1. Press SONG. In the Select Song dialog window and select an empty location (User see display example below).
tracks
Song Mode - Record View display (record/play parameters display)

Recording a Song 67
PREPARATION
The Record method
Press F1 (Rec Mode) to open the Rec Mode dialog window, select the mode required and press ENTER to confirm.
5. Select and program the initial Song parameters:
tracks
PREPARATION
Press F2 (Option) to open the Option dialog window where you can program the metronome and countdown options. Press ENTER to confirm the settings. Press F3 (Controls rec...) to activate or deactivate the recording of the Tempo, Pedal Volume, Effect Change events. Press ENTER to confirm the settings.
free locations
Select Song window
Song Mode - Record View display (record/play parameters display)
Tempo to modify the playing speed.
Press F3 (Controls rec...) to activate or deactivate the recording of the Tempo, Pedal Volume, Effect Change events. Press ENTER to confirm the settings.
Press F2 (Option) to open the Option dialog window where you can program the metronome and countdown options. Press ENTER to confirm the settings.
Song-Performance name
Recording a Song 67

The Record method
Tempo
locator (measure counter)
menu
Song-Performance name
Tempo
locator (measure counter)
menu
6. Select the Quantize parameter to modify the prequantization (auto-correction of timing errors) during the recording phase. 7. If necessary, select Play/ Rec Mode to alter the Song Play/Rec mode: The Linear option causes the Song to play or be recorded once only, from the beginning to the point at which you press STOP. The Forced Stop option causes the song to play or be recorded from the specified start locator to the end locator. The Loop option allows you to play or record in a cyclic manner from the Start point to the End point. 8. If necessary, modify the Start and End locators. These parameters can be modified only if the Song contains recorded data (it will not be possible to specify the measures if no recorded events exist). The Start locator can be modified only when the Play/Rec mode is set to Loop. The End locator can be modified only if the Play/Rec mode is set to Forced Stop or Loop.
9. Select the track(s) to record and set it (them) for recording. Only tracks marked by the record icon will capture data and be heard:
To place all the tracks in record, press F4 (Select all tracks). All the tracks will be activated for recording and the parameter changes to Deselect all tracks. 10. To change sounds, select the Sound View option by pressing F5. After assigning your Sounds, save the Performance with STORE PERFORMANCE. Press F6 (Rec View) to return to the Rec View page. 11. Activate the metronome with F8 (Metronome).
Song Mode - Sound View display (Sounds display)

68 Reference Guide
Note: To add notes to existing ones in a track, select the Overdub option. To substitute existing notes in a recorded track with new ones, select the Replace option.

6. Repeat the recording procedures for other tracks. 1. If, after recording a track, you wish to return to the previous situation, press UNDO.
UNDO

3. When you have finished, stop the recording with STOP.
2. Start to play after the countdown. Events will be recorded in the track or tracks active for recording.
1. Press PLAY to start the recording. If Countdown is ON wait for the countdown to finish before playing (events are not recorded during the countdown phase).
Recording a Song 69
RECORDING
Note: Pressing STOP twice rewinds the Song back to the beginning.
7. Press RECORD to escape Record mode. The LED of the RECORD button goes off and the display returns to normal.

4. To add additional events to the same tracks, press STOP again to take the song pointer to the starting point and repeat points 1 - 3.
5. If you are satisfied with the recording, confirm the track or tracks by pressing the corresponding Soft buttons. The recording will be confirmed and the tracks set to seq-play.

5. If you are satisfied with the recording, confirm the track or tracks by pressing the corresponding Soft buttons. The recording will be confirmed and the tracks set to seq-play.
4. To add additional events to the same tracks, press STOP again to take the song pointer to the starting point and repeat points 1 - 3.

6. Repeat the recording procedures for other tracks.
Note: To add notes to existing ones in a track, select the Overdub option. To substitute existing notes in a recorded track with new ones, select the Replace option.
2. Press ENTER to cancel the last performed operation, or ESCAPE to cancel the request and retain the last operation.
Note: Pressing STOP twice rewinds the Song back to the beginning.

7. Press RECORD to escape Record mode. The LED of the RECORD button goes off and the display returns to normal.
For example, after adding new events to an existing drum pattern, you might want to return to the original pattern and just cancel the new events. A quick an easy way is to use UNDO. Just press UNDO and confirm the request with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
If, during the recording phase, you want to cancel the last performed recording task, use UNDO to cancel the last performed task. The UNDO button is located to the right of the display, just after the Contrast knob.
UNDO
You are prompted with a request to confirm the operation.
Recording a Song 69

RECORDING

UNDO If, during the recording phase, you want to cancel the last performed recording task, use UNDO to cancel the last performed task. The UNDO button is located to the right of the display, just after the Contrast knob. For example, after adding new events to an existing drum pattern, you might want to return to the original pattern and just cancel the new events. A quick an easy way is to use UNDO. Just press UNDO and confirm the request with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE. 1. If, after recording a track, you wish to return to the previous situation, press UNDO.
UNDO
1. Press PLAY to start the recording. If Countdown is ON wait for the countdown to finish before playing (events are not recorded during the countdown phase). 2. Start to play after the countdown. Events will be recorded in the track or tracks active for recording. 3. When you have finished, stop the recording with STOP.

You are prompted with a request to confirm the operation.

2. Press ENTER to cancel the last performed operation, or ESCAPE to cancel the request and retain the last operation.

The Record View page in detail

Mode... (F1) Opens the Record Mode dialog window where you can select various recording options. Replace - The new notes substitute old notes already present in the tracks being recorded. Overdubb - New notes are merged with those already present in the tracks being recorded. Punch In/Out - A means of inserting a correction without repeating a recording. Punch recording is activated by pressing an appropriately programmed pedal (in Controllers/ Pads of Edit Performance). Activate the recording with PLAY. When the song reaches a position just before the point at which the correction must be inserted, press the pedal. At this point, the recording proceeds in replace mode. When the correction is complete, release the pedal to stop the replace recording. Option... (F2) Metronome options. Countdown - A lead into the recording during which time no events can be captured.. Settings: On, Off. Metronome vol. - Volume setting of the metronome tick. Settings Off, 10...127. Controls rec... (F3) Recording options for Tempo, Master Volume, effects changes. These events are captured in the Master Track. Tempo - To record the Tempo variations. Settings: On, Off. P.Volume. - To record the general Volume of

the instrument using the Volume pedal . These events are recorded as CC07 (see Appendix). Settings: On, Off. Effect - To record the changes of the effects assigned to the Performance and respective effect volume levels. These events are captured as CC16, CC17, CC48, CC49 (see Appendix). Settings: On, Off. Select all tracks (F4)
Select all tracks (F4)
Once pressed, the option changes to Deselect
all tracks.
Activates all the tracks for recording. Deselect all tracks resets all the tracks in key-play or seq-play status. Sound View (F5) Recalls the Sound View page in which it is possible to see and change the sounds assigned to the Performance. Rec View (F6) Recalls the Record View page in which it is possible to control the record/play parameters. Erase... (F7) Cancellation of the track or Song. Track - Cancels the selected track. Song - Cancels all the tracks (entire Song) and leaves an empty Song, ready to capture recorded events. The Song Performance remains intact. Metronome (F8) Activates/deactivates the metronome.
610 Reference Guide
measure (bar)
beat
resolution

PLAY/REC MODE
Note: The loop requires an additional memory buffer. When this mode is selected, the memory progress bar shows an increased amount of used memory.

Locator. Indicates the current position of the Song, expressed in measures, beats and resolution (tick).
Recording a Song 611
LOC
End point marker. If Loop is active (Play/Rec Mode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point at which the repeating song ends before looping back to the Start marker. If the Play/Rec Mode=Forced Stop, this parameter indicates the automatic Stop point.
START
Starting indicator. If Loop is active (Play/Rec Mode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point at which the Song starts to repeat. The parameter can be modified with the DIAL.
measure (bar)
beat
resolution
TIME SIGNATURE
PLAY/REC MODE
The measure can be modified with the DIAL. It is not possible to select the next measure after the Song end point. For example, if the recorded Song terminates at measure 10, the Locator cannot be given a value greater than 10 -1 -1.
Recording and playback options for the Song. The options are: Linear - A linear recording or playback of the Song, starting from the current locator to the Song end. In record mode, new events are recorded as the recording proceeds. Forced stop - The Song is played back or recorded from the current Locator to a specified End locator. With Forced Stop active, the Loc and End indicators determine the start and end point of the recording. Loop - Song playback or recording repeats continuously. When the Song reaches the end, it loops back to the beginning and starts again and continues to repeat until stopped with STOP.
Recording and playback options for the Song. The options are: Linear - A linear recording or playback of the Song, starting from the current locator to the Song end. In record mode, new events are recorded as the recording proceeds. Forced stop - The Song is played back or recorded from the current Locator to a specified End locator. With Forced Stop active, the Loc and End indicators determine the start and end point of the recording. Loop - Song playback or recording repeats continuously. When the Song reaches the end, it loops back to the beginning and starts again and continues to repeat until stopped with STOP.
Note: The loop requires an additional memory buffer. When this mode is selected, the memory progress bar shows an increased amount of used memory.
The measure can be modified with the DIAL. It is not possible to select the next measure after the Song end point. For example, if the recorded Song terminates at measure 10, the Locator cannot be given a value greater than 10 -1 -1.

Starting indicator. If Loop is active (Play/Rec Mode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point at which the Song starts to repeat. The parameter can be modified with the DIAL.
The parameter can be modified with the DIAL.

TIME SIGNATURE

Metro. This parameter can be modified only before starting a recording. If the Song contains recorded events, the parameter cannot be modified.
TEMPO
Initial playing/recording speed. The parameter can be modified with the DIAL in the Play View or Record View page, or in the Master Track. Tempo changes can be carried out during the recording by using the DIAL. The events are captured in the Master Track, provided that the appropriate option is active (Controls rec, dialog window F3). The Master Track always contains the initial Tempo of the Song. The value can be modified but not cancelled.
START
The Master Track always contains the initial Tempo of the Song. The value can be modified but not cancelled.
Tempo changes can be carried out during the recording by using the DIAL. The events are captured in the Master Track, provided that the appropriate option is active (Controls rec, dialog window F3).
Initial playing/recording speed. The parameter can be modified with the DIAL in the Play View or Record View page, or in the Master Track.
TEMPO
Metro. This parameter can be modified only before starting a recording. If the Song contains recorded events, the parameter cannot be modified.
The parameter can be modified with the DIAL.
END
Recording a Song 611

LOC

END
End point marker. If Loop is active (Play/Rec Mode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point at which the repeating song ends before looping back to the Start marker. If the Play/Rec Mode=Forced Stop, this parameter indicates the automatic Stop point.
Locator. Indicates the current position of the Song, expressed in measures, beats and resolution (tick).
QUANTIZE
An auto-corrector of timing errors during the recording phase. The selection values are normal, triplets or swing.
Value 1/4 1/8 1/12 1/16 1/24 1/32 1/48 1/64 1/96 free 1/8 B...F* 1/16 B...F* free triplet (1/64) (1/64 triplet) no quantization . . (swing) (swing) triplet triplet Quantization
EDITING YOUR SONGS

The Edit Song functions allow you to modify the recorded song, by copying or moving entire parts of a song, by correcting timing errors, by inserting events in event edit environments (Microscope and Master Track). For detailed information, refer to the Edit Song chapter 7.

If you have loaded disk-based Songs or recorded Songs and used up all the memory dedicated to the storage of Songs, a quick and easy way of clearing Song memory and making room for other Songs is to use the Restore Songs operation. Naturally, you must remember to save the Songs that you dont want to lose to disk before proceeding with the restore procedure. 1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain access to the Edit General environment. 2. Press F6 (Restore Songs) to cancel all the Songs (and relative Song-Performances) in RAM. You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice. 3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel. With ENTER, the Songs are cancelled from memory. With ESCAPE, the song data are retained.

no quantization
* B F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.
MEMORY PROGRESS BAR

A bar graph which monitors the amount of memory being used up by the song as it is being recorded. In Play mode, the parameter changes to SONG MEMORY, expressed as a numerical value and is independent of the total amount of memory remaining in RAM. Each Song is limited to 400 kb.
If the RAM already contains a large amount of data, a dialog window may appear showing the message Memory full!, which indicates that the recording cannot proceed further. The recording is instantly interrupted. You can increase the amount of space in RAM by deactivating the Undo function.

612 Reference Guide
After recording a Song using either the Record method or the QuickRec method, it can be edited by entering Edit Song.
THE EDIT PROCEDURE

1. In Song mode, press ST./SONG to enter Edit Song. The main menu appears. 2. Select the editor that you wish to edit using the DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also possible to enter an editor by specifying the relative number on the numeric keypad. 3. Press ENTER to gain access to the editor. 4. Select the desired option with the soft buttons. 5. Select the parameters with the directional arrows. Modify the parameter with the DIAL or the numeric keypad. 6. Confirm the operation with ENTER. 7. Pass to another editor with the buttons . Otherwise, return to the main menu with ESCAPE and select another editor.
7
HOW TO ENTER EDIT SONG

Select the Song that requires editing. The name of the Song will appear in the title bar of the display.
Song name
ST. / SONG
Page name
Editors
Locator
Edit Song: Main menu
Press the ST./SONG button in the EDIT section to enter Edit Song.
Entering this section the first time opens the main menu (page 00/10). On all successive occasions, the last page selected is recalled.
Entering this section the first time opens the main menu (page 00/10). On all successive occasions, the last page selected is recalled.
ESCAPE EDIT SONG
To escape from Edit Song press ESCAPE (once or twice, depending on the currently selected level). To escape without closing the edit page, press the ST./SONG button. To pass to another edit environment, press the corresponding button in the EDIT section.
Song name
The name of the Song will appear in the title bar of the display.
Select the Song that requires editing.
HOW TO ENTER EDIT SONG
After recording a Song using either the Record method or the QuickRec method, it can be edited by entering Edit Song.
7 Edit Song
ST. / SONG
Press the ST./SONG button in the EDIT section to enter Edit Song. 7. Pass to another editor with the buttons . Otherwise, return to the main menu with ESCAPE and select another editor.
Edit Song: Main menu
Page name
Editors
Locator
To escape from Edit Song press ESCAPE (once or twice, depending on the currently selected level). To escape without closing the edit page, press the ST./SONG button. To pass to another edit environment, press the corresponding button in the EDIT section.
ESCAPE EDIT SONG
6. Confirm the operation with ENTER.
5. Select the parameters with the directional arrows. Modify the parameter with the DIAL or the numeric keypad.
4. Select the desired option with the soft buttons.
3. Press ENTER to gain access to the editor.
2. Select the editor that you wish to edit using the DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also possible to enter an editor by specifying the relative number on the numeric keypad.
1. In Song mode, press ST./SONG to enter Edit Song. The main menu appears.
THE EDIT PROCEDURE
Edit Song 71

7 Edit Song
Edit Song 71
The main Menu Options

UNDO (F2)
When this parameter is selected (shown in negative highlight), the UNDO function is enabled. Undo cancels the last operation or series of operations carried out. This function consumes exactly the same amount of RAM memory as the Song. If there is a shortage of memory in RAM, it is a good idea to deactivate UNDO. Press the UNDO panel button to execute the desired Undo operation.
UNDO
EDIT SCORE (F6)

Opens the Score Edit function.
Score Edit is described separately in detail in the Score & Edit Score section towards the end of this chapter.
SONG NAME (F8)

Modifies the name of the Song.
You will be prompted with a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
The characters are insereted using the method described on page 1.4 of the Data Entry section of chapter 1. You can move the cursor with the Soft buttons or the DIAL and insert the characters with the keys of the keyboard. Name - Name of the Song which appears in the SK760/880 file selector. This name does not appear when the disk is read by a computer. Maximum character length: 10. Title - Full name of the Song.
If UNDO is disabled, pressing the UNDO button and confirming with ENTER activates the following user message:
Author - Name of the composer. Pub - Song Publisher.
Press ESCAPE to close the window and repeat the UNDO operation, this time with UNDO enabled.
72 Reference Guide
Track (F3) - Single track. Select the track with the Soft buttons A...H.
Music track (F6) - Track for the notes of the score (standard notation).
Lyrics track (F7) - Track for the lyrics of the score. All tracks (F8) .
Use the Soft buttons F1...F8 to select the track from which events will be cancelled. Depending on the type of track selected, the following parameters may or may not appear.
SOFT BUTTONS F3 ... F8
Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the cancellation.
Cancels the events from a single track or from all tracks.
Erase
Master track (F4) - The Master Track records events pertaining to the general controls of the Song (Tempo, Time Signature, selected Performance, selected effects).
Chords track (F5) - Track for the chord symbols inserted in the score.
Chords track (F5) - Track for the chord symbols inserted in the score.
Master track (F4) - The Master Track records events pertaining to the general controls of the Song (Tempo, Time Signature, selected Performance, selected effects).
All tracks (F8) .
Lyrics track (F7) - Track for the lyrics of the score.
Music track (F6) - Track for the notes of the score (standard notation).
Track (F3) - Single track. Select the track with the Soft buttons A...H.
Edit Song 73

Erase
Cancels the events from a single track or from all tracks.

Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the cancellation.

Use the Soft buttons F1...F8 to select the track from which events will be cancelled. Depending on the type of track selected, the following parameters may or may not appear.
Edit Song 73
ERASE PARAMETERS
Event type (Only for tracks which capture note events). Selects the type of event to cancel. Duplicate note eliminates the note with the lowest velocity value when two notes of the same pitch start at the same position.
Options: All, Duplicate note, Note, Pitch Bend, Mono touch, Poly touch, Velocity Off, ProgramChange, ControlChange 00...31, ControlChange 64...127.
Note range from... to... The highest and lowest limits of the note range to cancel. To cancel a single percussive instrument from the Drum track, assign the same value to the from and to parameters. For example, to cancel the snare (D2), set the parameter as Note range from D2 to D2.
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.

From locator... To locator... Determines the start and end point of the part to cancel. In some cases it is possible to specify the measure, beat and resolution (tick), in others, only the measure.
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song. It is not possible to specify a point before the start or after the end of the Song.
74 Reference Guide
Start locator
Start locator
Assignable values: any point, even after the end point of the Song.
Determines the new position of the part that is to be moved.
Determines the new position of the part that is to be moved.
Determines the start and end point of the part to move. It is possible to specify the measure, beat and resolution (tick).
From locator... To locator...
PARAMETERS
Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the movement.
Shifts events from one point of the selected track to another.
Move
Edit Song 75

Move
Shifts events from one point of the selected track to another.
Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the movement.
PARAMETERS
From locator... To locator... Determines the start and end point of the part to move. It is possible to specify the measure, beat and resolution (tick).
Edit Song 75
Copy
Copies events from a single track or from all tracks.
firm the copy.

Use the Soft buttons F1...F8 to select the track from which events will be copied. Depending on the type of track selected, the following parameters may or may not appear.
Track (F3) - Single track. Select the track with the Soft buttons A...H. Master track (F4) - The Master Track records events pertaining to the general controls of the Song (Tempo, Time Signature, selected Performance, selected effects). Chords track (F5) - Track for the chord symbols inserted in the score. Music track (F6) - Track for the notes of the score (standard notation). Lyrics track (F7) - Track for the lyrics of the score. All tracks (F8) .
76 Reference Guide
To Song...
Determines the highest and lowest limits of the note range to copy. To copy a single percussive instrument from the Drum track, assign the same
Determines the destination Song for the copy. If the selected Song is non existent, it will be created by the act of confirming the copy command.
Note range from... to...
Assignable values: any Song (1...16).
Assignable values: any Song (1...16).
Specifies the number of consecutive copies. Each copy starts exactly where the previous one ends.
Assignable values: 1...998.
Determines the destination Song for the copy. If the selected Song is non existent, it will be created by the act of confirming the copy command.
Determines the highest and lowest limits of the note range to copy. To copy a single percussive instrument from the Drum track, assign the same
Assignable values: any track (1...32).
Specifies the source and destination track of the copy. The From track... part is selected with the Soft buttons A ... H. The To track... part is modified with the DIAL.
From track... to track...
Options: Merge, Replace.
Determines the copy mode. Merge unites the copied events to those already present at the destination. Replace substitutes the events present at the destination with those copied.
Copy mode
COPY PARAMETERS
Assignable values: 1...998.
Specifies the number of consecutive copies. Each copy starts exactly where the previous one ends.
Copy times
Determines the new position of the copied part.
Start locator
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song. It is not possible to specify a measure after the end of the Song.
Determines the start measure and end measure of the part to copy. Bars and Resolution cannot be specified.
value to the from and to parameters. For example, to copy the snare (D2), set the parameter as Note range from D2 to D2.
Edit Song 77

COPY PARAMETERS

Copy mode Determines the copy mode. Merge unites the copied events to those already present at the destination. Replace substitutes the events present at the destination with those copied.
value to the from and to parameters. For example, to copy the snare (D2), set the parameter as Note range from D2 to D2.

From locator... To locator... Determines the start measure and end measure of the part to copy. Bars and Resolution cannot be specified.

From track... to track... Specifies the source and destination track of the copy. The From track... part is selected with the Soft buttons A ... H. The To track... part is modified with the DIAL.
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song. It is not possible to specify a measure after the end of the Song.
Start locator Determines the new position of the copied part.
Assignable values: any track (1...32).

To Song...
Copy times
Edit Song 77
Quantize
An auto-corrector of timing errors. Includes triplet and swing quantize values.
firm the quantization.
SOFT BUTTONS F1 AND F2

These select the Note On Quantize and Note Off Quantize parameters.
Note On Quantize - Quantization of the Note On event. Note Off Quantize - Quantization of the Note Off event. After a Note On quantization, a Note Off quantization affects the duration of the notes, adapting them to the quantization grid.
78 Reference Guide
1/16 B...F* free
(swing) no quantization
* B F indicate an adjustment of the swing feel.
* B F indicate an adjustment of the swing feel.
Edit Song 79
free
1/16 B...F*
1/8 B...F*
free
1/96
1/64
1/48
1/32
1/24
1/16
1/12
1/8
1/4
Value
Determines the Note On quantize values.
Note On quantization
QUANTIZE PARAMETERS
Quantization
no quantization
no quantization
(1/64)
(1/64 triplet)
triplet
triplet
triplet
(swing)
(swing)
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song. It is not possible to specify a point after the end of the Song.
Determines the start and end point of the part that requires quantizing. Only measures can be selected.
Determines the highest and lowest note range to quantize. To quantize a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to quantize the snare (D2), set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2.
Determines the Note Off quantize value. Same as Note On.
Note Off quantization
Edit Song 79

QUANTIZE PARAMETERS

Note Off quantization Determines the Note Off quantize value. Same as Note On. Note range from... to... Determines the highest and lowest note range to quantize. To quantize a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to quantize the snare (D2), set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2.
Note On quantization Determines the Note On quantize values.

Value 1/4 1/8 1/12 1/16 1/24 1/32 1/48 1/64 1/96 free 1/8 B...F* triplet (1/64) (1/64 triplet) no quantization (swing) triplet triplet Quantization

From locator... To locator... Determines the start and end point of the part that requires quantizing. Only measures can be selected.
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song. It is not possible to specify a point after the end of the Song.
Insert measures
Inserts a specified number of measures. The part of the Song after the insertion point shifts forward the same number of bars as those inserted. Given that the Time Signature of the inserted measures can differ to the Time Signature of the Song, the Insert Measures parameter permits the creation of a Song with multiple Time Signatures.
firm the insertion.
PARAMETERS
Measures to insert Specifies the number of measures to insert. Assignable values: 1...999. Time Signature Determines the Time Signature of the measures to insert. Insert from locator Specifies the measure at which the new measures will be inserted.
(1)
(2)
(a)
(b)
(3)
(4)
Assignable values: from the first measure of the Song, to the first measure after the end measure of the Song (coda insertion).
Insert measures example. Two measures are inserted at measure 3. Measure 3 and all successive measures are moved forward.
710 Reference Guide
Hint: To cancel measures without shifting those
after the deletion point, use the Erase events function.

Specifies the number of measures to delete.
Assignable values: any number that does not exceed the total number of measures in the Song. For example, if the Song is 50 measures long, the maximum value that can be assigned is 50.
Delete from locator
Cancels a specified number of measures. The measures directly after the point of cancellation shift towards the beginning of the Song and join with the measures preceding the cancellation point.
Delete measures
Hint: To cancel measures without shifting those after the deletion point, use the Erase events function.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the Song. The parameter is linked to the previous one, which can be modified if the measures between the deletion start point and the end of the Song are less than those shown in Measures.

Example of Delete measures. Measures 3 and 4 are cancelled. All the measures after the delete point shift towards the beginning of the song.

PARAMETERS
This parameter indicates the first measure of those to be deleted.
(1)
(2)
Measures to delete
Delete from locator
Assignable values: any number that does not exceed the total number of measures in the Song. For example, if the Song is 50 measures long, the maximum value that can be assigned is 50.
Measures to delete
PARAMETERS
(1) (2)
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the Song. The parameter is linked to the previous one, which can be modified if the measures between the deletion start point and the end of the Song are less than those shown in Measures.
Example of Delete measures. Measures 3 and 4 are cancelled. All the measures after the delete point shift towards the beginning of the song.
(5)
Edit Song 711

Delete measures
Cancels a specified number of measures. The measures directly after the point of cancellation shift towards the beginning of the Song and join with the measures preceding the cancellation point.

(6)
(5)
(6)
Edit Song 711
Velocity
Modifies the key Velocity. This parameter represents the speed with which a note is played, or its intensity. Generally, the greater the velocity the higher the volume. Velocity also affects the filter of many sounds, rendering them brighter with increased velocity.
firm the dynamic changes.
PARAMETERS
Velocity mode Provides two velocity modes to choose from which affect the way the Change Velocity function operates. Normal - The value indicated in Velocity change is added to or subtracted from the key Velocity values. Fixed - The key Velocities are all set to the value specified in the Change Velocity parameter. Change Velocity Specifies the amount by which the velocity values can be changed. This depends on the option selected in Velocity Mode. Note range from... to... Assigns the upper and lower limits of the notes to be affected. To modify the velocity of a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2. From locator... To locator... Determines the start and end point of the part to be affected. It is possible to specify Measure, Beat and tick.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the Song. It is not possible to specify a point beyond the end of the Song.
712 Reference Guide
Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the operation.
Transposition of the Music track of the Score by semitones.
Determines the start and end point of the part to be affected. It is possible to specify Measure, Beat and tick.
Chords trk (F7) Track (F6)
Music trk (F8)
Transposition of the Chords track of the Score by semitones.
Transposition of a Song track by semitones.
Also available are options to transpose the Chords and Music tracks of the Score of a song. This allows you to see the score in the correctly transposed status after a transpose operation.
Transposition of a recorded track by semitones.
Transpose
Determines the start and end point of the part to be affected. It is possible to specify Measure, Beat and tick.
Transposition of the Music track of the Score by semitones.

firm the operation.
Assigns the upper and lower limits of the notes to be affected. To transpose a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2.
Determines the value of the transposition (in semitones).
Transpose value
Edit Song 713

Transpose
Transposition of a recorded track by semitones. Also available are options to transpose the Chords and Music tracks of the Score of a song. This allows you to see the score in the correctly transposed status after a transpose operation. Track (F6) Transposition of a Song track by semitones. Chords trk (F7)
Transposition of the Chords track of the Score by semitones. Music trk (F8)
Transpose value Determines the value of the transposition (in semitones). Note range from... to... Assigns the upper and lower limits of the notes to be affected. To transpose a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2.

Edit Song 713
Microscope
The Microscope allows you to modify every single event recorded in the tracks. The Event List at the centre of the display shows all the events recorded.
Event List
track in edit
ACCESSING THE EVENT EDIT MODE

1. Select the track whose events you wish to see in the Event List. 2. Use the / buttons to scroll through the events. The selected notes are played automatically. 3. Select the parameter to modify using the cursor buttons / . 4. Use the DIAL to modify the selected parameter.
measure beat resolution Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 event type (Status) Gate
EVENTS AND PARAMETERS WHICH CAN BE CHANGED

The Status column shows the type of event. One or more parameters can be modified for each event. Refer to the events table on the following page for an explanation of each event.
SHOW... (F2)
Recalls a dialog window where it is possible to select the events that will be displayed in the Event List. Set the events that you want to mask to OFF.
Set the parameters and press ENTER.
714 Reference Guide
Pitch Bend
Value of LSB (Least Significant Byte). [0= Off, 1127 = On]
EVENTS TABLE AND RELATED PARAMETERS
Edit Song 715
Program Change
Note
STATUS
VALUE 1
Note name [C1 G9]
Key On Velocity [1 127]
VALUE 2
Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB message. To select message. Not the SK760/880 banks, necessary to select use numbers 1 16 the SK760/880 [1 128] sounds [1 128]
Poly Touch
Note to which Aftertouch is applied. [C1 G9]
Note Aftertouch intensity. [0 127]
Program change message. The PC contained in the tracks and shown in the Microscope has priority over the PC recorded in the Performance. [1 128]
Mono Touch
Channel Aftertouch intensity [0 127]
Control Change
Value of MSB (Most Significant Byte). Effectifve value of bending. [063 = down 64 = neutral 65127 = up] Control Change Value
Pitch Bend
Type of Control Change (or MIDI controller). Example: CC00 = BankSelect MSB, CC32 = BankSelect LSB, CC01 = Modulation, CC07 = Volume [1 128]
Value of MSB (Most Significant Byte). Effectifve value of bending. [063 = down 64 = neutral 65127 = up]
Control Change
Control Change Value
Poly Touch
Mono Touch
Key Off Velocity [1 127]
VALUE 3
Edit Song 715

EVENTS TABLE AND RELATED PARAMETERS

STATUS Note
VALUE 1 Note name [C1 G9]
VALUE 2 Key On Velocity [1 127]
VALUE 3 Key Off Velocity [1 127]
GATE Note Length expressed as the Sequencer resolution (q=192) [0 63323]
Program Change
Bank Select MSB message. To select the SK760/880 banks, use numbers 1 16 [1 128]
Bank Select LSB message. Not necessary to select the SK760/880 sounds [1 128]
Note Length expressed as the Sequencer resolution (q=192) [0 63323] GATE
INS: (X) (F3)

Inserts the event specified in the INS. TYPE function at the current cursor position. To position the inserted event precisely, modify its locator accordingly (the parameters to the left of the Status). The events are inserted with the following default parameter values:
Status Note: P. Ch Contr. P.Bend M.Tch P.Tch 1V C4 1 1 0 0 C4 2V 64 1 0 64 ---0 ---3V 64 1 ------Gate 128
DELETE (F6)
Cancels the selected event.
CATCH LOCATOR (F7)

Selects the event currently playing (when the Song is in playback mode), or the event immediately after the current Song position.
GO TO LOC... (F8)
Takes the cursor directly to the first event of the specified locator (measure). The number can be specified with the DIAL.
Specify the locator and press ENTER to confirm.
After inserting the desired event, modify its parameters accordingly.
INS TYPE... (F4)

Recalls a dialog window where you can select the type of event to insert manually with the Ins(x) function.
Select the event type to insert and press ENTER.
716 Reference Guide
The structure of the page is analogous to the Microscope. The events are shown in the Event List at the center of the display. Accessing the Event Edit Mode 1. Use the cursor buttons / the events.
to scroll through
Assignable values: one of the 8 (max) Song Performances.
The Master Track editor allows you to modify the events recorded in the Master track which contains events pertaining to the general controls of the Song. This Track records changes in Performance, general Volume (Pedal Volume), Effect Changes, Effect Volume, Scale, Tempo changes, initial Time Signature and the Score Key.
PERF - Initial Performance. Sets the initial values of some of the track parameters (Program Change, Volume, Pan, Effects). If the same parameters are also found at the beginning of each track, the sound, volume and pan settings are selected and controlled by the events contained in the tracks and not by the initial Performance.
KEY - Key for the correct visualization of the score. Alters the score according to the specified key (inserts the correct accidentals), rendering the score easier to read. For example, if the score was captured in the key of C, you can display the score in the key of F# with all the correct accidentals shown in the initial key signature by setting the Key parameter to F#. TEMPO - Metronome pulse. Can also be set on Play View or Record View pages.
1. Use the cursor buttons / the events.
Accessing the Event Edit Mode
2. Select the parameter to modify using the cursor buttons / .
The events that define the Song at the start point can be modified but not deleted. To access and modify the events press F1 (Start param).
resolution event type (Status)
3. Use the DIAL or the numeric keypad to modify the selected parameter.
INITIAL PARAMETERS OF THE SONG
INITIAL PARAMETERS OF THE SONG
3. Use the DIAL or the numeric keypad to modify the selected parameter.
The events that define the Song at the start point can be modified but not deleted. To access and modify the events press F1 (Start param).
2. Select the parameter to modify using the cursor buttons / .
Assignable values: one of the 8 (max) Song Performances.
PERF - Initial Performance. Sets the initial values of some of the track parameters (Program Change, Volume, Pan, Effects). If the same parameters are also found at the beginning of each track, the sound, volume and pan settings are selected and controlled by the events contained in the tracks and not by the initial Performance.
The structure of the page is analogous to the Microscope. The events are shown in the Event List at the center of the display.
Master Track
to scroll through
TEMPO - Metronome pulse. Can also be set on Play View or Record View pages.
KEY - Key for the correct visualization of the score. Alters the score according to the specified key (inserts the correct accidentals), rendering the score easier to read. For example, if the score was captured in the key of C, you can display the score in the key of F# with all the correct accidentals shown in the initial key signature by setting the Key parameter to F#.
VOLUME - Overall volume, controlled by the Damper pedal set for continuous control and assigned the Volume function.
Initial parameters
Note: When loading a MIDI file, normally the Performance settings are ignored, due to the fact that commercially available MIDI files contain initializing events at the start of each track
bar
beat
Event List
Edit Song 717

Master Track
Initial parameters
Event List
The Master Track editor allows you to modify the events recorded in the Master track which contains events pertaining to the general controls of the Song. This Track records changes in Performance, general Volume (Pedal Volume), Effect Changes, Effect Volume, Scale, Tempo changes, initial Time Signature and the Score Key.
bar beat resolution event type (Status) value
Note: When loading a MIDI file, normally the
Performance settings are ignored, due to the fact that commercially available MIDI files contain initializing events at the start of each track

VOLUME - Overall volume, controlled by the Damper pedal set for continuous control and assigned the Volume function.
value
Edit Song 717
PROGRAMMABLE EVENTS AND PARAMETERS

The Status column shows the type of event. One or more parameters can be modified for each event. The table shown opposite lists the events and parameters which can be modified.
STATUS TEMPO
VALUE Metronomic Tempo. If the Tempo Rec option is enabled during the recording, all tempo variations are recorded. [20 250]
PERFORMANCE Change of Performance [1 8] VOLUME Volume variation via MIDI (through the Common channel) or by means of the Volume Pedal. Does not record Volume changes made with the M.VOL slider. [0 127] Selection of a DSP device. Corresponds to CC18. Type of effect assigned to the selected DSP. Corresponds to CC48. The tables of the assignable effects are in the Appendix. General Effect Volume of the effect type assigned to the DSP. The Effect Sends (amount of effect applied) for each track is regulated in the Microscope by means of the Control Change messages CC91 & CC93.
START PARAMETERS (F1)

Enters the edit of the Songs start parameters. Press F1 again to return to the edit of the successive parameters.
SHOW... (F2)
Recalls a dialog window where it is possible to select the events that will be displayed by the Event List. Set the events that you want to mask to OFF.
EFF. DEVICE SEL. EFF. TYPE
EFF. DEVICE VOLUME
INS: (X) (F3)

Inserts the specified event type at the cursor position. To position the inserted event precisely, modify its locator (the parameters to the left of the Status).
718 Reference Guide
Eff. Dv. Sel Status Eff. Type Eff. Vol RotaryA RotaryB Scale Key Sign
0 Value 0 0 Slw/Fst Slw/Fst 1 C
Specify the required number and confirm with ENTER. Scale RotaryB RotaryA 1 Slw/Fst Slw/Fst
Edit Song 719
Volume
Performance
Tempo
Status
The events are inserted with the following default parameter values:
Value
120
64
Select the type of event and press ENTER.
Press the into view.
cursor arrow to bring other events
Key Sign
Eff. Vol
Eff. Type
Status
Eff. Dv. Sel
Recalls a dialog window from which you can select the type of event to insert manually with the Ins(x) function.
Value
GO TO LOC... (F8)
INS TYPE... (F4)
Takes the cursor directly to the first event of the selected measure. The number can be specified with the DIAL.
INS TYPE... (F4)
Recalls a dialog window from which you can select the type of event to insert manually with the Ins(x) function.
cursor arrow to bring other events
Volume
64
DELETE (F6)
CATCH LOCATOR (F7)

GO TO LOC... (F8)
Press the into view.
Specify the required number and confirm with ENTER.
Takes the cursor directly to the first event of the selected measure. The number can be specified with the DIAL.
CATCH LOCATOR (F7)
DELETE (F6)
Edit Song 719

The events are inserted with the following default parameter values:

Status Tempo Performance
Value 120 1
Score & Edit Score

THE SCORE BUTTON
Press SCORE to view the notes, lyrics and chord symbols on the display and/or on an external monitor.
SCORE
THE SCORE TRACK

The Score track is a ghost track that is added to the tracks of a Song. This track allows the insertion and viewing of notes (Music), words (Lyrics) and chord symbols (Chords). The Score displays a melody line and not chords. A track of chords is analyzed, the highest notes are extracted and a melody line is generated. The score can be viewed on the instruments display, or projected onto an external monitor by pressing SCORE. To view on an external monitor, the SK760/880 must be fitted with Generalmusics optional Audio/Video card. The Score is created in Edit Song.
Press F8 (Score controls...) to select the viewing options and the video standard. When a Song containing a Score is in playback, an indicator ( ) monitors the current position of the score. Press ESCAPE to exit Score.
Score page - All mode (notes, lyrics and chord symbols)

Score page - Lyrics 1 mode (lyrics in large type)
720 Reference Guide
F4
F5
F6
When finished, press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
PARTS OF THE DISPLAYED SCORE

Select the parts of the Score to display with the Soft buttons F3 F8. View mode
ON: the notes are displayed on a staff. OFF: the notes are displayed on the treble clef only. Notes that normally occupy the bass clef are shown with the symbol (bass 8ve).
F4 F5 F6 F7
Chords - Traditional chord symbols without notes. This option refreshes the display very quickly which can be useful for guitarists and bassists. Echo LCD
In the Score page, press F8 to open the Score Control dialog window.
Score Controls
F8
OFF: the monitor displays only the Score parts (music, lyrics, chords).
All - Notes, lyrics, chord symbols.
Lyric 1...Lyric4 - Lyrics only across the display, with characters of various dimensions.
Video mode
Score control dialog window (viewing options for external monitor)
Select the parts of the Score to display with the Soft buttons F3 F8.
Options: On, Off.

View mode
Selects a color for the lyrics and for the background. This option is valid for the external monitor only.
Options: 116.
Video mode
RGB: the RGB port transmits RGB and Composite Video signals. CV: the RGB port transmits Composite Video signals. For a correct Composite Video image, this option is recommended.
Options: RGB, CV.

Y shift Controls the vertical alignment. Score split
All - Notes, lyrics, chord symbols.
PARTS OF THE DISPLAYED SCORE
When finished, press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
Score control dialog window (viewing options for external monitor)
Score split
F8
Lyric 1...Lyric4 - Lyrics only across the display, with characters of various dimensions.
F7
Chords - Traditional chord symbols without notes. This option refreshes the display very quickly which can be useful for guitarists and bassists.
OFF: the notes are displayed on the treble clef only. Notes that normally occupy the bass clef are shown with the symbol (bass 8ve).
ON: the notes are displayed on a staff.
Controls the vertical alignment.
Y shift
Options: RGB, CV.
CV: the RGB port transmits Composite Video signals. For a correct Composite Video image, this option is recommended.
RGB: the RGB port transmits RGB and Composite Video signals.
Options: 116.
Selects a color for the lyrics and for the background. This option is valid for the external monitor only.
Options: On, Off.
ON: the external monitor displays exactly what is shown on the SK760/880 display.
Viewing options for an external monitor.
VIDEO CONTROLS
Score/Edit Score 721

Score Controls
In the Score page, press F8 to open the Score Control dialog window.
VIDEO CONTROLS
Viewing options for an external monitor. Echo LCD
ON: the external monitor displays exactly what is shown on the SK760/880 display. OFF: the monitor displays only the Score parts (music, lyrics, chords).
Chords on lyrics If ON, the viewing options Lyric 1 ...Lyric 4 show chord symbols together with lyrics on the external monitor.
Edit Score
HOW TO ENTER EDIT SCORE
1. Press SONG and select a Song. 2. Press ST./SONG in the EDIT section to enter Edit Song. 3. Press F5 (Edit Score) in the main menu of Edit Song to open Edit Score. If the Song does not contain a score, select the Get Score command (F4) to create one (this procedure is explained afterwards).
SPECIAL SYMBOLS
At times, the music score will show special symbols. The octave lower symbol. The displayed note or notes are in reality one octave lower. The note too high symbol. The note at the position corresponding to the displayed symbol is too high to appear in the staff. The note too low symbol. The note at the position corresponding to the displayed symbol is too low to appear in the staff. This symbol rarely appears with a standard music staff (Score split option in the Score controls window set to ON).
HOW TO EXIT EDIT SCORE

Press ESCAPE to return to Edit Song. Press ESCAPE once again to return to the Play View or Record View page.
Score Edit - Chord mode (chord symbol edit)

722 Reference Guide
1. Press F4 (Get Score):
2. Press the soft button G (Go to loc...) to go to a specific measure:
2. User the DIAL to select the track to transcribe. 3. Press ENTER to confirm. Wait a few seconds for the score to be generated.
Specify the measure with the DIAL then press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
3. Move the insertion point to the previous or next note using the soft buttons D (Next event) and E (Previous event). 4. Each note is ideally subdivided into 1/16ths. In addition to a symbol at the beginning of a note (first 1/16th), you can insert symbols in one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to open the symbol insertion zone:
Insertion of the symbol at the second 1/16th Insertion of the symbol at the third 1/16th Insertion of the symbol at the fourth 1/16th
INSERTING CHORD SYMBOLS

Chord symbols correspond to the MIDI Text event. These are loaded and saved with MIDI files. Chord symbols can be inserted into a new Song using the procedure explained on the next page.
The number shown on the left of the insertion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To move the insertion point to one of the other 1/16ths, use the soft buttons H (<<1/16) and F8 (>>1/16). To escape and return to the note, press the soft button E (Previous event). To escape and pass to the next note press the soft button D (Next event).
5. Play the chord below the Split Point. The chord symbol appears, in the following form: CMaj, Dmin, E7th... 6. If you want to indicate a bass extension, or a pedal note, press the function button F (Extension) and play the alternative chord. The

Score Edit - Lyrics mode
Score Edit - Lyrics mode
Chord symbols correspond to the MIDI Text event. These are loaded and saved with MIDI files. Chord symbols can be inserted into a new Song using the procedure explained on the next page.
INSERTING CHORD SYMBOLS
3. Press ENTER to confirm. Wait a few seconds for the score to be generated.
2. User the DIAL to select the track to transcribe.
1. Press F4 (Get Score):
To create a Score, notes are withdrawn from a Song track.
INSERTING NOTES
6. If you want to indicate a bass extension, or a pedal note, press the function button F (Extension) and play the alternative chord. The
5. Play the chord below the Split Point. The chord symbol appears, in the following form: CMaj, Dmin, E7th...
2. Press the soft button G (Go to loc...) to go to a specific measure:
1. Press F5 (Chords) to take the cursor to the chord line (above the staff).
4. Each note is ideally subdivided into 1/16ths. In addition to a symbol at the beginning of a note (first 1/16th), you can insert symbols in one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to open the symbol insertion zone:
3. Move the insertion point to the previous or next note using the soft buttons D (Next event) and E (Previous event).
Specify the measure with the DIAL then press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
To escape and return to the note, press the soft button E (Previous event). To escape and pass to the next note press the soft button D (Next event).
The number shown on the left of the insertion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To move the insertion point to one of the other 1/16ths, use the soft buttons H (<<1/16) and F8 (>>1/16).
Insertion of the symbol at the fourth 1/16th
Insertion of the symbol at the third 1/16th
Insertion of the symbol at the second 1/16th

INSERTING NOTES

To create a Score, notes are withdrawn from a Song track.
1. Press F5 (Chords) to take the cursor to the chord line (above the staff).
bass extension will appear in the following form: CMaj/D, Dmin/G... Press the soft buttons D (Next event or E (Previous event) to pass to another event. 7. You can modify the selected symbol by playing a different chord. 8. You can modify a chord by transforming it, for example, from a major to minor chord to seventh. Press F7 (Root) repeatedly to alternate between the bass of the chord (the root: A, B, C, etc.) and the abbreviation of the chord (min, 7th, dim, aug...).
The entire symbol is selected. Press F7 (Root).
2. Press soft button G (Go to loc...) to go to a specific measure (bar):
Specify the measure with the DIAL then press ENTER confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
3. Move the insertion point to the previous note or the next note with the soft buttons D (Next event) and E (Previous event). 4. Each note is ideally subdivided into 1/16ths. In addition to syllables at the beginning of the note (first 1/16th), you can insert syllables in one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to open the syllable insertion zone.
Insertion of the syllable at the second 1/16th Insertion of the syllable at the third 1/16th
The root note is selected. Press F7 (Root).
The chord abbreviation is selected. Press F7 (Root).
Insertion of the syllable at the fourth 1/16th
The entire symbol is selected again.
Rotate the DIAL or play another chord to modify the selected element (the root or abbreviation).
The number shown on the left of the insertion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To move the insertion point to one of the other 1/16ths, use the soft buttons H (<<1/16) and F8 (>>1/16). To escape and return to the note, press the soft button E (Previous event). To escape and pass to the next note press the soft button D (Next event). At this point, Next event and previous event pass from 16th to 16th instead of from note to note. 5. In this operating mode, the keyboard transforms into a source of alphanumeric data (see the Data Entry paragraph on page 1.4 of Chapter 1). Write the required syllable using the keys of the keyboard.
INSERTING LYRICS
Lyrics corresponds to the MIDI Lyrics event. This type of event is loaded and saved with MIDI files. Lyrics can be inserted into a new Song in the following manner: 1. Press F6 (Lyrics) to take the cursor to the lyrics line (below the staff).
724 Reference Guide
7. You can modify a selected syllable by rewriting it entirely or partially.
6. Press soft button F (End phrase) to terminate the verse. The end of the verse is indicated by the end phrase symbol I.
To insert a character without cancelling another, pass to Insert mode. Press note D#2 (INS/OVER); the cursor will take the form of a vertical line. Move the cursor with the DIAL, then insert the new character. Press D#2 to return to Overwrite mode.
To replace one character with another, remain in Overwrite mode (rectangular cursor). If you are in Insert mode (cursor in the form of a vertical line), press note D#2 (INS/OVER) to pass to Overwrite mode. Move the cursor with the DIAL, then insert the new character.
Do not write lines consisting of more than 20 characters. This is to avoid the incorrect syllabisation of words when you are viewing lyrics in large type. For example, the word Ballgame may syllabize to Bal-lgame, or Ballg-ame or other, instead of Ball-game.
Each note greater than a sixteenth (demisemiquaver) is ideally subdivided into sixteenths; this button takes the cursor to the next sixteenth. For example, a quaver (8th) is divided into two 1/ 16ths, a crotchet (quarter) into four 1/16ths, etc..
7. You can modify a selected syllable by rewriting it entirely or partially. To replace one character with another, remain in Overwrite mode (rectangular cursor). If you are in Insert mode (cursor in the form of a vertical line), press note D#2 (INS/OVER) to pass to Overwrite mode. Move the cursor with the DIAL, then insert the new character. To insert a character without cancelling another, pass to Insert mode. Press note D#2 (INS/OVER); the cursor will take the form of a vertical line. Move the cursor with the DIAL, then insert the new character. Press D#2 to return to Overwrite mode.
>> 1/16 (F8)
Takes the cursor to the beginning of the specified measure. Press soft button G to open the dialog window:
GO TO LOC... (G)
Previous event. Takes the cursor to the previous event (note or pause).
PREV. EVENT (E)
Takes the cursor to the next event (note or pause).
NEXT EVENT (D)
Takes the cursor to the Lyrics line (below the staff).
LYRICS (F6)
Takes the cursor to the Chords line (above the staff).
CHORDS (F5)
The Edit Score page
Specify the measure with the DIAL. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.

6. Press soft button F (End phrase) to terminate the verse. The end of the verse is indicated by the end phrase symbol I.

The Edit Score page

CHORDS (F5)
Takes the cursor to the Chords line (above the staff).
Do not write lines consisting of more than 20 characters. This is to avoid the incorrect syllabisation of words when you are viewing lyrics in large type. For example, the word Ballgame may syllabize to Bal-lgame, or Ballg-ame or other, instead of Ball-game.
LYRICS (F6)
Takes the cursor to the Lyrics line (below the staff).
NEXT EVENT (D)

Takes the cursor to the next event (note or pause).
PREV. EVENT (E)

Previous event. Takes the cursor to the previous event (note or pause).
GO TO LOC... (G)
Takes the cursor to the beginning of the specified measure. Press soft button G to open the dialog window:
Specify the measure with the DIAL. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
>> 1/16 (F8)
Each note greater than a sixteenth (demisemiquaver) is ideally subdivided into sixteenths; this button takes the cursor to the next sixteenth. For example, a quaver (8th) is divided into two 1/ 16ths, a crotchet (quarter) into four 1/16ths, etc..

The edit takes place in an active zone:
You can modify the extension with the DIAL, or play a different chord. Play the chords below the Split Point.
To escape and return to the normal edit of the note, press soft button E (Previous event). To escape and pass to the next note, press soft button D (Next event).
ROOT (F7)
This command allows you to modify the root note of a chord and its related abbreviation separately. Select a chord and press F7 repeatedly to place the chord parts in edit, first the root, then the abbreviation, then to return to the edit of the entire chord symbol.
<< 1/16 (H)

See above. Takes the cursor to the previous sixteenth
GET SCORE... (F4)

Creates a score from the selected track from which the melody is transcribed. Press F4 to open the dialog window:
You can modify the selected part with the DIAL, or by playing a different chord. Play the chords below the Split Point.
END PHRASE (F)

Specify the track with the DIAL. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
If the track contains chords, the analyser withdraws the highest notes, attempting to eliminate notes not related to the melody. A score is obtained with excellent results from a track containing a melody line only.
This command inserts an End phrase symbol (I) at the end of a verse. In the viewing modes Lyrics 1 Lyrics 4, when the verses that end with the End phrase symbol are reached, the next verse starts on a new line. We recommend that you write lines using not more than 20 characters, to avoid displaying incorrectly syllabized words when the Lyrics 1 option (large types) is used. This symbol can be cancelled as any other character by selecting the syllable with D (Next event) or E (Previous event). Select the symbol with the DIAL and cancel the symbol with note F2 (DELETE).
EXTENSION (F)
This command allows you to add an alternative bass extension to the chord. Select a chord and press soft button F, then play a complete chord which contains the alternative bass root required to insert.
726 Reference Guide
Disk based User Styles can be loaded into memory and user-programmed Styles can be saved to disk, using the methods described in the Disk chapter 3 of the Reference Guide.
Var1 Var2 Var3
THE BASIC STRUCTURE OF A STYLE
A Riff is a musical motif capable of repetition (looping). It can also be expressed as a phrase or lick, but it is important to understand that the Riff must be capable of repetition. In fact, when you play with Styles, you will note that the patterns are short repeating sequences.
The four USER buttons (1, 2, 3 and 4) of the STYLE/SONG GROUPS section recall User-programmable Styles, or free locations that allow you to record your own auto accompaniments. Up to 32 User Styles can reside in memory, 8 in each User Group.
8 User Style recording
The basic Riff is the principal pattern of the Style which repeats continually until stopped, or until it is broken by a Fill, Intro or Ending pattern.
WHAT IS A RIFF?
A new Style can be created by recording every part yourself, or by modifying a copy of an existing Style. This second option is discussed in the Edit Style chapter.
There are 4 Variations of the Major, minor and 7th chords and each Variation breaks down into several different elements: basic, Intro, Fill, Ending. These four elements form the basis of a structure consisting of 48 short sequences, or Riffs, for each Style.
THE BASIC STRUCTURE OF A STYLE
Styles provide automatic accompaniments based on the system of chords. In particular, the Major, Minor and Seventh chords trigger three completely different arrangement patterns. Each Riff consists of up to 8 Style tracks: Drum, Bass, Acc1, Acc2, Acc3, Acc4, Acc5, Acc6.
There are 4 Variations of the Major, minor and 7th chords and each Variation breaks down into several different elements: basic, Intro, Fill, Ending. These four elements form the basis of a structure consisting of 48 short sequences, or Riffs, for each Style.
A new Style can be created by recording every part yourself, or by modifying a copy of an existing Style. This second option is discussed in the Edit Style chapter.
Fill 7th Fill Minor Fill Major Basic 7th Fill Minor Fill Major Basic 7th Fill 7th Fill Minor Fill Major Basic 7th Fill 7th
The Fills, Intros and Endings are triggered by pressing the relative FILL, INTRO, or ENDING buttons. A Riff can vary in length from one to sixteen measures long. Each Riff consists of up to 8 Style tracks: Drum, Bass, Acc1, Acc2, Acc3, Acc4, Acc5, Acc6.
Disk based User Styles can be loaded into memory and user-programmed Styles can be saved to disk, using the methods described in the Disk chapter 3 of the Reference Guide.
Var1
Var2
Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic 7th Fill Major Fill Minor Fill 7th Basic 7th Fill Major Fill Minor Basic 7th Fill Major Fill Minor Basic 7th Fill Major Fill Minor Fill 7th Intro Major Intro Minor Intro 7th End Major End Minor End 7th
Fill 7th
Intro Major Intro Major Intro Minor Intro Minor Intro 7th Intro 7th End Major End Minor End 7th End Major End Minor
End 7th
Riffs of a Style

WHAT IS A RIFF?
The four USER buttons (1, 2, 3 and 4) of the STYLE/SONG GROUPS section recall User-programmable Styles, or free locations that allow you to record your own auto accompaniments. Up to 32 User Styles can reside in memory, 8 in each User Group.
End Minor End Major Intro 7th Intro Minor Intro Minor Intro Major Intro Major End Minor End Major Intro 7th Intro Minor Intro Major Intro 7th End Minor End Major
A Riff is a musical motif capable of repetition (looping). It can also be expressed as a phrase or lick, but it is important to understand that the Riff must be capable of repetition. In fact, when you play with Styles, you will note that the patterns are short repeating sequences.
Styles provide automatic accompaniments based on the system of chords. In particular, the Major, Minor and Seventh chords trigger three completely different arrangement patterns.
Riffs of a Style
End 7th
Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic Minor
Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major
A Riff can vary in length from one to sixteen measures long.
The Fills, Intros and Endings are triggered by pressing the relative FILL, INTRO, or ENDING buttons.
The table shown below lists all the Riffs that make up a Style.
End 7th
End 7th
User Styles 81

8 User Style recording

The table shown below lists all the Riffs that make up a Style. The basic Riff is the principal pattern of the Style which repeats continually until stopped, or until it is broken by a Fill, Intro or Ending pattern.
Var4
Intro Minor
Intro Major
Fill Minor
Fill Major
Intro 7th
End 7th Basic 7th End Minor End Major Fill 7th
Var3
Var4
Fill 7th
Intro Major Intro Minor Intro 7th End Major End Minor
End 7th
User Styles 81
Recording
PREPARATION
1. Select a USER Style. Select a free location (User) to create a new Style. 2. You are prompted to create a new style. Press F1 (Ok).
environment name Style name Tempo locator (measure counter)
3. The Style Record View page activates and the Select Riff dialog window is also shown:
tracks Style Mode - Record View display (record/play parameters display) menu
4. Select the Variation, element and chord with the cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm. The LED on the RECORD button lights up and the Record View page is shown in negative highlight. 5. Once the dialog window closes, press F1 (Mode) to select the recording mode. The Record Mode dialog window opens where you can select the required mode.
Select the record mode and press ENTER to confirm.
6. Select and program the basic Style parameters: Time Signature to modify the time signature.

Style Mode - Sound View display
82 Reference Guide
10. If you want to assign different Sounds, open the Sound View page with the F5 Soft button
After assigning the sounds, save the Performance with STORE PERF. Return to the Rec View page with Soft button F6.
11. Activate the metronome with F8 (Metronome).
7. Set both parts of the Scale conversion parameter. The Scale Converter reconstructs the riffs of two chords starting from the complementary chord. For example, you can program the Basic Major riff and the Scale Converter engages the task of reconstructing the Basic Minor and Basic 7th. Refer to the Scale Converter tables at the end of this chapter.
9. Select the tracks that you want to record and set them to Record mode. Only Tracks showing the record icon will capture events:
8. Select the Quantize parameter to modify the pre-quantization setting (auto-correction of the timing) during the recording.
8. Select the Quantize parameter to modify the pre-quantization setting (auto-correction of the timing) during the recording.
10. If you want to assign different Sounds, open the Sound View page with the F5 Soft button
9. Select the tracks that you want to record and set them to Record mode. Only Tracks showing the record icon will capture events:
7. Set both parts of the Scale conversion parameter. The Scale Converter reconstructs the riffs of two chords starting from the complementary chord. For example, you can program the Basic Major riff and the Scale Converter engages the task of reconstructing the Basic Minor and Basic 7th. Refer to the Scale Converter tables at the end of this chapter. UNDO
11. Activate the metronome with F8 (Metronome).
After assigning the sounds, save the Performance with STORE PERF. Return to the Rec View page with Soft button F6.
Key note to specify the reference key. When a chord is played, SK760/ 880 transposes the riffs. You must, therefore, indicate the key in which the riffs are programmed.
Just press UNDO and confirm with ENTER to return to the previous status, or ESCAPE to retain the last task.
For example, after adding new events to an existing drum pattern, you might want to return to the original pattern and just cancel the new events. A quick and easy way is to use UNDO.
If, during the recording phase, you want to cancel the last performed recording task, use UNDO.
7. Press RECORD to escape Record mode. The LED on the RECORD button goes off.
6. If necessary, repeat the procedure for other tracks.
5. Select the tracks shown in record and set them to seq-play.
4. To add notes to the same tracks, repeat points 1 - 3. Note: If the Overdubb recording mode is selected, new notes will be added to the tracks each time the recording repeats. If Replace is selected, new notes will cancel those already existing on the next cycle. In Replace mode, the recording returns to Overdubb mode at the end of the first cycle.
3. Stop the recording with START/STOP.
2. Start playing after the lead-in. The recording proceeds in a cyclic manner: once the end of the riff is reached, the recording starts again from the beginning.
1. Press START/STOP to start the recording. A one-measure countdown with start.
RECORDING
User Styles 83


RECORDING
1. Press START/STOP to start the recording. A one-measure countdown with start. 2. Start playing after the lead-in. The recording proceeds in a cyclic manner: once the end of the riff is reached, the recording starts again from the beginning. 3. Stop the recording with START/STOP. 4. To add notes to the same tracks, repeat points 1 - 3. Note: If the Overdubb recording mode is selected, new notes will be added to the tracks each time the recording repeats. If Replace is selected, new notes will cancel those already existing on the next cycle. In Replace mode, the recording returns to Overdubb mode at the end of the first cycle. 5. Select the tracks shown in record and set them to seq-play.
Key note to specify the reference key. When a chord is played, SK760/ 880 transposes the riffs. You must, therefore, indicate the key in which the riffs are programmed.
6. If necessary, repeat the procedure for other tracks. 7. Press RECORD to escape Record mode. The LED on the RECORD button goes off. UNDO
If, during the recording phase, you want to cancel the last performed recording task, use UNDO. For example, after adding new events to an existing drum pattern, you might want to return to the original pattern and just cancel the new events. A quick and easy way is to use UNDO. Just press UNDO and confirm with ENTER to return to the previous status, or ESCAPE to retain the last task.
User Styles 83
RESTORING THE USER STYLES MEMORY

If you have loaded disk-based User Styles or recorded User Styles and used up all the memory dedicated to the storage of Styles, a quick and easy way of clearing User Style memory and making room for other Styles is to use the Restore Styles operation. Naturally, you must remember to save the User Styles that you dont want to lose to disk before proceeding with the restore procedure. 1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain access to the Edit General environment. 2. Press F5 (Restore Styles) to cancel all the User Styles (and relative User Style-Performances) in RAM. You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice. 3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel. With ENTER, the User Styles are cancelled from memory. With ESCAPE, the User Styles are retained.

The Record View page

MODE... (F1)
Opens the Record Mode dialog window where you can select various recording options. Replace - The new notes substitute old notes already present in the tracks being recorded. Overdubb - New notes are merged with those already present on the tracks being recorded. Punch In/Out - A means of inserting a correction without repeating a recording. Punch recording is activated by pressing an appropriately programmed pedal (in Edit Controllers/Pads). Activate the recording with PLAY. When the song reaches the point at which the correction must be inserted, press the pedal. At this point, the recording proceeds in replace mode. When the correction is complete, release the pedal to stop the recording.

REC RIFF... (F2)

Opens a dialog window where you can select a riff to record.
Select the Variation, section and chord with the cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm.
SOUND VIEW (F5)

Recalls the Sound View page where you can see and change the sounds assigned to the Performance.
84 Reference Guide
Cancellation of a track, riff, variation or Style.
Track - Cancels the selected track. Riff - Cancels the selected riff. Variation - Cancels the selected variation. Style - Cancels the entire Style.
METRONOME (F8)
Activates/deactivates the metronome.
TIME SIGNATURE
Determines the length of a riff expressed in measures (max 16).
TEMPO
KEY NOTE
Cancellation of a track, riff, variation or Style.
Reference key. Indicates the key in which the original riff is recorded. When you play the indicated chord, the riff will play back in exactly the same manner as recorded. If other chords are played, the riff will be transposed accordingly.
Activates/deactivates the metronome.
The playing speed (metronomic Tempo). Valid for the entire Style.
Valid for the entire Style. This parameter can be modified only before starting a recording. If the Style contains recorded events, this parameter cannot be modified.
MEASURES
Determines the length of a riff expressed in measures (max 16).
If the Off setting is selected, the arranger carries out the simplified conversion referred to. The tables at the end of this chapter show how the Scale Converter operates, both in the off status, as well as for the Minor and 7th chords. Several different solutions for each chord are provided for. The tables on pages 7 and 8 refer to chord and bass patterns played in the key of C and shows which notes are converted. The changes are expressed in semitones, therefore, if the note C shows a conversion of 2, the note is converted 2 semitones down (Bb). Notes not converted are shown blank.
MEASURES
Valid for the entire Style. This parameter can be modified only before starting a recording. If the Style contains recorded events, this parameter cannot be modified.
Reference key. Indicates the key in which the original riff is recorded. When you play the indicated chord, the riff will play back in exactly the same manner as recorded. If other chords are played, the riff will be transposed accordingly.
You can program the Major chord only and set the scale converter for the other two chords (minor and/or 7th). If, on a future occasion, you wish to program also the respective riffs, the relative Scale conversion will be ignored. The parameter consists of two variable parts, corresponding to the two complementary chords with respect to the one being recorded.
KEY NOTE
The playing speed (metronomic Tempo). Valid for the entire Style.
User Styles 85
TEMPO
TIME SIGNATURE
METRONOME (F8)
ERASE... (F7)
Recalls the Record View page where it is possible to control the record/play parameters.
REC VIEW (F6)
Track - Cancels the selected track. Riff - Cancels the selected riff. Variation - Cancels the selected variation. Style - Cancels the entire Style.
The tables on pages 7 and 8 refer to chord and bass patterns played in the key of C and shows which notes are converted. The changes are expressed in semitones, therefore, if the note C shows a conversion of 2, the note is converted 2 semitones down (Bb). Notes not converted are shown blank.
If the Off setting is selected, the arranger carries out the simplified conversion referred to. The tables at the end of this chapter show how the Scale Converter operates, both in the off status, as well as for the Minor and 7th chords. Several different solutions for each chord are provided for.
You can program the Major chord only and set the scale converter for the other two chords (minor and/or 7th). If, on a future occasion, you wish to program also the respective riffs, the relative Scale conversion will be ignored. The parameter consists of two variable parts, corresponding to the two complementary chords with respect to the one being recorded.
If you program a Style accompaniment based on the Major scale, the SK760/880 arranger will automatically convert a minor or 7th chord accordingly. This allows you to limit your User Style recording times by, for example, recording only the Major riff of Variation 1, in order that when you play with the recorded style, a minor or 7th chord will be automatically adjusted for the change. However, in harmonic terms, this type of over-simplification creates errors when using the more complex chord structures. To overcome this problem, the SK760/880 Scale Converter provides a selection of chord inversion systems, based on algorithms in order to render the conversion more musical.
SCALE CONVERSION
User Styles 85

REC VIEW (F6)

SCALE CONVERSION
If you program a Style accompaniment based on the Major scale, the SK760/880 arranger will automatically convert a minor or 7th chord accordingly. This allows you to limit your User Style recording times by, for example, recording only the Major riff of Variation 1, in order that when you play with the recorded style, a minor or 7th chord will be automatically adjusted for the change. However, in harmonic terms, this type of over-simplification creates errors when using the more complex chord structures. To overcome this problem, the SK760/880 Scale Converter provides a selection of chord inversion systems, based on algorithms in order to render the conversion more musical.
Recalls the Record View page where it is possible to control the record/play parameters.
ERASE... (F7)
QUANTIZE
An auto-corrector of timing during the recording phase. The selection values are normal, triplets or swing.
Value 1/4 1/8 1/12 1/16 1/24 1/32 1/48 1/64 1/96 free 1/8 B...F* 1/16 B...F* free triplet (1/64) (1/64 triplet) no quantization (swing) (swing) no quantization triplet triplet Quantization
FREE MEMORY (CANNOT BE MODIFIED)

The amount of memory remaining to record the riff. Each riff can occupy up to 30.000 bytes (30 kilobytes). If the RAM contains a large amount of data, a dialog window may appear showing the message Memory full! indicating that the recording cannot proceed further. The recording is instantly interrupted. You can increase the amount of space in RAM by deactivating the Undo function.
* B F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.
86 Reference Guide
C# C accomp. bass 1 1 +1 +1 D
D# E 1 1 F
F# G
G# A +1 +1 2 2
A#
Scale Converter active: C Major riff > C 7th riff C# C A# 2 2 2 2 1 +1 +1 +1 C C# D D# D G# 7th 1 accomp. 7th 1 bass 7th 2 accomp. 7th 2 bass 7th 3 accomp. 7th 3 bass 7th 4 accomp. 7th 4 bass A# B 1 1 +1 1 G A B D# E F# F E F F# G D# D G# A C# C 2 A#
User Styles 87
7th 4 bass
7th 4 accomp.
7th 3 bass
7th 3 accomp.
7th 2 bass
7th 2 accomp.
7th 1 bass
7th 1 accomp.
Scale Converter active: C Major riff > C 7th riff
bass
accomp.
Scale Converter in OFF status: C Major riff > C minor riff
bass
accomp.
Scale Converter in OFF status: C Major riff > C 7th riff
SCALE CONVERSION TABLES
C#
D#
F#
F#
G#
G#
+1
+1
A#
User Styles 87

SCALE CONVERSION TABLES

Scale Converter in OFF status: C Major riff > C 7th riff C# C accomp. bass 2 D D# E F F# G G# A +1 +1 A# B 1 1
Scale Converter in OFF status: C Major riff > C minor riff B
1 1
1 B
Scale Converter active: C Major riff > C minor riff C# C min 1 accomp. min 1 bass min 2 accomp. min 2 bass min 3 accomp. min 3 bass min 4 accomp. min 4 bass min 5 accomp. min 5 bass min 6 accomp. min 6 bass min 7 accomp. min 7 bass 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D D# E 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 +1 +1 1 1 1 1 +1 +1 1 1 F F# G G# A A# B
Complex chords The logic applied to the conversion of the more complex chords follows similar lines to that used for the standard Major, minor and 7th chords indicated above. The user is invited to experiment with the Scale Converter in order to discover the most suitable conversion for the Style being programmed.
88 Reference Guide
After recording a User Style, the Style riff can be modified in Edit Style. To escape from Edit Style press ESCAPE (once or twice, depending on the currently selected level). To escape without closing the edit page, press the ST./SONG button. To pass to another edit environment, press the corresponding button in the EDIT section.
ENTERING EDIT STYLE
In Style/RealTime mode, select the Style you wish to modify. If you select a User Style, all the Edit Style functions will be available. The Style name appears in the status bar of the display.
EDIT PROCEDURE
1. Press ST./SONG to enter Edit Style. The main menu appears. 2. Select the editor that you wish to edit using the DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also possible to enter an editor by specifying the relative number on the numeric keypad. 3. Press ENTER to enter the editor. 4. Select the desired option with the soft buttons. 5. Select the parameters with the cursor buttons and modify their value with the DIAL or the numeric keypad. 6. Confirm the operation with ENTER. 7. Pass to another editor with the / buttons. Otherwise, return to the main menu with ESCAPE and select another editor.
page name Editors
Edit Style - Main menu
In Style/RealTime mode, select the Style you wish to modify.
ENTERING EDIT STYLE
After recording a User Style, the Style riff can be modified in Edit Style.
9 Edit Style
1. Press ST./SONG to enter Edit Style. The main menu appears.
Editors
If you select a User Style, all the Edit Style functions will be available. The Style name appears in the status bar of the display.
page name
Press the ST./SONG button in the EDIT section to enter Edit Style.
Entering this section the first time opens the main menu page. On all successive occasions, the last page selected is recalled.
Entering this section the first time opens the main menu page. On all successive occasions, the last page selected is recalled.
ESCAPE FROM EDIT STYLE
To escape from Edit Style press ESCAPE (once or twice, depending on the currently selected level). To escape without closing the edit page, press the ST./SONG button. To pass to another edit environment, press the corresponding button in the EDIT section.
Style name
7. Pass to another editor with the / buttons. Otherwise, return to the main menu with ESCAPE and select another editor.
Style name
Press the ST./SONG button in the EDIT section to enter Edit Style.
Edit Style - Main menu
ESCAPE FROM EDIT STYLE
6. Confirm the operation with ENTER.
5. Select the parameters with the cursor buttons and modify their value with the DIAL or the numeric keypad.
4. Select the desired option with the soft buttons.
3. Press ENTER to enter the editor.
2. Select the editor that you wish to edit using the DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also possible to enter an editor by specifying the relative number on the numeric keypad.
EDIT PROCEDURE
ST. / SONG
Edit Style 91

9 Edit Style
ST. / SONG
Edit Style 91
UNDO (F2)
When this parameter is selected (shown in negative highlight), the UNDO function is enabled. Undo cancels the last operation or series of operations carried out. This function consumes exactly the same amount of RAM memory as the Style. If there is a shortage of memory in RAM, it is a good idea to deactivate UNDO. Press the UNDO panel button to execute the desired Undo operation.
UNDO
STYLE NAME (F8)

Changes the name of a Style. This function only applies to USER Styles; the names of the ROM Styles are permanent and cannot be modified.
The method used to insert characters is described in the Data Entry paragraph of chapter 1, page 1.4. You can move the cursor with the soft buttons or the DIAL. Insert the characters with the keys of the keyboard.
You will be prompted with a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
EMPTY TRACK INDICATION - NOTES PRESENT IN THE TRACK

The presence of notes in a track is indicated by the seq-play icon:
If UNDO is disabled, pressing the UNDO button and confirming with ENTER activates the following user message:
In play mode, this status icon indicates the presence of notes in at least one riff. If the current riff of the track does not contain notes, the empty track message is displayed at the bottom of the Edit Style page: In record mode, tasks are performed directly on a riff, and the icon indicates the presence of notes in the track and in the riff being recorded.
Press ESCAPE to close the window and repeat the UNDO operation, this time with UNDO enabled.
92 Reference Guide
Track (F5) - Single track, the current riff.
PARAMETERS
Variation
Riff
Selects one of the riffs of the selected Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears.
Use the Soft buttons F5...F8 to select the part of the Style to cancel the events from. Depending on the part selected, the following parameters may or may not appear.
SOFT BUTTONS F5...F8
Cancellation of events.
Erase
Track (F5) - Single track, the current riff.
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only Variations that contain at least one recorded riff can be selected.
Style (all vars) (F8) - An entire Style (the 4 Variations of the Style).
Style (all vars) (F8) - An entire Style (the 4 Variations of the Style).
PARAMETERS
Var (all riffs) (F7) - An entire Variation (all the riffs of the Variation).
Variation
Riff (all tracks) (F6) - An entire riff (all the tracks of the riff).
Edit Style 93
Riff
Use the Soft buttons F5...F8 to select the part of the Style to cancel the events from. Depending on the part selected, the following parameters may or may not appear.
Selects one of the riffs of the selected Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears.
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only Variations that contain at least one recorded riff can be selected.
Var (all riffs) (F7) - An entire Variation (all the riffs of the Variation).
Riff (all tracks) (F6) - An entire riff (all the tracks of the riff).
Edit Style 93

Erase
Cancellation of events.
Event type Determines the type of event to be erased. Duplicate note eliminates the note with the lowest velocity value when two notes of the same pitch start at the same position.
Options: All, Duplicate note, Note, Pitch Bend, Mono touch, Poly touch, Velocity Off, ProgramChange, ControlChange 00...31, ControlChange 64...127.
Note range from... to... Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to cancel. To cancel a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to cancel the snare (D2) set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2.

From locator... To locator... Determines the start and end point of the part to cancel. It is possible to specify the measure, beat and resolution.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the riff. It is not possible to specify a point beyond the end of the riff.
Erase Variation Selects the Style Variation to cancel [Var (all riffs) option]. Erase Style Selects the Style to cancel [Style (all Vars) option].
94 Reference Guide
Sets the new position of the section being moved.
Assignable values: any point within the riff.
Selects one of the 4 Style Variations. Only Variations that contain at least one recorded riff can be selected.
Start locator
Edit Style 95
Riff
Selects one of the riffs of the current Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty the phrase No Riff appears.
Sets the start and end points of the part to be moved. The measure, beat and resolution can be specified.
Sets the start and end points of the part to be moved. The measure, beat and resolution can be specified.
Selects one of the riffs of the current Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty the phrase No Riff appears.
Riff
Sets the new position of the section being moved.
Start locator
Selects one of the 4 Style Variations. Only Variations that contain at least one recorded riff can be selected.
Assignable values: any point within the riff.
Variation
PARAMETERS
Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the operation.
Shifts events from one point to another within the selected track.
Move
Edit Style 95

Move
Shifts events from one point to another within the selected track.
firm the operation.
PARAMETERS
Variation
Copy
Copies events from a single tracks or from all the tracks.
firm the operation

Use the Soft buttons F5...F8 to select the type of track to copy events from. Depending on the type of track selected, the following parameters may or may not appear.
Track (F5) - Single track, the current riff. Riff (all tracks) (F6) - An entire riff (all the tracks of the riff). Var (all riffs) (F7) - An entire Variation (all the riffs of the Variation). Style (all vars) (F8) - An entire Style (the 4 Variations of the Style).
PARAMETERS
Copy to Style... Selects the destination Style to copy the current Style (part or whole) to.
Assignable values: any USER Style.

From var... to var... Selects the source and destination Variations for the part to be copied.
Assignable values: 1 ... 4.
96 Reference Guide
Assignable values: any riff.

Track... to track...
To Style...
The destination Style of the copy.
Copy current Style to Style
Start locator Sets the new position of the copied part.
Copy mode
From riff... to riff...
Track... to track...
Assignable values: any riff.
Determines the copy mode. Merge unites the copied events to those already present at the destination. Replace substitutes the events present at the destination with those copied. The destination Style of the copy. To Style...
Specifies the source and destination tracks for the copied elements. From track shows the track selected using soft buttons A...H. To track... can be modified using the DIAL.
Assignable values: depends of the length of the riff. The copy must not exceed the riff length.
Copy current Style to Style
Assignable values: any accompaniment track (9...16).
Sets the number of consecutive copies. Each copy starts exactly where the previous one ends.
Copy times Selects the USER location where the entire current Style is to be copied to (Style [all Vars] option).
Sets the start and end point of the part to be copied. Only the measure (bar) can be specified.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the destination riff.
Sets the new position of the copied part.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the riff..
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the destination riff.
Sets the start and end point of the part to be copied. Only the measure (bar) can be specified.
Copy times
Sets the number of consecutive copies. Each copy starts exactly where the previous one ends.
Assignable values: any accompaniment track (9...16).
Selects the USER location where the entire current Style is to be copied to (Style [all Vars] option).
Copy mode
Assignable values: depends of the length of the riff. The copy must not exceed the riff length.
Specifies the source and destination tracks for the copied elements. From track shows the track selected using soft buttons A...H. To track... can be modified using the DIAL.
Assignable values: any of the USER Styles.
Determines the copy mode. Merge unites the copied events to those already present at the destination. Replace substitutes the events present at the destination with those copied.
Start locator
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the riff..
Selects the source and destination riffs for the part to be copied. For example, it is possible to copy the patterns of a Basic Major riff to a minor Fill riff.
Assignable values: any of the USER Styles.
The source and destination of the copied Variation (Var (all riffs) option).
Copy Variation... to Variation...
Edit Style 97

From riff... to riff...

Copy Variation... to Variation... The source and destination of the copied Variation (Var (all riffs) option).
Selects the source and destination riffs for the part to be copied. For example, it is possible to copy the patterns of a Basic Major riff to a minor Fill riff.
Edit Style 97
Quantize
The Quantize function is an auto-corrector of timing errors. Includes triplet and swing quantize values.
firm the quantize operation.

These select the Note On Quantize and Note Off Quantize parameters. Note On Quantize - Post-Quantization of the Note On event. Note Off Quantize - Post-Quantization of the Note Off event. After a Note On quantization, a Note Off quantization affects the duration of the notes, adapting them to a quantization grid.
PARAMETERS
Variation Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing Variations can be selected (those with at least one riff recorded). Riff Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears.
98 Reference Guide
*B F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.
Edit Style 99
free
1/16 B...F
1/8 B...F
free
1/96
1/64
1/48
1/32
1/24
1/16
1/12
1/8
1/4
Value
Specifies the Note On quantize values.
Note On quantize
(1/64)
Quantization
no quantization
no quantization
(1/64 triplet)
triplet
triplet
triplet
(swing)
(swing)
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the Riff.
Determines the start and end point of the part that requires quantizing. Only measures can be selected.
Sets the highest and lowest note range to quantize. To quantize a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to quantize the snare (D2), set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2.
Determines the Note Off quantize value. Same as Note On.
Note Off quantize
Edit Style 99

Note On quantize

Note Off quantize Determines the Note Off quantize value. Same as Note On. Note range from... to... Sets the highest and lowest note range to quantize. To quantize a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to quantize the snare (D2), set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2.
Specifies the Note On quantize values.

Value 1/4 1/8 1/12 1/16 1/24 1/32 1/48 1/64 1/96 free 1/8 B...F 1/16 B...F free triplet (1/64) (1/64 triplet) no quantization (swing) (swing) no quantization triplet triplet Quantization

From locator... To locator... Determines the start and end point of the part that requires quantizing. Only measures can be selected.
*B F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.
Insert Measures
Inserts a specified number of measures. The part of the Riff that follows the insertion point shifts forward the same number of measures as those inserted. The length of the Riff changes.
firm the insertion.
PARAMETERS
Variation Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing Variations can be selected (those with at least one recorded Riff). Riff Selects one of the riffs from the selected Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. Measures to insert Specifies the number of measures to insert.
Assignable values: depends on the length of the riff (max 16 measures).
1
Insert from locator Specifies the measure at which the new measures will be inserted.
(1)
(2)
(a)
(b)
(3)
(4)
Insert measures example. Two measures are inserted at measure 3. Measure 3 and all successive measure are moved forward.
Assignable values: from the first measure (bar) of the Riff, to the first measure after the end measure of the Riff.
910 Reference Guide
after the deletion point, use the Erase events function.

Assignable values: within the actual limits of the riff. Dependent on the previous parameter.
Delete from locator
Cancels a specified number of measures. The measures directly after the point of cancellation shift towards the beginning of the Riff and join with the measures preceding the cancellation point.
Delete measures
Hint: To cancel measures without shifting those after the deletion point, use the Erase events function.
Assignable values: a number that does not exceed the length of the Riff. For example, if the Riff is 4 measures long, the maximum assignable value if 4.

Delete measures example. Measure 3 and 4 are cancelled. All the measures after the deletion point shift towards the beginning of the Riff.

PARAMETERS
Measures to delete
(1)
(2)
(5)
Edit Style 911
Variation
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears.
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing Variations can be selected (those with at least one recorded Riff).
Riff
(6)
Riff
Variation
Measures to delete
PARAMETERS
4
(6)
Assignable values: a number that does not exceed the length of the Riff. For example, if the Riff is 4 measures long, the maximum assignable value if 4.
Hint: To cancel measures without shifting those
Delete from locator
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the riff. Dependent on the previous parameter.
Delete measures example. Measure 3 and 4 are cancelled. All the measures after the deletion point shift towards the beginning of the Riff.
(1)
(2)
(5)
Edit Style 911

Delete measures
Cancels a specified number of measures. The measures directly after the point of cancellation shift towards the beginning of the Riff and join with the measures preceding the cancellation point.
Velocity
Modifies the key Velocity value. This parameter represents the key-strike velocity, or its intensity. Generally, the greater the velocity the higher the volume. Velocity also affects the filter of many sounds, making them brighter with increased velocity.
firm the dynamic changes.
PARAMETERS
Variation Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing Variations can be selected (those with at least one recorded Riff). Riff Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. Velocity mode Provides two velocity modes to choose from which affect the way the Change Velocity function operates. Normal - The value indicated in Velocity change is added to or subtracted from the Velocity values of the notes. Fixed - The note Velocities are all set to the value specified in Velocity change
Change Velocity Specifies the amount by which the velocity values can be changed. This depends on the option selected in Velocity Mode. Note range from... to... Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to be affected. To modify the velocity of a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2.

From locator... To locator... Determines the start and end point of the part to be affected. It is possible to specify measure, beat and resolution.
912 Reference Guide
Riff
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. Transpose
Assignable values: -64 ... +64.

Assignable values: C-1 ... G9

Defines the start and end point of the part to be affected. It is possible to specify the measure, beat and resolution.
Assignable values: -64 ... +64.
Determines the value of the transposition (in semitone steps).
Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to be affected. To transpose a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2.
Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to be affected. To transpose a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2.
Determines the value of the transposition (in semitone steps).
Defines the start and end point of the part to be affected. It is possible to specify the measure, beat and resolution.
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9
Transpose
Edit Style 913
Riff
Variation
Transposition in semitone steps.
Transpose
Edit Style 913

Transpose
Variation
Transposition in semitone steps.
Microscope
The Microscope allows you to modify every single event recorded in the tracks. The Event List shown at the center of the display shows all the events recorded.
Event List
track in edit
ACCESS TO THE EVENT EDIT

1. Select the track where you want to edit the events in the Event List. 2. Use the / cursor buttons to scroll through the events. The selected notes are played automatically. 3. Select the parameter to be changed using the / cursor buttons. 4. Use the DIAL to change the selected parameters.
measure beat resolution
Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Gate event type (Status)
PROGRAMMABLE EVENTS AND PARAMETERS

The Status column shows the type of event. One or more parameters can be changed for each event. See the next page for a table of events and their parameters.
SHOW... (F2)
Opens a dialog window where it is possible to select the events that will be displayed in the Event List. Set the events to mask to Off
SELECT RIFF... (F1)

Selects the riff to edit. Select the variation and the riff in the dialog window
Set the parameters and press ENTER.
914 Reference Guide
Pitch Bend
EVENTS TABLE AND RELATVE PARAMETERS
Edit Style 915
Program Change
Note
STATUS
VALUE 1
Note name [C1 G9]
Key On Velocity
VALUE 2
Bank Select MSB Bank Select MSB message. To select message. Not the SK760/880 banks, necessary to select use numbers 1 16 the SK760/880 [1 128] sounds [1 128]
Poly Touch
Mono Touch
Control Change
Value of MSB (Most Significant Byte). Effectifve value of bending. [063 = down 64 = neutral 65127 = up] Control Change Value
Pitch Bend
Value of MSB (Most Significant Byte). Effectifve value of bending. [063 = down 64 = neutral 65127 = up]
Control Change
Control Change Value
Poly Touch
Mono Touch
Key Off Velocity
VALUE 3
Edit Style 915

EVENTS TABLE AND RELATVE PARAMETERS

STATUS Note
VALUE 1 Note name [C1 G9]
VALUE 2 Key On Velocity
VALUE 3 Key Off Velocity
GATE Note Length expressed as the Sequencer resolution (q=192) [0 63323]
Program Change
Bank Select MSB message. To select the SK760/880 banks, use numbers 1 16 [1 128]
Bank Select MSB message. Not necessary to select the SK760/880 sounds [1 128]
Note Length expressed as the Sequencer resolution (q=192) [0 63323] GATE
INS: (X) (F3)

Inserts the event specified in the INS. TYPE function at the current cursor position. To position the inserted event precisely, modify its locator (the parameters to the left of the Status column). The events are inserted with the following default parameter values:
Status Note: P. Ch Contr. P.Bend M.Tch P.Tch 1V C4 1 1 0 0 C4 2V 64 1 0 64 ---0 ---3V 64 1 ------Gate 128
DELETE (F6)
Deletes the selected event.
CATCH LOCATOR (F7)

Selects the event currently playing, or the event immediately after the current riff position.
GO TO LOC... (F8)
Takes the cursor directly to the first event in the specified measure. The number can be entered using the DIAL.
Specify the locator and press ENTER to confirm.
INS TYPE... (F4)

Opens a dialog window where you can select the type of event to insert manually with the Ins: (x) function.
916 Reference Guide
The Bass tracks rest unchanged and cannot be altered. Program the Intro, Ending and Fill of the 4 Variations to create a complete Style.
PARAMETERS
Mask Activates the Mask function.
Arranger tracks
Options: On, Off.
The Basic Variation 2 generates the Basics of Variations 1 and 2. The Basic Variation 4 generates the Basics of Variations 3 and 4. To obtain the best results, program your Variations with all 6 accompaniment tracks (Acc.1,2,3,4,5,6) as well as Drums and Bass.
When the Mask parameter is enabled (ON), the Basic Variation 2 automatically generates Basic Variation 1, while Basic Variation 4 generates the Basic Variation 3.
Deactivates the individual Arrangement parts (A1...A6) of each Variation. For example, if you have programmed tracks A1...A6 of Variation 2 and you want to mask A4, A5 and A6 for Variation 1, A2 and A3 for Variation 2, program the first two lines as follows:
V1 = Off/Off/Off/A4/A5/A6
V2 = Off/A2/A3/Off/Off/Off
Activates the Mask function.
Edit Style 917
Mask
PARAMETERS
The idea is to reduce your Style recording times by recording 2 Variations and exploit the automatic features to create a Style with 4 Variations. Then, using the Arranger Tracks function, mask one or two accompaniment sections in one or two Variation to reduce the instrumental content of the respective accompaniments. Arranger tracks
Options: On, Off.
When the Mask parameter is enabled (ON), the Basic Variation 2 automatically generates Basic Variation 1, while Basic Variation 4 generates the Basic Variation 3.
The Basic Variation 2 generates the Basics of Variations 1 and 2. The Basic Variation 4 generates the Basics of Variations 3 and 4. To obtain the best results, program your Variations with all 6 accompaniment tracks (Acc.1,2,3,4,5,6) as well as Drums and Bass.
Program the Intro, Ending and Fill of the 4 Variations to create a complete Style.
The Bass tracks rest unchanged and cannot be altered.
The idea is to reduce your Style recording times by recording 2 Variations and exploit the automatic features to create a Style with 4 Variations. Then, using the Arranger Tracks function, mask one or two accompaniment sections in one or two Variation to reduce the instrumental content of the respective accompaniments.
The Mask function allows you to program the Basic elements of two Variations (Var 2 and 4) in order to automatically obtain the Basic elements of the remaining two Variations (Var 1 and 3).
Mask
For example, if you have programmed tracks A1...A6 of Variation 2 and you want to mask A4, A5 and A6 for Variation 1, A2 and A3 for Variation 2, program the first two lines as follows:
Deactivates the individual Arrangement parts (A1...A6) of each Variation.
V2 = Off/A2/A3/Off/Off/Off
V1 = Off/Off/Off/A4/A5/A6
Edit Style 917

Mask
The Mask function allows you to program the Basic elements of two Variations (Var 2 and 4) in order to automatically obtain the Basic elements of the remaining two Variations (Var 1 and 3).
DRUM MASK (F7/F8)

Opens the Drum mask dialog window. As in the Mask function for the Arrangement tracks, the Drum Mask excludes individual percussive sounds from the Drum tracks of the Variations. Four keyboards (or drumkits) appear in the dialog window, each representing the Drum track (DR) of the four different variations. Select the variation with the cursor buttons / . Play the notes corresponding to the percussion instruments to exclude them from the selected variation. The excluded notes are denoted by a small black line on white notes and a white line on the black notes. Play the same note to cancel the line and to play the sound in the selected variation. Press ENTER to confirm the programming, or ESCAPE to cancel.
Drum track of Variation 1 showing masked Percussive instruments
918 Reference Guide
The Edit Effect environment contains general parameters that affect the instrument as a whole (amount of general reverb), Performance parameters (effects assigned to the DSPs), and track parameters (amount of effects sends).
EFFECTS TYPE (F1)

Edit Effects - Effects type selection

The Edit Effect environment contains general parameters that affect the instrument as a whole (amount of general reverb), Performance parameters (effects assigned to the DSPs), and track parameters (amount of effects sends).
Press the EFFECTS button in the EDIT section followed by ENTER (or the page button) to gain access to the Edit Effect environment.
Group A & B Eff1. The Reverb selector. Rotating the Dial when this parameter is selected scrolls through the 24 available Reverb effects. Reverbs: refer to the table on page 5 for a detailed list of the Reverb effects. Vol. General Reverb level (volume). Assignable values: 0 ... 127.
EFFECTS
ENTER
The SK760/880 models (without the optional Audio/Video card) show the Edit Effect environment with only one editor. The SK760/880 with A.V card, shows two editors; Effect and Vocal Processor (see page 10. 7).
This function assigns the effects to the DSP. Each Performance can have its own effect and the general level (volume) can be regulated. The effect levels for each track are adjusted using the Send level function.
Page stored in Performance
ESCAPE
Group A & B Eff2. The modulation effect selector (delay/chorus/flanger, etc). Rotating the Dial when this parameter is selected scrolls through the 32 available Modulation effects. Effects: refer to the table on page 6 for a detailed list of the modulation effects. Vol. General Modulation effect Level (volume). Assignable values: 0 ... 127. Group A & B Effect 2 to Effect 1: Determines the quantity of feedback of Eff2 into Eff1. Assignable values: 0 (no feedback) ... 127 (maximum feedback of the signal).

EFFECTS TYPE (F1)
10 Edit Effect
Note: Save the modifications with STORE PERFORMANCE. The parameter configurations that are memorized to the Performances show the letter in the top left hand corner of the Edit I.D. Icon.
Note: Save the modifications with STORE PERFORMANCE. The parameter configurations that are memorized to the Performances show the letter in the top left hand corner of the Edit I.D. Icon.
Edit Effects - Effects type selection
This function assigns the effects to the DSP. Each Performance can have its own effect and the general level (volume) can be regulated. The effect levels for each track are adjusted using the Send level function.
The SK760/880 models (without the optional Audio/Video card) show the Edit Effect environment with only one editor. The SK760/880 with A.V card, shows two editors; Effect and Vocal Processor (see page 10. 7).

Group A & B Eff1. The Reverb selector. Rotating the Dial when this parameter is selected scrolls through the 24 available Reverb effects. Reverbs: refer to the table on page 5 for a detailed list of the Reverb effects. Vol. General Reverb level (volume). Assignable values: 0 ... 127.
Group A & B Effect 2 to Effect 1: Determines the quantity of feedback of Eff2 into Eff1. Assignable values: 0 (no feedback) ... 127 (maximum feedback of the signal).
Group A & B Eff2. The modulation effect selector (delay/chorus/flanger, etc). Rotating the Dial when this parameter is selected scrolls through the 32 available Modulation effects. Effects: refer to the table on page 6 for a detailed list of the modulation effects. Vol. General Modulation effect Level (volume). Assignable values: 0 ... 127.
Edit Effect 101

10 Edit Effect
EFFECTS 1
Press the EFFECTS button in the EDIT section followed by ENTER (or the page button) to gain access to the Edit Effect environment.
ENTER
ESCAPE
Page stored in Performance
Performance
Performance
Edit Effect 101
SEND LEVEL (F2)

This function controls the amount of effect assigned to each track. The zero level corresponds to a deactivated effect for the track. Grp (Group) In Style/RealTime mode, the Group parameter cannot be selected. The accompaniment tracks are processed by the Group B effects. The keyboard tracks are processed by the Group A effects. In Song mode, the Group parameter can be switched from A to B and vice versa. E1 (Effect 1 - Reverbs) Regulates the send level of Effect 1 (reverb) for each track.
GENERAL EFF1 BALANCE (F3)

Value added or subtracted from the general reverb level, regardless of the selected Performance. Allows you to adapt the reverberation of the SK760/880 to the natural reverb of the surroundings. The reverb duration varies according to the dimensions and absorption characteristics of the surroundings in which you play. You can program the SK760/880 reverb in order to obtain the best results over headphones, or for home listening, and then regulate this parameter to adapt the reverb to the surroundings in which you play in public. The setting is not retained in memory at power down.
Assignable values: 0 (dry) ... 127 (wet).

E2 (Effects 2 - Modulations) Regulates the send level of Effect 2 (modulations) for each track.
Assignable values: 0% (all dry) ... 100% (all wet). The value of 70% corresponds to the factory set value.
Assignable values: 0 (dry) ... 127 (wet).
Track in edit
Edit Effects - Send level (Style/RealTime mode)

Edit Effects - General Effect Balance
102 Reference Guide
The tables at the end of this chapter list the Effect types and relative values of the parameters. Time required to pass from slow to fast or vice versa.
Rev.Time (Reverb Time)
Delay (reverbs)
Feedback (delays)
H.F.Decay (High Frequency Decay) Modulation velocity of chorus and flanger effects. Decay of the high frequencies. The parameter indicates the final frequency of the filter. The decay of the high frequencies has a longer duration than that of the low frequencies. Feedback (phasers and flangers) Freq.Modul. (Frequency Modulation)
Interaction of the delay with itself. Determines the number of repetitions of the delay. Feedback (phasers and flangers) Interaction of the phaser or flanger with itself. Determines the harmonic amount of the effect. Freq.Modul. (Frequency Modulation) Modulation velocity of chorus and flanger effects. Depth Depth of the action of the effect. Feedback (Distortion) H.F.Decay (High Frequency Decay)
DSP1 Parameters (GrpA-Eff1)
DSP3 Parameters (GrpB-Eff1) DSP4 Parameters (GrpB-Eff2)
Edit Effects - Effect programming (Edit of the Effect assigned to the Performance)
Initial delay between the emission of the original sound (dry signal) and the reverb (wet signal).
Decay of the high frequencies. The parameter indicates the final frequency of the filter. The decay of the high frequencies has a longer duration than that of the low frequencies.
Speed (rotary effects)
Time required to pass from slow to fast or vice versa. The tables at the end of this chapter list the Effect types and relative values of the parameters. Rotary
Slow/fast velocity.
Decay time of the reverb.
Saturation of the distortion. Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter. L.P.Filter (Low Pass Filter)
Delay (reverbs)
Rev.Time (Reverb Time)
Editor of the currently selected effect. The parameter values and parameter configurations vary according to the Effect type selected.
EFFECTS PROGRAMMING (F4)
DSP3 Parameters (GrpB-Eff1)
DSP4 Parameters (GrpB-Eff2)
Initial delay between the emission of the original sound (dry signal) and the reverb (wet signal). Depth of the action of the effect. Depth
Saturation of the distortion.
Decay time of the reverb.
Edit Effects - Effect programming (Edit of the Effect assigned to the Performance)
Slow/fast velocity.
Rotary
Speed (rotary effects)
Feedback (Distortion)
Interaction of the phaser or flanger with itself. Determines the harmonic amount of the effect.
Interaction of the delay with itself. Determines the number of repetitions of the delay.
Feedback (delays)
Velocity of the delay repetition.
Delay (delays)
Duration of the reverb (Early type reverbs).
Diffusion
Dimensions of the simulated room. The time lapse between the first reflection and the remainder of the reverb.
Room Size
Edit Effect 103

EFFECTS PROGRAMMING (F4)

Room Size Dimensions of the simulated room. The time lapse between the first reflection and the remainder of the reverb. Diffusion Duration of the reverb (Early type reverbs). L.P.Filter (Low Pass Filter) Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter. Delay (delays) Velocity of the delay repetition.
Editor of the currently selected effect. The parameter values and parameter configurations vary according to the Effect type selected.
Edit Effect 103
Semitone Transposition in semitone steps. Detune Detuning over a range of 100 Cents. Low Gain Enhancement of the low frequencies. Medium Gain Enhancement of the mid frequencies. High Gain Enhancement of the high frequencies.
104 Reference Guide
Effect 1 - Reverb table
Effect 1 - Reverbs 1 Hall 1 2 Hall 2 3 Hall 3 4 Warm Hall 5 Long Hall 6 Stereo Concert 7 Chamber 8 Studio Room 1 9 Studio Room 2 10 Studio Room 3 11 Club Room 1 12 Club Room 2 13 Club Room 3 14 Vocal 15 Metal Vocal 16 Plate 1 17 Plate 2 18 Church 19 Mountains 20 Falling 21 Early 1 22 Early 2 23 Early 3 24 Stereo
Rev. Time [0 (0.1 s) 99 (10s)] Room Size [0 64] Room Size [0 64] Room Size [0 64] Room Size [0 64]
Delay [0 ms 99 ms Diffusion [0 127] Diffusion [0 127] Diffusion [0 127] Diffusion [0 127]
H.F.Decay [0=Bypass 10 kHz] L.P.Filter [0-Bypass10-16kHz] L.P.Filter [0-Bypass10-16kHz] L.P.Filter [0-Bypass10-16kHz] L.P.Filter [0-Bypass10-16kHz]
Edit Effect 105

Effect 1 - Reverb table

Effect 1 - Reverbs 1 Hall 1 2 Hall 2 3 Hall 3 4 Warm Hall 5 Long Hall 6 Stereo Concert 7 Chamber 8 Studio Room 1 9 Studio Room 2 10 Studio Room 3 11 Club Room 1 12 Club Room 2 13 Club Room 3 14 Vocal 15 Metal Vocal 16 Plate 1 17 Plate 2 18 Church 19 Mountains 20 Falling 21 Early 1 22 Early 2 23 Early 3 24 Stereo
Rev. Time [0 (0.1 s) 99 (10s)] Room Size [0 64] Room Size [0 64] Room Size [0 64] Room Size [0 64]
Delay [0 ms 99 ms Diffusion [0 127] Diffusion [0 127] Diffusion [0 127] Diffusion [0 127]
H.F.Decay [0=Bypass 10 kHz] L.P.Filter [0-Bypass10-16kHz] L.P.Filter [0-Bypass10-16kHz] L.P.Filter [0-Bypass10-16kHz] L.P.Filter [0-Bypass10-16kHz]
Edit Effect 105
Effect 2 - Delay/Chorus/Flanger/Modulation table

Effect 2 - Delay/Chorus/Flanger/Modulations 1 Mono Delay 1 Delay [0 (0ms)125 (500ms)] 2 Mono Delay 2 3 Stereo Delay 1 4 Stereo Delay 2 5 Multitap Delay 1 6 Multitap Delay 2 7 Ping-pong 8 Panmix Delay [0-(0ms)125-(500ms)] 9 Chorus 1 Freq.Mod [0-0kHz30-6kHz] 10 Chorus 2 11 Ensemble 1 12 Ensemble 2 13 Phaser 1 Freq.Mod [0-0kHz30-6kHz] 14 Phaser 2 15 Flanger 1 16 Flanger 2 17 Chorus/Delay1 Delay [0-(0ms)125-(500ms)] 18 Chorus/Delay2 19 Flanger/Delay1 20 Flanger/Delay2 21 Dubbing Delay [0-(0ms)125-(500ms)] 22 Distortion Depth [0% 100%] 23 Distortion/Delay Depth [0% 100%] 24 Pitch Shifter 1 Semitone [-12 +12] 25 Pitch Shifter 2 26 Shift/Delay Delay [0-(0ms)125-(500ms)] 27 Rotary 1 Speed [1s 11s] 28 Rotary 2 29 EQ Jazz Low Gain 30 EQ Pop 31 EQ Rock 32 EQ Classic Feedback [0% 99%] Freq.Mod [0-bypass30-6kHz] Depth [0 100] Depth [0 100] Freq.Mod [0-bypass30-6kHz] Feedback [0% 99%] Feedback [0% 100%] Delay [0-(0ms)125-(500ms)] Detune [-100c +100c] Feedback [0% 99%] Rotary [slow/fast] Medium Gain L.P.Filter [0-bypass10-16kHz] Depth [0 100] L.P.Filter [0-bypass10-16kHz] Feedback [0% 99%] Depth [0 100] L.P.Filter [0-bypass10-16kHz] L.P.Filter [0-bypass10-16kHz] Feedback [0% 99%] L.P.Filter [0-bypass10-16kHz] Detune [-100c +100c] L.P.Filter [0-bypass10-16kHz] High Gain
106 Reference Guide
INTRODUCTION TO THE VOCAL PROCESSOR
4. The rear-panel MIC/LINE INPUT 1 is predisposed to accept a Microphone signal in order to be processed by the Vocal Processor function.
The Vocal Processor function allows solo vocalists to add vocal harmonies to their performance. Up to 4 extra melody lines can be added to any kind of sound source (voice, guitar, synth, etc.).
3. In the Edit General environment, the Vocal Processor implements an Equalizer (the Mic/ Line editor) which affects the Microphone signal only.
If your SK does not have the on-board Vocal Processor, it can be easily upgraded with the Vocal Processor function by installing the optional Audio/Video + Vocal Processor and loading the relative disk-based Operating System software.
2. The Vocal Processor implements new controlling functions assignable to the Pads and Pedals. Also implemented are specific MIDI Controllers to control the Vocal Processor via MIDI.
EFFECTS
ENTER
FEATURES OFFERED BY THE VOCAL PROCESSOR
1. The Vocal Processor is a function which can add vocal harmonies to your voice according to various preset configurations which enrich the vocal backings automatically.
1
1. The Vocal Processor is a function which can add vocal harmonies to your voice according to various preset configurations which enrich the vocal backings automatically.
FEATURES OFFERED BY THE VOCAL PROCESSOR
2. The Vocal Processor implements new controlling functions assignable to the Pads and Pedals. Also implemented are specific MIDI Controllers to control the Vocal Processor via MIDI.
If your SK does not have the on-board Vocal Processor, it can be easily upgraded with the Vocal Processor function by installing the optional Audio/Video + Vocal Processor and loading the relative disk-based Operating System software.
3. In the Edit General environment, the Vocal Processor implements an Equalizer (the Mic/ Line editor) which affects the Microphone signal only.
The Vocal Processor function allows solo vocalists to add vocal harmonies to their performance. Up to 4 extra melody lines can be added to any kind of sound source (voice, guitar, synth, etc.).
4. The rear-panel MIC/LINE INPUT 1 is predisposed to accept a Microphone signal in order to be processed by the Vocal Processor function.
INTRODUCTION TO THE VOCAL PROCESSOR
Vocal Processor (Edit Effect)
Edit Effect- Main Menu
Press the EFFECTS button in the EDIT section to gain access to Edit Effect, select the Vocal Proc. editor and press ENTER to gain access.
If your SK760/880 contains the Vocal Processor function, in Edit Effect youll find parameters for Effects editing (Effect editor) and the Vocal Processor (Vocal Proc. editor).
Vocal Processor 107

Vocal Processor (Edit Effect)

If your SK760/880 contains the Vocal Processor function, in Edit Effect youll find parameters for Effects editing (Effect editor) and the Vocal Processor (Vocal Proc. editor). Press the EFFECTS button in the EDIT section to gain access to Edit Effect, select the Vocal Proc. editor and press ENTER to gain access.
ENTER
EFFECTS
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
Edit Effect- Main Menu

Vocal Processor 107
CONNECTIONS
To work with the Vocal Processor, the minimum amount of equipment you will need is: 1. A low impedance microphone with a standard jack connector on the output end of the cable. 2. A switch-action pedal (optional). 3. An amplification system for instrument not fitted with internal amplification (domestic hifi unit, amplified speakers, mixer, etc.). Switch Pedal: plug the switch pedal into PEDAL 1 or 2 jack and assign the pedal one of the Pedal functions to control the Vocal Processor (Vocal On/Off, Vocal Mute, Mode recall, etc.). The Mute function can also be assigned to the Pads.
PEDAL
ACTIVATE THE VOCAL PROCESSOR

The Vocal Processor operates only if both the Mic/Line On/Off and Vocal Processor On/Off options in Edit General are enabled. For example if, after loading the Vocal Processor operating system, you attempt to use the Vocal Processor, youll find that it will not respond. Therefore, before gaining access to the Vocal Processor editor, it is more convenient to go into Edit General, enter the Mic/Line editor and enable the Mic/Line On/Off and Vocal On/Off options with the corresponding Soft buttons.
DAMPER
VOLUME
Press ESCAPE or EFFECTS to exit Edit General and return to the Edit Effects section. Microphone: connect the Microphone to the MIC/ LINE 1 jack. You can regulate the microphones sensitivity (Gain) with the small knob 1. In Edit General, Mic/Line editor, you will find the Mic/Line On/Off and Vocal On/Off options and an Equalizer which affects the microphone input signal only.
MIC / LINE IN
The instrument will memorize the status of the selected parameters even after power down.
108 Vocal Processor
Select the Vocal Processor editor from the main Edit Effects menu with the cursor buttons ( / ) and press Enter to access the editor. It is also possible to enter the editor directly using the Page scroll buttons ( ). The parameter configuration displayed depends on the mode selected. Three operating modes are available: Chord / Vocoder / Unison.
You can regulate the Volume and Pan parameters of each single voice (F1/F2). You can mute or activate the various voices with the function buttons A-F.
CHORD (F5)
N.B. THIS MODE IS OPERATIVE ONLY IN STYLE MODE The Volume and Pan controls are common to all three operating modes.
Vocal Processor - Chord mode, Volume option
N.B. THIS MODE IS OPERATIVE ONLY IN STYLE MODE
CHORD mode recognizes the chords you play and determines the most appropriate harmony intervals for your singing. This mode produces up to four voices according to the recognized chord and chord type (Close or Smart - see Vocal Processor Edit). The harmonic voices are generated within the octaves above and below the input note with two different intervals: one interval near the input note (Close) and another further away (Extreme). The interval extensions vary according to the chord played . a muted voice shows the icon
The Harmony parameter controls the general volume of the Vocal Processor:
The Volume page operates in the same manner as the same page in Edit Mixer; in other words, you can regulate the levels with the Dial or Sliders. The Volume and Pan controls are common to all three operating modes.
Vocal Processor - Chord mode, Pan option

Vocal Processor - Chord mode, Volume option
CHORD mode recognizes the chords you play and determines the most appropriate harmony intervals for your singing. This mode produces up to four voices according to the recognized chord and chord type (Close or Smart - see Vocal Processor Edit). The harmonic voices are generated within the octaves above and below the input note with two different intervals: one interval near the input note (Close) and another further away (Extreme). The interval extensions vary according to the chord played .
Vocal Processor 109
CHORD (F5)
Three operating modes are available: Chord / Vocoder / Unison.
The parameter configuration displayed depends on the mode selected.
It is also possible to enter the editor directly using the Page scroll buttons ( ).
Select the Vocal Processor editor from the main Edit Effects menu with the cursor buttons ( / ) and press Enter to access the editor.
Vocal Processor
Vocal Processor - Chord mode, Pan option
The Volume page operates in the same manner as the same page in Edit Mixer; in other words, you can regulate the levels with the Dial or Sliders.
The Harmony parameter controls the general volume of the Vocal Processor:
You can mute or activate the various voices with the function buttons A-F.
You can regulate the Volume and Pan parameters of each single voice (F1/F2).
The four voices can be selected from the six available:
Ex: an active voice shows the icon
Voice 1 : Extreme Lower octave Voice 2 : Close Lower octave Voice 3 : Extreme Upper octave Voice 4 : Close Upper octave Main : doubles the input voice Bass : doubles the input voice one octave down.
Vocal Processor 109

Vocal Processor
The four voices can be selected from the six available: Voice 1 : Extreme Lower octave Voice 2 : Close Lower octave Voice 3 : Extreme Upper octave Voice 4 : Close Upper octave Main : doubles the input voice Bass : doubles the input voice one octave down.
Ex: an active voice shows the icon a muted voice shows the icon
NB. The number of voices produced by the Vocal Processor is always a maximum of 4. Example: if voices 1, 2, 3 and 4 are active in order to activate the Main or Bass voice, you must mute one of the active voices.
VOCODER (F6)
VOCODER mode operates both in Style mode as well as Song mode. The VOCODER mode operates by referring to the notes played in real time on the keyboard, or reproduced by the sequencer, and the Vocal Processor responds by shifting the pitch of your voice exactly to the notes played. The Vocoder is always tied to one of the tracks (see Vocal Processor - Edit). You can regulate the Volume and Pan parameters of each single voice (F1/F2). You can mute or activate the various voices with the function buttons A-F. In VOCODER mode, the Main and Bass voices are not present. The assigned Vocoder track is able to receive Pitch and Modulation messages.
Vocal Processor - Vocoder mode, Pan option Vocal Processor - Vocoder mode, Volume option
1010 Vocal Processor
Each voice is doubled with a slight detune effect above and below the input note according to the following scale. Voice 1 = +12 cents Voice 2 = + 7 cents Voice 3 = 7 cents Voice 4 = 12 cents
Vocal Processor - Edit
You can regulate the Volume and Pan parameters of each single voice (F1/F2). You can mute or activate the various voices with the function buttons A-F.
In UNISON mode, the Main and Bass voices are not present.
Vocal Processor - Unison mode, Pan option
EDIT (F3)
Each voice is doubled with a slight detune effect above and below the input note according to the following scale.
UNISON mode operates both in Style mode as well as Song mode. In this mode, the Vocal Processor automatically produces the same note as the input note, doubling up to 4 Voices.
LFO is a periodic (repeating) control source which produces a low speed (low frequency) waveform which is applied to the voice Pitch to obtain a cyclic modulation. Because of its periodic nature, the LFO applied to the pitch creates the Vibrato effect to simulate the natural vibrations of the human voice.
Vocal Processor 1011
UNISON (F7)
Vocal Processor - Unison mode, Volume option
About the LFO
You can regulate the Volume and Pan parameters of each single voice (F1/F2).
Vocal Processor - Edit
Sine
Square
Voice 1 = +12 cents Voice 2 = + 7 cents Voice 3 = 7 cents Voice 4 = 12 cents
The Edit page allows you to apply a Low Frequency Oscillator (LFO) to the voices produced by the Vocal Processor. The modifications affect the voices globally, not individually. The parameters of the Edit page are common to all three operating modes.
LFO is a periodic (repeating) control source which produces a low speed (low frequency) waveform which is applied to the voice Pitch to obtain a cyclic modulation. Because of its periodic nature, the LFO applied to the pitch creates the Vibrato effect to simulate the natural vibrations of the human voice.
Vocal Processor - Unison mode, Pan option
Triangle Saw-tooth
Random Sample&Hold

About the LFO
The Edit page allows you to apply a Low Frequency Oscillator (LFO) to the voices produced by the Vocal Processor. The modifications affect the voices globally, not individually. The parameters of the Edit page are common to all three operating modes.
EDIT (F3)
In UNISON mode, the Main and Bass voices are not present.
You can mute or activate the various voices with the function buttons A-F.
Square
Sine
Random Sample&Hold

UNISON (F7)

UNISON mode operates both in Style mode as well as Song mode. In this mode, the Vocal Processor automatically produces the same note as the input note, doubling up to 4 Voices.
Triangle Saw-tooth
Vocal Processor - Unison mode, Volume option
THE EDIT PAGE PARAMETERS

LFO Wave
VOICE SET (F4)

In this page, it is possible to recall up to 16 Custom configurations. Each Custom recalls a different setting of all the Vocoder parameters (Volume, Pan, Mute, Mode, lfo,...). The Custom settings are not programmable. You can use the Custom Voice Sets as a starting point for your configurations and, any subsequent changes to the settings can be memorized to the Performances.
Selects the waveform of the low frequency oscillation. Assignable values: Off, Sinus, Triangle, Saw, Square, Random, Sample/Hold.
LFO Rate
Determines the velocity of the LFO. Assignable values: 1 200.

LFO Depth
Determines the depth of action of the LFO. Assignable values: 0 7.

LFO Delay
Determines the delay before the entry of the LFO. Entry of the LFO is gradual. Assignable values: 0 64.
Pitch Filter
Vocal Processor - Voice Set
Checks the pitch of the voices. In Free mode, all pitch imperfections detected due to minor changes in the pitch of the voice rest unchanged. In Auto Correction mode, the imperfections are automatically corrected. Assignable values: Free, Auto Correction.
Chord Type
LOCK (F8)
The LOCK function locks the current Vocal settings to protect them from subsequent Performance changes. To lock the current setting, press the function button F8 to activate the Lock. The icon is shown in negative highlight and the small lock closes.
Selects from two different modes of harmonization according to the chord played. Assignable values: Close and Smart.. [See also Harmony Type in Edit Tracks/Splits].
Vocoder Track
Selects the track exploited by the Vocoder. Assignable values: 1 32.

Transpose
Transposes the Vocoder track one octave above standard pitch. Assignable values: Off, Octave+.

Vocal Processor - Chord mode, Volume option, Lock on
In addition to the above, the following additional modifications are implemented by the Vocal Processor:
PADS AND PEDALS

In Edit Controllers/Pads. The following additional assignable functions are implemented for the pads and pedals: Vocal On/Off (Pedals/Pads) Vocal Volume (solo Pedals Assign.) Vocal Custom 1-16 (Pedals/Pads) Vocal Mute (Pedals/Pads) Vocal Chord/Vocoder/Unison (Pedals/Pads)
NB. All the parameters described above can be memorized to the Performances.
Edit Controllers/Pads - Vocal Volume and Vocal On/Off assigned to the pedals
Edit Controllers/Pads - Vocal Volume and Vocal On/Off assigned to the pedals
NB. All the parameters described above can be memorized to the Performances.
Edit General - Equalizer
The following additional assignable functions are implemented for the pads and pedals:
In Edit Controllers/Pads.
PADS AND PEDALS
In addition to the above, the following additional modifications are implemented by the Vocal Processor:
Additional changes
Vocal Chord/Vocoder/Unison (Pedals/Pads)
Vocal Mute (Pedals/Pads)
Vocal Custom 1-16 (Pedals/Pads)
Vocal Volume (solo Pedals Assign.)
Vocal On/Off (Pedals/Pads)
Edit General - Equalizer
NB. These parameters are memorized in Edit General.
The Mic/Line On/Off option enables/disables the MIC/LINE interface.
The Vocal On/Off option enables/disables the Vocal Processor
The Equalizer parameters exclusively affect the Microphone signals at input 1 of the Mic/Line interface.
The Mic/Line In editor includes an Equalizer which prompts the following window when activated:
In Edit General, the Mic/Line editor with the Audio/Video card and vocal Processor installed.
VOCAL ON/OFF AND EQUALIZER
Low gain
Middle gain
Middle Freq
High gain

Additional changes
VOCAL ON/OFF AND EQUALIZER

In Edit General, the Mic/Line editor with the Audio/Video card and vocal Processor installed. The Mic/Line In editor includes an Equalizer which prompts the following window when activated: High gain Middle Freq Middle gain Low gain
The Equalizer parameters exclusively affect the Microphone signals at input 1 of the Mic/Line interface. The Vocal On/Off option enables/disables the Vocal Processor The Mic/Line On/Off option enables/disables the MIC/LINE interface.
NB. These parameters are memorized in Edit General.
SPECIAL MIDI CONTROLLERS ASSOCIATED TO THE VOCAL PROCESSOR

To control the Vocal Processor via MIDI, the following special MIDI controllers (Common Channel) are available:
Cntrl No. 12 13 14 Description Vocal volume Vocal On/Off Mode recall Value 0 127 0 Off/On (toggle) 64-127 On 0 = Chord mode 1 - Vocoder mode 2 = Unison 15 Voice Set recall 1=1 2=2 3=3 15 = 15 16 = 16 85 Voice Mute mode 0 = Voice 1 1 = Voice 2 2 = Voice 3 3 = Voice 4 4 = Main 5 = Bass
LOADING MIDI FILES CONTAINING A VOCODER TRACK

When a MIDI File containing a Vocoder track is loaded from disk, the Vocoder track sets to track 5 by default.
Press the MIDI button in the EDIT section to gain access to the Edit MIDI environment.

MIDI CHANNELS (F1)

This parameter assigns the MIDI channel (116) and MIDI port (A or B) to each track.
Note: Save any modifications with STORE PERFORMANCE. The Performance memorizes pages whose icons shows the symbol .
The Performances are independently programmable for a MIDI configuration.

Press the MIDI button in the EDIT section to gain access to the Edit MIDI environment.
The Edit MIDI environment contains general parameters and parameters pertaining to single tracks.
The MIDI Lock option (soft button F8) locks the current configuration for all Performances, overriding the individual MIDI configurations of the Performances when you change Style or Performance.
MIDI 2
The Performances are independently programmable for a MIDI configuration.
Note: Save any modifications with STORE PERFORMANCE. The Performance memorizes pages whose icons shows the symbol .
The MIDI Lock option (soft button F8) locks the current configuration for all Performances, overriding the individual MIDI configurations of the Performances when you change Style or Performance.
The Edit MIDI environment contains general parameters and parameters pertaining to single tracks.
This parameter assigns the MIDI channel (116) and MIDI port (A or B) to each track.
Page memorized to the Performance
Edit MIDI - MIDI Channels (MIDI Channels and ports for each track)

MIDI CHANNELS (F1)
11 Edit MIDI
Edit MIDI - MIDI Channels (MIDI Channels and ports for each track)
Page memorized to the Performance
Performance
Edit MIDI 111

11 Edit MIDI
MIDI 2
MIDI OUT port (A or B) Track in edit MIDI OUT channel (1...16)
Performance Track in edit
MIDI OUT port (A or B)
Edit MIDI 111
CONFIGURATION (F2)
This function sets the track configuration which determines how the tracks are connected to MIDI IN, to the keyboard, to the sound generator and MIDI OUT. The keyboard icon also indicates the Common Channel (equivalent to the incorporated keyboard of SK760/880). Pass from one icon to another with the cursor buttons. Modify the status of the icons with the DIAL (when the icon shows, the parameter is on; when the parameter is deactivated, the icon is substituted by OFF). MIDI IN icon When on (icon showing), the track responds to MIDI data received at the MIDI IN port. When OFF, the track does not receive external MIDI data. Keyboard/Common Channel icon When on (icon showing), the track can be played from the keyboard. When OFF, the track cannot be played from the keyboard, but can receive data via MIDI, or it can be exploited by a Song or Style. The icon also corresponds to a master keyboard connected via the Common Channel, which simulates the SK760/880 keyboard and on-board controllers (pedals).
Internal sound generator icon When on (icon showing), the events generated by the track are sent to the internal sound engine. When OFF, the track is not connected to the internal sound engine, but can send data to an expander via MIDI OUT. MIDI OUT icon When on (icon showing), the events generated by the track are sent to an external MIDI device via the MIDI OUT port. When OFF, the track does not transmit MIDI data to external units.
Edit MIDI - Configuration (track configuration - internal/external connections)
MIDI IN
keyboard/ Common Channel
internal sound generator
MIDI OUT
112 Reference Guide
It is possible to program up to 7 MIDI IN filters and 7 MIDI OUT filters for each track.
Options: Off, Program Change, Pitchbend, Mono touch, Poly touch, ControlChange 00...31, ControlChange 64...127.

Hint: To avoid transmitting ProgramChange data to an expander connected to the SK760/880 MIDI OUT, activate the MIDI OUT ProgramChange filter for the track.

This function programs MIDI Filters for data received at MIDI IN and data sent via MIDI OUT.
Edit MIDI - MIDI Filters (filters of data in reception and transmission for each track)
Edit MIDI - MIDI Filters (filters of data in reception and transmission for each track)
Options: Off, Program Change, Pitchbend, Mono touch, Poly touch, ControlChange 00...31, ControlChange 64...127.
It is possible to program up to 7 MIDI IN filters and 7 MIDI OUT filters for each track.
MIDI FILTERS (F3)
Hint: To avoid transmitting ProgramChange data to an expander connected to the SK760/880 MIDI OUT, activate the MIDI OUT ProgramChange filter for the track.
Edit MIDI - General settings
Options: Internal, External.
The Song Position Pointer is received and transmitted with the same precision as MIDI (1 tic = 1/ 24th of a beat). This parameter allows a Song to be stopped at a precise point.
Setting External places SK760/880 on standby, waiting to receive the PLAY, START or STOP command from the external device connected to the instruments MIDI In port. The external device also controls the tempo.
Setting Internal renders SK760/880 independent from the Clock of external MIDI devices.
A MIDI synchronizer to synchronize SK760/880 with external rhythm units and sequencers.
MIDI Clock
This function provides settings that influence the instrument as a whole (saved to the Setup).
GENERAL SETTINGS (F4)
Note: SK760/880 receives or transmits MIDI Clock on the same MIDI port (A or B) as the Common Channel.
Edit MIDI 113

MIDI FILTERS (F3)

GENERAL SETTINGS (F4)

This function provides settings that influence the instrument as a whole (saved to the Setup). MIDI Clock A MIDI synchronizer to synchronize SK760/880 with external rhythm units and sequencers. Setting Internal renders SK760/880 independent from the Clock of external MIDI devices. Setting External places SK760/880 on standby, waiting to receive the PLAY, START or STOP command from the external device connected to the instruments MIDI In port. The external device also controls the tempo. The Song Position Pointer is received and transmitted with the same precision as MIDI (1 tic = 1/ 24th of a beat). This parameter allows a Song to be stopped at a precise point.
This function programs MIDI Filters for data received at MIDI IN and data sent via MIDI OUT.
Options: Internal, External.

Note: SK760/880 receives or transmits MIDI
Clock on the same MIDI port (A or B) as the Common Channel.

Edit MIDI - General settings
Edit MIDI 113
Clock send Determines whether or not the SK760/880 MIDI Clock is transmitted to external MIDI devices. If deactivated, SK760/880 cannot control the tempo and the Start/Stop of MIDI devices connected to the SK760/880 MIDI OUT.
MIDI IN fix velocity Enables the Velocity switch. If this parameter is set to OFF, notes are received via MIDI IN with the correct velocity value. Other values set the indicated value to the notes received.
Options: Off, 1 ... 127.

Options: On, Off.

MIDI Merge Enables data received at MIDI IN to be merged with data transmitted at MIDI OUT. If Merge=Off, the data received at MIDI IN are directed to the internal sound engine and to MIDI THRU. If Merge=On, the data received at MIDI IN are directed to the internal sound engine, to MIDI THRU and MIDI OUT. Unlike data sent from MIDI THRU, the data transmitted via MIDI OUT are processed by the tracks (volume, pan, transpose, velocity curve, MIDI filters).
Hint: Some accordions transmit velocity at a fixed level, not able to be regulated. With this parameter, it is possible to modify the velocity value received by the accordion.

System Exclusive Enables the transmission and reception of system exclusive messages. System Exclusive data control the editing parameters of the instrument, and can cause radical changes in the way SK760/ 880 works. These messages are widely used in the most recent MIDI files, to send editing messages before the start of a Song.
Options: On, Off.

Options: On, Off.

Note: The parameter cannot be programmed
when the COMPUTER port is active (Computer editor of Edit General).

Note: To transmit and receive system exclusive messages, connect both MIDI IN and MIDI OUT of SK760/880 to the MIDI OUT and MIDI IN respectively of the external sequencer (commonly known as the Closed MIDI Loop connection).

MIDI IN Transpose Enables the transposition of data received at MIDI IN. Deactivating this parameter can be useful to avoid unwanted transpositions when you program Songs with a computer. A computer operates as a THRU device. After receiving data by a SK760/880 track which has been transposed, the computer can return the notes to the same track which will transpose them further. This will not occur if MIDI IN Transpose is deactivated.
System Exclusive Channel Sets the MIDI In and Out port and MIDI channel for system exclusive transmissions. The default setting is MIDI ports A and channel 1. SMF Save format Set the function to format 0 or format 1 when you save SK760/880 Songs as MIDI files.
Options: 0, 1.
Options: On, Off.
114 Reference Guide
The table shown below lists the drumkit Program Changes according to the status of the parameter.
Options: On, Off.
MIDI channel 10, General MIDI On - conversion table (automatic) PC-GM 18 9 16 17 24 25 26 32 33 40 41 48 49 128 PC-BS SK760/880 113-2 114-2 115-2 116-2 117-2 118-2 119-2 Standard Room Power
Drumkit GM
Electronic TR-808 Jazz Brush
120-2
Orchestra
Options: On, Off.
The table shown below lists the drumkit Program Changes according to the status of the parameter.
Drumkit SK760/880
DK-STAND1 DK-POWER
DK-ROOM DK-ELECT
DK-HOUSE
DK-JAZZ1
DK-BRUSH DK-ORCH
Edit MIDI 115
Set this parameter to ON in the following situations:
Represents the General MIDI compatibility switch which requires setting when loading or saving MIDI files.
General MIDI
18
PC-GM
MIDI channel 10, General MIDI On - conversion table (automatic)
before saving a perfectly GM compatible MIDI file (the General MIDI On flag is inserted in the file and the Program Changes of the drumkits are converted to Program Changes compatible with General MIDI).
before loading a GM compatible MIDI file which does not contain the GENERAL MIDI ON flag.
PC-BS SK760/880
113-2
before saving a perfectly GM compatible MIDI file (the General MIDI On flag is inserted in the file and the Program Changes of the drumkits are converted to Program Changes compatible with General MIDI).
Standard Drumkit GM
25
17 24
9 16
114-2
116-2
115-2
before loading a GM compatible MIDI file which does not contain the GENERAL MIDI ON flag.
Room Electronic Power
33 40
26 32
118-2
Set this parameter to ON in the following situations:

Jazz TR-808 DK-JAZZ1 DK-ELECT DK-HOUSE
Options: On, Off.

117-2
49 128
41 48
119-2
120-2
Brush
Orchestra
Options: On, Off.
Enables the reception and transmission of the BankSelect MSB (CC00) and BankSelect LSB (CC32) message.
BankSelect
DK-ROOM
DK-BRUSH
DK-STAND1
DK-POWER
DK-ORCH
Drumkit SK760/880
Edit MIDI 115

General MIDI

BankSelect Enables the reception and transmission of the BankSelect MSB (CC00) and BankSelect LSB (CC32) message.
Represents the General MIDI compatibility switch which requires setting when loading or saving MIDI files.
COMMON CHANNEL/ARRANGEMENT (F5)

This page presents parameters common to all Performances. The Common Channel is a MIDI channel dedicated to special operations: simulation of the keyboard and on-board controllers (pedals). transmission of Effects, Performance, Style and Song selected messages to SK760/880. transmission to SK760/880 of chord data for the automatic accompaniment.
Chord to Arr.1 / Chord to Arr.2 Enables the parameters dedicated to the control with a MIDI accordion. They are divided into two parts: Ch - MIDI channel. In - MIDI IN port (A or B). Chord to Arr.1 is dedicated to the chords, Chord to Arr.2 is dedicated to the Bass. The accordionist can send notes for the automatic accompaniment from the chord section, from the bass section, or from both sections. The Common Channel unites to these two channels and their notes contribute to the formation of the chord for the automatic accompaniment.
As an alternative to the Common Channel, chord messages for the accompaniment can be received on the MIDI channels specified by Chord to Arr.1 and Chord to Arr.2, conceived principally for the connection of a MIDI accordion. Common Channel Enables the Common Channel. This parameter is divided into three parts: Ch - MIDI channel assigned to the Common Channel (IN and OUT). In - MIDI IN port (A or B). Out - MIDI OUT port (A or B). The channel assigned to the Common Channel is no longer available for the tracks of the external sequencer. The Common Channel is reserved to special tracks dedicated to the control of effects and other parameters. ProgramChange and ControlChange data received on the Common Channel select Style, Song, Performance, Effects and other parameters listed in the Appendix.
Edit MIDI - Common/Arrangement (Common Channel and arrangement control)

116 Reference Guide
The options are:
Setup - the current general settings of the instrument.
User Style - opens a selection window where you can select either All files or a single user-programmed file.
MIDI Dump: file type selection window.
Note: The System Exclusive parameter in the General Set option of Edit MIDI must be set to ON (ON by default).

Note: The MIDI DUMP operation must be carried out while SK760/880 is in Style/RealTime mode - Style not playing.

Opens the MIDI Dump file selection window, which allows you to select the data to send to another SK760/880, to a MIDI Data Filer, to a sequencer or an editor for computers.
Use the directional Up/Down buttons to select the desired file type and press ENTER to enter the second level file selector. Use the direction arrows to select the desired file and press ENTER again to send the Dump.
Note: SK760/880 receives and transmits the Dump on the same MIDI ports (A or B) as the Common Channel.

MIDI Dump: second level file selection window.
The options are:
MIDI DUMP... (F6)
Setup - the current general settings of the instrument.
Song - opens a selection window where you can select either All files or a single Song (including relative Song-Performance).
Sound - opens a selection window where you can select either All files (including RAMWaves, RAM-Sounds and RAM -Sounds) or a single file from the SK760/880 Sound Library.
Style Performance - opens a selection window where you can select either All files or a single user-programmed file.
Real Performance - opens a selection window where you can select either All files or a single Performance.
Real Performance - opens a selection window where you can select either All files or a single Performance.
User Style - opens a selection window where you can select either All files or a single user-programmed file.
Style Performance - opens a selection window where you can select either All files or a single user-programmed file.
Sound - opens a selection window where you can select either All files (including RAMWaves, RAM-Sounds and RAM -Sounds) or a single file from the SK760/880 Sound Library.
Note: The System Exclusive parameter in the General Set option of Edit MIDI must be set to ON (ON by default).
Note: SK760/880 receives and transmits the Dump on the same MIDI ports (A or B) as the Common Channel.
Use the directional Up/Down buttons to select the desired file type and press ENTER to enter the second level file selector. Use the direction arrows to select the desired file and press ENTER again to send the Dump.

Note: The MIDI DUMP operation must be carried out while SK760/880 is in Style/RealTime mode - Style not playing.
Song - opens a selection window where you can select either All files or a single Song (including relative Song-Performance).
MIDI Dump: second level file selection window.
Edit MIDI 117

MIDI DUMP... (F6)

Opens the MIDI Dump file selection window, which allows you to select the data to send to another SK760/880, to a MIDI Data Filer, to a sequencer or an editor for computers.

MIDI Dump: file type selection window.
Edit MIDI 117
Transmission of data to another SK760/880 1. Connect the MIDI OUT of the transmitting instrument to the MIDI IN of the receiving instrument. Use the MIDI port (A or B) assigned the Common Channel. 2. In the transmitting instrument, select the data to transmit from the MIDI Dump selection window. 3. Press ENTER to start transmitting. A bar graph shows the progression of the transmission. Wait until the data transfer operation is complete. If the MIDI Dump aborted! - Check connections message appears, the transfer was unsuccessful. Check the cable connection and try again. Transmission of data to a sequencer Check that the external sequencer is able to record System Exclusive data. 1. Connect the SK760/880 MIDI OUT to the sequencer MIDI IN. Use the MIDI port (A or B) assigned the Common Channel. 2. In the SK760/880, select the data to transmit from the MIDI Dump selection window. 3. In the sequencer, dedicate a track to the system exclusive data with a generic MIDI channel (Any, All, or similar). 4. Activate the recording in the sequencer. 5. Press ENTER to start transmitting. A bar graph shows the progression of the transmission. Wait until the data transfer operation is complete. If the MIDI Dump aborted! - Check connections message appears, the transfer was unsuccessful. Check the cable connection and try again. 6. Stop the sequencer and check that the data has been received.
Reception of data from a sequencer 1. Connect the SK760/880 MIDI In to the sequencer MIDI OUT. Use the MIDI port (A or B) assigned the Common Channel. 2. Set the sequencer to playback mode. 3. Wait until the data transfer operation is complete and stop the sequencer. 4. Check that SK760/880 has received the system exclusive data correctly.

WARNING - Sending system exclusive data to SK760/880 cancels all data of the same type currently residing in memory. Save the data you wish to conserve before receiving the system exclusive data from the sequencer.

118 Reference Guide
Activate Local Off to program Songs on an external sequencer. SK760/880 transmits data to the external sequencer, and the sequencer returns the data to the SK760/880 internal sound engine.
MIDI OUT MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
Activate Local Off to program Songs on an external sequencer. SK760/880 transmits data to the external sequencer, and the sequencer returns the data to the SK760/880 internal sound engine.
Press F7 to set the instrument for Local Off operation (shown in negative highlight). Local Off operation disconnects the SK760/880 keyboard from the internal sound generator. The keyboard sends data from the Group A MIDI OUT on channel 1. In Local Off mode, the internal sound engine responds only to data received at MIDI IN. The keyboard cannot play the internal SK760/ 880 sounds directly.
The Local On setting (the default status of the instrument) corresponds to the situation when the keyboard is connected to the internal sound engine.
LOCAL ON, LOCAL OFF (F7)
MIDI IN
The MIDI Lock setting is conserved in memory after power down. It is saved to the Setup.
When the option is not selected, the tracks are reset to the settings of the current Performance.
When this function is selected (shown in negative highlight), the current MIDI channel configuration and filters of the tracks is locked for all Performances. The individual situations of Performances are overridden.
MIDI LOCK (F8)
Edit MIDI 119

LOCAL ON, LOCAL OFF (F7)

MIDI LOCK (F8)

When this function is selected (shown in negative highlight), the current MIDI channel configuration and filters of the tracks is locked for all Performances. The individual situations of Performances are overridden. When the option is not selected, the tracks are reset to the settings of the current Performance. The MIDI Lock setting is conserved in memory after power down. It is saved to the Setup.
The Local On setting (the default status of the instrument) corresponds to the situation when the keyboard is connected to the internal sound engine. Press F7 to set the instrument for Local Off operation (shown in negative highlight). Local Off operation disconnects the SK760/880 keyboard from the internal sound generator. The keyboard sends data from the Group A MIDI OUT on channel 1. In Local Off mode, the internal sound engine responds only to data received at MIDI IN. The keyboard cannot play the internal SK760/ 880 sounds directly.
Edit MIDI 119
1110 Reference Guide
Edit Mixer allows you to control volume, pan, effect send and output assignment for each track. Also included is an equalizer that is applied to all tracks. Press the MIXER button in the EDIT section to gain access to the EDIT MIXER environment.

Note: Save the changes with STORE PERFORMANCE. The Performances memorize the pages whose icon shows the symbol .

You can regulate the track volume with the DIAL or the sliders AH. In edit, each slider corresponds to a track (the LED near the A ... H letters is on).

12 Edit Mixer
Edit Mixer - Volume (track volume)
Edit Mixer - Pan (track position in the stereo panoramic)

Value range: 0 ... 127.
Value range: 0 ... 127.
In edit, each slider corresponds to a track (the LED near the A ... H letters is on).
You can regulate the track volume with the DIAL or the sliders AH.
VOLUME (F1)
Press the MIXER button in the EDIT section to gain access to the EDIT MIXER environment.
Edit Mixer allows you to control volume, pan, effect send and output assignment for each track. Also included is an equalizer that is applied to all tracks.
Performance
VOLUME (F1)
PAN (F2)
Track position in the stereo panorama. Moving the Pan all to the left or all to the right, you can direct the sound to one output instead of both outputs.
Value range: -31 (all to the left) ... 0 (center) ...+31 (all to the right).
Edit Mixer - Volume (track volume)
Track in edit
Edit Mixer - Pan (track position in the stereo panoramic)
Value range: -31 (all to the left) ... 0 (center) ...+31 (all to the right).
Track position in the stereo panorama. Moving the Pan all to the left or all to the right, you can direct the sound to one output instead of both outputs.
PAN (F2)
MIXER
Edit Mixer 121

12 Edit Mixer
MIXER
Edit Mixer 121
RANDOM PAN (F3)

Random changes of the sound position in the stereo panorama. This change renders the sound more realistic.
AUDIO OUT (F4)

Routing of the tracks to the audio outputs. The parameter is important only when the tracks are connected to the internal sound generation. Normally the SK760/880 sends sounds to both LEFT and RIGHT outputs, but it is possible to send some tracks to the auxiliary 1 and 2 outputs, for an external mixing operation and a wider sound opening. The outputs selection also affects the internal amplification.
Value range: 0 (no effects) ... 7 (maximum randomness).
Options: Left+Right, Out1+Out2, Out1, Out2.
Edit Mixer - Random Pan
Edit Mixer - Audio Outputs (track audio outputs)

122 Reference Guide
Bass A Bass equalizer which adds or removes the bass frequencies.
Value range: 12dB +12dB

3D Spatializer which affects the stereo outputs of the instrument. The effect is not heard if the instrument is connected to an amplification system in mono.
Value range: 3dB ... 12dB.
Edit Mixer - 3D
Value range: 3dB ... 12dB.
Spatializer which affects the stereo outputs of the instrument. The effect is not heard if the instrument is connected to an amplification system in mono.
Edit Mixer 123
3D
Value range: 12dB +12dB
A Bass equalizer which adds or removes the bass frequencies.
Bass
The 3D effect is a spacializer which adds dimension to the SK760/880 Sounds.
3D EFFECT (F5)
Edit Mixer - 3D
Edit Mixer 123

3D EFFECT (F5)

The 3D effect is a spacializer which adds dimension to the SK760/880 Sounds.
124 Reference Guide
In Edit Controllers/Pads you can program how the individual tracks of a Performance react to the Trackball, the programmable Pedals and programmable Pads. Press the CNT./PADS button in the EDIT section to gain access to the Edit Controller/Pads environment.

WHEELS (F1)
Each track can be independently programmed for the action of the Pitchbend Wheel (1) and/or the Modulation Wheel (2).
PitchBend
Options: Pitch Bend: Off, 1...12. Modulation: Off, On.
Press the CNT./PADS button in the EDIT section to gain access to the Edit Controller/Pads environment.
The same control can be assigned to a continuous control pedal. See Pedals Programming (F2).
13 Edit Controllers/Pads
Edit Controllers/Pads - Wheels Pitch/Mod assignment for each track

Edit Controllers/Pads 131
WHEELS (F1)
In Edit Controllers/Pads you can program how the individual tracks of a Performance react to the Trackball, the programmable Pedals and programmable Pads.
Pitch Bend is applied by vertical movements of Wheel 1 (the left wheel). The PitchBend wheel is spring loaded to return the control to the central position (corresponding to standard pitch). The parameter offers a maximum pitch excursion of 12 semitones and Off.
Modulation 2

PitchBend
Each track can be independently programmed for the action of the Pitchbend Wheel (1) and/or the Modulation Wheel (2).
Activates the action of the Wheels for single tracks.
Activates the action of the Wheels for single tracks.
Pitch Bend is applied by vertical movements of Wheel 1 (the left wheel). The PitchBend wheel is spring loaded to return the control to the central position (corresponding to standard pitch). The parameter offers a maximum pitch excursion of 12 semitones and Off.
The same control can be assigned to a continuous control pedal. See Pedals Programming (F2).
Options: Pitch Bend: Off, 1...12. Modulation: Off, On.
The same control can be assigned to a switch action pedal. See Pedals Programming (F2).
Modulation is applied by vertical movements of Wheel 2 (the right wheel). The Modulation Wheel is centre-dented for easy positioning at the central position. The parameter can be set to either On of Off.
Edit Controllers/Pads - Wheels Pitch/Mod assignment for each track

13 Edit Controllers/Pads
CNT / PADS 4
Modulation
Modulation is applied by vertical movements of Wheel 2 (the right wheel). The Modulation Wheel is centre-dented for easy positioning at the central position. The parameter can be set to either On of Off. The same control can be assigned to a switch action pedal. See Pedals Programming (F2).
CNT / PADS
PEDALS PROGRAMMING (F2)

Here you can assign a function to the pedals 1, 2 and 3. All three Pedals can be set to operate as either Switch or Continuous controls. Switch action pedals control on/off functions such as Soft, Sostenuto, Damper, Start/Stop, Fill, Rotary Slow/Fast, etc. Continuous control pedals control functions such as Volume, Expression, Pitch and Modulation. Type of pedal The first column on the left of the display selects the type of pedal (Switch or Continuous).
CONTINUOUS: Off, PitchBend, Pitch+, Pitch, Filter Cutoff Frequency (CC74), Resonance (CC71), Modulation (CC01), Breath controller (CC02), Volume (CC07), Pan (CC10), Expression (CC11).
Refer to the Pedal function tables at the end of this chapter for brief explanations of each function.
PEDALS ASSIGNMENT (F3)

This parameter enables or disables the tracks for the action of pedals 1, 2 and 3.
Options: On, Off.
Options: Switch, or Continuous.

Parameters assignable to the pedals The control functions assignable to the pedals depend on the type of pedal. SWITCH: Off, Damper, Sostenuto, Soft, Start/Stop, Key Start, Intro, Fill <, Fill =, Fill >, Ending, Var 1, Var 2, Var 3, Var 4, Var >, Var <, Perf >, Perf <, Harmony, Bass to Low., Arrange On/Off, Fade In/Out, Tempo >, Tempo <, Punch, Rotary Slow/Fast, Minor, 7th, Dim, Min 7th, Maj 7th, Freeze Chord.
Edit Controllers/Pads - Pedals programming (Function assignments for the Pedals)

Edit Controllers/Pads - Pedals assignment (pedal enable/disable)
132 Reference Guide
Rotary slow/fast - Switches the Rotary velocity from slow to fast or vice versa. Hardcopy - Captures a bitmap image of the current display (.BMP) into RAM. The images can be saved to an MSDOS disk and elaborated by a graphic program running on a personal computer.
Pad # Determines the Function to assign to the pad.
Functions assignable: Off, KeyAssign, Rotary slow/fast, Hardcopy.

Off - pad deactivated. KeyAssign - The pad plays the assigned note. The Volume, Pan, Transposition and MIDI OUT channel settings correspond to those of track 6. The Note and ProgramChange are defined by the following parameters which appear only when this option is selected PC - Program Change. Range 1128. The Pedals/Pads Lock remains in memory after power down. It is saved to the Setup.
C#0 - CC00: Control Change 00 (Bank Select MSB). Range 1128. C#32 - CC32: Control Change 32 (Bank Select LSB). This parameter does not require a setting to play an internal SK760/ 880 sound. Range 1128.
Confirm (F1) - confirms the captured display. Save (F2) - saves the captured image to an MS-DOS disk. Reset (F3) - cancels all captured images and liberates the RAM. Each image uses approx. 6 KBytes of RAM. Ignore (F5) - closes the dialog window without capturing the image.
PED./PAD
Edit Controllers/Pads - Pads (pad programming tasks)
Functions assignable: Off, KeyAssign, Rotary slow/fast, Hardcopy.
Determines the Function to assign to the pad.
Pad #
The four PAD buttons are independently programmable. Each button can be configured to react according to the settings of various parameters.
PADS (F4)
KeyAssign - The pad plays the assigned note. The Volume, Pan, Transposition and MIDI OUT channel settings correspond to those of track 6. The Note and ProgramChange are defined by the following parameters which appear only when this option is selected
Note - Determines the note played. Range: C-1 to G9
When selected, the Pedals/Pads Lock conserves the current pedal and pad programmed status for all Performance and Style selections. To enable the recall of the Pedal/Pads parameters, make sure the Padlock is open (unlocked). The Pedals/Pads Lock remains in memory after power down. It is saved to the Setup. Off - pad deactivated.
Edit Controllers/Pads - Pads (pad programming tasks)
PC - Program Change. Range 1128.
Note - Determines the note played. Range: C-1 to G9
C#32 - CC32: Control Change 32 (Bank Select LSB). This parameter does not require a setting to play an internal SK760/ 880 sound. Range 1128.
C#0 - CC00: Control Change 00 (Bank Select MSB). Range 1128.
To enable the recall of the Pedal/Pads parameters, make sure the Padlock is open (unlocked).
When selected, the Pedals/Pads Lock conserves the current pedal and pad programmed status for all Performance and Style selections.
PED./PAD
Confirm (F1) - confirms the captured display. Save (F2) - saves the captured image to an MS-DOS disk. Reset (F3) - cancels all captured images and liberates the RAM. Each image uses approx. 6 KBytes of RAM. Ignore (F5) - closes the dialog window without capturing the image.
Hardcopy - Captures a bitmap image of the current display (.BMP) into RAM. The images can be saved to an MSDOS disk and elaborated by a graphic program running on a personal computer.
Rotary slow/fast - Switches the Rotary velocity from slow to fast or vice versa.
Dynamic 0127

PADS (F4)

The four PAD buttons are independently programmable. Each button can be configured to react according to the settings of various parameters.
Dynamic 0127
Note velocity. Range
(PEDALS/PADS LOCK) (F8)

Note velocity. Range
(PEDALS/PADS LOCK) (F8)
THE SWITCH PEDAL FUNCTIONS

(affect enabled tracks of the current Performance) Off Damper Sostenuto No effect Applies the sustain effect to released notes. Sustains only the notes played at the time of pressing the pedal; notes played after pressing the pedal are not affected. Attenuates the sound. Simulates the Start/Stop button. Activates/deactivates the Key Start function. Activates the Intro. Activates the Fill< function. Actvates the Fill function. Activates the Fill> function. Activates the Ending function. Switches to Variation 1. Switches to Variation 2. Switches to Variation 3. Switches to Variation 4. Switches to the next Variation. Switches to the previous Variation. Advances to the next Performance. N.B. To select several Performances in increasing order, all the Performances you intend to recall must be programmed for the action of the Perf > function. Returns to the previous Performance. N.B. To select several Performances in decreasing order, all the Performances you intend to recall must be programmed for the action of the Perf < function. Activates/deactivates the Harmony button. Activates/deactivate the Bass to Lowest function.
Arrange On/Off Activates/deactivates the Arrange On/Off button. Fade In/Out Tempo > Tempo < Punch Activates/deactivates the Fade In/ Out function. Increases the Tempo setting by one unit at a time. Decreases the Tempo setting by one unit at a time. Activates/deactivates the Punch recording function during recording operations. Changes the speed of the Rotary effect from Slow to Fast or vice versa. Converts the currently held chord to the minor chord. Converts the currently held chord to the diminished chord. Converts the currently held chord to the minor 7th chord. Converts the currently held chord to the Major 7th chord. Locks the current chord (pedal held), allowing you to play freely with both hands across the entire keyboard without triggering changes in the Style auto-accompaniment. The function deactivates at pedal release.
Soft Start/Stop Key Start Intro Fill < Fill = Fill > Ending Variation 1 Variation 2 Variation 3 Variation 4 Var. > Var. < Perf. >
Rotary s/f Minor Dim Min 7th Maj 7th Freeze Chord
Perf. <
Harmony Bass to Low.
134 Reference Guide
Volume Pan Expression
Controls the general volume (CC07). Controls the Pan (CC10) from left to right.
Breath Cnt.
Modulation
Resonance
Filter
Pitch
Pitch +
Pitch Bend
Off
(affect enabled tracks of the current Performance)
THE CONTINUOUS PEDAL FUNCTIONS
Applies Pitch Bend to the notes. The Pitch Bend sweeps from the maximum negative to maximum positive value of the Pitch setting in the Wheels Pit/Mod function. The central position of the continuous pedal corresponds to 0 pitch.
Applies Modulation (CC01) to tracks activated for the effect (in Pit/Mod).
Controls the volume from 0 level to the maximum setting of the mixer levels.
Expression
Breath Cnt.
Pan
Volume
Controls the general volume (CC07).
Controls the Pan (CC10) from left to right.
Generates Breath controller (CC02) data (useful for external MIDI devices capable of recognizing the controller).
Controls the volume from 0 level to the maximum setting of the mixer levels.
Generates Breath controller (CC02) data (useful for external MIDI devices capable of recognizing the controller).
Opens/closes the Filter Cutoff parameter in Edit Perf Sound.
Decreases the Pitch down the value set in the Pit/Mod parameter.
Increases the Pitch up the value set in the Pit/Mod parameter.
No effect
Affects the Resonance parameter

THE CONTINUOUS PEDAL FUNCTIONS

(affect enabled tracks of the current Performance) Off Pitch Bend No effect Applies Pitch Bend to the notes. The Pitch Bend sweeps from the maximum negative to maximum positive value of the Pitch setting in the Wheels Pit/Mod function. The central position of the continuous pedal corresponds to 0 pitch. Increases the Pitch up the value set in the Pit/Mod parameter. Decreases the Pitch down the value set in the Pit/Mod parameter. Opens/closes the Filter Cutoff parameter in Edit Perf Sound. Affects the Resonance parameter Applies Modulation (CC01) to tracks activated for the effect (in Pit/Mod).
Pitch + Pitch Filter Resonance Modulation
136 Reference Guide
Press the TRACKS button in the EDIT section to gain access to the Edit Tracks.

Edit Tracks - Transpose (track transposition)

14 Edit Tracks
The Master Transpose parameter is disabled for the drum track to avoid drum remappings due to transpositions.
Press the TRACKS button in the EDIT section to gain access to the Edit Tracks.
In Edit Tracks you can program parameters that are exclusive to the tracks and set the Harmony function which is exploited by the Styles.
Master Transpose (general transpose) enable/ disable for the track. Tracks set to Enable are tuned to the scale selected in Edit General. Tracks set to Disable play with the Equal temperament.
TRACKS 5
This section consists of two menus. Pass from one to the other with the scroll menu buttons ( ).
MASTER TRANSPOSE ENABLE/DISABLE (F2)
Edit Tracks - Master Transpose enable/disable

TRANSPOSE (F1)
Assignable values: 600+60.
A track transposer which transposes in steps of one semitone. The maximum transposition obtainable is 5 octaves.
A track transposer which transposes in steps of one semitone. The maximum transposition obtainable is 5 octaves.
Assignable values: 600+60.
TRANSPOSE (F1)
MASTER TRANSPOSE ENABLE/DISABLE (F2)
This section consists of two menus. Pass from one to the other with the scroll menu buttons ). (

Master Transpose (general transpose) enable/ disable for the track. Tracks set to Enable are tuned to the scale selected in Edit General. Tracks set to Disable play with the Equal temperament.
In Edit Tracks you can program parameters that are exclusive to the tracks and set the Harmony function which is exploited by the Styles.
The Master Transpose parameter is disabled for the drum track to avoid drum remappings due to transpositions.
Edit Tracks - Master Transpose enable/disable
Edit Tracks - Transpose (track transposition)
Edit Tracks 141

14 Edit Tracks
TRACKS
Edit Tracks 141
DETUNE (F3)
A fine tune function for single tracks. Each step is equivalent to 1/64th semitone.
MODE/PRIORITY (F5)
(1) Selects the polyphonic/monophonic mode for the tracks. (2) Activates/deactivates the Priority option (guaranteed minimum polyphony for the track).
Mode This parameter sets a track to play monophonically (one note at a time) or polyphonically (two or more simultaneous notes). Mono R gives priority to the right note, Mono L to the left note, Mono T to the last note played.
Assignable values: - 630+63.
Options: Poly, Mono L, Mono R, Mono T.

Priority
Edit Tracks - Detune (Track fine tuning operations)
Priority guarantees a minimum polyphony to a track with respect to others and avoids notestealing. In complex arrangements, a track set with Priority=Off can remain without notes, while those with Priority=On will not be subjected to note-stealing.
RANDOM PITCH (F4)

Creates slight pitch variations freely and is useful to simulate the pitch instability typical of acoustic instruments. It is advisable to assign a value of 1 or 2 to wind instruments.
Options: On, Off.

Note: Avoid assigning Priority=On to too many tracks, as this will cancel the function due to conflicts between the assigned tracks.

Assignable values: 0 (no effect) ... 7 (maximum randomness).
Edit Tracks - Random pitch

Edit Tracks - Mode/Priority (polyphonic/monophonic Mode and Priority)
142 Reference Guide
For example, it is possible to assign two tracks with opposing dynamic curves (for example, two opposing linear curves [ex. 1 & 4], or two opposing exponential curves [ex. 2 & 5]. The resulting effect is one of hearing the sound of the second track fade in by gradually increasing the keystrike velocity while the sound of the first track fades out. Playing softly triggers one sound and playing hard triggers the second. Playing with in between values creates a blend of both sounds.
EFF
For example, to one track, assign a piano sound softened by a closed filter, while to another track, assign the same piano sound with an open filter to enhance the higher frequencies. Program the first track to respond across a low velocity range and the second track across a higher range. The result obtained is a piano which changes timbre depending on the velocity applied.
Assignable values: Low range 0127 - High range: 1270.
VEL
Edit Tracks - Dynamic Curve
For example, it is possible to assign two tracks with opposing dynamic curves (for example, two opposing linear curves [ex. 1 & 4], or two opposing exponential curves [ex. 2 & 5]. The resulting effect is one of hearing the sound of the second track fade in by gradually increasing the keystrike velocity while the sound of the first track fades out. Playing softly triggers one sound and playing hard triggers the second. Playing with in between values creates a blend of both sounds.
Provides a selection of Velocity response curves. As well as modifying the velocity data, velocity curves allow the creation of crossfade effects between two tracks.
Edit Tracks - Velocity Range

VELOCITY CURVE (F6)
Edit Tracks 143
VEL
Press the right button to pass to the second page of options.
Press the right button to pass to the second page of options.
Edit Tracks - Dynamic Curve
Edit Tracks - Velocity Range
Assignable values: Low range 0127 - High range: 1270.
For example, to one track, assign a piano sound softened by a closed filter, while to another track, assign the same piano sound with an open filter to enhance the higher frequencies. Program the first track to respond across a low velocity range and the second track across a higher range. The result obtained is a piano which changes timbre depending on the velocity applied.
Sets velocity limits for each track above and below which the sound will not play. These limits allow the creation of cross-switching effects by assigning tracks different velocity ranges.
VELOCITY RANGE (F7)
Edit Tracks 143

VELOCITY CURVE (F6)

VELOCITY RANGE (F7)

Sets velocity limits for each track above and below which the sound will not play. These limits allow the creation of cross-switching effects by assigning tracks different velocity ranges.
Provides a selection of Velocity response curves. As well as modifying the velocity data, velocity curves allow the creation of crossfade effects between two tracks.
EFF

HARMONY (F1)
Allows you to choose from a selection of harmony types. The Harmony function is enabled and disabled by pressing the HARMONY button on the control panel. Harmony is a function that affects the instrument set to Styles/Performance mode when the keyboard is split (Upper/Lower and Multi modes). Songs are not affected. Harmony type Provides a selection of harmony types (defined by the structure chart shown below). Close: the notes of a chord played below the Split Point harmonize the melody of the right hand. The harmonizing chord is a closed (or tight) position and the notes of the left hand are copied to the right hand (see table). Open 1: an open chord (see table). Open 2: similar to Open 1 (see table). Smart: similar to Close, but based on the harmonizing tables. Duet: similar to Smart, but limited to two notes. Block: based on the harmonizing tables. Octave 1: doubles the note of the right hand by playing an octave higher. No left hand chord required.
Octave 2: doubles the note of the right hand, one octave above as well as one octave below. No left hand chord required. Peterson: doubles the note of the right hand with a note two octaves below. No left hand chord required. Jazz: adds two notes above the note played by the right hand, at intervals of a fourth and a minor seventh. No left hand chord required. Rock: adds three notes of the perfect chord below the note played with the right hand. No left hand chord required. Track Selects the track to which the harmony type is assigned.
Options: tracks 38
Edit Tracks - Harmony
HARMONY TYPE STRUCTURES

Close Open 1 Open 2 Smart
Duet
Block
Jazz
Rock
Harmony example. The left hand plays a chord in C Major. The black notes represent the melody, the white note the harmony added by the Harmony option.
144 Reference Guide
KEY RANGE (F3)
This parameter is valid only when the instrument is set to Song Mode.
Assignable values: A0) C8.
Assigns a keyboard extension (highest and lowest notes) to a track.
Assigns a keyboard extension (highest and lowest notes) to a track.
Edit Tracks - Key Range
Assignable values: A0) C8.
This parameter is valid only when the instrument is set to Song Mode.
KEY RANGE (F3)
Assignable values: 0 (off)192 (1 ) 384 (2 ) 576 (3 ) 768 (4 ).
Delay is synchronized with the Clock and affects the internal generation as well as MIDI OUT.
Programmes a delayed entry for a sound after striking a key and is valid for tracks set for keyplay. After striking the keys, the sound is reproduced after the time indicated by this parameter. The value is expressed in 1/192nds of a quarter note (crotchet) and the [+] sign appears when the value exceeds that of the indicated musical note.
DELAY (F2)
Edit Tracks - Key Range
Edit Tracks - Delay
Edit Tracks 145

DELAY (F2)

Programmes a delayed entry for a sound after striking a key and is valid for tracks set for keyplay. After striking the keys, the sound is reproduced after the time indicated by this parameter. The value is expressed in 1/192nds of a quarter note (crotchet) and the [+] sign appears when the value exceeds that of the indicated musical note. Delay is synchronized with the Clock and affects the internal generation as well as MIDI OUT.
Assignable values: 0 (off)192 (1 ) 384 (2 ) 576 (3 ) 768 (4 ).
Edit Tracks - Delay
Edit Tracks 145
CREATE TRACK (F5)

This parameter is valid only when the instrument is set to Song Mode. Creates a track with default values. Use this function to create Song Performances with more than 16 tracks. Pressing the Soft button F6 opens the Create Track dialog window:
Procedure: 1. Select the track to copy. 2. Press F6 (Copy track). 3. Specify the number of the track to copy with the DIAL or numeric keypad. 4. Press ENTER to confirm the copy or ESCAPE to cancel the operation. The settings of the source track are copied to the destination track.

Procedure: 1. Press F5 (Create track). 2. Specify the number of the track to create with the DIAL or numeric keypad. If the track that you specify already exists, the relative parameters are assigned default values. 3. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
Note: This operation does not copy the notes captured by the sequencer but only the settings such as sound, transposition, pan. To copy the notes, use the Copy events function (in Edit Style or Edit Song).

ERASE TRACK (F7)

This parameter is valid only when the instrument is set to Song Mode. Cancels the selected track.
COPY TRACK (F6)

Copies one track to another. The destination track assumes all the programmed settings of the source track. Press the corresponding Soft button to open the Copy track dialog window.
Procedure: 1. Select the track to cancel. A track engaged by the sequencer cannot be erased. 2. Press F7 to cancel the track. You are prompted to confirm the operation:

Note: This command is valid for Song mode. In Style/RealTime mode, it is not possible to cancel tracks. Note: It is not possible to cancel track that contains note information. If a track shows the seq-play or mute icon with notes, it cannot be cancelled. Hint: Cancel Song tracks that are not used. The resulting Song file will occupy less memory on disk.

146 Reference Guide
3. Press SOUND in the EDIT section to enter the Edit Perf Sound or Edit Sound Patch editor. 4. Modify the parameters according to your requirements. 5. Press SOUND or ESCAPE to exit the editor. 6. Save the modifications to the current Performance by pressing STORE PERFORMANCE then ENTE R. During the editing tasks, you can periodically store to the current Performance by pressing STORE PERFORMANCE + ENTER. symbol .
Advanced Edit Sound
identified by the symbol

symbol
Sound and Sound Patch
Edit Perf Sound and Edit Sound Patch are both edit facilities which permit the rapid modification of a Sound or a Sound Patch by means of macro edit parameters.
The term Sound refers to all the SK760/880 Sounds that are not Drumkits, nor contain a dynamic switch. Sound Patch is a generic term used to describe a Drumkit or a Sound containing a dynamic switch.
identified by the symbol
The modifications are associated to the tracks and not to the Sound or Sound Patch, therefore, any SK760/880 Sound that you assign to the edited track will inherit the same modifications. If the same Sound/Sound Patch is recalled by a different track or Performance, it will not play with the same modifications. Modified Sounds are
15 Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch
5. Press SOUND or ESCAPE to exit the editor.
Advanced Edit Sound
The advanced Edit Sound environment, accessed via the Synth button (in the Edit/Numbers section), allows you to intervene directly on the sound parameters, not on track parameters as in Edit Perf Sound. Refer to the Edit Sound chapter in the Reference Guide.
In Performances and Style-Performances, the Drumkit/Sound Patch is conserved in the accompaniment tracks. When you change Style or Performance and cause a change in the accompaniment tracks, the Drumkit/Sound Patch also changes. Performances which contain a modified Drumkit/Sound Patch are identified by the
In Performances and Style-Performances, the Drumkit/Sound Patch is conserved in the accompaniment tracks. When you change Style or Performance and cause a change in the accompaniment tracks, the Drumkit/Sound Patch also changes. Performances which contain a modified Drumkit/Sound Patch are identified by the
7. Save the Performance to disk for future use.

Note: If you fail to store your modifications, they will be irremediably lost when you select another Performance, or reselect the same one.

Sound and Sound Patch
The advanced Edit Sound environment, accessed via the Synth button (in the Edit/Numbers section), allows you to intervene directly on the sound parameters, not on track parameters as in Edit Perf Sound. Refer to the Edit Sound chapter in the Reference Guide.
The modifications are associated to the tracks and not to the Sound or Sound Patch, therefore, any SK760/880 Sound that you assign to the edited track will inherit the same modifications. If the same Sound/Sound Patch is recalled by a different track or Performance, it will not play with the same modifications. Modified Sounds are
The term Sound refers to all the SK760/880 Sounds that are not Drumkits, nor contain a dynamic switch. Sound Patch is a generic term used to describe a Drumkit or a Sound containing a dynamic switch.
7. Save the Performance to disk for future use.
6. Save the modifications to the current Performance by pressing STORE PERFORMANCE then ENTE R.
4. Modify the parameters according to your requirements.
3. Press SOUND in the EDIT section to enter the Edit Perf Sound or Edit Sound Patch editor.
2. Select the track to which the Sound/S.Patch to be edited is assigned.
1. Select or create a Performance containing the Sound or Drumkit/Sound Patch that requires editing.
THE GENERAL EDIT PROCEDURE:
Note: If you fail to store your modifications, they will be irremediably lost when you select another Performance, or reselect the same one.
During the editing tasks, you can periodically store to the current Performance by pressing STORE PERFORMANCE + ENTER.
Edit Perf Sound 151

15 Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch

THE GENERAL EDIT PROCEDURE:
1. Select or create a Performance containing the Sound or Drumkit/Sound Patch that requires editing. 2. Select the track to which the Sound/S.Patch to be edited is assigned.
Edit Perf Sound and Edit Sound Patch are both edit facilities which permit the rapid modification of a Sound or a Sound Patch by means of macro edit parameters.
Edit Perf Sound 151
Edit Perf Sound

In Edit Perf Sound, you can program the parameters that are exclusive to the tracks. Any Sound, therefore, that you assign to the track will inherit the modifications applied. Select a track containing the Sound that you wish to modify and press the SOUND button in the EDIT section to gain access to the Edit Perf Sound environment.

OSCILLATORS AND LAYERS

The SK760/880 Sounds can comprise 1, 2 or 3 layers. The layers are sound generating units consisting of 1 or 2 oscillators and each oscillator elaborates a Wave sample. Consequently, each polyphonic voice can be generated by 6 simultaneous oscillators. Given that the higher number of oscillators per voice the lower the overall polyphony of the instrument, most of the SK760/880 Sounds comprise one or two oscillators. The structure of the Sounds is represented in the diagram below. The Edit Perf Sound tasks modify all layers and all oscillators simultaneously. This allows all the parameters of a Sound to be edited by means of a few, simple operations.
Note: Save the changes with STORE PERFORMANCE. The Performances memorize the page whose icon shows the symbol .

SOUND
SOUND Layer 3 Layer 2 Layer 1 Oscillator 2 Oscillator 1
Wave
Filter
Envelope
Edit Perf Sound: the edit parameters

Sound structure. The number of layers and oscillators can change from a Sound to another.
152 Reference Guide
Decay
Release
Edit Perf Sound 153
Attack
THE PERF SOUND PARAMETERS
Low-pass - Cuts into the higher frequencies. As a result, if you use Sounds with a low harmonic content, the notes at the higher end will be cut. This parameter regulates the brilliance of the Sound. Lowering the cutoff frequency produces a mellow sound while an increase produces a bright sound.
High-pass - Cuts into the lower frequencies, making the sound brighter. The higher the value, the lighter the sound.
Filter Cutoff
Modifies the cutoff frequency. Changes the frequency at which the filter intervenes on the sound. The action of the filter varies according to the filter:
Assignable values: -63 (maximum rate) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (minimum rate).
Assignable values: -63 (least intensity) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (highest intensity).

Note: The higher values of resonance causes the filter to enter into auto-oscillation. If used wisely, the auto-oscillation can create very suggestive synthetic sounds, but can also increase the output level excessively causing disturbing distortion.

Decay
Represents the release phase of the Sound. This parameter modifies the time taken (rate) for the sound to pass to total silence after note release. The modifications are expressed as relative values, subtracting or adding them to the normal release of the Sound.
Assignable values: -63 (maximum decrease of the cutoff frequency) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (maximum increase of the cutoff frequency).
Resonance
Resonance creates a peak of emphasis at the cutoff frequency to the point of sending it in autooscillation. The higher values of resonance produce effects that were common in the analog synths.
Release
Represents the decay phase of the Sound. This parameter modifies the time taken (rate) for the sound to pass from its maximum volume level to silence after the attack phase. The modifications are expressed as relative values, subtracting or adding them to the normal decay of the Sound. Resonance
Modifies the cutoff frequency. Changes the frequency at which the filter intervenes on the sound. The action of the filter varies according to the filter:
Band-pass - Allows the entire band to pass. Modifies the phase of the Sound and is useful when two oscillators that read the same Wave are used. Parametric boost - Enhances the frequencies around the cutoff frequency, rendering a sound brighter and stronger at the higher end. Parametric cut - Attenuates the frequencies around the cutoff frequency. Higher values renders the sound weaker at the high end.
Filter Cutoff
Represents the release phase of the Sound. This parameter modifies the time taken (rate) for the sound to pass to total silence after note release. The modifications are expressed as relative values, subtracting or adding them to the normal release of the Sound.
Represents the decay phase of the Sound. This parameter modifies the time taken (rate) for the sound to pass from its maximum volume level to silence after the attack phase. The modifications are expressed as relative values, subtracting or adding them to the normal decay of the Sound.
Represents the attack phase of the sound. This parameter modifies the time taken (rate) for the sound to pass from the silent state to maximum volume when a note is pressed. The modifications are expressed as relative values, subtracting or adding them to the normal attack of the Sound.
Assignable values: -63 (least intensity) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (highest intensity).
Resonance creates a peak of emphasis at the cutoff frequency to the point of sending it in autooscillation. The higher values of resonance produce effects that were common in the analog synths.
Assignable values: -63 (maximum decrease of the cutoff frequency) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (maximum increase of the cutoff frequency).
Note: The higher values of resonance causes the filter to enter into auto-oscillation. If used wisely, the auto-oscillation can create very suggestive synthetic sounds, but can also increase the output level excessively causing disturbing distortion.
Parametric cut - Attenuates the frequencies around the cutoff frequency. Higher values renders the sound weaker at the high end.
Parametric boost - Enhances the frequencies around the cutoff frequency, rendering a sound brighter and stronger at the higher end.
Band-pass - Allows the entire band to pass. Modifies the phase of the Sound and is useful when two oscillators that read the same Wave are used.
Edit Perf Sound 153

THE PERF SOUND PARAMETERS

Attack Represents the attack phase of the sound. This parameter modifies the time taken (rate) for the sound to pass from the silent state to maximum volume when a note is pressed. The modifications are expressed as relative values, subtracting or adding them to the normal attack of the Sound.
Low-pass - Cuts into the higher frequencies. As a result, if you use Sounds with a low harmonic content, the notes at the higher end will be cut. This parameter regulates the brilliance of the Sound. Lowering the cutoff frequency produces a mellow sound while an increase produces a bright sound. High-pass - Cuts into the lower frequencies, making the sound brighter. The higher the value, the lighter the sound.
LFO Rate The Low Frequency Oscillator is normally used to produce vibrato. In the SK760/880, the LFO can also create a cyclic variation of the parameters of the filter. The LFO Rate parameter determines the velocity of the oscillation.
THE PERF SOUND OPTIONS

Copy to... (F6) Copies the modifications applied to the Sound of a track to a different Track of the same Performance. The parameter values are copied, NOT the Sound, therefore, if a Piano sound is at the source and a Bass is at the destination, the Bass sound will inherit the parameter modifications.
Assignable values: -63 (minimum rate) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (maximum rate).
LFO Depth LFO Depth determines the depth of the action of the LFO, and, therefore, its audibility.
Assignable values: -63 (minimum rate) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (maximum rate).
LFO Delay Determines the delay of the entry of the LFO. In acoustic instruments, vibrato generally enters after the attack phase, and mainly forms part of the sustain phase of the sound.
Track - Select the track with the DIAL. In Style/RealTime mode, the maximum number of tracks is 16, in Song mode, 32. Restore track (F7) Cancels the modifications of the selected track. 1. Press F7 to cancel. You are prompted to reconfirm the operation.
Assignable values: -63 (minimum rate) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (maximum rate)..
2. Press ENTER again to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel. Restore all tracks (F8) Cancels the modifications applied to all the tracks of the Performance. 1. Press F8 to cancel. You are prompted to reconfirm the operation.
2. Press ENTER again to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.
154 Reference Guide
In Edit Sound Patch, you can program the parameters that are exclusive to the tracks. Any Drumkit or Sound Patch, therefore, that you assign to the track will inherit the modifications applied. Select a track containing the Drumkit or Sound Patch that you wish to modify and press SOUND in the EDIT section to gain access to the Edit Sound Patch environment. Drumkits and Sound Patches have two dynamic Layers. Normally, Sound Patches exploit both Layers (1 & 2) while Drumkits limit themselves to Layer 1. The soft buttons A and B select and mute the Layers. In Switch sounds, this allows you to work on a Layer without hearing the sound on the other layer. Once you enter into Edit Sound Patch to select the Layers, it is not possible to select the tracks of the current Performance.

Although structurally identical, Drumkits and Sound Patches differ as described: In a Drumkit, a percussive instrument is assigned to each note of the keyboard. This allows a Drumkit to be controlled across a single MIDI channel.
Track in edit Performance

Edit Sound Patch: the parameters.
In a Drumkit, a percussive instrument is assigned to each note of the keyboard. This allows a Drumkit to be controlled across a single MIDI channel.
The parameters in Edit Sound Patch differ to those of Edit Perf Sound.
Although structurally identical, Drumkits and Sound Patches differ as described:
The parameters in Edit Sound Patch differ to those of Edit Perf Sound.
Select a track containing the Drumkit or Sound Patch that you wish to modify and press SOUND in the EDIT section to gain access to the Edit Sound Patch environment.
In Edit Sound Patch, you can program the parameters that are exclusive to the tracks. Any Drumkit or Sound Patch, therefore, that you assign to the track will inherit the modifications applied.
Edit Sound Patch
Track in edit Performance
In a Sound Patch, two different sounds are separated by a dynamic threshold in order that playing harder recalls the sound at the higher dynamic level. Try playing, for example, the sound ORCHESTRA 48-3; play softly first, then harder and listen to the change in timbre. Sound Patches, therefore, allow you to vary the timbre of a Sound by varying the keystrike velocity.
SELECTING/MUTING THE DYNAMIC LAYER

Drumkits and Sound Patches have two dynamic Layers. Normally, Sound Patches exploit both Layers (1 & 2) while Drumkits limit themselves to Layer 1. The soft buttons A and B select and mute the Layers. In Switch sounds, this allows you to work on a Layer without hearing the sound on the other layer. Once you enter into Edit Sound Patch to select the Layers, it is not possible to select the tracks of the current Performance.

Dynamic Layer options to select and mute the layers. Press the same soft button repeatedly to toggle between L and M.

Edit Sound Patch: the parameters.
SELECTING/MUTING THE DYNAMIC LAYER
Dynamic Layer options to select and mute the layers. Press the same soft button repeatedly to toggle between L and M.
Sound Patches, therefore, allow you to vary the timbre of a Sound by varying the keystrike velocity.
In a Sound Patch, two different sounds are separated by a dynamic threshold in order that playing harder recalls the sound at the higher dynamic level. Try playing, for example, the sound ORCHESTRA 48-3; play softly first, then harder and listen to the change in timbre.
Edit SoundPatch 155

Edit Sound Patch
SOUND
SOUND
Edit SoundPatch 155
THE EDIT SOUND PATCH PARAMETERS

Edit note Determines the note to edit.
Tuning Fine tune control, in steps of 1/64 of a semitone. Assignable values: -64 ... +63. Filter Regulates the cutoff frequency of the filter.
Assignable values: A0 ... C8 (respectively the lowest and highest note in an 88 note master keyboard).
Sound Determines the Sound assigned to the note. It is possible to select any sound from the ROMSounds, RAM-Sounds or RAM -Sounds. Volume Determines the volume of the note in edit. This parameter can be useful to balance Sounds which differ greatly in volume.
Assignable values: -64 (maximum decrease) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (maximum increase).
Exclude A linking number between two notes that exclude each other. Playing a note will interrupt another note with the same exclude number. For example, if a Closed Hi-Hat and an Open Hi-Hat have the same exclude number, they interrupt each other, exactly as occurs in reality. You can create as many linked percussive instrument groups as there are Exclude numbers assignable.

Pan Determines the position of the note in the stereo panorama. In Drumkits, it is important to pan single percussive instrument correctly. For example, the toms are normally positioned in order that a snare drifts from one stereo channel to the other.
Assignable values: Off, 1, 2, 3.

Eff. 1 (Reverb) Effects send for the reverbs. The maximum value corresponds to a perfect balance between the original sound and the processed one.
Assignable values: -32 (all left) ... 0 (balanced) ... +32 (all right).
Transpose Transposes the Sound assigned to the note. At the zero value, a percussive instrument can be distant from the sampled note, which is normally around note C4. If the note in edit is below C4, the Sound will require transposing upwards (positive), while if above will require transposing down (negative).

Eff 2 (Delay/Chorus/Flanger/Modulation) Effect sends for the modulation effects. The maximum value corresponds to a perfect balance between the original sound and the processed one.

Audio Out Allows you to direct the sound assigned to the note in edit to a preferred output.
Assignable values -64 ... +63.
Assignable values: Main, Left+Right, Out1+Out2, Out1, Out2.
156 Reference Guide
WARNING - The copy will cancel the programmed data in the destination Layer.

Threshold level that divides Layer 1 from Layer 2. When you play with a low velocity, the Sound assigned to Layer 1 is triggered. By playing harder, the Sound assigned to Layer 2 is triggered. The value 0 causes the Sound assigned to Layer 2 while the value 127 causes the Sound assigned to Layer 1.
Edit SoundPatch 157
Dynamic switch
2. Press F2 (Copy to Layer...). You are prompted to reconfirm the operation.
1. Select the Layer to copy with the soft buttons A and B.
Copies an entire Layer to the other.
Copy to Layer... (F2)
2. Play the note to place in edit.
1. Press F1 (Catch note...).
Selects the note to place in edit by playing it on the keyboard.
Catch note... (F1)
THE SOUND PATCH OPTIONS
WARNING - The copy will cancel the programmed data in the destination Layer.
The dialog window closes and the Edit note parameter is modified.
The following message appears.
Edit SoundPatch 157

Dynamic switch

THE SOUND PATCH OPTIONS

Catch note... (F1) Selects the note to place in edit by playing it on the keyboard.
Threshold level that divides Layer 1 from Layer 2. When you play with a low velocity, the Sound assigned to Layer 1 is triggered. By playing harder, the Sound assigned to Layer 2 is triggered. The value 0 causes the Sound assigned to Layer 2 while the value 127 causes the Sound assigned to Layer 1.

1. Press F1 (Catch note...).

The following message appears.

2. Play the note to place in edit.

The dialog window closes and the Edit note parameter is modified. Copy to Layer... (F2) Copies an entire Layer to the other.
1. Select the Layer to copy with the soft buttons A and B. 2. Press F2 (Copy to Layer...). You are prompted to reconfirm the operation.

Expand... (F3) Extends the programmed parameters of the note in edit to a specified keyboard zone.
Compare... (F4) ON/OFF switch. When active, the original parameter values of the Drumkit/Sound Patch in edit are temporarily recalled in order to compare them with the current edited ones. Restore (F6) This option restores the original Sound Patch or cancels the last modifications applied after saving to the Performance.
1. Select the note whose parameters require copying. 2. Press F3 (Expand...).

The Expand dialog window opens:
1. Press F6 to open the following dialog window:
3. With the From parameter selected, rotate the DIAL, or play a note to specify the lowest note of the required keyboard zone. 4. Pass to the To parameter with the cursor button . Rotate the DIAL, or play a note to specify the highest note of the required keyboard zone. 2. Select the function required with the directional arrows and press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel to abort.
S.P. Performance - Restores the Drumkit/ Sound Patch in edit to its original status (cancels all editing operations applied to all notes). Current edit - Cancels the current modifications and recalls the last saved parameter settings of the Drumkit memorized in the Performance.
5. Press ENTER to confirm the Expand command, or ESCAPE to cancel.

Confirming extends the programmed parameters of the original note to the specified keyboard zone.
Store... (F8) This option allows you to save the modifications to a Performance or creates a new Drumkit/ Sound Patch file that can be used by any Performance. To conserve the modifications, save them before selecting a Performance. Selecting a Performance before saving cancels all modifications applied.
158 Reference Guide
2. The File option is shown selected. Press ENTER to confirm.

An insertion zone appears:
4. If you want to change the name of the file, press the soft button F7 or F8. 1. Press F8 (Store...). The Store dialog window appears:
1. Press F8 (Store...).
Save the modifications as a new Drumkit/Sound Patch file
The Store dialog window opens:
5. Insert a name using the method described in the Data Entry paragraph of Chapter 1 (page 1.4). Press ENTER to confirm the name and return to the Store window.
2. The File option is shown selected. Press ENTER to confirm.
The insertion zone shows the ProgramChange and BankSelect MSB (CC00) to which the new Drumkit/SoundPatch will be saved.
3. Press ENTER to confirm the current location, or use the DIAL or numeric keypad if you wish to select a different location.
3. Press ENTER to confirm the current location, or use the DIAL or numeric keypad if you wish to select a different location.
The insertion zone shows the ProgramChange and BankSelect MSB (CC00) to which the new Drumkit/SoundPatch will be saved.
5. Insert a name using the method described in the Data Entry paragraph of Chapter 1 (page 1.4). Press ENTER to confirm the name and return to the Store window.
4. If you want to change the name of the file, press the soft button F7 or F8.
4. Rotate the DIAL to select the Performance or Style Performance Group to store to. 5. Move down to the Perf option with the cursor button and select the Performance to save to with the DIAL. 6. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
An insertion zone appears:
6. Press ENTER to save the new file to the selected location.
3. Select the Performance or Style-Performance option with the / cursor arrows.
5. Move down to the Perf option with the cursor button and select the Performance to save to with the DIAL.
4. Rotate the DIAL to select the Performance or Style Performance Group to store to.
2. Select the Performance option with the cursor button and press ENTER to confirm.
Save the modifications to a Performance
The Drumkit store dialog window opens:
The new Drumkit/SoundPatch is now available as a RAM-Sound. As any new RAM-Sound, the new Drumkit/ SoundPatch will remain in memory after power down. To conserve it and safeguard it against future cancellation, save it to disk using the Save Single Sound, Save All Sound or Save All procedures.
Edit SoundPatch 159

Save the modifications as a new Drumkit/Sound Patch file

6. Press ENTER to save the new file to the selected location.

The new Drumkit/SoundPatch is now available as a RAM-Sound. As any new RAM-Sound, the new Drumkit/ SoundPatch will remain in memory after power down. To conserve it and safeguard it against future cancellation, save it to disk using the Save Single Sound, Save All Sound or Save All procedures.
1. Press F8 (Store...).
The Store dialog window opens:
Save the modifications to a Performance
1. Press F8 (Store...). The Store dialog window appears:
2. Select the Performance option with the cursor button and press ENTER to confirm.
The Drumkit store dialog window opens:
3. Select the Performance or Style-Performance option with the / cursor arrows.
Edit SoundPatch 159
GENERAL INFORMATION
While you cannot change the path of an Algorithm, you can choose from a selection of 5 different Algorithms, each representing a fixed signal path, and assign a wide variety of processing functions to the individual stages of the algorithms path. The following graphical representations illustrate the signal path of the Algorithms.
THE FIRST FEW PAGES OF THIS CHAPTER DISCUSS THE EDIT SOUND ENVIRONMENT FROM A GENERAL POINT OF VIEW. IF YOU WANT TO SKIP THE PRELIMINARIES AND GO STRAIGHT INTO SOUND EDITING, GO TO PAGE 9. Difference between Edit Perf Sound and Edit Sound
Press the corresponding soft button repeatedly to toggle between the L ad M status.
An Algorithm is the signal path of a sample to the audio outputs, through a series of processing functions that you select during the course of the editing tasks. The processing functions which you assign during the various editing stages are the synthesis tools (oscillators, filters, amplitude envelopes, etc.). While you cannot change the path of an Algorithm, you can choose from a selection of 5 different Algorithms, each representing a fixed signal path, and assign a wide variety of processing functions to the individual stages of the algorithms path. The following graphical representations illustrate the signal path of the Algorithms.
STRAIGHT INTO
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3
Algorithm X Algorithm X Algorithm X
THE FIRST FEW PAGES OF THIS CHAPTER DISCUSS THE EDIT SOUND ENVIRONMENT FROM A GENERAL POINT OF
GENERAL INFORMATION
VIEW. IF YOU WANT TO SKIP THE PRELIMINARIES AND GO
16 Edit Sound
SOUND EDITING, GO TO PAGE 9.
Each layer can comprise 1 or 2 oscillators, depending on the algorithm selected for the layer. Each oscillator has an Amplitude envelope, a Pitch envelope, a Pan envelope, a Low Frequency Oscillator (LFO) and a Filter with relative envelope. Depending on the algorithm selected, the amplitude envelope can be shared by both oscillators with a balance control, and the filters can be connected in series or in parallel.
The oscillators and layers
Unlike the Edit Perf Sound environment, where any the Sound assigned to a Track of a Performance inherits the modifications applied to the tracks, the Edit Sound environment allows you to modify the Sound parameters. The result is a RAM-Sound that you can store to the SK760/880 sound library, assign to any track of any Performance and save to Disk.
SK760/880 Sounds can comprise 1, 2 or 3 layers. Each layer is elaborated by an associated Algorithm of synthesis (explained afterwards). The layers can be simultaneously edited and the results can be instantly heard.
Difference between Edit Perf Sound and Edit Sound
The Algorithms
The oscillators and layers
SK760/880 Sounds can comprise 1, 2 or 3 layers. Each layer is elaborated by an associated Algorithm of synthesis (explained afterwards). The layers can be simultaneously edited and the results can be instantly heard.
For each layer, it is possible to program the key range and set the maximum key velocity. The Algorithms
Layer 3
Layer 2
Layer 1
Algorithm X
Algorithm X
Algorithm X
Unlike the Edit Perf Sound environment, where any the Sound assigned to a Track of a Performance inherits the modifications applied to the tracks, the Edit Sound environment allows you to modify the Sound parameters. The result is a RAM-Sound that you can store to the SK760/880 sound library, assign to any track of any Performance and save to Disk.
Each layer can comprise 1 or 2 oscillators, depending on the algorithm selected for the layer. Each oscillator has an Amplitude envelope, a Pitch envelope, a Pan envelope, a Low Frequency Oscillator (LFO) and a Filter with relative envelope. Depending on the algorithm selected, the amplitude envelope can be shared by both oscillators with a balance control, and the filters can be connected in series or in parallel.
The processing functions which you assign during the various editing stages are the synthesis tools (oscillators, filters, amplitude envelopes, etc.).
An Algorithm is the signal path of a sample to the audio outputs, through a series of processing functions that you select during the course of the editing tasks.
For each layer, it is possible to program the key range and set the maximum key velocity.
Press the corresponding soft button repeatedly to toggle between the L ad M status.
Given that the SK760/880 Sounds can comprise up to 3 layers, the left column of all the Edit Sound displays is dedicated to their selection by means of the corresponding soft button (A1, A2, A3). The layers can also be muted to isolate the layer currently in edit, allowing you to listen to the modified sound on its own.
Edit Sound 161

16 Edit Sound
Given that the SK760/880 Sounds can comprise up to 3 layers, the left column of all the Edit Sound displays is dedicated to their selection by means of the corresponding soft button (A1, A2, A3). The layers can also be muted to isolate the layer currently in edit, allowing you to listen to the modified sound on its own.
Edit Sound 161
Single Algorithm - one oscillator only
Dual 3 Algorithm - two oscillators. An Amplitude envelope for the two oscillators with a Balance control and the Filters connected in parallel
Editors available for the oscillator: Waveform, Volume, Amplitude envelope, Filter, Filter envelope, Pitch envelope, LFO, Pan envelope.
Dual 1 Algorithm - two oscillators in parallel

Editors available for each oscillator: Waveform, Filter, Filter envelope, Pitch envelope, LFO. Editors available for each layer: Volume/Volume balance, Amplitude envelope/Balance envelope.
Editors available for each oscillator: Waveform, Volume, Amplitude envelope , Filter, Filter envelope, Pitch envelope, LFO, Pan envelope.
Dual 4 Algorithm - two oscillators. An Amplitude envelope for the two oscillators with a Balance control and the Filters connected in series
Dual 2 Algorithm - two oscillators with independent Amplitude envelopes for each oscillator and with the Filters connected in series
Editors available for each oscillator: Waveform, Filter, Filter envelope, Pitch envelope, LFO. Editors available for each layer: Volume/Volume balance, Amplitude envelope/Balance envelope. Editors available for each oscillator: Waveform, Volume, Amplitude envelope , Pitch Envelope. Editors available for each layer: Filter 1 & 2 (separate); Filter envelope 1 & 2 (separate), LFO, Pan envelope.
162 Reference Guide
Layer Range
Allows you to assign a keyboard range and a dynamic range to the currently selected Layer. Escapes definitely from the Edit of the Sound. Allows you to save your modified Sound to the SK760/880 Sound Library (RAM) and escapes from Edit Sound definitely. This option, which appears in all Edit pages, temporarily assigns the original parameter status of the current edit page to the Sound in edit to compare the Sound before and after the modifications. Pressing Compare activates two new commands: Copy (F7) Copies the recalled parameter status to the Sound in edit, cancelling all modifications applied in the current edit page and escapes from Compare mode. Compare exit (F8) Escapes from Compare and retains all modifications applied to the sound in the current edit page. Filter Amplitude envelope Volume Waveform
LFO
Low Frequency Oscillator to provide Modulation. Generates cyclic variations in the amplitude or in the cutoff frequency of the filters. Layer Utility Algorithm
The principal editors of the edit sound menu
The configuration of the Editors changes according to the Algorithm selected, but the basic functions remain the same.
THE EDIT SOUND MAIN MENU EDITORS
Varies the sounds volume over time. Can be defined by Key On and Key Off Envelopes, a Tracking curve and some situations include an Env. Balance editor.
Pan
Position of the Sound within the Stereophonic panorama. It is possible to program the Key On and Key Off Pan envelope and the Tracking curve.
Modifies the Sounds timbre, attenuating or enhancing certain frequencies, such as in an equalizer. Can be defined by Key On and Key Off Filter Envelopes, Filter CutOff tracking and Filter Envelope tracking curves.
Pitch envelope Variation of the Sounds Pitch over time. Can be defined by Key On and Key Off Pitch envelopes and a Tracking curve. Abort Layer Range
Abort Save
Compare
Edit Sound 163
LFO
Pitch envelope Variation of the Sounds Pitch over time. Can be defined by Key On and Key Off Pitch envelopes and a Tracking curve.
Low Frequency Oscillator to provide Modulation. Generates cyclic variations in the amplitude or in the cutoff frequency of the filters.
Filter
Modifies the Sounds timbre, attenuating or enhancing certain frequencies, such as in an equalizer. Can be defined by Key On and Key Off Filter Envelopes, Filter CutOff tracking and Filter Envelope tracking curves. Compare Save
Algorithm
Allows you to choose one of the 5 Algorithms available. Allows you to Create, Import or Delete layers as required.
Layer Utility
Pan
Position of the Sound within the Stereophonic panorama. It is possible to program the Key On and Key Off Pan envelope and the Tracking curve.
Volume of the Sound. Some situations also include a Balance editor.
Selects the Wave sample (the fundamental waveform).
Sample Translator
These are listed in the right column of the main menu and selected with the corresponding Soft button (F1F8). See also page 16.36 for detailed explanations.
THE MAIN MENU OPTIONS
This option, which appears in all Edit pages, temporarily assigns the original parameter status of the current edit page to the Sound in edit to compare the Sound before and after the modifications. Pressing Compare activates two new commands: Copy (F7) Copies the recalled parameter status to the Sound in edit, cancelling all modifications applied in the current edit page and escapes from Compare mode. Compare exit (F8) Escapes from Compare and retains all modifications applied to the sound in the current edit page.
Allows you to save your modified Sound to the SK760/880 Sound Library (RAM) and escapes from Edit Sound definitely.
Escapes definitely from the Edit of the Sound.
Allows you to assign a keyboard range and a dynamic range to the currently selected Layer.
Allows you to Create, Import or Delete layers as required.
Allows you to choose one of the 5 Algorithms available.
Activates the program which is able to read samples from previous Generalmusic Series instruments (S, WX, SX) and disk-based samples of various formats. Sample Translator also permits the reception and transmission of samples via Midi and the creation of new Waveforms. Sample Translator is discussed separately on page 40.
Edit Sound 163

THE EDIT SOUND MAIN MENU EDITORS

THE MAIN MENU OPTIONS

These are listed in the right column of the main menu and selected with the corresponding Soft button (F1F8). See also page 16.36 for detailed explanations.
Sample Translator Activates the program which is able to read samples from previous Generalmusic Series instruments (S, WX, SX) and disk-based samples of various formats. Sample Translator also permits the reception and transmission of samples via Midi and the creation of new Waveforms. Sample Translator is discussed separately on page 40.
The configuration of the Editors changes according to the Algorithm selected, but the basic functions remain the same.
The principal editors of the edit sound menu Waveform Volume Selects the Wave sample (the fundamental waveform). Volume of the Sound. Some situations also include a Balance editor. Varies the sounds volume over time. Can be defined by Key On and Key Off Envelopes, a Tracking curve and some situations include an Env. Balance editor.
Amplitude envelope
ENTERING EDIT SOUND

You can choose to enter Edit Sound either with a solod Sound (SOLO button LED on), or with two or more tracks of the current Performance active. This second option allows you to listen to the Sound currently in edit together with other active tracks of the Performance to give you an idea of what your edited Sound is like when combined with other Sounds. Once you enter Edit Sound, you cannot activate or deactivate the SOLO button; you must set the SOLO button according to your requirements before entering Edit Sound. You can enter Edit Sound while the instrument is in any playing mode.
1/2
A B C D E
1. Select the Sound (track) you wish to edit from the main display. 2. Press the SOLO button if you want to isolate the Sound from the rest. 3. Press SYNTH in the EDIT section.
You are prompted to confirm the request to enter Edit Sound.
G H
SOLO
3/4
SYNTH 8
4. Press ENTER to enter Edit Sound

Press ESCAPE to cancel the request. With ENTER, the main EDIT SOUND menu is displayed. When you enter Edit Sound with a new Sound, the configuration of the Editors depends on the Sound in edit.
ENTER
ESCAPE
164 Reference Guide
To escape Edit Sound permanently, use the Abort option in the main menu (F6).
An Are you sure dialog appears requesting confirmation of the escape command. Confirming the Escape command with Enter escapes Edit Sound and cancels all modifications made to the Sound in edit. To escape permanently without losing the modifications, use the Save command explained on the next page.
To escape permanently without losing the modifications, use the Save command explained on the next page.
An Are you sure dialog appears requesting confirmation of the escape command. Confirming the Escape command with Enter escapes Edit Sound and cancels all modifications made to the Sound in edit.
To escape Edit Sound permanently, use the Abort option in the main menu (F6).
Permanent escape without saving
To return to the sound in edit press SYNTH. If you escape Edit Sound temporarily, you will not be permitted to change Sound, or select a Song or Style.
The Sound remains in edit and the selected track plays the Sound in its modified status.
Thanks to multitasking, you can temporarily escape Edit Sound by pressing the SYNTH button or ESCAPE, or by entering the edit of another section by pressing the corresponding button of the EDIT section.
Temporary escape
ESCAPE FROM EDIT SOUND
SYNTH
Permanent escape
Temporary escape
OR
Edit Sound 165

ESCAPE FROM EDIT SOUND

Temporary escape
Thanks to multitasking, you can temporarily escape Edit Sound by pressing the SYNTH button or ESCAPE, or by entering the edit of another section by pressing the corresponding button of the EDIT section. The Sound remains in edit and the selected track plays the Sound in its modified status. To return to the sound in edit press SYNTH. If you escape Edit Sound temporarily, you will not be permitted to change Sound, or select a Song or Style.
Temporary escape
ENTER TEMPO / DATA
SYNTH
OR
ESCAPE
Permanent escape without saving

F8 F7
Permanent escape
F1 F2 F3 F4
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
F4
F6 F2 F5 F3 F1
F5
F6 F7
F8
Edit Sound 165
SAVING AND NAMING THE MODIFIED SOUND

Once you have completed your editing tasks, you can save the modified Sound to RAM (the SK760/ 880 Sound Library).
1
F1 F2 F3 F4
1. Press the soft button F8 to select Save from the main Edit Sound menu.
The Bank Prog. Change window opens where you can select the destination of the new Sound in the SK760/880 Sound library. The SK760/880 Sounds are stored in the order of Bank Select and Program Change numbers. You can choose to store the modified sound with its original name, or with a new name. RAM-Sounds based on ROM-Wavesamples are saved with an asterisk (*) attached after the name to identify the Sound from the original. New sounds based on new Wavesamples loaded from disk or created with the Sample Translator are called RAM Sounds, identified by the small graphical representation of a wave ( ).
F5
F6 F7
F8
2. Use the directional / arrows to select the Bank and Prog. Change entry zones and rotate the Dial to select the numbers corresponding to an empty location (shown as No Sound).
You can also specify an absolute number on the numeric keypad (KEYPAD LED on).
3/4
F6 F7 F8
3. To change the Sounds name, press the Soft button F7/F8 .

Use the standard name entry procedure (see Data Entry on page 1.4 of Chapter 1). Press ENTER to confirm the new name.
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
4. Press ENTER again to memorize the Sound to the selected location.

ESCAPE
166 Reference Guide
Once you enter an Editor, press ESCAPE to exit the editor and return to the main menu.
F8 F7
Alternatively, enter the editors directly using the page scroll buttons ( ). These buttons allow you to scroll through the editors in increasing or decreasing numerical order without having to return to the main menu.
To confirm a new entry, use the ENTER button. Use the ESCAPE button to exit from a selected parameter without confirming a new entry.
Another direct entry method from the main menu is to specify the editor number on the numeric keypad (with the KEYPAD LED on) and press ENTER to gain access.
To enter a value for the selected parameter, use either the DIAL for continuous data change, or the numerical keypad to insert an absolute value (with the KEY PAD LED on).
Select the options in the right options column with the corresponding soft buttons (F1F8).
DATA ENTRY
Select the parameters of an editor with the directional arrow buttons.
Select the parameters of an editor with the directional arrow buttons.
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
DATA ENTRY
Select the options in the right options column with the corresponding soft buttons (F1F8).
To enter a value for the selected parameter, use either the DIAL for continuous data change, or the numerical keypad to insert an absolute value (with the KEY PAD LED on).
Another direct entry method from the main menu is to specify the editor number on the numeric keypad (with the KEYPAD LED on) and press ENTER to gain access.
ENTER TEMPO / DATA
Once you enter an Editor, press ESCAPE to exit the editor and return to the main menu.
To confirm a new entry, use the ENTER button. Use the ESCAPE button to exit from a selected parameter without confirming a new entry.
Select the Editors with the directional arrows and press ENTER to gain access to the selected function.
The navigational tools are the page scroll buttons ( ) and the directional arrows ( / & / ).
NAVIGATION AND DATA ENTRY IN THE EDIT SOUND ENVIRONMENT
ESCAPE
Editors Main Menu options
Navigation and Data Entry tools
Edit Sound 167

NAVIGATION AND DATA ENTRY IN THE EDIT SOUND ENVIRONMENT

The navigational tools are the page scroll buttons ( ) and the directional arrows ( / & / ). Select the Editors with the directional arrows and press ENTER to gain access to the selected function. Alternatively, enter the editors directly using the page scroll buttons ( ). These buttons allow you to scroll through the editors in increasing or decreasing numerical order without having to return to the main menu.
ST. / SONG CNT / PADS DEMO
F1 F2 F3 F4
F5
F6 F7
F8
EFFECTS
_
4 1
EDIT / NUMBER
PRELOAD
KEY PAD
TRACKS
SYNTH
MIDI
F4
F6
F2
0 5 8 2
F5 F3 F1
GENERAL
SOUND
MIXER
DISK
+
9 6 3 H. D.
Editors Main Menu options
Navigation and Data Entry tools
KEY PAD
EDIT / NUMBER
MIDI MIXER
EFFECTS
CNT / PADS
TRACKS
SOUND
ST. / SONG
SYNTH
GENERAL
DEMO
PRELOAD
DISK H. D.
Edit Sound 167
STATUS OF THE INSTRUMENT IN EDIT SOUND MODE

The settings of the Trackball, Pedals, Aftertouch, Transpose and the other parameters are those of the currently selected Performance. If you attempt to select a Song, Style, Performance or Sound while you have temporarily escaped Edit Sound, the display will show the following message:
IMPORTANT REMINDERS
1. You cannot overwrite a Rom-Sound.
A modified ROM-Sound generates a RAMSound which can be stored to either an empty location, or to an existing RAM-Sound. If you attempt to store a RAM-Sound to a ROMSound destination, the display will show the following message:
Press ENTER or ESCAPE to close the window and press SYNTH to return to Edit Sound and escape permanently, either with Abort or Save.
Repeat the operation and select an empty location.
2. If you save the new RAM-Sound to an existing RAM-Sound, the existing file will be irremediably lost without warning.
Be absolutely sure, therefore, that you have stored the existing RAM-Sound to disk or Hard disk before confirming the save procedure.
3. If you Abort Edit Sound without storing the modified sound, you will loose all edited Sound data.
When you select the Abort option, you are prompted to reconfirm the operation. If you do not want to save the modifications, proceed as required. If you escape Edit Sound temporarily, the modified status of the Sound will be retained but you will not be permitted to select a Song, Style, Performance or Sound.
168 Reference Guide
Valid for all Algorithms. Single activates a single Waveform editor while all Dual Algorithms activate Waveform 1 and Waveform 2. The Waveform editor provides access to the principal control parameters of the basic wave sample of the Sound. The Waveform parameters
Waveform Selects the basic waveform of the Sound. Here you can select one of the Rom Waveforms, or a Waveform loaded to memory with a disk-based Ram -Sound, or one created with the Sample Translator. You can select the waveforms by scrolling one by one with the DIAL, or by specifying their number on the numeric keypad, making reference to the ROM Wave table in the Appendix. You can also use the Search, Search Previous and Search Next functions to pass directly to a specified name. Fine pitch Transpose
Edit Sound - main menu - Waveform editor selected
Edit Sound: Waveform editor programming

Edit Sound 169
Waveform
The Waveform parameters
Valid for all Algorithms. Single activates a single Waveform editor while all Dual Algorithms activate Waveform 1 and Waveform 2. The Waveform editor provides access to the principal control parameters of the basic wave sample of the Sound.
Edit Sound - main menu - Waveform editor selected
Waveform
Selects the basic waveform of the Sound. Here you can select one of the Rom Waveforms, or a Waveform loaded to memory with a disk-based Ram -Sound, or one created with the Sample Translator. You can select the waveforms by scrolling one by one with the DIAL, or by specifying their number on the numeric keypad, making reference to the ROM Wave table in the Appendix. You can also use the Search, Search Previous and Search Next functions to pass directly to a specified name.
Tuning mode
Wave Vector
Edit Sound: Waveform editor programming
Fine tunes the Waves pitch in steps of 1/64th of a semitone. Assignable values: 64 ... +64. corresponds to standard pitch.
Transposes the Waveform in semitones. Assignable values: 64 ... +64. corresponds to standard pitch.
Assigns the Waveform to a specific note of the keyboard. Assignable values: Normal, A0C8. Normal transposes the wave according to the note played. Assigning a note fixes the Wave to the same note across the entire keyboard.
Allows you to choose from a selection of 4 wave vectors: Forward reads the wave from the start point to the end; Reverse reads the wave from end to start point; Alternate 1 reads the wave from start point to the end and loops back to the beginning and repeats continually; Alternate 2, similar to Alternate 1.
Edit Sound 169

Waveform
Wave Vector
Allows you to choose from a selection of 4 wave vectors: Forward reads the wave from the start point to the end; Reverse reads the wave from end to start point; Alternate 1 reads the wave from start point to the end and loops back to the beginning and repeats continually; Alternate 2, similar to Alternate 1. Assigns the Waveform to a specific note of the keyboard. Assignable values: Normal, A0C8. Normal transposes the wave according to the note played. Assigning a note fixes the Wave to the same note across the entire keyboard. Transposes the Waveform in semitones. Assignable values: 64 ... +64. corresponds to standard pitch. Fine tunes the Waves pitch in steps of 1/64th of a semitone. Assignable values: 64 ... +64. corresponds to standard pitch.
Tuning mode
Transpose
Fine pitch
Pitch touch sensitivity
Links Pitch to Aftertouch variations. The Pitch of the Sound can be varied by applying pressure on the notes of the keyboard after key on. Positive values increase the Pitch while negative ones have the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 (lowest sensitivity = 2 semitones) ... +7 (highest sensitivity = +2 semitones). Represents the actual (default) starting point of the wave sample in the SK760/880 memory. Use this parameter to determine the point at which the sample will start its playback. Depending on the waveform, values above the default starting point may cause the sample to start at a later point, removing some or all of its attack. Values below the default value may cause the sample to start before its normal start point, adding part or all of the samples stored at lower memory addresses. Selects the mode in which the Wavestart parameter is linked to key velocity. Disable: not linked to key velocity. Switch: either the entire Wave, or the part of the Wave following the programmed Wave Start is read above or below a certain key velocity setting. Floating: fluctuates the Wave Start according to the key velocity.
Wv. Start Dyn sns.
Wavestart
With the Switch mode setting, the value (0127) represents the dynamic switch. Above the dynamic switch setting, the entire Wave is read while below, only the part of the Wave that follows immediately after the programmed Wave Start is considered. Switch assignable values: 0127 If the mode is Floating, the value determines the distance from the point at which the Wave is read at the programmed Wave Start, or towards the end of the Wave. (The Wave is always read from the Wave start setting, not before). With positive values, the higher the key velocity, the nearer the Wave is read at the Wave start setting. Floating assignable values: 7+7. Selects a scale (temperament). Value 0 corresponds to Equal temperament; Value 1 corresponds to 1/4 tone difference between each note; Value 2 corresponds to a 1/16 tone difference between each note. Assignable values: 0, 1, 2.
Scale Mode
Wv. Start Dyn mode
Valid for all Algorithms. Dual 1 and Dual 2 activate Volume 1 and Volume 2, Dual 3 and Dual 4 share a single Volume editor with a Balance control. The Volume editor controls the volume of a single oscillator, or the volume of two oscillators in situations where the algorithm provides a Balance control (Dual 3 & 4). This function corresponds to the maximum volume level available of the Sound in any situation. The Volume parameters
Volume Sets the Volume of oscillator 1 or 2, or the general volume of the layer if the Algorithm comprises the Balance editor. Assignable values: 0 127.
Dynamic sensitivity
Edit Sound - main menu Volume editor selected
Edit Sound - Volume page

Edit Sound 1611
Dynamic sensitivity
Volume
The Volume parameters
The Volume editor controls the volume of a single oscillator, or the volume of two oscillators in situations where the algorithm provides a Balance control (Dual 3 & 4). This function corresponds to the maximum volume level available of the Sound in any situation.
Valid for all Algorithms. Dual 1 and Dual 2 activate Volume 1 and Volume 2, Dual 3 and Dual 4 share a single Volume editor with a Balance control.
Volume & Balance
Sets the Volume of oscillator 1 or 2, or the general volume of the layer if the Algorithm comprises the Balance editor. Assignable values: 0 127.
Links the Volume response to velocity variations. Positive values increase the Volume with increased key velocity, while negative values create the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.
Edit Sound - main menu Volume editor selected
Links the Volume response to velocity variations. Positive values increase the Volume with increased key velocity, while negative values create the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.
Edit Sound - Volume page
Volume touch Links Volume response to Aftertouch. sensitivity Positive values increase the Volume with increased aftertouch pressure, while negative values create the inverse effect with increased aftertouch. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.
Edit Sound 1611

Volume & Balance
Volume touch Links Volume response to Aftertouch. sensitivity Positive values increase the Volume with increased aftertouch pressure, while negative values create the inverse effect with increased aftertouch. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.
VOLUME TRACKING
Valid for all Algorithms. Tracking allows you to determine how the volume varies across the keyboard. Here you can enhance the presence of a sound more or less across the keyboard in order to simulate to a greater degree that which occurs in reality. For example, an acoustic piano can reach a higher sound level in the bass region, while the higher notes are less intensive. Segment (F6) Using the SEGMENT option, you can divide the Tracking curve into several different segments, in order to obtain a more refined Tracking across the keyboard.
1 segm The Tracking curve is essential, representing a constant Volume offset across the keyboard. The parameter Key cannot be modified. The Tracking curve consists of 3 segments which allow the construction of a situation offering different variations across the keyboard. The Tracking curve is divided into many parts (maximum resolution); allowing a more complex programming of the Volume offsets across the keyboard.
3 display parameters, selected with the Up/Down cursor buttons and modified with the Dial, define the tracking:
Point Corresponds to one of the extreme ends of a segment. Point 1 represents the lowest note of the keyboard. The highest note of the keyboard is represented by the last Point (depending on the number of segments inserted). Defines the note at the selected Point. The extreme points (A#0, C8) cannot be modified. The value of this parameter is a relative value which represents the change in volume with respect to the actual setting of the Volume function. A level of 0 corresponds to the maximum setting of the Volume function and all other values are negative. A value of 127 corresponds to 0 volume at the note defined by the selected Point. A straight line running from point 1 to point 2 corresponds to the lowest possible resolution. Assignable values: 0 127
Key
Level
3 segm
6 segm
Edit Sound - Volume Tracking curve

Edit Sound - Volume Tracking curve showing 3 segments
1. Press F6 to open the SEGMENT selection window, select 3 or 6 segments with the down ( ) cursor arrow and press ENTER to confirm. 2. Rotate the DIAL to select the Point that you wish to modify.
ENTER
TE
ESCAPE
Edit Sound - Volume Tracking: add 3 segments
Edit Sound - Volume Tracking: program the Key parameter
EXAMPLE OF HOW TO PROGRAM A TRACKING ENVELOPE
Edit Sound - Volume Tracking: program the Point parameter
2. Rotate the DIAL to select the Point that you wish to modify.
1. Press F6 to open the SEGMENT selection window, select 3 or 6 segments with the down ( ) cursor arrow and press ENTER to confirm.
Edit Sound - Volume Tracking: program the Level parameter

Edit Sound 1613
ESCAPE
Edit Sound - Volume Tracking: program the Point parameter
Edit Sound - Volume Tracking: add 3 segments
3
TE
ENTER
Edit Sound - Volume Tracking: program the Key parameter
Edit Sound - Volume Tracking: program the Level parameter
4. Select the LEVEL parameter with the down ( ) cursor arrow and rotate the DIAL to set the required value.
3. Select the KEY parameter with the down ( ) cursor arrow and rotate the DIAL to set the required value.
Edit Sound 1613

EXAMPLE OF HOW TO PROGRAM A TRACKING ENVELOPE

3. Select the KEY parameter with the down ( ) cursor arrow and rotate the DIAL to set the required value. 4. Select the LEVEL parameter with the down ( ) cursor arrow and rotate the DIAL to set the required value.
BALANCE (F1)
Valid for Dual 3 and Dual 4 Algorithms only. The Balance parameters
Balance Balances the Volume of the two oscillators of the current layer. Positive values render the first Waveform louder, negative values enhance the second Waveform. Assignable values: 127 ... +127. Links the Balance response to key velocity variations. Positive values enhance the presence of the first Waveform with increased key velocity while negative values enhance the presence of the second Waveform with increased key velocity. Value range: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.
Balance dyn. sensitivity
Edit Sound - Dual 3 configuration showing Balance Editor
Balance touch Links the Balance response to sensitivity aftertouch variations. Positive values enhance the presence of the first Waveform with increased Aftertouch pressure while negative values enhance the presence of the second Waveform with increased Aftertouch pressure. Value range: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.
Edit Sound - Balance parameters
BALANCE TRACKING (F2)

Balance Tracking allows you to program a Balance offset, or the variation of the Balance (programmed in the Balance page) across the keyboard. For information regarding how to program the SEGMENT option (1, 3, 6 Segments) and the tracking parameters (Point, Key, Level), refer to the Volume Tracking example on the previous page.
Edit Sound - Balance tracking curve (1 segment)

Valid for all Algorithms. Dual 1 and Dual 2 activate the Amp. Envel. 1 and Amp. Envel. 2 editors; Dual 3 and Dual 4 share an Amp. Envelope with a Balance control. The Amplitude Envelope represents the volume displacement of the Sound over time. This editor allows you to program the Key On Envelope, the Key Off Envelope and the Envelope Tracking. In practice, the Key On and Key Off Envelopes correspond to the traditional ADSR parameters (Attack, Decay, Sustain, Release). Amplitude Envelope Control
This parameter fixes a sustain level independent of the release envelope. Activation of this parameter depends on the status of the Sustain function. Press soft button F5 to activate Sustain (shown in negative highlight). Press again to deactivate Sustain. Assignable values: 0 127.
Segment 1 rate Segment 1 corresponds to the Attack dynamic sens. phase. This parameter ties the Attack rate of the Sound to key velocity. Positive values increase the Attack rate with increased key velocity while negative values produce the inverse effect with increased key velocity. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response. Key Off rate Links the response of the Key Off dynamic sens. Envelope rate to the release velocity. The Key Off Envelope corresponds to the Release phase. Positive values increase the completion speed of the Key Off Envelope with increased key release velocity, while negative values slow down the completion speed with increased key release velocity. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response. Sustain (F5) This parameter fixes a sustain level independent of the release envelope. Activation of this parameter depends on the status of the Sustain function. Press soft button F5 to activate Sustain (shown in negative highlight). Press again to deactivate Sustain. Assignable values: 0 127.
Edit Sound - Amplitude Envelope Editor
Edit Sound - Amplitude Envelope control with Sustain active

Amplitude Envelope Control
Envelope finish Determines the note from which the Key Off envelope cannot interrupt the Amp. envelope on its natural course to completion, indispensable to simulate, for example, the acoustic piano where no dampers are applied from the note A6 onwards; the sound continues indefinitely after release. When this parameter is not set to Off, the last segment of the Key On Envelope sets to 0 automatically and cannot be modified; this is to prevent the sound from playing continually after release due to the deactivated Key Off Envelope. Assignable values: Off, A0 C8. Sustain (F5)
Envelope finish Determines the note from which the Key Off envelope cannot interrupt the Amp. envelope on its natural course to completion, indispensable to simulate, for example, the acoustic piano where no dampers are applied from the note A6 onwards; the sound continues indefinitely after release. When this parameter is not set to Off, the last segment of the Key On Envelope sets to 0 automatically and cannot be modified; this is to prevent the sound from playing continually after release due to the deactivated Key Off Envelope. Assignable values: Off, A0 C8.
Valid for all Algorithms. Dual 1 and Dual 2 activate the Amp. Envel. 1 and Amp. Envel. 2 editors; Dual 3 and Dual 4 share an Amp. Envelope with a Balance control. The Amplitude Envelope represents the volume displacement of the Sound over time. This editor allows you to program the Key On Envelope, the Key Off Envelope and the Envelope Tracking. In practice, the Key On and Key Off Envelopes correspond to the traditional ADSR parameters (Attack, Decay, Sustain, Release).
Edit Sound - Amplitude Envelope Editor
Amplitude Envelope & Balance Envelope
Edit Sound - Amplitude Envelope control with Sustain active
Key Off rate Links the response of the Key Off dynamic sens. Envelope rate to the release velocity. The Key Off Envelope corresponds to the Release phase. Positive values increase the completion speed of the Key Off Envelope with increased key release velocity, while negative values slow down the completion speed with increased key release velocity. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.
Segment 1 rate Segment 1 corresponds to the Attack dynamic sens. phase. This parameter ties the Attack rate of the Sound to key velocity. Positive values increase the Attack rate with increased key velocity while negative values produce the inverse effect with increased key velocity. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.
Edit Sound 1615

Amplitude Envelope & Balance Envelope
Edit Sound 1615
AMPLITUDE ENVELOPE KEY ON

The Key On Envelope is a 10 segment curve (maximum) that represents the variation of the sounds volume for the entire duration that the notes are held pressed. Some examples of typical Amplitude Envelopes appear opposite, shown in various Zoom situations. ZOOM (F7) Using the ZOOM option, you can enlarge the field of vision of the envelope up to 4 times at a selected Point. Pressing the soft button repeatedly selects the Zoom options in cyclic order (1, 2, 3, 4, 0). Zoom 0 corresponds to actual size. USING THE SEGMENT OPTION
Add segment insert a new segment immediately after the currently selected segment. A maximum of up to 10 segments is permitted. cancels the current segment. N.B.: The Key On Envelope must have at least one segment (the Attack phase), which cannot be cancelled. Edit Sound - KeyOn Ampl. Envelope in Zoom 1 status showing segment 1 (Attack phase) programmed with a Time value of 104 Edit Sound - KeyOn Ampl. Envelope in Zoom 3 status showing segment 1 (Attack phase) with a time value of 0
Del segm
Loop segm
loops the current segment (envelope repetition), provided that the Envelope Finish parameter in the Envelope control page is set to OFF. When it reaches the terminal point, it loops back to the beginning. The cycle repeats continually until key release. The initial Loop point is represented by an arrow. To eliminate the loop, select the segment and select del segm.. Edit Sound - Ampl. Envelope showing segment 4 set to Loop. In practice, the Sounds volume starts at 0, proceeds to the first peak of segment 1 (attack phase), drops to the lowest point of segment 2, rises to the second peak of segment 3, drops again to the lowest point of segment 4 then loops back to the highest peak of segment 3 and repeats continually until the key is released.
Time
Level
Edit Sound - Ampl. Envelope showing a 5 segment curve with segment 4 selected
AMPLITUDE KEY OFF

Valid for all Algorithms. The Amplitude Key Off Envelope is a 10 segment curve (maximum) that represents the variation of the sound after the notes have been released. This envelope phase is often called Release. For details regarding the display parameters (Segment, Time, Level) and soft options (Segment, Zoom), refer to the section on the Key On Amp. Envelope of the previous pages.
Sets the Sound level of the segment at its terminal point. The maximum level corresponds to the volume programmed in the Volume editor N.B.: the initial level of the first segment at the starting point is always zero (it cannot be modified). Assignable values: 0 ... 127.
Edit Sound 1617
Segment
An example of how to program a Key On & Key Off Envelopes appears on the next page.
Edit Sound - Amp. Key Off Envelope
Time
3 display parameters, selected with the cursor buttons, define the Key On Amp. Envelope.
Allows you to selects the segments with the Dial. The one selected corresponds to the flashing terminal point.
N.B.: the level at the terminal point of the Key Off Envelope is always zero.
Level
Valid for all Algorithms.
Sets the Sound level of the segment at its terminal point. The maximum level corresponds to the volume programmed in the Volume editor N.B.: the initial level of the first segment at the starting point is always zero (it cannot be modified). Assignable values: 0 ... 127.
The Amplitude Key Off Envelope is a 10 segment curve (maximum) that represents the variation of the sound after the notes have been released. This envelope phase is often called Release. For details regarding the display parameters (Segment, Time, Level) and soft options (Segment, Zoom), refer to the section on the Key On Amp. Envelope of the previous pages.
Determines the duration of the Segment. The maximum segment time is approximately 21 seconds. Assignable values: 0 ... 127.
An example of how to program a Key On & Key Off Envelopes appears on the next page.
N.B.: the level at the terminal point of the Key Off Envelope is always zero.
AMPLITUDE KEY OFF
Edit Sound - Amp. Key Off Envelope
Edit Sound - Ampl. Envelope showing a 5 segment curve with segment 4 selected
Edit Sound - KeyOn Ampl. Envelope in Zoom 0 status showing segment 1 (Attack phase) with a time value of 0
Edit Sound 1617


Segment
Allows you to selects the segments with the Dial. The one selected corresponds to the flashing terminal point.
Edit Sound - KeyOn Ampl. Envelope in Zoom 0 status showing segment 1 (Attack phase) with a time value of 0
EXAMPLE OF HOW TO PROGRAM A KEY ON OR KEY OFF ENVELOPE

1. To insert a segment, press F6 to open the SEGMENT selection window and press ENTER to confirm the Add Segm option (shown selected). 2. Rotate the DIAL to select the envelope segment that you wish to modify. If necessary, use the ZOOM option to zoom in on the selected segment. 3. Select the KEY parameter with the down ( ) cursor arrow and rotate the DIAL to set the required value. 4. Select the LEVEL parameter with the down ( ) cursor arrow and rotate the DIAL to set the required value.
ENTER
TE
ESCAPE
Edit Sound - Key On Envelope: add a segment
Edit Sound - Key On Envelope: program the Time parameter
Edit Sound - Key On Envelope: select a Segment

Edit Sound - Key On Envelope: program the Level parameter
The tracking curve represents the change in the completion velocity of the Amplitude Envelope across the keyboard. SEGMENT (F6) Using the SEGMENT option, you can divide the Tracking curve into several different segments, in order to obtain a more refined Tracking across the keyboard.
1 segm The Tracking curve is essential, representing a constant variation of the envelope completion velocity across the keyboard. The parameter Key cannot be modified. The Tracking curve consists of 3 segments which allow the construction of a situation offering different variations across the keyboard.
Point
Key
Level
6 segm
For details of how to program the Amplitude Envelope Tracking, refer to the Volume Tracking example on page 16. 13.
3 segm
Valid for all Algorithms
Edit Sound - Amplitude Envelope Tracking
Edit Sound 1619
6 segm
1 segm
Using the SEGMENT option, you can divide the Tracking curve into several different segments, in order to obtain a more refined Tracking across the keyboard.
SEGMENT (F6)
The tracking curve represents the change in the completion velocity of the Amplitude Envelope across the keyboard.
AMPLITUDE ENVELOPE TRACKING
The Tracking curve consists of 3 segments which allow the construction of a situation offering different variations across the keyboard.
The Tracking curve is divided into many parts (maximum resolution); allowing a more complex programming of the envelope completion velocity across the keyboard.
The Tracking curve is essential, representing a constant variation of the envelope completion velocity across the keyboard. The parameter Key cannot be modified.
For details of how to program the Amplitude Envelope Tracking, refer to the Volume Tracking example on page 16. 13.
3 segm
The Envelope completion velocity (Key On and Key Off) can be faster or slower across the note range of acoustic instruments. For example, the bass notes of a piano or an acoustic guitar sound for a longer period than the high notes.
Edit Sound - Amplitude Envelope Tracking
The Envelope completion velocity (Key On and Key Off) can be faster or slower across the note range of acoustic instruments. For example, the bass notes of a piano or an acoustic guitar sound for a longer period than the high notes.
Level
Key
Point
3 display parameters, selected with the Up/Down cursor buttons, define the tracking:
The envelope completion velocity offset (Key On and Key Off). Positive values increase the completion velocity, negative values slow it down. 0 corresponds to the standard duration of the segments programmed in the previous pages. Assignable values: -63 0+63.
Determines the keyboard position for the point in edit. The extreme points (A#0, C8) cannot be modified.
One of the extreme ends of a segment. Rotation of the Dial selects one of the points of the Tracking curve (1, 2, or 1, 2, 3, 4, or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7).
Edit Sound 1619

AMPLITUDE ENVELOPE TRACKING

Valid for all Algorithms
One of the extreme ends of a segment. Rotation of the Dial selects one of the points of the Tracking curve (1, 2, or 1, 2, 3, 4, or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7). Determines the keyboard position for the point in edit. The extreme points (A#0, C8) cannot be modified. The envelope completion velocity offset (Key On and Key Off). Positive values increase the completion velocity, negative values slow it down. 0 corresponds to the standard duration of the segments programmed in the previous pages. Assignable values: -63 0+63.
BALANCE ENVELOPE
Valid for Dual 3 and Dual 4 Algorithms only. The Balance Envelope corresponds to a mixer for the two oscillators which share a single Amplitude Envelope. The Key On and Key Off envelopes allow you to enhance the presence of one Waveform with respect to the other in the key on and release situations. The Balance Tracking allows you to vary the Balance setting across the keyboard. Balance parameters
Balance envelope Activates (On) or deactivates (Off) the Balance envelope. Assignable values: On, Off.
Balance env. Links the Balance envelope dyn. sensitivity response to key velocity variations. Positive values increase the response of the Balance envelope with increased key velocity while negative values have the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. Key off balance Links the response of the key off env. rate dyn. Balance envelope completion sens. velocity to key velocity variations. Positive values increase the completion velocity of the Key Off Balance envelope with increased key velocity while negative values have the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect.
Balance env. Depth of the action of the Amplitude am. sensitivity envelope on Balance. The envelope is activated by the Balance Envelope parameter above. Positive values increase the depth of the action of the envelope on Balance while negative values have the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect.
Edit Sound - Balance Envelope editor

Edit Sound - Balance parameters
USING THE SEGMENT OPTION

Add segment
Del segm Loop segm
cancels the current segment.
To eliminate the loop, select the segment and select del segm..
Edit Sound - Balance Key On envelope, Zoom 3
Segment
Allows you to select the segments with the Dial. The one selected corresponds to the flashing terminal point. Level
Edit Sound - programmed Balance Key Off envelope, Zoom 2

Edit Sound 1621
ZOOM (F7)
Add segment
USING THE SEGMENT OPTION
Using the ZOOM option, you can enlarge the field of vision of the envelope up to 4 times at a selected Point. Pressing the soft button repeatedly selects the Zoom options in cyclic order (1, 2, 3, 4, 0). Zoom 0 corresponds to actual size.
loops the current segment (envelope repetition). When it reaches the terminal point, it loops back to the beginning. The cycle repeats continually until key release. The initial Loop point is represented by an arrow.
Loop segm
Del segm
The Key On envelope represents the variation of the Balance for the entire duration that the notes are held pressed while the Key Off Envelope, the variation of the Balance after the notes have been released.
The Balance Key On and Key Off Envelopes are 10 segment curves (maximum).
BALANCE ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF
insert a new segment immediately after the currently selected segment. A maximum of up to 10 segments is permitted.
loops the current segment (envelope repetition). When it reaches the terminal point, it loops back to the beginning. The cycle repeats continually until key release. The initial Loop point is represented by an arrow.
Using the ZOOM option, you can enlarge the field of vision of the envelope up to 4 times at a selected Point. Pressing the soft button repeatedly selects the Zoom options in cyclic order (1, 2, 3, 4, 0). Zoom 0 corresponds to actual size.
ZOOM (F7)
For details of how to program the Balance Key On & Key Off Envelopes, refer to the Amplitude Envelope example on page 16. 18.
Segment
Allows you to select the segments with the Dial. The one selected corresponds to the flashing terminal point.
For details of how to program the Balance Key On & Key Off Envelopes, refer to the Amplitude Envelope example on page 16. 18.
Edit Sound - programmed Balance Key Off envelope, Zoom 2
Edit Sound - Balance Key On envelope, Zoom 3
Time
Sets the Balance level of the segment at its terminal point. The values are relative and represent the enhancement of one oscillator with respect to the other. Assignable values: -50 0 +50.
Edit Sound 1621

BALANCE ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF

Time
The Balance Key On and Key Off Envelopes are 10 segment curves (maximum). The Key On envelope represents the variation of the Balance for the entire duration that the notes are held pressed while the Key Off Envelope, the variation of the Balance after the notes have been released.
Level
Determines the duration of the Segment. The maximum segment time is approximately 21 seconds. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. Sets the Balance level of the segment at its terminal point. The values are relative and represent the enhancement of one oscillator with respect to the other. Assignable values: -50 0 +50.
BALANCE TRACKING
Balance Tracking allows you to determine how the Balance varies across the keyboard. SEGMENT (F6) Using the SEGMENT option, you can divide the Balance Tracking curve into several different segments, in order to obtain a more refined Tracking across the keyboard.
3 display parameters, selected with the Up/Down cursor buttons and modified with the Dial, define the tracking:
Point Corresponds to one of the extreme ends of a segment. Point 1 represents the lowest note of the keyboard. The highest note of the keyboard is represented by the last Point (depending on the number of segments inserted). Defines the note at the selected Point. The extreme points (A#0, C8) cannot be modified. The value of this parameter is a relative value which represents the change in Balance across the keyboard. A level of 0 corresponds to an equal Balance setting for both oscillators of the layer. Positive values enhance the presence of one oscillator with respect to the other while negative values give the inverse effect. Assignable values: 63 0 +63.
Key 1 segm The Tracking curve is essential, representing a constant Balance offset across the keyboard. The parameter Key cannot be modified. The Tracking curve consists of 3 segments which allow the construction of a situation offering different variations across the keyboard. The Tracking curve is divided into many parts (maximum resolution); allowing a more complex programming of the Balance offsets across the keyboard.
Level
3 segm
6 segm
For details of how to program the Balance Tracking, refer to the Volume Tracking example on page 16. 13.
Edit Sound - Balance Tracking

Valid for all Algorithms. For the Dual 1 and Dual 3 algorithms, two Filters are connected in parallel [Filter os. 1, Filter os. 2]. For the Dual 2 and Dual 4 Algorithms, the Filters are connected in series [Filter 1, Filter 2]. Filters enhance or attenuate certain frequencies of the Waveforms. The sound changes according to the type of filter selected. The SK760/880 filters are 2 pole filters with roll off curves at 12 dB per octave. In the Dual 1 and Dual 3 Algorithms, the Filters are connected in parallel, so that Filter 1 operates on oscillator 1 and Filter 2 on oscillator 2. In the Dual 2 and Dual 4 Algorithms, the Filters are connected in series, so that Filter 2 operates on the sound already processed by Filter 1. If both filters are programmed with identical parameter values, they become a single 4 pole filter with a roll off curve of 24 dB per octave, perfect for those classic analog synth sounds.
Applies resonance to the Cutoff frequency, creating a peak of emphasis at the Cutoff frequency. A high value of resonance can place the filter on auto-oscillation, producing a whistling sound rich in harmonics. Assignable Values: 0 ... 127.
Filter Control parameters

Type
Cutoff Frequency
Resonance
Some additional information on Filters appears on page 39 of this chapter.
Edit Sound - Main menu - Filter Editor selected
Some additional information on Filters appears on page 39 of this chapter.
In the Dual 2 and Dual 4 Algorithms, the Filters are connected in series, so that Filter 2 operates on the sound already processed by Filter 1. If both filters are programmed with identical parameter values, they become a single 4 pole filter with a roll off curve of 24 dB per octave, perfect for those classic analog synth sounds.
In the Dual 1 and Dual 3 Algorithms, the Filters are connected in parallel, so that Filter 1 operates on oscillator 1 and Filter 2 on oscillator 2.
Filters enhance or attenuate certain frequencies of the Waveforms. The sound changes according to the type of filter selected. The SK760/880 filters are 2 pole filters with roll off curves at 12 dB per octave.
Valid for all Algorithms. For the Dual 1 and Dual 3 algorithms, two Filters are connected in parallel [Filter os. 1, Filter os. 2]. For the Dual 2 and Dual 4 Algorithms, the Filters are connected in series [Filter 1, Filter 2].
Edit Sound - Filter Control parameters

Edit Sound - Main menu - Filter Editor selected
Edit Sound 1623
Filter
Resonance
Cutoff Frequency
Type
Filter Control parameters
Edit Sound - Filter Control parameters
Sets a value for the Cutoff Frequency, or the frequency at which the filter intervenes. The Cutoff Frequency is the same for all the notes of a Sound, unless you programme Filter Tracking. Assignable values: 0 ... 191.
Selects the Filter type. Off deactivates the filter. Assignable values: Off, Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, Parametric boost, Parametric cut.
Edit Sound 1623

Filter
Selects the Filter type. Off deactivates the filter. Assignable values: Off, Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, Parametric boost, Parametric cut. Sets a value for the Cutoff Frequency, or the frequency at which the filter intervenes. The Cutoff Frequency is the same for all the notes of a Sound, unless you programme Filter Tracking. Assignable values: 0 ... 191. Applies resonance to the Cutoff frequency, creating a peak of emphasis at the Cutoff frequency. A high value of resonance can place the filter on auto-oscillation, producing a whistling sound rich in harmonics. Assignable Values: 0 ... 127.
Cutoff dynamic Links the Cutoff Frequency to Key sensitivity On Velocity. Positive values increase the Cutoff Frequency by playing harder (the filter opens resulting in a brighter sound), negative values produce the inverse effect (the filter closes and the sound becomes dull). Assignable values: 7 ... 0 +7. 0 = no effect. Resonance Links Resonance to Key On dynamic sens. Velocity. Positive values enhance the Resonance with increased key velocity while negative values give the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... 0 +7. 0 = no effect. Cutoff touch sensitivity Links the Cutoff Frequency to Aftertouch. Positive values increasingly open the filters with increased Aftertouch pressure, negative values have the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... 0 +7. 0 = no effect. Links the Resonance to Aftertouch. Positive values increases the amount of Resonance applied with increased Aftertouch pressure, negative values have the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... 0 +7. 0 = no effect.
Filt. env amount dyn. sens.
Links the depth of action of the Filter envelope to changes in key velocity. Positive values enhance the depth of action of the Filter envelope with increased key velocity, negative values produce the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 0 +7. 0 = no effect.
Filt. env amnt. Links the depth of action of the touch. sens. Filter envelope to changes in Aftertouch pressure. Positive values enhance the depth of action of the Filter envelope with increased Aftertouch pressure, negative values produce the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 0 +7. 0 = no effect.
Resonance touch sensitivity
Filter envelope Activates the envelope for the amount Filter in edit and sets the depth of action of the Filter envelope. The envelope consists of two parts: Filter Key On Envelope and the Filter Key Off Envelope. Negative values invert the Filter Envelope. Assignable values: 10 ... +10.
The Filter Cutoff Tracking curve allows you to vary the Cutoff Frequency across the keyboard, in order that it does not remain fixed for all the notes of a Sound, but moves according to the note played. Segment (F6) Using the SEGMENT option, you can divide the Tracking curve into several different segments, in order to obtain a more refined Tracking across the keyboard.
1 segm The Tracking is essential and provides a constant variation of the Cutoff frequency across the keyboard. The Key parameter cannot be modified. The Tracking consists of 3 segments which can create a curve with different variations across the keyboard.
3 segm
6 segm
Valid for All Algorithms.
Edit Sound - Filter Cut Off Tracking - 1 segment
Edit Sound 1625
3 segm
1 segm
Segment (F6)
The Filter Cutoff Tracking curve allows you to vary the Cutoff Frequency across the keyboard, in order that it does not remain fixed for all the notes of a Sound, but moves according to the note played.
FILTER CUTOFF TRACKING
The Tracking is essential and provides a constant variation of the Cutoff frequency across the keyboard. The Key parameter cannot be modified.
The Tracking curve provides the highest possible resolution, allowing a complex programming of the Cutoff Frequency across the keyboard.
6 segm
Edit Sound - Filter Cut Off Tracking - 1 segment
The Tracking curve provides the highest possible resolution, allowing a complex programming of the Cutoff Frequency across the keyboard.
The Tracking consists of 3 segments which can create a curve with different variations across the keyboard.
For details of how to program the Filter Cut Off Tracking, refer to the Volume Tracking example on page 16.13.
Level
Key
Point
3 display parameters, selected with the Up/Down cursor buttons, define the tracking.
Determines the Cutoff Frequency offset with respect to the value programmed on the controls page. Normal use of this parameter requires that the Tracking curve be an ascending whole or broken line. Assignable values: 63 0+63
Defines one of the extreme ends of a segment. Rotation of the Dial selects one of the points of the Tracking curve (1, 2, or 1, 2, 3, 4, or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7).
Edit Sound 1625

FILTER CUTOFF TRACKING

Valid for All Algorithms.
3 display parameters, selected with the Up/Down cursor buttons, define the tracking.
Point Defines one of the extreme ends of a segment. Rotation of the Dial selects one of the points of the Tracking curve (1, 2, or 1, 2, 3, 4, or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7). Determines the keyboard position for the point in edit. The extreme points (A#0, C8) cannot be modified. Determines the Cutoff Frequency offset with respect to the value programmed on the controls page. Normal use of this parameter requires that the Tracking curve be an ascending whole or broken line. Assignable values: 63 0+63
Key
Level
For details of how to program the Filter Cut Off Tracking, refer to the Volume Tracking example on page 16.13.
FILTER ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF

Valid for all Algorithms. The Key On and Key Off Filter Envelopes are 10 segment curves (maximum). The Key On envelope represents the variation of the Filter cutoff frequency for the entire duration that the notes are held pressed, while the Key Off envelope controls Filter variations after releasing the notes. Zoom (F7) Using the ZOOM option, you can enlarge the field of vision of the envelope up to 4 times at a selected Point. Pressing the soft button repeatedly selects the Zoom options in cyclic order (1, 2, 3, 4, 0). Zoom 0 corresponds to actual size. USING THE SEGMENT OPTION (F6) Using the SEGMENT option, you can divide the Filter Key On & Key Off Envelope curves into several different segments, in order to obtain a more refined envelope across the keyboard.
Add segment insert a new segment immediately after the currently selected segment. A maximum of up to 10 segments is permitted. cancels the current segment.
Loop segm
loops the current segment (envelope repetition). When it reaches the terminal point, it loops back to the beginning. The cycle repeats continually until key release. The initial Loop point is represented by an arrow. To eliminate the loop, select the segment and select del segm..
3 parameters, selected with the cursor buttons, define the Filter Key On & Key Off Envelopes.
Segment Allows you to select the segments with the Dial. The one selected corresponds to the flashing terminal point. Determines the duration of the Segment. The maximum segment time is approximately 21 seconds. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. The Cutoff Frequency offset which the end point of the selected segment must reach. 0 corresponds to the Cutoff Frequency programmed in the Filter Controls page, including the Filter Cutoff Tracking. Assignable values: 50 ... +50 N.B.: the initial level of the first segment at the starting point is always zero (it cannot be modified)
Time
Level
Del segm
For details of how to program the Filter Key On & Key Off Envelopes, refer to the Amplitude Envelope example on page 16.18.
Edit Sound - Filter Key On, Zoom 3

Edit Sound - Filter Key Off, Zoom 3
Point
Segment (F6) Using the SEGMENT option, you can divide the Tracking curve into several different segments, in order to obtain a more refined Tracking across the keyboard.
1 segm The Tracking curve is essential, representing a constant variation of the speed of action of the Filter envelope across the keyboard. The parameter Key cannot be modified. The Tracking curve consists of 3 segments which allow the construction of a situation offering different variations across the keyboard. The Tracking curve is divided into many parts (maximum resolution); allowing a more complex programming of the envelope completion velocity across the keyboard.
Key
Level
3 segm
6 segm
For details of how to program the Filter Envelope Tracking, refer to the Volume Tracking example on page 16.13.
6 segm
Edit Sound - Filter Envelope Tracking
Edit Sound 1627
3 segm
1 segm
Segment (F6)
Valid for all Algorithms. The Filter Envelope Tracking curve, valid both for the Key On and Key Off Filter Envelopes, increases or reduces the speed of action of the Filter envelope across the keyboard.
FILTER ENVELOPE TRACKING
Edit Sound - Filter Envelope Tracking
The Tracking curve is essential, representing a constant variation of the speed of action of the Filter envelope across the keyboard. The parameter Key cannot be modified.
For details of how to program the Filter Envelope Tracking, refer to the Volume Tracking example on page 16.13.
Level
Key
Point
The envelope velocity offset (Key On and Key Off). Positive values increase the speed of action of the Filter envelope, negative values slow it down. 0 corresponds to the standard duration of the segments programmed in the previous pages. Assignable values: -63 0+63.
Edit Sound 1627

FILTER ENVELOPE TRACKING

Valid for all Algorithms. The Filter Envelope Tracking curve, valid both for the Key On and Key Off Filter Envelopes, increases or reduces the speed of action of the Filter envelope across the keyboard.
One of the extreme ends of a segment. Rotation of the Dial selects one of the points of the Tracking curve (1, 2, or 1, 2, 3, 4, or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7). Determines the keyboard position for the point in edit. The extreme points (A#0, C8) cannot be modified. The envelope velocity offset (Key On and Key Off). Positive values increase the speed of action of the Filter envelope, negative values slow it down. 0 corresponds to the standard duration of the segments programmed in the previous pages. Assignable values: -63 0+63.
Pitch Envelope
Valid for all Algorithms. The Dual options activate separate Pitch Envelopes for the two oscillators of each layer (Pitch Envelope Os. 1 and Pitch Envelope Os. 2). The tuning (pitch) of the Oscillators can vary over time, thanks to Pitch Envelope which is divided into two parts: the Pitch Key On Envelope and the Pitch Key Off Envelope. The Pitch Envelope can have different completion velocities across the keyboard extension, thanks to the Pitch Envelope Tracking. Pitch Envelope Control
Envelope Amount Activates the Pitch envelope and sets the depth of the Pitch to apply to the oscillator. The maximum value corresponds to a Pitch excursion of 2 semitones. Negative values invert the Pitch Envelope. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 excludes the action of the envelope. Env. amount touch sens. Dynamic rate Sensitivity of the Pitch Envelope to key velocity variations. With positive values, increasing the key velocity (playing harder) speeds up the Envelope development (the completion velocity). Negative values act inversely with increased key velocity. Value range: -7 ... +7. 0 excludes the action. Links the depth of action of the Pitch Envelope (defined in the Env. Amount setting) to variations of Aftertouch pressure. Positive settings increase the velocity of the action with increased aftertouch pressure. Negative settings create the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 excludes the action of aftertouch. Links the depth of action of the Pitch Envelope (defined in the Env. Amount setting) to variations of key velocity. Positive settings increase the velocity of action with increased key velocity. Negative settings create the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 excludes the action.
Env. amount dyn. sens.
Edit Sound - main menu - Pitch Envelope selected

Edit Sound - Pitch Envelope control page
Zoom (F7) Using the ZOOM option, you can enlarge the field of vision of the envelope up to 4 times at a selected Point. Pressing the soft button repeatedly selects the Zoom options in cyclic order (1, 2, 3, 4, 0). Zoom 0 corresponds to actual size. USING THE SEGMENT OPTION (F6) For details of how to program the Pitch Key On & Key Off Envelopes, refer to the Amplitude Envelope example on page 16.18. 3 display parameters, selected with the cursor buttons, define the Pitch Key On & Key Off. Envelopes.
Segment Allows you to select the segments with the Dial. The one selected corresponds to the flashing terminal point. Determines the duration of the Segment. The maximum segment time is approximately 21 seconds. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. Del segm Add segment
For details of how to program the Pitch Key On & Key Off Envelopes, refer to the Amplitude Envelope example on page 16.18.
Edit Sound - programmed Pitch Key On Envelope, Zoom 3 Loop segm
Edit Sound - programmed Pitch Key Off Envelope, Zoom 3

USING THE SEGMENT OPTION (F6)
Pressing the soft button repeatedly selects the Zoom options in cyclic order (1, 2, 3, 4, 0). Zoom 0 corresponds to actual size.
Using the ZOOM option, you can enlarge the field of vision of the envelope up to 4 times at a selected Point.
Edit Sound 1629
Zoom (F7)
The Pitch Key On and Key Off Envelopes are 10 segment maximum) curves. The Key On envelope regulates the Pitch for the entire duration that the notes are held pressed, while the Key Off envelope controls Pitch variations after releasing the notes.
PITCH ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF
Time
Del segm
Level
Add segment
Using the SEGMENT option, you can divide the Pitch Key On & Key Off Envelope curves into several different segments, in order to obtain a more refined envelope across the keyboard.
Using the SEGMENT option, you can divide the Pitch Key On & Key Off Envelope curves into several different segments, in order to obtain a more refined envelope across the keyboard.
Edit Sound - programmed Pitch Key On Envelope, Zoom 3
Segment
3 display parameters, selected with the cursor buttons, define the Pitch Key On & Key Off. Envelopes.
Edit Sound - programmed Pitch Key Off Envelope, Zoom 3
Sets the Pitch offset (the difference with respect to the standard value) at a given point. 0 represents the standard pitch. Assignable values: 50 ... +50 N.B: the initial level of the first segment at the starting point is always zero (it cannot be modified).
Allows you to select the segments with the Dial. The one selected corresponds to the flashing terminal point.
loops the current segment (envelope repetition). When ir reaches the terminal point, it loops back to the beginning. The cycle repeats continually until key release. The initial Loop pont is represented by an arrow.
Edit Sound 1629

PITCH ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF

Loop segm
The Pitch Key On and Key Off Envelopes are 10 segment maximum) curves. The Key On envelope regulates the Pitch for the entire duration that the notes are held pressed, while the Key Off envelope controls Pitch variations after releasing the notes.
loops the current segment (envelope repetition). When ir reaches the terminal point, it loops back to the beginning. The cycle repeats continually until key release. The initial Loop pont is represented by an arrow.
Time
Level
Sets the Pitch offset (the difference with respect to the standard value) at a given point. 0 represents the standard pitch. Assignable values: 50 ... +50 N.B: the initial level of the first segment at the starting point is always zero (it cannot be modified).
PITCH ENVELOPE TRACKING

The Pitch Envelope Tracking curve, valid both for the Key On and Key Off envelopes, increases or reduces the speed of action of the Pitch envelope across the keyboard. Segment (F6) Using the SEGMENT option, you can divide the Tracking curve into several different segments, in order to obtain a more refined Tracking across the keyboard.
Point One of the extreme ends of a segment. Rotation of the Dial selects one of the points of the Tracking curve (1, 2, or 1, 2, 3, 4, or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7). Determines the keyboard position for the point in edit. The extreme points (A#0, C8) cannot be modified. The Pitch envelope velocity offset (Key On and Key Off). Positive values increase the speed of action of the pitch envelope, negative values slow it down. 0 corresponds to the standard duration of the segments programmed in the previous pages. Assignable values: -63 0+63.
Key
Level
3 segm
6 segm
For details of how to program the Pitch Envelope Tracking, refer to the Volume Tracking example on page 16.13.
Edit Sound - Pitch Envelope Tracking showing no pitch change across the keyboard

A single Low Frequency Oscillator generator for all Algorithms.

Links the depth of the Pitch modulation to Aftertouch pressure. By applying aftertouch pressure to the keys, the Delay parameter is ignored and the oscillation starts immediately. Positive and negative values indicate an opposed sense of vibration at the starting phase (upwards or downwards respectively). Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect.
The LFOs depth of action on the Pitch, Amplitude and Filter is independently programmable for each oscillator. LFO is a periodic (repeating) control source. It produces a low speed waveform (low frequency) that can be applied to various aspects of the sound to cause patterns of cyclic change. Because of its periodic nature, the LFO can be used to create effects like Tremolo (cyclic amplitude modulation), Vibrato (cyclic pitch modulation) or, for example, Wah-wah (applied to the filter cutoff-frequency). LFO parameters
Wave Touch pitch s.o.1 Touch pitch s.o.2
Rate Delay
Sync
Touch pitch s.o.1 Touch pitch s.o.2
Links the depth of the Pitch modulation to Aftertouch pressure. By applying aftertouch pressure to the keys, the Delay parameter is ignored and the oscillation starts immediately. Positive and negative values indicate an opposed sense of vibration at the starting phase (upwards or downwards respectively). Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect.
Edit Sound - main menu, LFO editor selected
Edit Sound 1631
Wave
LFO parameters
Selects the waveform of the low frequency oscillation. Given the low frequency of the oscillation, the waveform is clearly perceptible. You can choose from the following waves: Sinus, Triangle; Saw, Square, Random, Sample/Hold. Pitch s.o.1 Pitch s.o.2
Pitch s.o.1 Pitch s.o.2
Edit Sound - main menu, LFO editor selected
LFO is a periodic (repeating) control source. It produces a low speed waveform (low frequency) that can be applied to various aspects of the sound to cause patterns of cyclic change. Because of its periodic nature, the LFO can be used to create effects like Tremolo (cyclic amplitude modulation), Vibrato (cyclic pitch modulation) or, for example, Wah-wah (applied to the filter cutoff-frequency).
The LFOs depth of action on the Pitch, Amplitude and Filter is independently programmable for each oscillator.
A single Low Frequency Oscillator generator for all Algorithms.
LFO (Low Frequency Ocillator)
Selects the waveform of the low frequency oscillation. Given the low frequency of the oscillation, the waveform is clearly perceptible. You can choose from the following waves: Sinus, Triangle; Saw, Square, Random, Sample/Hold.
Sync
Delay
Rate
Square
Sine
When set to ON, the LFO is Synchronized for all the notes played. When set to MIDI, the LFO is tied to the MIDI Clock. Assignable values: Off, On, MIDI.
Applies LFO to the Pitch to produce a Vibrato effect on the selected oscillator. This parameter determines the modulation depth of LFO on Pitch. Positive and negative values indicate an opposed sense of vibration at the starting phase (upwards or downwards respectively). Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect.
Determines the delay before the entry of the LFO. Entry of the LFO is gradual. Value range: 0 ... 64.
Determines the velocity of the LFO. Assignable values: 1 ... 200.
Random Sample&Hold
Triangle Saw-tooth
Edit Sound 1631

LFO (Low Frequency Ocillator)

Sine Triangle Saw-tooth
Square
Random Sample&Hold
Determines the velocity of the LFO. Assignable values: 1 ... 200. Determines the delay before the entry of the LFO. Entry of the LFO is gradual. Value range: 0 ... 64. When set to ON, the LFO is Synchronized for all the notes played. When set to MIDI, the LFO is tied to the MIDI Clock. Assignable values: Off, On, MIDI. Applies LFO to the Pitch to produce a Vibrato effect on the selected oscillator. This parameter determines the modulation depth of LFO on Pitch. Positive and negative values indicate an opposed sense of vibration at the starting phase (upwards or downwards respectively). Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect.
Amplitude s.o.1 Applies Lfo to the Amplitude to Amplitude s.o.2 produce Tremolo effects. This parameter determines the modulation depth of the LFO on the Amplitude (the output level). The positive and negative values indicate an opposed sense of increase/ decrease of the Tremolo output level (the choice between positive or negative values give perfectly equivalent results). Higher positive or negative values increase the modulation depth. Assignable values: 7 ... +7 0 = no effect. Touch ampl. s.o.1 Touch ampl. s.o.2 Links the depth of the Amplitude modulation to Aftertouch pressure, permitting you to control of the amount of Tremolo by varying the aftertouch pressure applied to the keys. The Delay parameter is ignored when pressure is applied to the keys and the oscillation starts immediately. The positive and negative values indicate an opposed sense of increase/ decrease of the Tremolo output level (the choice between positive or negative values give perfectly equivalent results). Higher positive or negative values increase the modulation depth. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect.
Filter s.o.1 Filter s.o.2
Applies Lfo to the Cutoff Frequency of the Filter (1 or 2) to produce a Wha-Wha effect, caused by the opening and closing of the Filter. This parameter determines the modulation depth of the Lfo on the Cutoff Frequency. The positive and negative values indicate an opposed sense of opening and closing, otherwise, the choice between a positive or negative value give perfectly equivalent results. Higher positive or negative values increase the Filter modulation depth. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect.
Touch filt s.o.1 Links the depth of the Filter Touch filt s.o.2 modulation to Aftertouch pressure. By applying aftertouch pressure to the keys, the Delay parameter is ignored and the oscillation starts immediately (toggles between open and closed filter). The positive and negative values indicate an opposed sense of opening and closing, otherwise, the choice between a positive or negative value give perfectly equivalent results. Higher positive or negative values increase the Filter modulation depth. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect.
Valid for all Algorithms. In Dual situations, regardless of whether the Filters are connected in series or in parallel, there is only one pan envelope for both oscillators. The position of the sound in the stereo panorama can be controlled dynamically by means of the Pan envelope divided in two parts: the Pan Key On Envelope and the Pan Key Off Envelope. Pan Envelope Control
Envelope amount Activates the Pan Envelope and determines its depth of action. Assignable values: 0 7. 0 = no envelope.
Env. amount touch sens.
Pan dynamic sensitivity
Env amount Links the envelope amount to key dyn sensitivity velocity variations. Positive values increase the envelope amount by increasing the key velocity while negative values act inversely with increased key velocity. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response. Pan touch sensitivity
Edit Sound - main menu, Pan editor selected
Env amount Links the envelope amount to key dyn sensitivity velocity variations. Positive values increase the envelope amount by increasing the key velocity while negative values act inversely with increased key velocity. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.
Pan touch sensitivity
Edit Sound - Pan Envelope Control parameters

Edit Sound 1633
Envelope amount
Pan Envelope Control
The position of the sound in the stereo panorama can be controlled dynamically by means of the Pan envelope divided in two parts: the Pan Key On Envelope and the Pan Key Off Envelope.
Valid for all Algorithms. In Dual situations, regardless of whether the Filters are connected in series or in parallel, there is only one pan envelope for both oscillators.
Edit Sound - main menu, Pan editor selected
Pan
Activates the Pan Envelope and determines its depth of action. Assignable values: 0 7. 0 = no envelope.
Edit Sound - Pan Envelope Control parameters
Pan dynamic sensitivity
Env. amount touch sens.
Links the sensitivity of the Pan envelope to variations in the Aftertouch pressure. Positive values move the sound further right by increasing the Aftertouch pressure, while negative values act inversely with increased Aftertouch. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.
Links the sensitivity of the Pan envelope to key velocity variations. Positive values move the sound further right by increasing the key velocity while negative values act inversely with increased key velocity. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.
Links the envelope amount to variations in the Aftertouch pressure. Positive values increase the envelope amount by increasing the Aftertouch pressure, while negative values act inversely with increased Aftertouch. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.
Edit Sound 1633

Pan
Links the envelope amount to variations in the Aftertouch pressure. Positive values increase the envelope amount by increasing the Aftertouch pressure, while negative values act inversely with increased Aftertouch. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response. Links the sensitivity of the Pan envelope to key velocity variations. Positive values move the sound further right by increasing the key velocity while negative values act inversely with increased key velocity. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response. Links the sensitivity of the Pan envelope to variations in the Aftertouch pressure. Positive values move the sound further right by increasing the Aftertouch pressure, while negative values act inversely with increased Aftertouch. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.
PAN ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF

The Pan Key On and Key Off Envelopes are 10 segment maximum) curves. The Key On envelope regulates the Pan for the entire duration that the notes are held pressed, while the Key Off envelope controls Pan variations after releasing the notes. Zoom (F7) Using the ZOOM option, you can enlarge the field of vision of the envelope up to 4 times at a selected Point. Pressing the soft button repeatedly selects the Zoom options in cyclic order (1, 2, 3, 4, 0). Zoom 0 corresponds to actual size. USING THE SEGMENT OPTION (F6) Using the SEGMENT option, you can divide the Pan Key On & Key Off Envelope curves into several different segments, in order to obtain a more refined envelope across the keyboard.
Add segment insert a new segment immediately after the currently selected segment. A maximum of up to 10 segments is permitted. cancels the current segment.
Loop segm
loops the current segment (envelope repetition). When it reaches the terminal point, it loops back to the beginning. The cycle repeats continually until key release. The initial Loop point is represented by an arrow. To eliminate the loop, select the segment and select del segm..
3 display parameters, selected with the cursor buttons, define the Key On & Key Off. Envelopes.
Segment Allows you to select the segments with the Dial. The one selected corresponds to the flashing terminal point. Determines the duration of the Segment. The maximum segment time is approximately 21 seconds. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. Sets the Pan offset (the difference with respect to the central position) at a given point. 0 represents the centre of the stereo panorama. Assignable values: 50 ... +50 N.B.: the initial level of the first segment at the starting point is always zero (it cannot be modified).
Time
Level
Del segm
For details of how to program the Pan Key On & Key Off Envelopes, refer to the Amplitude Envelope example on page 16.18.
Edit Sound - programmed Pan Key On Envelope, Zoom 3

Edit Sound - programmed Pan Key Off Envelope, Zoom 3
Segment (F6) Using the SEGMENT option, you can divide the Tracking curve into several different segments, in order to obtain a more refined Tracking across the keyboard.
3 segm
6 segm
Edit Sound - Pan Envelope Tracking for the Piano1 sound
Edit Sound 1635
6 segm
3 segm
1 segm
Segment (F6)
Edit Sound - Pan Envelope Tracking for the Piano1 sound
The Pan Envelope Tracking curve, valid both for the Key On and Key Off envelopes, modifies the relative position of the sound across the keyboard extension with respect to the central point. For example, the sound in the bass section may be further to the left while in the treble section, it may be further to the right.
PAN ENVELOPE TRACKING
The Tracking curve is essential, representing a constant variation of the speed of action of the Filter envelope across the keyboard. The parameter Key cannot be modified.
For details of how to program the Pan Envelope Tracking, refer to the Volume Tracking example on page 16.13.
Level
Key
Point
3 display parameters, selected with the Up/Down cursor buttons, define the Pan Envelope tracking:
Sets the Pan offset (the position with respect to the centre) at a given point. 0 represents the centre of the Stereo panorama. Assignable values: 63 0+63.
Edit Sound 1635

PAN ENVELOPE TRACKING

The Pan Envelope Tracking curve, valid both for the Key On and Key Off envelopes, modifies the relative position of the sound across the keyboard extension with respect to the central point. For example, the sound in the bass section may be further to the left while in the treble section, it may be further to the right.
3 display parameters, selected with the Up/Down cursor buttons, define the Pan Envelope tracking:
Point One of the extreme ends of a segment. Rotation of the Dial selects one of the points of the Tracking curve (1, 2, or 1, 2, 3, 4, or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7). Determines the keyboard position for the point in edit. The extreme points (A#0, C8) cannot be modified. Sets the Pan offset (the position with respect to the centre) at a given point. 0 represents the centre of the Stereo panorama. Assignable values: 63 0+63.
Key
Level
For details of how to program the Pan Envelope Tracking, refer to the Volume Tracking example on page 16.13.
The Main Menu options

SAMPLE TRANSLATOR (F1)
The Sample Translator is explained separately in detail from page 16.40 onwards. The Create option adds a second or third layer to the current sound in edit. The Import option opens a second level dialog window where you can select the source and destination layer.
ALGORITHM (F2)
This option allows you to select the Algorithm. Pressing F2 activates a dialog box showing the current Algorithm.
The Delete option cancels the currently selected Layer. This option limits itself to cancelling one or two layers. It is not possible to cancel all layers - at least one must be present. Program the options as required and confirm with ENTER or cancel the operation with ESCAPE.
Rotate the Dial to select a different Algorithm and confirm with ENTER or cancel the operation with ESCAPE. Algorithms available: Single, Dual 1, Dual 2, Dual 3, Dual 4.
LAYER RNG (F5) LAYER UT. (F4)

The Layer Utility option allows you to create a new Layer for the current Sound in edit, to import a Layer from another Sound, or delete a Layer. Pressing F4 activates a dialog box where you can select the option required with the Up/Down cursor buttons. The Layer Range option allows you to assign a Key range and a Dynamic range for the current layer. Pressing F5 activates a dialog box where you can select the option required with the Up/Down cursor buttons.
The Key Range option assigns the lowest and highest keyboard limits for the current Layer.
See Saving and Naming the modified Sound on page 16.6 of this chapter.
Press this soft button to save your programmed sound to the SK760/880 Sound Library and escape from Edit Sound permanently.
Edit Sound 1637
SAVE (F8)
See Escape from Edit Sound on page 16.5 of this chapter.
Press this soft button to escape permanently from the Edit Sound environment without saving eventual modifications.
ABORT (F6)
Program the options as required and confirm with ENTER. Press ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
The Dynamic Range option assigns the lowest and highest key velocity limits for the current Layer.
Edit Sound 1637

The Dynamic Range option assigns the lowest and highest key velocity limits for the current Layer.

Program the options as required and confirm with ENTER. Press ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
ABORT (F6)
Press this soft button to escape permanently from the Edit Sound environment without saving eventual modifications. See Escape from Edit Sound on page 16.5 of this chapter.
SAVE (F8)
Press this soft button to save your programmed sound to the SK760/880 Sound Library and escape from Edit Sound permanently. See Saving and Naming the modified Sound on page 16.6 of this chapter.
Notes and suggestions on Sound Editing

WAVEFORM Not all Waveforms cover the entire extension of the keyboard. This becomes particularly evident when you use an 88 note keyboard. The problem is caused by a lack of samples at the extremes of the keyboard. During the creating phase of a Waveform, considerations are made for the quality of the sound and the amount of memory necessary to store all the samples which constitute the Waveform; if some high or low end samples are lacking in musical quality (e.g., the lower notes of a violin Waveform, or the higher notes of a double bass Waveform), it is preferable to eliminate them to avoid using up precious memory. VOLUME, VELOCITY & AFTERTOUCH The Volume of a Sound can be controlled in live situations by velocity and aftertouch variations (the relative parameters are found in the Volume editor). If you set very sensitive values for both controls (e.g. +7 assigned to both dynamics and aftertouch), the Sound will be very difficult to control and easily susceptible to sudden volume variations. LOOP AND LFO By programming a loop on two segments of a Key On Envelope which create an ascending and descending ramp (/\) you can simulate a Tremolo effect, without using the Lfo editor. A loop of this kind on a Pitch Key On Envelope will simulate a more realistic Vibrato effect than the effect obtained with the LFO. When you release the key the sound begins to fade and then reappears, it is held for an instant and then fades away gradually. LFO Lfo can be applied to several different sound parameters. The effect produced depends on the parameter affected: Amplitude Pitch Cutoff Freq. KEY OFF ENVELOPE Thanks to the articulated Key Off Envelopes (Release phase) of the SK760/880 Series, you can create some very interesting effects. In practice, you can render a Sound live after releasing the keys. For example, try programming an Amplitude Key Off Envelope of the following kind with a Sound such as 12StrGtr (26-2):
>
>
Vibrato Tremolo Wha-wha
>
dB
Hz
Low Pass (attenuates the high end frequencies). High Pass (attenuates the low end frequencies).
dB
Hz
dB
Hz
Band Pass (attenuates the frequencies above and below the C.F.).
dB
Hz
dB
Hz
The action of the filters on the sound is represented by curves:
Edit Sound 1639
FILTERS
dB
Programme identical parameter values for the Filter 1 and Filter 2 editors of the Dual 2 or Dual 4 Algorithms. Resonance enhances the frequencies in close proximity of the Cutoff Frequency, rendering the filter curves more complex:
dB
Hz
To obtain a 4-pole Filter:
dB
dB
Hz
Hz
Band Pass (attenuates the frequencies above and below the C.F.).
High Pass (attenuates the low end frequencies).
The slope of these curves is determined by the attraction capacity of the poles. The SK760/ 880 Series can have two 2-pole filters connected in parallel (Dual 1, Dual 3 Algorithms), or one 4pole filter, corresponding to two 2-pole filters connected in series (Dual 2, Dual 4 Algorithms). A 4-pole filter creates a clearer slope and consequently a fuller and more aggressive sound.
Hz
dB
dB
Hz
Parametric Boost (enhances the frequencies around the Cutoff Frequency).
Parametric Cut (attenuates the frequencies around the Cutoff Frequency).
Hz
Low Pass (attenuates the high end frequencies).
Parametric Cut (attenuates the frequencies around the Cutoff Frequency).
Parametric Boost (enhances the frequencies around the Cutoff Frequency).
Programme identical parameter values for the Filter 1 and Filter 2 editors of the Dual 2 or Dual 4 Algorithms.
Resonance was a very typical feature of classic analog synthesizers. As an example, listen to the Sound Resonance (102-2).
To obtain a 4-pole Filter:
The slope of these curves is determined by the attraction capacity of the poles. The SK760/ 880 Series can have two 2-pole filters connected in parallel (Dual 1, Dual 3 Algorithms), or one 4pole filter, corresponding to two 2-pole filters connected in series (Dual 2, Dual 4 Algorithms). A 4-pole filter creates a clearer slope and consequently a fuller and more aggressive sound.
As an example, listen to the Sound Resonance (102-2).
Resonance was a very typical feature of classic analog synthesizers.
RESONANCE
Edit Sound 1639

FILTERS

RESONANCE Resonance enhances the frequencies in close proximity of the Cutoff Frequency, rendering the filter curves more complex:
dB
The action of the filters on the sound is represented by curves:
Resonance
Hz
Resonance
Sample Translator version XXX

ABOUT SAMPLE TRANSLATOR
The Edit Sound menu includes the Sample Translator command, situated in the right options column, which permits the importation and exportation of RAM Samples of various formats, and the edit of RAM Samples to create new RAM Waveforms to add to the SK760/880 Wave Library. Using the new Waveforms, it is then possible to create new RAM -Sounds, increasing SKs sonic potential. Recognized formats Sample Translator is able to recognize the following sample formats: Wave, Sample Vision, Sound Designer 1, Akai, Aiff, Kurzweil. Sample loading methods Samples can be loaded from disk, via MIDI from computers, samplers, etc., or dumped from external devices. The Sample dump to and from external devices is a high speed transfer process which works on the handshake principal. Samples can also be loaded directly from RAM -Sounds, provided that you enter Edit Sound with the same sound (Sounds based on Ram waveforms, identified by the symbol). Entering Sample Translator Access to the Sample Translator is always via the Edit Sound environment (press the SYNTH button; see also page 16.4). You can enter the Sample Translator in two ways: 1. With a RAM -Sound. This allows you select Sample Translator and load the Waveform associated to the selected RAM Sound, then proceed to edit the sample in order to create a new RAM Waveform that can be added to the Wave Library.

2. With a Rom-Sound (for example, select the default Grand Piano Performance). This allows you to enter Sample Translator and load disk-based samples, or receive them via a Dump from an external device. Dont forget the Solo button! In either case, if the current keyboard situation corresponds to two or more tracks set in key-play status, you must remember to isolate the track with which you enter Edit Sound by pressing the SOLO button. This is to avoid hearing other Sounds when you are working with the samples. Temporary escape from Sample Translator By pressing the ESCAPE button, you can escape temporarily from Sample Translator, to access other edit environments without losing current edit data in Sample Translator, but you will not be permitted to select a new Sound, Performance, Style or Song. Press the SYNTH button to return directly to the Sample Translator.
Edit Sound - Sample Translator display, no samples loaded
The main Sample Translator display consists of 16 slots, each able to house a sample that can compose a Waveform. A Waveform may consist of one or more samples covering different keyboard ranges. The display example below shows the sample configuration of a Waveform originating from a previous series instrument.
Abort:
Here, the original RAM -Sound contains a Waveform consisting of 6 samples, each assigned to a specific range of the keyboard:
Edit: Deassign:
Locations without samples are numbered and shown with three dashes ( ). Selecting Samples from the waveform display
Assign:
Select the Samples with the Up/Down cursor buttons. Next to each sample, three notes are usually
Delete:
THE MAIN SAMPLE TRANSLATOR DISPLAY
shown, representing the lower limit of the keyboard range to which the sample has been assigned, the original sample pitch, and the upper keyboard limit:
Load:
shown, representing the lower limit of the keyboard range to which the sample has been assigned, the original sample pitch, and the upper keyboard limit:
Next to each sample, three notes are usually
Select the Samples with the Up/Down cursor buttons.
Selecting Samples from the waveform display
Locations without samples are numbered and shown with three dashes ( ).
Here, the original RAM -Sound contains a Waveform consisting of 6 samples, each assigned to a specific range of the keyboard:
The display example below shows the sample configuration of a Waveform originating from a previous series instrument.
The main Sample Translator display consists of 16 slots, each able to house a sample that can compose a Waveform. A Waveform may consist of one or more samples covering different keyboard ranges.
Edit Sound-Sample Translator 1641

THE MAIN SAMPLE TRANSLATOR DISPLAY

The Sample Translator options

Load: Loads a sample into the selected location, directly from the selected Ram -Sound, from floppy disk or via MIDI from an external source (computer, sampler, etc.). Saves a sample to the instruments Wave Library. Only samples which have been assigned a keyboard extension are saved. Saving also escapes the Sample Translator and returns to Edit Sound where you can create a new Sound with the new Waveform.
Save:
Send Sample: Activates a sample Dump process to transfer (via MIDI) the sample to an external device (for example, another SK760/880 keyboard). Save:
The Sample Translator options
Escapes the Sample Translator, erasing all the samples present, and returns toEdit Sound. Assigns the selected sample to a keyboard range. This assigned sample plays together with the other assigned samples that make up the Waveform. Sample keyboard range overlaps are not permitted. Opens a page showing information regarding the Waveform (Sample name and type, properties, size, pitch, Sample rate, Loop Start, Loop End points and the Loop status). Several parameters can be edited in this page and other options are activated (Tuning, Normalize, Gain, Cut, Export). Cancels the extension limits of the selected sample. Cancels the selected Sample from the main Sample Translator display. Saves a sample to the instruments Wave Library. Only samples which have been assigned a keyboard extension are saved. Saving also escapes the Sample Translator and returns to Edit Sound where you can create a new Sound with the new Waveform. Loads a sample into the selected location, directly from the selected Ram -Sound, from floppy disk or via MIDI from an external source (computer, sampler, etc.).
Delete:
Cancels the selected Sample from the main Sample Translator display. Assigns the selected sample to a keyboard range. This assigned sample plays together with the other assigned samples that make up the Waveform. Sample keyboard range overlaps are not permitted. Cancels the extension limits of the selected sample. Opens a page showing information regarding the Waveform (Sample name and type, properties, size, pitch, Sample rate, Loop Start, Loop End points and the Loop status). Several parameters can be edited in this page and other options are activated (Tuning, Normalize, Gain, Cut, Export).
Assign:
Deassign: Edit:
Send Sample: Activates a sample Dump process to transfer (via MIDI) the sample to an external device (for example, another SK760/880 keyboard). Abort: Escapes the Sample Translator, erasing all the samples present, and returns toEdit Sound.
Loading samples
LOAD (F1)
The Load option allows you to load Samples into the Sample Translator directly from a RAM Sound, or from disk. 1. Loading a sample a RAM -Sound
4. Press ENTER to confirm the operation, or escape to cancel.

Confirming with Enter starts the loading process. The time taken depends on the size of the sample. A dialog window showing an animated clock keeps you informed of the samples being loaded:
This operation should be carried out with RAM Sounds originating from previous Series instruments (S, SX, SK760/880 Series) or from Ram -Sounds containing a Waveform created by Sample Translator.
1. Assign a RAM -Sound to a track of a Performance.
Shortly after, the display shows a situation similar to the example below, with one or more samples which constitute the Waveform.
It is preferable to set the instrument in Style/ RealTime mode with the keyboard mode set to Full Keyboard and a single track selected. If two or more tracks are selected, you can isolate the Sound with which you enter Edit Sound using the SOLO button.
2. Enter Edit Sound (as already explained on page 16.4 of this chapter). 3. Press F1 to enter the Sample Translator.
A dialog window is displayed informing that a Ram-Sound has been found the associated Waveform is ready to be loaded.
2. Loading disk-based samples To load samples from disk, in practice you can enter with any sound, including a RAM -Sound, because once you enter the Sample Translator, you can override the sound assigned to the track and listen to a sample loaded from disk. If, instead, other tracks are active, you will hear these as well. The most important point, therefore, is to remember to isolate a track from other active tracks with the SOLO button before starting.
3. Press F1 to enter the Sample Translator.
4. Press LOAD (F1) to load a sample from disk.

If a disk is not inserted in the drive, an appropriate Disk Error! message is shown. Cancel the message with Escape and insert the disk into the drive. If a disk is inserted in the drive, pressing LOAD opens a selection window showing all data contained in the disk. An example of what may appear is shown below: Loading other Samples
The various sample formats are identified by appropriate extensions.
5. Use the Up/Down cursor arrows to select the sample to load and press ENTER to confirm.
ing loaded. A bar graph also appears at the top of the display to monitor the loading phase. When the operation is complete, the display will show a situation that depends on the sample loaded. An example of what may appear is shown below:
3. Press F1 to enter the Sample Translator.
2 Enter Edit Sound (as already explained on page 16.4 of this chapter).
Some sample formats allow you to load individual samples or Programs. (See Sample and Programs afterwards). Confirming with Enter starts the loading process. A dialog window showing an animated clock keeps you informed of the samples be-
5. Use the Up/Down cursor arrows to select the sample to load and press ENTER to confirm.
4. Press LOAD (F1) to load a sample from disk.
1. Insert a disk containing samples.
The various sample formats are identified by appropriate extensions.
A. If you enter Edit Sound with a RAM Sound, you are prompted to load the associated Waveform. Press ESCAPE to ignore the prompt and pass to the load phase (point 4). B. If you entered with a Rom-Sound, the dialog window does not appear and you pass directly to the load phase.
Some sample formats allow you to load individual samples or Programs. (See Sample and Programs afterwards). Confirming with Enter starts the loading process. A dialog window showing an animated clock keeps you informed of the samples be-
If a disk is inserted in the drive, pressing LOAD opens a selection window showing all data contained in the disk. An example of what may appear is shown below:
If a disk is not inserted in the drive, an appropriate Disk Error! message is shown. Cancel the message with Escape and insert the disk into the drive.
A. If you enter Edit Sound with a RAM Sound, you are prompted to load the associated Waveform. Press ESCAPE to ignore the prompt and pass to the load phase (point 4). B. If you entered with a Rom-Sound, the dialog window does not appear and you pass directly to the load phase.

1. Insert a disk containing samples.

2 Enter Edit Sound (as already explained on page 16.4 of this chapter).
ing loaded. A bar graph also appears at the top of the display to monitor the loading phase. When the operation is complete, the display will show a situation that depends on the sample loaded. An example of what may appear is shown below:
Use this method only if you want to cancel an existing Sample in order to replace it with another. If you load to an existing sample location, a dialog window is displayed requesting the cancellation of the selected sample before proceeding. You can load other samples to the Sample Translator, provided that you select an empty location to load to. This example shows a single unassigned Flute Wave sample.
This example shows a single unassigned Flute Wave sample. Loading other Samples
You can load other samples to the Sample Translator, provided that you select an empty location to load to.
If you load to an existing sample location, a dialog window is displayed requesting the cancellation of the selected sample before proceeding.
Use this method only if you want to cancel an existing Sample in order to replace it with another.
Loading Samples and Programs Some sample formats, such as Akai and Kurzweil, allow you to load individual Samples (equivalent to the SK760/880 Series samples) and Programs (similar to the SK760/880 Series Waveforms). In such cases, when you select a file type from the File Open window, a second selection window appears:
These kind of Samples can overlap even inside a dynamic Level. Sample Translator eliminates this overlap, using the lowest limit-note of the highest pitched sample as the limit between samples. Receiving Samples via a Dump You can also Dump samples into Sample Translator via the Sample Request option (F7). This is discussed in detail on page 16.53.
Use the Up/Down cursor arrows to select an individual sample, or select All samples and press ENTER to confirm. A Program organizes the Samples by defining the keyboard ranges to which they are assigned. Unlike the Waveform of the SK760/880 Series, a Program can distribute the Samples over several different Levels (dynamic levels). Sample Translator can load single Samples, or it can convert, in a single operation, an entire level of the Program into a SK760/880 Series Waveform. If a Program contains more than one level, it can be converted entirely in successive phases, using (a) a Sound Patch, (b) a multi track configuration, c) a Sound containing a key-dynamic assignment (executed in Edit Sound).
Conversion limitations
A SK760/880 Waveform can contain only 16 samples. For example, an Akai S1000 level can contain up to 99 Samples, therefore, when a conversion is carried out, only the 16 Samples from the lowest register are loaded.
The display shows the Save Sample dialog window:
Here you can write a name for the waveform (Wave name) and a name for the new RAM Sound (Sound name) based on the Waveform. The name given to the Waveform is automatically assigned to the sound once you select the Sound Name entry zone. You are free, however, to write a different name for the Sound.
Un-assigned Samples
SAVE (F2)
If you attempt to save the Waveform with a name that already exists, an message appears saying that the Wave Name already exists.
The SAVE operation is used to save assigned Samples to the SK760/880 Wave Library. A Waveform can contain one or more assigned samples, provided that each is assigned to a specific keyboard range.
Whatever Bank and Program number you select with the Dial, it will always correspond to an empty location in RAM. SK760/880 does not allow you to overwrite existing Ram-Sound or RAM Sounds.
Once your samples have been assigned, press the soft button F2 to Save the Waveform to the SK760/880 Wave Library.
Also shown is the first available empty location in RAM for the new RAM -Sound, defined by the Bank and Program numbers.
Also shown is the first available empty location in RAM for the new RAM -Sound, defined by the Bank and Program numbers.
Once your samples have been assigned, press the soft button F2 to Save the Waveform to the SK760/880 Wave Library.
Whatever Bank and Program number you select with the Dial, it will always correspond to an empty location in RAM. SK760/880 does not allow you to overwrite existing Ram-Sound or RAM Sounds.
The SAVE operation is used to save assigned Samples to the SK760/880 Wave Library. A Waveform can contain one or more assigned samples, provided that each is assigned to a specific keyboard range. If, instead, you want to assign the un-assigned samples, press Escape to cancel the message, assign the samples (explained afterwards), then press Save again to proceed with the save operation.
If you attempt to save the Waveform with a name that already exists, an message appears saying that the Wave Name already exists.
Here you can write a name for the waveform (Wave name) and a name for the new RAM Sound (Sound name) based on the Waveform. The name given to the Waveform is automatically assigned to the sound once you select the Sound Name entry zone. You are free, however, to write a different name for the Sound.
The display shows the Save Sample dialog window:
Saving your Samples

Saving your Samples

SAVE (F2)
Press Enter or Escape to cancel the message and return to the Save Sample window and write a different name for the Wave. Confirm with ENTER to save the Waveform to the SK760/880 Wave Library. The new Ram Sound is simultaneously saved to the SK760/880 Sound Library at the selected location. Pressing Enter also escapes the Sample Translator and returns to Edit Sound where you can start to edit the new Ram -Sound using all the methods already described. Youll find the new Ram -Sound assigned to the currently selected track, and the new Waveform selected in the Waveform editor.
Un-assigned Samples
Press ENTER to confirm and proceed with the saving of the Waveform as described above. If, among the assigned samples of the Sample Translator, one or more unassigned samples are present, pressing SAVE prompts a message requesting the cancellation of unassigned samples before proceeding with the Save operation. Youll find the new Ram -Sound assigned to the currently selected track, and the new Waveform selected in the Waveform editor. Confirm with ENTER to save the Waveform to the SK760/880 Wave Library. The new Ram Sound is simultaneously saved to the SK760/880 Sound Library at the selected location. Pressing Enter also escapes the Sample Translator and returns to Edit Sound where you can start to edit the new Ram -Sound using all the methods already described. Press Enter or Escape to cancel the message and return to the Save Sample window and write a different name for the Wave.
If, among the assigned samples of the Sample Translator, one or more unassigned samples are present, pressing SAVE prompts a message requesting the cancellation of unassigned samples before proceeding with the Save operation.
Press ENTER to confirm and proceed with the saving of the Waveform as described above. If, instead, you want to assign the un-assigned samples, press Escape to cancel the message, assign the samples (explained afterwards), then press Save again to proceed with the save operation.
Cancelling samples
DELETE (F3)
The Delete option allows you to cancel the selected Sample from the Sample Translator. After listening to your Samples and assigning the relative key ranges, you may want to eliminate those not required. Simply select the sample you wish to cancel and press the soft button F2. You are prompted with a message to reconfirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with Escape.
Assigning samples
ASSIGN (F4)
The Assign option lets you select a sample, then specify the key range to which the sample is to be assigned. Only assigned samples become a part of a Waveform which you can then save to the SK760/880 Wave Library. When you load a new Waveform into Sample Translator, the samples that constitute the Waveform are shown assigned to specific key ranges. In such cases, three values are shown, the lowest key limit, the sample pitch and the highest key limit:
Highest Key limit Lowest Key limit
Press ENTER to delete the Sample.
Sample Pitch
If you load new Samples from disk or receive them via MIDI, they will normally be shown with no key range assignment, but only with the sample pitch. In such cases, although shown with no specific key range, Sample Translator allows you to listen to the sample across the entire keyboard, to help you decide in what keyboard area you can obtain the best results. Once you have decided in which keyboard area the sample sounds best, press the ASSIGN option using the soft button F4. At this point, the display shows a graphical representation of a keyboard and the Sample (or Samples) currently in edit. The display example shown on the next page is a typical situation which may be encountered.
Repeat the assignment procedure for all the samples that are to be part of the new Waveform, and avoid overlapping. If you overlap the key range of two samples, pressing ENTER will prompt a message indicating the presence of an overlap.
The selected Sample is shown with a temporary key range, represented by the black line. The notch shown in the line represents the Sample Pitch. If the selected Sample is not shown with a black line, simply strike the left cursor button ( ).
4. Select the next Sample to assign with the up/ down cursor buttons ( / ) then strike the left cursor button ( ) to activate the lowest key limit of the selected sample (A0).
1. Rotate the Dial to assign the lowest key limit:
A typical assignment consisting of several samples that constitute a SK760/880 Waveform may look like this:
3. Press ENTER to confirm.
2. Strike the right cursor button ( ) and assign the upper key limit with the Dial.
2. Strike the right cursor button ( ) and assign the upper key limit with the Dial.
Each sample covers a specified key range and the notch at the beginning of each range corresponds to the Root Key Number, also called the Sample Pitch. Once you have completed the sample key range assignments, press ESCAPE to close the ASSIGN display and return to the Sample Translator.
3. Press ENTER to confirm.
1. Rotate the Dial to assign the lowest key limit:
4. Select the next Sample to assign with the up/ down cursor buttons ( / ) then strike the left cursor button ( ) to activate the lowest key limit of the selected sample (A0).
The selected Sample is shown with a temporary key range, represented by the black line. The notch shown in the line represents the Sample Pitch. If the selected Sample is not shown with a black line, simply strike the left cursor button ( ).
Repeat the assignment procedure for all the samples that are to be part of the new Waveform, and avoid overlapping.

Overlapping samples
If you overlap the key range of two samples, pressing ENTER will prompt a message indicating the presence of an overlap.
Once you have completed the sample key range assignments, press ESCAPE to close the ASSIGN display and return to the Sample Translator. Each sample covers a specified key range and the notch at the beginning of each range corresponds to the Root Key Number, also called the Sample Pitch. Press Escape to cancel the message and assign the correct key range before confirming with ENTER.
Overlapping samples
Press Escape to cancel the message and assign the correct key range before confirming with ENTER.
A typical assignment consisting of several samples that constitute a SK760/880 Waveform may look like this:
Cancelling assignments
DEASSIGN (F5)
The Deassign command cancels the assigned key range of the selected sample.
Sample Editing
EDIT (F6)
The Edit option opens a display showing nonprogrammable information relating to the original sample, and gives access to some programmable parameters which allow you to change some characteristics of each individual sample.
1. Select the Sample to deassign.
2. Press the soft button F5 to deassign the sample.
After deassigning, the sample will play across the entire keyboard range only if it is selected. If you wish to save the deassigned sample as part of the final Waveform, you must reassign a key range before proceeding.
The first four items of the display correspond to the sample information:
Sample name
Shows the original name of the wave sample.

Sample Type
Identifies the sample format.

Properties
Shows the technical characteristics of the sample.

Sample size
Shows the size of the sample expressed as the total number of samples. The remaining items of the display correspond to settings for the sample assigned to the currently selected key range. All these parameters are programmable.
Sample Rate
Basically, this function provides a fine tuning for the sample, avoiding dissonance between the samples that make up the Waveform.
Loop Start Loop Switch
When you trim samples by changing the values of Loop Start and Loop End, youll hear the effect with the next note you play. However, the Sample is not actually changed in the SK760/880 memory until you save it.
Indicates the pitch at which the sample was originally recorded. This parameter also defines the Root Key number, or the key where the sample root for the current key range is assigned.
This parameter causes samples to replay indefinitely until you release the note, or they decay to silence. Each sample, when triggered, begins at the Loop Start point and plays through to the Loop End, then loops to the Loop start point and plays again. This cycle will continue until the note is released. If the Loop Switch is set to Off (see below), when the sample plays to the Loop End on its first cycle, it stops when it reaches the Loop End.
Loop End
Sample Rate
You can also use this parameter to make the sample play its normal pitch on a different key from the one to which it was assign when it was recorded. This, however, will pitch shift the sample and change its playback rate, which can affect the timbre of the sample.
This parameter defines the frequency with which the Sample is read. If the Sampling Rate is modified, the sample pitch is also proportionally modified. For example, if the Sample Rate is raised in value, the sample pitch will also become higher.
Basically, this function provides a fine tuning for the sample, avoiding dissonance between the samples that make up the Waveform.
This parameter defines the frequency with which the Sample is read. If the Sampling Rate is modified, the sample pitch is also proportionally modified. For example, if the Sample Rate is raised in value, the sample pitch will also become higher.
You can also use this parameter to make the sample play its normal pitch on a different key from the one to which it was assign when it was recorded. This, however, will pitch shift the sample and change its playback rate, which can affect the timbre of the sample.
Loop Switch
This parameter toggles between the On and Off status of the Loop. If set to ON, the sample loops continually from Loop Start to Loop End until the keys are released. If OFF, the sample plays from Loop Start to Sample End and stops.
GENERAL NOTES ON SAMPLE EDITING
Loop Start
If the SK760/880 does not recognize the Sample Pitch of a sample youve loaded from disk, you can use this parameter to specify the key which will play the sample at its normal pitch (the pitch at which it was sampled). To help you with this operation, use the Tuning function, activated with the F1 soft button, which plays the original sample pitch with a sinusoidal that is superimposed on the sample.
This parameter causes samples to replay indefinitely until you release the note, or they decay to silence. Each sample, when triggered, begins at the Loop Start point and plays through to the Loop End, then loops to the Loop start point and plays again. This cycle will continue until the note is released. If the Loop Switch is set to Off (see below), when the sample plays to the Loop End on its first cycle, it stops when it reaches the Loop End.
If the SK760/880 does not recognize the Sample Pitch of a sample youve loaded from disk, you can use this parameter to specify the key which will play the sample at its normal pitch (the pitch at which it was sampled). To help you with this operation, use the Tuning function, activated with the F1 soft button, which plays the original sample pitch with a sinusoidal that is superimposed on the sample.
Sample Pitch

Sample Pitch

Indicates the pitch at which the sample was originally recorded. This parameter also defines the Root Key number, or the key where the sample root for the current key range is assigned.
Changing the Loop Start (and Loop End) points can have a small or great effect on the sample timbre, depending on the nature of the sound at the Loop Start point. You may hear a click as the sample loops back from the Loop End to Sample Start. In such cases, vary the Loop Start value until you reduce the click to an acceptable value.
Loop End
This parameter represents the end of the current sample and the point where the sample, once played, loops back to the Loop Start point. If the Loop Switch is set to Off, the Loop End parameter changes to Sample End.
Changing the Loop Start (and Loop End) points can have a small or great effect on the sample timbre, depending on the nature of the sound at the Loop Start point. You may hear a click as the sample loops back from the Loop End to Sample Start. In such cases, vary the Loop Start value until you reduce the click to an acceptable value.
When you trim samples by changing the values of Loop Start and Loop End, youll hear the effect with the next note you play. However, the Sample is not actually changed in the SK760/880 memory until you save it.
GENERAL NOTES ON SAMPLE EDITING

This parameter toggles between the On and Off status of the Loop. If set to ON, the sample loops continually from Loop Start to Loop End until the keys are released. If OFF, the sample plays from Loop Start to Sample End and stops. This parameter represents the end of the current sample and the point where the sample, once played, loops back to the Loop Start point. If the Loop Switch is set to Off, the Loop End parameter changes to Sample End.
THE SAMPLE EDI T OPTIONS

Entering the Sample Edit page activates several options. TUNING (F1) The Tuning option provides a reference for the sample pitch, producing the exact note with a sinusoidal, superimposed on the sample. This is useful in situations where the original sample pitch is required when assigning a sample to a key range. Press the soft button F1 to activate the Tuning function (shown in negative highlight) and play a note on the keyboard. Press F1 to deactivate Tuning. NORMALIZE (2) If the volume of the selected sample seems to be too low, it is quite probable that the original sample Gain (Volume) has a setting that needs to be adjusted. Normalize takes the sample gain to its maximum setting in a single step.
2. Press ENTER to set the sample Gain to its maximum setting (100%).
After a short period, the sample Gain setting sets to 100%.
GAIN (F3) This option allows you to modify the volume of the sample with respect to the other samples of the Waveform. One of the primary uses of Gain is to equalize the volume levels between different key ranges.
1. Press F3 to select Gain.

The display shows the status of the Sample Gain setting.
1. Press F2 to select NORMALIZE.

The display shows the current status of the sample Gain.
In this display situation, the Gain setting is not programmable.
CUT (F5)
This option allows you to trim the Sample at a specified Loop End in order to cut off the last portion of the Sample. If you vary the current setting of the Loop End and wish to eliminate the portion of the sample that follows, press F5 to trigger the CUT option. After using CUT, youll find that the Loop End point cannot be taken to a higher value.
After using CUT, youll find that the Loop End point cannot be taken to a higher value.
If you vary the current setting of the Loop End and wish to eliminate the portion of the sample that follows, press F5 to trigger the CUT option.
This option allows you to trim the Sample at a specified Loop End in order to cut off the last portion of the Sample.
Shortly after, the Sample is saved to disk.
Press ESCAPE to exit the Sample Edit display.
CUT (F5)
3. Press ENTER to confirm the setting.
2. Rotate the Dial, or use the numeric keypad (with the KEYPAD LED on) to set the Gain to a suitable level, playing the sample as you regulate the setting.
After a short period, the sample Gain setting is memorized.

2. Rotate the Dial, or use the numeric keypad (with the KEYPAD LED on) to set the Gain to a suitable level, playing the sample as you regulate the setting.

EXPORT (F7) Use the Export option to save the Sample currently in edit to disk. You can chose to save in two of the most commonly recognized formats: Sound Designer 1 or Windows RIFF Wave.
1. Press EXPORT to open a dialog where you can specify a name and select the format.
3. Press ENTER to confirm the setting.

Press ESCAPE to exit the Sample Edit display. After a short period, the sample Gain setting is memorized. Shortly after, the Sample is saved to disk.
2. Select the File Type parameter and rotate the Dial to select the other format.
3. Insert a floppy disk into the disk drive and press ENTER to start the export procedure. 2. Select the File Type parameter and rotate the Dial to select the other format. 1. Press EXPORT to open a dialog where you can specify a name and select the format.
You can chose to save in two of the most commonly recognized formats: Sound Designer 1 or Windows RIFF Wave. Use the Export option to save the Sample currently in edit to disk. EXPORT (F7)
3. Insert a floppy disk into the disk drive and press ENTER to start the export procedure.
Sample MIDI Dump

SEND SAMPLE / SAMPLE REQUEST (F7)
Samples can be transferred between SK760/880 and most other samplers and computer sampling programs using the Send Sample/Sample Request option which operates according to the MIDI Sample Dump Standard. This feature works on the handshake principal and requires only that the transmitter and receiver conform to the standard. Both units must be connected via a closed MIDI loop The operation proceeds smoothly and at high speed without freezing either the external device or the SK760/880. It is not necessary to set MIDI channels. If the external device does not conform to the Sample MIDI Dump Standard, this operation cannot be performed. The Send Sample option is shown when a Sample is selected in the main Sample Translator display.
3. Press SAMPLE REQ (F7).

A selection window opens where you can select the sample number.
If you are requesting a sample from another SK760/880, you can specify the numbers from 0 to 15 which correspond to the 16 locations of the Sample Translator. If you are requesting a sample from an external computer or sampler, you can specify a number from 0 to 255, depending on the sample numbers stored in the external unit. Press ENTER and shortly after, the sample transfer process begins. During the transfer, the process is monitored on the bar graph of the main Sample Translator display. While the transfer is taking place, the Sample Req option changes to Dump Stop. Use Dump Stop to stop the sample transfer from the external device. To save a Sample (Send Sample)
The option changes from Send Sample to Sample Request when an empty location is selected.
To transfer a selected sample from SK760/880 to an external device, press SEND SAMPLE (F7).
To load a Sample (Sample Request - F7) Shortly after, the sample transfer process begins. During the transfer, the process is monitored on the bar graph of the main Sample Translator display. While the transfer is taking place, the Send Sample option changes to Dump Stop. Use Dump Stop to stop the sample transfer to the external device.
1. To load a sample into SKs Sample Translator from an external source (such as another SK760/ 880, or a computer or sampler), first connect the external devices MIDI OUT port to the SK760/880 MIDI IN and the MIDI IN port to the SK760/880 MIDI OUT (MIDI Loop). 2. Select an empty location in the Sample Translators main display.
Press ESCAPE to cancel the display and retain the samples. Save the samples with SAVE to escape the Sample Translator (see page 45).
Pressing ENTER cancels all samples and returns to the Sound Edit environment.
Pressing Abort activates a prompt to confirm the abort process with ENTER and cancel all samples.
Use the Abort option to escape from Sample Translator without saving your samples.
Abort (F8)

Abort (F8)
Use the Abort option to escape from Sample Translator without saving your samples. Pressing Abort activates a prompt to confirm the abort process with ENTER and cancel all samples.
Pressing ENTER cancels all samples and returns to the Sound Edit environment. Press ESCAPE to cancel the display and retain the samples. Save the samples with SAVE to escape the Sample Translator (see page 45).
Edit General is where you can modify global parameters that affect the instrument as a whole and which are not memorized to a Performance. A part of the general parameter settings are conserved in RAM and saved to disk as a Setup. Press the GENERAL button in the EDIT section to gain access to the Edit General environment. Edit General is a complex structure environment. When you press GENERAL for the first time, the main menu page appears where you can access one of the 6 editors using one of the following methods: a) rotate the DIAL to select the editor and press ENTER; b) use the directional arrows to select the editor and press ENTER; c) use the page scroll buttons to pass directly from one editor to another;
DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN MENU PAGE

The menu page shows 6 editors at the centre: General Controls, Tuning/Scale, Pedalboard/ Computer, Date & Time, Display Controls and Mic/Line In. On the right hand side are 8 options which can be selected with the corresponding Soft buttons F1F8: Battery & Release, Auto Help, System Info, Restore All, Restore Styles, Restore Performances, Restore Songs, Restore Style Performances. After entering the editors, the options shown in the options column change according to the editor. The description of the main menu options is at the end of this chapter.
Edit General - Main menu
Edit General is a complex structure environment. When you press GENERAL for the first time, the main menu page appears where you can access one of the 6 editors using one of the following methods:
Press the GENERAL button in the EDIT section to gain access to the Edit General environment.
Edit General is where you can modify global parameters that affect the instrument as a whole and which are not memorized to a Performance. A part of the general parameter settings are conserved in RAM and saved to disk as a Setup.
17 Edit General
a) rotate the DIAL to select the editor and press ENTER;
d) specify the editor number on the keypad (with the KEY PAD LED on) and press ENTER.
Edit General - Main menu
d) specify the editor number on the keypad (with the KEY PAD LED on) and press ENTER.
c) use the page scroll buttons to pass directly from one editor to another;
b) use the directional arrows to select the editor and press ENTER;
The description of the main menu options is at the end of this chapter.
After entering the editors, the options shown in the options column change according to the editor.
On the right hand side are 8 options which can be selected with the corresponding Soft buttons F1F8: Battery & Release, Auto Help, System Info, Restore All, Restore Styles, Restore Performances, Restore Songs, Restore Style Performances.
The menu page shows 6 editors at the centre: General Controls, Tuning/Scale, Pedalboard/ Computer, Date & Time, Display Controls and Mic/Line In.
DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN MENU PAGE
Edit General 171

17 Edit General
GENERAL
GENERAL
Edit General 171
General Controls
KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY
Determines the response of the keyboard to velocity changes.
Tuning/Scale
MASTER PITCH
Fine tunes the instrument as a whole in fractions of 1/64 of a semitone.
Assignable values: Soft, Medium soft, Medium, Medium hard, Hard.
Assignable values: -63...+63.
FOOTSWITCH POLARITY
Footswitch 1, 2, 3
KEYBOARD SCALE
Provides a selection of Temperaments (Scales).
Sets the polarity of the programmable pedals 1, 2, 3. Generalmusic pedals are of the NC type.
Options: Equal, Inverse, Meantone, Werkmeister III, Arabian 1, Arabian 2, User1 ... User8.
Options: NC (Normally Closed), NO (Normally Open).
USER PROGRAMMABLE SCALES

You can program your own scale using the keyboard map shown at the bottom of the display. This graphical representation shows the current pitch of the notes of an octave. The octave currently in edit is shown in the title bar directly above the keyboard (e.g. Octave C-1/B-1). Each note shows the coarse tune and fine tune status. The programming tasks allow you to alter the pitch of one or more notes by modifying the coarse and fine tuning parameters of the current scale.
Actual note Coarse tuning Octave (select F5 for Octave Up or F6 for Octave Down).
Fine tuning in 64ths of a semitone Edit General: General controls

Edit General: Master pitch & Keyboard Scale
172 Reference Guide
2. Use the directional arrows to select the fine tune parameter (in this case 0) and rotate the Dial to fine tune the note according to your requirements. While tuning, play the note repeatedly. 3. Repeat the microtuning operation for other notes. 4. Select the Copy to oct. function (F3), select Fine Tune in the Copy parameter and ALL in the to octave parameter, then press ENTER to confirm. 5. When the scale has been programmed, save it to the Setup by pressing F7 (Save). You will be prompted to select a User location. Save... (F8)
THE TUNING/SCALE OPTIONS

Copy to octave... (F3)
Copies the current setting to another octave. The Copy to octave dialog window is opened where you can specify the elements to copy and the octave to copy the user programmed data to. Catch Note... (F7)
1. With the Octave Up function (F5), select the octave to program.
Coarse&Fine - Copies both the coarse tuned notes as well as the fine.. To octave - Selects the octave to copy to. Select the ALL option to copy a programmed octave to the entire keyboard.
Coarse&Fine - Copies both the coarse tuned notes as well as the fine..
Copies the current setting to another octave. The Copy to octave dialog window is opened where you can specify the elements to copy and the octave to copy the user programmed data to.
5. When the scale has been programmed, save it to the Setup by pressing F7 (Save). You will be prompted to select a User location.
Play the note to edit. Save... (F8)
Saves the User programmed scale to the Setup. The Save dialog window is opened where you can choose from 8 User scale destinations.
Select the User scale with the DIAL. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
Copy to octave... (F3)
THE TUNING/SCALE OPTIONS
4. Select the Copy to oct. function (F3), select Fine Tune in the Copy parameter and ALL in the to octave parameter, then press ENTER to confirm.
3. Repeat the microtuning operation for other notes.
2. Use the directional arrows to select the fine tune parameter (in this case 0) and rotate the Dial to fine tune the note according to your requirements. While tuning, play the note repeatedly.
Example - to program a scale by fine tuning one or more notes:
The final configuration can then be copied to selected octaves of the keyboard, or to all octaves.
Finetune - Copies only the fine tuning.
Coarse - Copies only the coarse tuned notes.
Select the User scale with the DIAL. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
Saves the User programmed scale to the Setup. The Save dialog window is opened where you can choose from 8 User scale destinations.
Play the note to edit.
Selects the note to edit. Press F7. The following message appears:
Sets the next lowest octave to edit.
Octave Down (F6)
Selects the next highest octave to edit.
Octave Up (F5)
Edit General 173

The final configuration can then be copied to selected octaves of the keyboard, or to all octaves.

Coarse - Copies only the coarse tuned notes. Finetune - Copies only the fine tuning. To octave - Selects the octave to copy to. Select the ALL option to copy a programmed octave to the entire keyboard. Octave Up (F5)
Example - to program a scale by fine tuning one or more notes:
1. With the Octave Up function (F5), select the octave to program.
Selects the next highest octave to edit. Octave Down (F6) Sets the next lowest octave to edit. Catch Note... (F7) Selects the note to edit. Press F7. The following message appears:
Edit General 173
Pedalboard / Computer
The PEDALBOARD and COMPUTER connectors cannot operate at the same time. Selecting one renders the other inoperative. To activate one of the two connectors, select the corresponding option (Pedalboard or Computer) with the cursor buttons.
Note C2 D2 E2 F#2 G#2 A#2 C3
Function Start/Stop Intro Ending Fill < Fill = Fill > Key Start
Note C#2 D#2 F2 G2 A2 B2
Function Tempo Tempo + Var 1 Var 2 Var 3 Var 4
PEDALBOARD
If you have purchased Generalmusics optional 13-note pedalboard, connect it to the Pedalboard connector and program the unit for how it will be used by pressing F8 (Mode). Mode (F8) for Pedalboard options Options for the pedalboard.
Bass Sustain (F1) Sustain for the notes of the pedalboard.
COMPUTER
Instead of using the MIDI interface, you can connect via a single serial cable to a computer. Program the connector for the type of computer used by pressing F8 (Mode).
Off - Pedalboard deactivated. Pedalbass - The automatic bass of the auto-accompaniments is deactivated and the BASS track is assigned to the Pedalboard, allowing you to play the bass with the pedalboard. Pedalchord - Chord recognition on the keyboard is disabled and passed over to the pedalboard. To play minor and sevenths, play two bass notes at the same time. Alternatively, you can program the Pedals 1, 2, or 3 to select minor and sevenths. Multifunction - Each note of the pedalboard recalls a function associated to the Styles:
Edit General: PedalBoard/Computer

174 Reference Guide
Off - Connection deactivated. Macintosh - To connect to an Apple Macintosh computer. A standard Mac serial cable is required to connect to the Modem port. In the computer software, set a communication velocity of 1 MHz. PC1 - Allows serial connection with an IBM computer or compatible, with a communication velocity of 31250 baud. A standard PC serial cable must be connected to the RS-232 port of the computer. PC2 - As above, but with a communication velocity of 38400 baud.
PC2 - As above, but with a communication velocity of 38400 baud.
PC1 - Allows serial connection with an IBM computer or compatible, with a communication velocity of 31250 baud. A standard PC serial cable must be connected to the RS-232 port of the computer.
Macintosh - To connect to an Apple Macintosh computer. A standard Mac serial cable is required to connect to the Modem port. In the computer software, set a communication velocity of 1 MHz.
Options to communicate with a computer
Edit General; Date & Time

Off - Connection deactivated.
Mode (F8) Computer options
Confirm with ENTER or F2.
Sets the time in edit. Take the cursor to the hour, minute and seconds with the cursor buttons and specify the value of each parameter with the DIAL.
SET TIME (F2)
Confirm with ENTER or F1.
Sets the date in edit. Take the cursor to the day, month and year and specify the value of each parameter with the DIAL.
Edit General; Date & Time
SET DATE (F1)
Sets the internal calendar and clock.
Date & Time
Edit General 175

Mode (F8) Computer options

Options to communicate with a computer
Date & Time

Sets the internal calendar and clock.
SET DATE (F1)

Sets the date in edit. Take the cursor to the day, month and year and specify the value of each parameter with the DIAL. Confirm with ENTER or F1.
SET TIME (F2)

Sets the time in edit. Take the cursor to the hour, minute and seconds with the cursor buttons and specify the value of each parameter with the DIAL. Confirm with ENTER or F2.
Edit General 175
Display controls
Viewing controls for the display. The settings are conserved to memory after power down. They cannot be saved to disk.
Mic/Line Input
This page contains bar graphs to monitor the level of signals fed into the Mic/Line inputs 1 and 2. The contents of the display change according to the absence or presence of the optional Audio Video card.
CHORD LANGUAGE
Determines the viewing language (English/Italian/French/Germa) of the chord notation in the Score.
AV CARD NOT INSTALLED

You can plug a microphone or musical instrument (or other audio source) into the Mic/Line jacks (IN1, IN2) to play through the instruments internal pre-amplifier. The input signals are directed to the instruments internal speakers and to the LEFT and RIGHT audio outputs, but are not processed by the on-board Digital Effects processor. You can regulate the signal gain with the twin GAIN knob located to the left of the Mic/Line jacks. An optimum signal level can be obtained when the input signal, at maximum volume, almost reaches the extreme right of the VU bar graph (the clipping zone). Regulate the volume of the signal at the LEFT and RIGHT outputs with the MIC/LINE front panel slider. The M. VOL slider will have no effect on the MIC/LINE signal.
HELP LANGUAGE
Selects the language for the Help file. Your model may not contain a file in a different language.
DISPLAY MODE
Offers the choice of viewing black text on a white background (Positive) or white texts on a black background (Negative).
LAST SELECTION MEMORY

If enabled (ON), the last selected carried out in either Style, Performance or Sound mode is memorised. If disabled (off), the selection window of these modes to not show the last selection made.
Edit General - Display controls

Edit General - Mic/Line In (AV interface not installed)
176 Reference Guide
The input signal is directed to the internal sound generator and effects processor before being directed to the LEFT and RIGHT outputs and the speaker system. You can regulate the signal gain with the twin GAIN knob located to the left of the Mic/Line jacks. An optimum signal level can be obtained when the input signal, at maximum volume, almost touches the extreme right of the VU bar graph (the clipping zone). Regulate the maximum volume with the MIC/LINE panel slider. The M. VOL slider regulates the sum of the internal sound generator output level (SK760/880 sounds and signal of the MIC/LINE IN inputs). Pan E1 Send Selects the Group of effects A or B. Eff Group
Edit General - Mic/Line In (AV interface installed)
Edit General - Mic/Line In (AV interface installed)
Regulate the maximum volume with the MIC/LINE panel slider. The M. VOL slider regulates the sum of the internal sound generator output level (SK760/880 sounds and signal of the MIC/LINE IN inputs).
You can regulate the signal gain with the twin GAIN knob located to the left of the Mic/Line jacks. An optimum signal level can be obtained when the input signal, at maximum volume, almost touches the extreme right of the VU bar graph (the clipping zone).
The input signal is directed to the internal sound generator and effects processor before being directed to the LEFT and RIGHT outputs and the speaker system.
Instruments fitted with the Audio/Video interface show a completely different Mic/Line Input page with several parameters to control the input signals.
A/V INTERFACE INSTALLED
The VU-meter indicates the level of the input signal. The dark zone to the extreme right represents clipping (distortion).
Determines the amount of modulation effect to apply to the signal.
E2 Send
Determines the amount of Reverb effect to apply to the signal.
Assignable values: -32 (all to the left) ... 0 (centre) ... +31 (all to the right).
Determines the position of the input signal within the stereo panorama.
Maximum volume levels can produce clipping, a distortion which can be eliminated by controlling the gain.
Monitors the level of the input signal. Controls the signal gain of the two signals fed into the Mic/ Line IN1 and IN2 jacks with the twin knob 1 and 2 located to the left of the inputs.
Separate volume control for each input.
Volume
Input VU
PARAMETERS WITH OPTIONAL AV INTERFACE
Edit General 177

A/V INTERFACE INSTALLED

Instruments fitted with the Audio/Video interface show a completely different Mic/Line Input page with several parameters to control the input signals.
PARAMETERS WITH OPTIONAL AV INTERFACE

Input VU Monitors the level of the input signal. Controls the signal gain of the two signals fed into the Mic/ Line IN1 and IN2 jacks with the twin knob 1 and 2 located to the left of the inputs. Maximum volume levels can produce clipping, a distortion which can be eliminated by controlling the gain.
clipping
The VU-meter indicates the level of the input signal. The dark zone to the extreme right represents clipping (distortion).
Volume Separate volume control for each input.

Pan Determines the position of the input signal within the stereo panorama.
Assignable values: -32 (all to the left) ... 0 (centre) ... +31 (all to the right).
Eff Group
Selects the Group of effects A or B. E1 Send
clipping
Determines the amount of Reverb effect to apply to the signal.

E2 Send
Determines the amount of modulation effect to apply to the signal.

Edit General 177
Filter Selects a filter type.
MIC/LINE ON/OFF (F1)

Switch to activate/deactivate the Mic/Line IN1 and IN2 jacks. When the inputs are active, the overall polyphony is reduced by two voices; if you do not intend using the Mic/Line inputs, deactivate them in order to direct the two voices to the internal SK760/880 sounds.
Assignable values: Off, LP (Low Pass), HP (High Pass), BP (Band Pass), PB (Parametric Boost), PC (Parametric Cut).
Cutoff Sets the cutoff frequency.

Resonance Sets the filter resonance. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. Audio Out Directs the signal to the audio output or outputs. Assignable values: L+R (Left+Right), L, R.
VOCAL ON/OFF (F3/F4)

Switch for the activation/deactivation of the Vocal Processor. See also the Vocal Processor section in the Edit Effects chapter.
EQUALIZER (F5/F6)
The Equalizer parameters affect the Mic/Line input signals only.
178 Reference Guide
Edit General main menu options column
Press F1 once again to show the date and time of the release:
If the battery charge level is low, leave the instrument turned on for at least 15 hours to recharge the battery completely.
If the battery charge level is low, leave the instrument turned on for at least 15 hours to recharge the battery completely.
Press F1 once to show the release date and battery charge level:
This option shows the date and time of the latest release of the operating system and the charge level of the rechargeable backing battery.
BATTERY & RE.... (F1)
The Edit General Main Menu Options
For example, if you use the Restore Performance command, you will cancel all user-programmed Performances and restore the original factory settings.
User-programmed data (Performances, User Styles, Songs, Performance-Sounds, Sounds) can be cancelled, either as an individual block (Performances, Style-Performances, User Styles, Songs, Sounds) or entirely (All) by means of a single command. Cancelling user programmed data from memory restores the instruments original default parameter status.
The Edit General environment offers several dedicated RESTORE commands which are useful to restore part or all the instruments RAM to the factory set status.
RESTORE
This option displays information regarding the presence or absence of the various accessories that can be installed in SK760/880.
SYSTEM INFO (F2)
WARNING: use the RESTORE commands with caution because user-programmed data is irremediably lost. Make sure that you have saved any data you so not wish to cancel to disk or Hard disk before proceeding with a restore operation.
BATTERY & RE.... (F1)

SYSTEM INFO (F2)

This option displays information regarding the presence or absence of the various accessories that can be installed in SK760/880.
This option shows the date and time of the latest release of the operating system and the charge level of the rechargeable backing battery.

Press F1 once to show the release date and battery charge level:
Press F1 once again to show the date and time of the release:
RESTORE
The Edit General environment offers several dedicated RESTORE commands which are useful to restore part or all the instruments RAM to the factory set status. User-programmed data (Performances, User Styles, Songs, Performance-Sounds, Sounds) can be cancelled, either as an individual block (Performances, Style-Performances, User Styles, Songs, Sounds) or entirely (All) by means of a single command. Cancelling user programmed data from memory restores the instruments original default parameter status. For example, if you use the Restore Performance command, you will cancel all user-programmed Performances and restore the original factory settings.

WARNING: use the RESTORE commands with caution because user-programmed data is irremediably lost. Make sure that you have saved any data you so not wish to cancel to disk or Hard disk before proceeding with a restore operation.

Edit General main menu options column
Edit General 179

The Edit General Main Menu Options
Edit General 179
RESTORE ALL (F3)

This operation cancels all user programmed data currently in RAM (Performances, User Styles, Style-Performances, Songs) and restores the instrument to its factory-set status (RAM empty). Pressing F3 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
parameters are restored to the factory-set values. ROM Styles associated to modified StylePerformances are identified by an asterisk (*) after the Style name. Pressing F7 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
RESTORE SOUNDS (F8) RESTORE STYLES (F4)

This operation cancels all User Styles in RAM (including User Style-Performances) residing in the User 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons of the STYLE GROUPS. The User slots are restored to the factory-set conditions (empty: User). Pressing F4 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE. This operation restores the Sound configuration to the original factory-set situation, cancelling all User edited Sounds previously stored to user locations. This operation is particularly useful to restore the original SK760/880 sound set (over 1,000 sunds) after loading a sound configuration from a previous WK4 disk (about 600 sounds) using the Load All Sounds or Load Block procedures. Pressing F8 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
RESTORE PERFORMANCE (F5)

This operation cancels all user-programmed Performances in RAM residing in the 8 buttons of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS. The status of the Performance parameters are restored to the factory-set values. Pressing F5 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
RESTORE SONGS (F6)

This operation cancels all Song in RAM. The Songs memory is restored to the factory-set status (empty: User). Pressing F6 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
RESTORE STYLE-PERFORMANCE (F7)

This operation cancels all user-programmed Style-Performances associated to the ROM STYLES. The status of the Style-Performance
Appendix
Sound tables Drum tables Style tables Performance tables Effects tables Wave tables MIDI Implementation MIDI Controllers System Exclusive implementation Index (alphabetical)
Index (alphabetical) System Exclusive implementation MIDI Controllers MIDI Implementation Wave tables Effects tables Performance tables Style tables Drum tables Sound tables
Appendix
ROM-Sounds
Bank 1 PIANO group 1 Piano12 2 Piano22 3 Piano32 4 HonkyTonk2 5 E.Piano11 6 E.Piano22 7 Harpsichor1 8 Clavinet1 CHROM PERC. group 9 Celesta2 10 Glockenspl2 11 MusicBox2 12 Vibraphone1 13 Marimba1 14 Xylophone1 15 TubularBel2 16 Santur2 ORGAN group 17 Organ12 18 Organ21 19 Organ32 20 ChurchOrg12 21 ReedOrgan1 22 Musette1 23 Harmonica1 24 Bandoneon1 GUITAR group) 25 NylonGtr1 26 SteelGtr1 27 JazzGtr11 28 CleanGtr1 29 MutedGtr1 30 Overdrive1 31 DistGtr1 32 HarmonxGtr1 2 PianoMk12 PianoW22 E.G.Piano12 DetPiano2 ThinRhodx2 E.Piano32 Harpsich22 SynClav1 CelestaPlk2 GlockVibes2 WineGls12 Vibes21 Marimba22 Xylophone21 SoftBell2 BarChimes1 16'1'Draw1 16'8'5'Drw1 SwOrgan2 Church21 PipeOrgan2 Accord11 Blusette1 Cassotto1 SoloGtr1 12StrGtr2 OctJzGtr1 ElGuitar11 Muted22 WhaGtr12 FuzzGtr2 SlowHarmx2 3 PickPiano2 Pianoctave3 E.G.Piano22 Western2 E.Piano42 E.Piano52 Harpsich31 WowClav2 ToyPiano2 GlockChoir2 MusicBell2 SynVibes2 Mallet2 XyloTribal2 Oohlalaa2 Climbing2 Organ1WX2 JazzOrgan32 SynOrg12 Organ3WX2 Organ42 Accord22 WestHarmon1 OrganLfo2 VocalGtr2 SteelGtr11 Hawaiian2 ChorusGtr2 Dyn.Muted1 5thOverdr2 HeavyGt2 HarmGtr32 4 PianoStage2 PianoTine3 AtkPiano12 AtkPiano22 RhodxFilt2 E.PianoSft2 LogPiano2 PercPiano2 Balarimba1 ToyOrgan2 GlockSeq1 Marimba31 SynthMarim1 VibeSeq1 5 InharPiano2 TonePiano2 ArcoPiano3 E.PianoMk2 DetuneE.P.2 ElPianoSeq1 E.PianoX2 DynE.P.1 FM Pro MezzoPiano 6 7 8
Quasimodo
OrgTheatre1 Organ3W1 OrganC32 Organ1W2 PipeChiff2 Accord31 Farfis1 Bandoneon22 PedalSteel2 SteelGtr21 JazzGtr21 ElGuitar22 MutedWha1 CrunchStb2 LeadDist3 StratoGt1
16'1'Vib32 16'1 5'1/31 PipeOrg32 HamDrw1 Accord42 Hamperc1 Diatonic2 CrunchGt1 Mandolin1 MutedClean1 Dyn.Clean2 MutedFunk1 5thDistort3 LeadDist23 JazzPick2
8'1 4'1 2'2/31 Hamclick2 EvocativOr2 Accord51 PercOrgan2 AccordEnv1
2'1 OctaDrawbr3 FiltDrawbr3 SixtDrawbr3 Bandoneon31 Trekzak DirtyOrgan3 OctAccordn2
RockOrgSeq1 TheatreSus RotaryPress
Fuzztain The Strat
NylonGtr23 Mandolin21 SteelGtr31 JazzStrato2 ElGuitar32 ElGuitar42 1 MandolinSeq LeadDist33
The suffix = 3 oscillators per voice. The suffix = 2 oscillators per voice. The suffix = 1 oscillator per voice. The prefix DK = DrumKit
A2 Appendix
ST_Mandolin1 ST_Steel11
Bank 9 PIANO group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CHROM PERC. group 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ORGAN group 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 GUITAR group) 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ROM-Sounds
10
11
12
ST_Mandolin1 ST_Steel11
13
14
ST_Steel21
15
Tables A3

ROM-Sounds

Bank 9 PIANO group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CHROM PERC. group 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ORGAN group 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 GUITAR group) 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ST_Nylon1 ST_Steel31 ST_12Strng1 ST_Steel41 16
ST_Steel21
ST_Nylon1 ST_Steel31 ST_12Strng1 ST_Steel41
Tables A3
ROM-Sounds
Bank 1 BASS group 33 AcoustcBs11 34 FingeredBs1 35 PickBass1 36 Fretless2 37 SlapBass11 38 SlapBass22 39 SynBass11 40 SynBass22 STRINGS group) 41 Violin1 42 Viola1 43 Cello1 44 Contrabass1 45 TremoloStr1 46 Pizzicato1 47 Harp1 48 Timpani1 ENSEMBLE group) 49 Strings1 50 SlwStrings1 51 SynStrg12 52 SynStrg22 53 Choir1 54 VoiceOohs2 55 SynVox2 56 OrchHits2 BRASS group 57 Trumpet1 58 Trombone1 59 Tuba2 60 MutedTrp11 61 FrenchHorn2 62 Brass2 63 SynBrass12 64 SynBrass22 2 AcoustcBs21 Dyn.Fingrd2 Dyn.Bass21 AcidBass12 Dyn.Bass31 WXBass2 SynBass31 SynBass42 SlowViolin1 BowedViola2 SlowCello1 BowedBass2 OctTremolo2 OctPizz2 HarpDelay2 TimpaniEFX2 StereoStrg2 StrgOrch2 SynStrg32 SynStrg42 VoiceUuh2 VoiceAah2 SkatVoices1 Rave2 FlugelAttk1 Trombone31 ShortTuba1 MutedTrp21 Dyn.FrHorn3 Brass22 SynBras22 SlowHorn2 3 AcousticBs32 Dyn.Bass11 PckBass22 Flanged1 SlapSynBs2 StopBass2 TecknoBass2 RaveBass2 4 Dyn.AcoBs1 Dyn.Baxx1 PkBsMute1 Fretless21 PckBass31 ThumBass1 AcoustcBs41 SynthBass2 5 HarmAcBs1 HarmAcBs21 HarmElBs1 RezoBass1 ClickBass1 BleapBass1 SynSlapBs1 HitBass2 6 FingerdBs21 Fretless31 WedgeBass1 SynBass51 ToneBass1 BassMik1 SpaceBass12 SpaceBass22 7 DanceBass2 FingerdBs32 SubBass2 WowBass1 FingAndSlp2 DubbedRezo2 Popcorn2 NylonBass2 8 TheChopper2 LowPassed2 SerialBass2 ContraSynB2 DigiBass2 PriorBass2 SynBass62 RazorBass2
ViolinOrch2 ViolaPad2 CelloEns2 Quartet1 Staccato1 Plectra1 EchoPizz1 Spacehar2 Dyn.Orch I'I'I2 StrgGlock2 St.SlwStrg2 SynStrg52 Strings32 SlowUuh2 SlowAah2 Vocoder2 Dyn.St.Hit3 FlugelHorn1 WowTromb21 WowTuba1 Dyn.MtTrp2 TotoHorns2 BrassRips1 SyntHorn2 AttkHorn2 DualStrgs2 Strings21 OrchHits21 StrEthnic2 BackVocals1 SimStrings2 SympMemory2 HitsRev2 DynSection2 TrombSwell1 ClassicBrs1 ModernBrs1 FrHrnSwell2 BrassFall2 SynBrass32 SynBrass42 StereoOctv3 SlwString21 SawStrings2 NoiseUuh2 PannedVox4 WideEnsemb2 StereoSlow2 OctSlowStr2 NoiseTrp3 TrombSlop2 OctBrass13 OctBrass23 FrenchFlut3 BrassTrp2 PercSynBrs3 SynBrass52
TrombSwel2
ColorBrass2 StereoBrs2
A4 Appendix
Bank 9 BASS group 33 Vang.Bass 34 DanceFing2 35 SoftBass2 36 37 38 39 40 STRINGS group) 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 ENSEMBLE group 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 BRASS group 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
ROM-Sounds
Vang.Bass2
10
11
12
13
14
ST_AcousBs1 ST_FngrdBs1 ST_PickBs21 ST_Fretls11 ST_Fretls21 ST_FngrBs21 ST_PickBs11 ST_Fretls31 ST_SynBas42 ST_Fretls41
15
Tables A5

ROM-Sounds

Bank 9 BASS group 33 Vang.Bass 34 DanceFing2 35 SoftBass2 36 37 38 39 40 STRINGS group) 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 ENSEMBLE group 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 BRASS group 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
10
11
12
13
14
15
16 ST_AcousBs1 ST_FngrdBs1 ST_PickBs21 ST_Fretls11 ST_Fretls21 ST_FngrBs21 ST_Fretls31 ST_Fretls41
Vang.Bass2
ST_PickBs11 ST_SynBas42
16
Tables A5
ROM-Sounds
Bank 1 REED group 65 Soprano1 66 SoftSax1 67 TenorSax1 68 BaritonSax1 69 Oboe1 70 EnglisHorn2 71 Bassoon1 72 Clarinet1 PIPE group 73 Piccolo1 74 Flute1 75 Recorder2 76 PanFlute1 77 BottleBlow2 78 Shakuhachi2 79 Whistle1 80 Ocarina2 SYNTH LEAD group 81 SquareWave2 82 SawWave2 83 SynCalliop2 84 ChiffLead3 85 Charang2 86 SoloVox2 87 5thSawWave4 88 BassLead3 SYNTH PAD group 89 Fantasia3 90 WarmPad2 91 Polysynth2 92 SpaceVoice2 93 BowedGlass2 94 MetalPad2 95 HaloPad3 95 SweepPad2 2 Soprano22 SaxNoise2 OctaveSax2 BaritDet2 OboeChiff2 EngHorn22 Bassoon21 ClarSolo2 HardFlute12 Dyn.Flute12 Recorder22 PanFlute22 BottleNois2 Shakupad2 Whistle1WX1 OcarinaPan2 Pulse12 ObxFilter2 Azimut2 Chopper2 Jump2 FiltRes12 Decay12 Obx22 NewAge2 Obx12 Fantasy22 VocBells2 Prophet12 Bright22 Slave2 Machiner2 3 SoprFilter1 SoftFilt1 TenFilter1 BariFilter1 OboeFilter1 HornFilter2 BassoonFlt1 ClarFilter1 HardFlute22 DynHiFlute2 Bubbler1 Dyn.Pan1 Tube1 ShakuVoice2 Whistle3WX2 OcarinaSyn2 Pulse22 Lyle2 SynLead12 Digital2 SoundTrk2 FiltRes22 Decay22 Obx32 PPG2 AnlgPad2 Fantasy32 Angels2 Prophet22 Analogic2 Atmosphere2 Decay32 4 AltoSax1 LiscioSax1 TouchSax2 BaritnSax21 SaxQuartet1 TenSaxSolo1 BreathSopr2 LiscioClar1 PanFilter1 ColorWind2 Panfluit 5 Safe Sax 6 7 8
ProphSaw1 TrianWave1 ClavWave1 PulseWave1 MiniSaw1 MiniPulse1 DigiWave11 DigiWave21 Fantasy13 Waveaura2 Awala1 OcBreath2 Panch1 Bright33 Ppg1 Waiting2
SnapSynth1 SeqTone1 SeqWoody1 SeqStick1 Inharm11 Inharm21 Inharm31 Inharm41 Form11 Form21 Form31 Form41 Form51 Form61 Form71 Budweis2
BirAttak1 Boink1 Gring1 Thin1 Buzz1 LfxSynth1 Sharp1 Shape1 LogStr1 MarimVox2 Pad4U1 MyVox1 PadZone11 PadZone21 PluckPad1 Tibet2
RdPhas1 StrnNoise1 SevenSynth1 SynthLead1 MKSynth1 StlSynth1 FmIsh1 BtSynth1 PrettyPad12 PrettyPad23 Fantasy43 StereoFrm12 FizzyPad2 BandSweep2 EpicPan2 StereoFrm22
Boss1 PannedSeq2 Joe4lead2 OlFaithful3 Saw-Me3 Saw-You3 PowerPop2 TooAnalog3 RichForm2 BellPad012 BellPad022 StereoFrm32 BellPad032 BellPad042 BellPad052 StereoFrm42
A6 Appendix
MinBitSyn12 MinBitSyn22 DigGrunge12 DigGrunge22 ToneZone12 ToneZone22 ToneZone32 ToneZone42
FxShape2 SharpBuzz2 MinStack4 MajStack4 DimStack4 Maj5Stack4 Min7Stack4 Maj7Stack4
Eerie12 Eerie22 Eerie32 Eerie42 VocoWah2 ThinWha2 FatAttak12 FatAttak22
Vangelis1 Vangelis2 An A.Logic Spiral Phat Pulse Soft Seq. Soft Lead Alf's Lead
Alf's Pad Alf's Pad2
Bank 9 REED group 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 PIPE group 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 SYNTH LEAD group 81 FatSynth2 82 WhaSynth2 83 Outburst2 84 Its19852 85 FMbefore2 86 CrossShape2 87 CrossSharp2 88 CrossWires2 SYNTH PAD group 89 IcePad12 90 IcePad22 91 BassPad2 92 93 94 95 96
ROM-Sounds
Alf's Pad Alf's Pad2
MinBitSyn12 MinBitSyn22 DigGrunge12 DigGrunge22 ToneZone12 ToneZone22 ToneZone32 ToneZone42
10
FxShape2 SharpBuzz2 MinStack4 MajStack4 DimStack4 Maj5Stack4 Min7Stack4 Maj7Stack4
11
Eerie12 Eerie22 Eerie32 Eerie42 VocoWah2 ThinWha2 FatAttak12 FatAttak22
12
Vangelis1 Vangelis2 An A.Logic Spiral Phat Pulse Soft Seq. Soft Lead Alf's Lead
13
14
15
Tables A7

ROM-Sounds

Bank 9 REED group 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 PIPE group 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 SYNTH LEAD group 81 FatSynth2 82 WhaSynth2 83 Outburst2 84 Its19852 85 FMbefore2 86 CrossShape2 87 CrossSharp2 88 CrossWires2 SYNTH PAD group 89 IcePad12 90 IcePad22 91 BassPad2 92 93 94 95 96
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16
Tables A7
ROM-Sounds
Bank 1 SYN SFX group 97 IceRain3 98 Soundtrack2 99 Crystal2 100 Atmosphere2 101 Brightness3 102 Goblin2 103 EchoDrops1 104 StarTheme2 ETHNIC group 105 Sitar1 106 Banjo2 107 Shamisen1 108 Koto1 109 Kalimba1 110 Bagpipe1 111 Fiddle1 112 Shanai1 PERCUSSIVE group 113 TinkleBell2 114 Agogo1 115 SteelDrums2 116 Woodblock1 117 Taiko2 118 Melo.Tom11 119 SynthDrum1 120 ReverseCym1 SFX group 121 GtFretNois1 122 BreathNois1 123 Seashore2 124 Bird2 125 Telephone11 126 Helicopter2 127 Applause2 128 GunShot1 2 Noiseres2 MoonWind2 Wind2 Arp260002 WithGas2 Resonance2 Synthex12 StarTheme22 SitarDet2 BanjoOct2 ShamSitar2 Kanoun2 ShrtKalimb2 BagpipeEns2 Hukin2 BacktoWS2 DK_STAND.1 DK_ROOM DK_POWER DK_ELECT DK_HOUSE DK_JAZZ1 DK_BRUSH DK_ORCH Gtr.WhaWha|'|'|1 Zapp1 TickTack1 Scratch11 Telephone21 SynPerc32 HeartBeat2 Explosion2 3 BigRoom2 Slope2 SynLead22 GlockAthm2 PopUp2 NoGravity2 Synthex22 PowerBad2 SynSitar2 EthnicGtr2 SynSham2 TrpClarin1 SaxTrumpt1 BrassEns2 FiddleBell2 VoiceSpect2 DK_STAND.2 DK_WS DK_STD.1WX DK_DANCE DK_TECHNO DK_JAZZ2 DK_M1 DK_SY77 GtrNoise1 KeyClick1 Drop1 Water1 Door1 Clackson2 PickScrape1 Bomb2 4 Submarin2 Ekoendls2 Jets2 Smak2 OnOff2 Synthex32 Synthex42 StarTheme32 Kalimba21 KalimShot1 5 Impact1 SynRain2 SeqSnap1 ColorBlast2 Spect11 Spect21 Synthex52 Spect31 6 Mech-Lp1 Mech-Wv1 SeqCook1 BounSync2 Atomic2 SawModula2 Synthex62 HiJoe2 7 Yowww3 Stars2 Babbling1 Synkro2 JimisDream2 TunedNoise1 BlasteRel2 StarTheme43 8 HitThePipe2 StabSynth2 MetalWork2 DigiDrops2 WoodCutter2 SnapOff2 SilicaPick2 Yourimba2
Kalimba31
DK_STAND.3 DK_ROOM1WX DK_POWER1WX DK_ELECT1WX DK_HOUSE1WX DK_JAZZ_WX DK_BRUSHWX DK_ORCH_WX
DK_STD.2WX DK_STAND.5 DK_ROOM2WX DK_STD'70 DKPOWER2WX DK_HYBRID1 DKELECT2WX DK_FUSION DKHOUSE2WX DK_STAND.6 DK_STAND.4 DK_STAND.7 DK_BRUSH2 DK_STAND.8 SD_ONLY_KT DK_JAZZ3
DK_HOUSE2 DK_HIPHOP DK_DANCE2 DK_TEK'90A DK_TEKBRSH DK_ELECT.2 DK_DNC1999 DK_POLY
Vang. Kit DK_ROCK DK_STAND.9 DK_STAND10 DK_TEK'90B DK_TUNED DK_HYBRID2 BD_ONLY_KT
A8 Appendix
HHOPEN11 HHFT_701 HOUSERIDE1 COWBELL1 BONGOLOW1 AGOGO1 CLAVES1 WINDCHIMES 1 NOISE21 VOICES31 SCRATCH11 CRASH_181 SD_STD31 SD_SH31 BD_DMGD_LN1 9091_CHH1 WhaWha31 ReverSnar11 ReverSnar21 ReverSnar31 DYNA_PERC2 SD_ROCK2 BD_ROCK2 WEEP1
HHPEDAL1 HHOP_701 RIDECUP1 VIBRASLAP1 CONGAHSLAP1 CABASA1 WOODBLOCK1 CASTANETS1 WATER1 VOXHHCL1 SCRATCH21 HARD_CLAP1 SD_STD41 SD_FSN1 BD_DNC2_LN1 9091_OCHH1
HHTGHT11 HHTGHT21 HH_CL1_DR1 HH_CL2_DR1 RIDECYM1 SPLASH1 HOUSECOWB1 COWBL21 CONGALSLAP1 CONGAHIGH1 CABASAL1 MARACAS1 1 QUICAHIGH QUICALOW1 MTSURDO1 OPSURDO11 DOOR1 VOXTAP1 TOMBRUSH2 SD_BB1 SD_P701 EFF_SD21 BD_DNC31 9092_CHH1 Noisnare12 Noisnare22 Noisnare32 Noisnare42 BrokeNoise2 HatOrSnare2 FallingBD2 WayaW2 KITCHEN1 VOXTIP1 HOU_TOM1 D_SD1 SD_F701 808_CL_HH1 BD_Z1_LAYL2 9092_OPHH1 SD_HEAVY12 SD_HEAVY22 SD_HEAVY32 SD_HEAVY42 BD_DN1_ZP2 BD_DN2_ZP2 BD_DN3_ZP2 BN_DN3_SD2
WhaWha41 ReverShrt11 ReverShrt21 ReverShrt31 NOISE_C1HH1 NOISE_C2HH1 NOISE_OPHH1 NOISE_OPRV1
Bank 9 10 SYN SFX group 97 BDHOUSE11 BDHOUSE21 98 BDTEKNO1 BDORCH1 99 RIMSHOT11 RIMSHOT21 100 SDELECT1 DYNSDJAZZ1 101 SDSTD21 SDSTD31 102 HOUSECLAP1 CLAP1 103 ROLLSNARE1 BRUSREV1 104 TOMELEC1 TOMHIGH1 ETHNIC group 105 HHCLO1L1 HHCLO1S1 106 HHOPEN21 HHCL_701 107 CRASHORCH1 CRASH1 108 TAMBOURINE1 TAMBSLP1 109 BONGOHISL1 CONGALSLAP1 110 TIMBALES1 TIMBLOW1 111 GUIROLONG1 GUIROSHORT1 112 SHAKER1 JINGLEBELL1 PERCUSSIVE group 113 FINGERSNAP1 DROP1 114 VOICES11 VOICES21 115 FINGBELL1 ZAPP1 116 NOISEPERC1 RASPYRIDE1 117 SD_STD11 SD_STD21 118 SD_SH11 SD_SH21 119 REZO_IT3 LNG_BD11 120 LONG_REVRS1 BD_Z1_LAYH2 SFX group 121 WhaWha11 WhaWha21 122 Glasses1 ReverseBd11 123 TekBrush2 ReverseBd21 124 Highhh1 ReverseBd31 125 PhoneWave1 SCRATCH31 126 RndEnArm2 SCRATCH41 127 OddSpace2 SCRATCH51 128 GlassalG2 SCRATCH61
ROM-Sounds
WhaWha31 ReverSnar11 ReverSnar21 ReverSnar31 DYNA_PERC2 SD_ROCK2 BD_ROCK2 WEEP1
NOISE21 VOICES31 SCRATCH11 CRASH_181 SD_STD31 SD_SH31 BD_DMGD_LN1 9091_CHH1
HHOPEN11 HHFT_701 HOUSERIDE1 COWBELL1 BONGOLOW1 AGOGO1 CLAVES1 WINDCHIMES1
BDELECT11 BDPOWER1 HOUSERIM1 SDJAZZ21 SDSTD41 BD_AC_1DYN1 BRUSRIG1 TOMJAZZ1
11
WhaWha41 ReverShrt11 ReverShrt21 ReverShrt31 NOISE_C1HH1 NOISE_C2HH1 NOISE_OPHH1 NOISE_OPRV1
WATER1 VOXHHCL1 SCRATCH21 HARD_CLAP1 SD_STD41 SD_FSN1 BD_DNC2_LN1 9091_OCHH1
HHPEDAL1 HHOP_701 RIDECUP1 VIBRASLAP1 CONGAHSLAP1 CABASA1 WOODBLOCK1 CASTANETS1
BDJAZZ1 ACOUST_KIK1 STICK1 SDJAZZ31 HOUSSD11 BD_AC_2DYN1 BRUSHSLP1 TOMROOM1
12
Noisnare12 Noisnare22 Noisnare32 Noisnare42 BrokeNoise2 HatOrSnare2 FallingBD2 WayaW2
DOOR1 VOXTAP1 TOMBRUSH2 SD_BB1 SD_P701 EFF_SD21 BD_DNC31 9092_CHH1
HHTGHT11 HHTGHT21 HH_CL1_DR1 HH_CL2_DR1 RIDECYM1 SPLASH1 HOUSECOWB1 COWBL21 CONGALSLAP1 CONGAHIGH1 CABASAL1 MARACAS1 QUICAHIGH1 QUICALOW1 MTSURDO1 OPSURDO11
BDROOM11 BD_KIK1 RIM_701 SDORCH1 HOUSESD21 BD_AC_1A1 BRUSHTAP1 TIMP_JM1
13
SD_HEAVY12 SD_HEAVY22 SD_HEAVY32 SD_HEAVY42 BD_DN1_ZP2 BD_DN2_ZP2 BD_DN3_ZP2 BN_DN3_SD2
KITCHEN1 VOXTIP1 HOU_TOM1 D_SD1 SD_F701 808_CL_HH1 BD_Z1_LAYL2 9092_OPHH1
BDSTD11 BD_70_P1 RIM_11 SDROOM11 ROLL_701 BD_AC_1B1 TOM_141 TOMLOW1
14
SD12 SD22 SD32 909_SD_LNG2 BD_Z1_HHC2 BD_DN3_HI2 BD_DN2_HI2 BD_DMG_SD2
LOGDRUM1 DOLLYVOX1 SQCLICK1 BEAT_SD1 SD_BR1 808_OC_HH1 DNC_BD11 HH_LOOP_CL1
HOUSEHH1 HH_PED_DR1 CHINA1 RIDE1 CONGALOW1 WHISTLE1 TRIANLONG1 DARBKHIGH1
BDSTD21 BD_70_F1 RIM_21 SDROOM21 ROLL_F_LN2 BD_AC_2A1 TOM_13_DYN2 TIMPANI1
15
Tables A9

ROM-Sounds

Bank 9 10 SYN SFX group 97 BDHOUSE11 BDHOUSE21 98 BDTEKNO1 BDORCH1 1 99 RIMSHOT1 RIMSHOT21 100 SDELECT1 DYNSDJAZZ1 101 SDSTD21 SDSTD31 102 HOUSECLAP1 CLAP1 103 ROLLSNARE1 BRUSREV1 104 TOMELEC1 TOMHIGH1 ETHNIC group 105 HHCLO1L1 HHCLO1S1 106 HHOPEN21 HHCL_701 1 107 CRASHORCH CRASH1 108 TAMBOURINE1 TAMBSLP1 109 BONGOHISL1 CONGALSLAP1 110 TIMBALES1 TIMBLOW1 1 111 GUIROLONG GUIROSHORT1 112 SHAKER1 JINGLEBELL1 PERCUSSIVE group 113 FINGERSNAP1 DROP1 114 VOICES11 VOICES21 115 FINGBELL1 ZAPP1 116 NOISEPERC1 RASPYRIDE1 117 SD_STD11 SD_STD21 1 118 SD_SH1 SD_SH21 119 REZO_IT3 LNG_BD11 120 LONG_REVRS1 BD_Z1_LAYH2 SFX group 121 WhaWha11 WhaWha21 122 Glasses1 ReverseBd11 123 TekBrush2 ReverseBd21 124 Highhh1 ReverseBd31 125 PhoneWave1 SCRATCH31 126 RndEnArm2 SCRATCH41 127 OddSpace2 SCRATCH51 128 GlassalG2 SCRATCH61
11 BDELECT11 BDPOWER1 HOUSERIM1 SDJAZZ21 SDSTD41 BD_AC_1DYN 1 BRUSRIG1 TOMJAZZ1
12 BDJAZZ1 ACOUST_KIK1 STICK1 SDJAZZ31 HOUSSD11 BD_AC_2DYN1 BRUSHSLP1 TOMROOM1
13 BDROOM11 BD_KIK1 RIM_701 SDORCH1 HOUSESD21 BD_AC_1A1 BRUSHTAP1 TIMP_JM1
14 BDSTD11 BD_70_P1 RIM_11 SDROOM11 ROLL_701 BD_AC_1B1 TOM_141 TOMLOW1
15 BDSTD21 BD_70_F1 RIM_21 SDROOM21 ROLL_F_LN2 BD_AC_2A1 TOM_13_DYN2 TIMPANI1 HOUSEHH1 HH_PED_DR1 CHINA1 RIDE1 CONGALOW1 WHISTLE1 TRIANLONG1 DARBKHIGH1
16 BDSTD31 CLAP_MIX1 EFF_RIM1 SDSTD11 ROLL_F1 BD_AC_2B1 TOM_10_DYN2 OPSURDO21 HHCLO21 HH_OP_DR1 SMASH1 RIDECUP1 HOUSETCON1 MUTBELL2 TRIANSHORT1 DARBKLOW1 CLAKSON1 BABYVOX1 DYTEK_TIMB2 SD_9091 SD_BR_DYN2 808_OPHHLP1 BD_Z21 HH_LOOP_OP1 BD_DEEP_DN2 TOMLOW22 TOMHIGH22 BD11 BORDER_12 BORDER_22 Sinus1 Empty1
BD_DEEP_DN2 TOMLOW22 TOMHIGH22 BD11 BORDER_12 BORDER_22 Sinus1 Empty1 CLAKSON1 BABYVOX1 DYTEK_TIMB2 SD_9091 SD_BR_DYN2 808_OPHHLP1 BD_Z21 HH_LOOP_OP1 HHCLO21 HH_OP_DR1 SMASH1 RIDECUP1 HOUSETCON1 MUTBELL2 TRIANSHORT1 DARBKLOW1 BDSTD31 CLAP_MIX1 EFF_RIM1 SDSTD11 ROLL_F1 BD_AC_2B1 TOM_10_DYN2 OPSURDO21 16
LOGDRUM1 DOLLYVOX1 SQCLICK1 BEAT_SD1 SD_BR1 808_OC_HH1 DNC_BD11 HH_LOOP_CL1 SD12 SD22 SD32 909_SD_LNG2 BD_Z1_HHC2 BD_DN3_HI2 BD_DN2_HI2 BD_DMG_SD2
Tables A9
C5 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 C6 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 C7 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 C8 108
WHISTLE 110-15 GUIROSHORT 111-10 GUIROLONG 111-9 CLAVES 111-11 WOODBLOCK 111-12 WOODBLOCK 111-12 QUICAHIGH 111-13 QUICALOW 111-14 TRIANSHORT 111-16 TRIANLONG 111-15 SHAKER 112-9 JINGLEBELL 112-10 WINDCHIMES 112-11 CASTANETS 112-12 MTSURDO 112-13 OPSURDO 112-14
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
< = same as DK_STAND1 113-2-1
A10 Appendix
Drumkits
25 26 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 C2 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 C3 48 49 50 51 52
58 59 C4 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71

Drumkits
C2 36
41
57
40
38
35
33
31
29
28
26
42
56
43
55
44
54
45
53
C4 60
C3 48
71
69
67
65
64
62
59
57
55
53
52
50
47
70
68
66
63
61
58
56
54
51
49
46
39
37
34
32
30
27
25
DK_STAND1 113-2-.1 ROLLSNARE 103-9 FINGERSNAP 113-9 ZAPP 115-10 GunShot 128-1 SCRATCH2 115-12 SCRATCH1 115-11 STICK 99-12 SQCLICK 115-15 HOUSERIM 99-11 MUTBELL 110-16 BDSTD2 97-15 BDSTD1 97-14 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDSTD1 100-16 HOUSECLAP 102-9 SDSTD4 101-11 TOMLOW 104-14 HHCLO1S 105-10 TOMLOW 104-14 HHPEDAL 105-12 TOMLOW 104-14 HHOPEN2 106-9 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMHIGH 104-10 CRASH 107-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 RIDECYM 107-13 CHINA 107-15 RIDECUP 107-12 TAMBSLP 108-10 SPLASH 107-14 COWBELL 108-11 CRASH 107-10 VIBRASLAP 108-12 RIDECYM 107-13 CONGASLAP 109-10 BONGOLOW 109-11 CONGAHSLAP 109-12 CONGAHIGH 109-14 CONGALOW 109-15 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBLOW 110-10 AGOGO 110-11 AGOGO 110-11 CABASA 110-12 MARACAS 110-14 WHISTLE 110-15
DK_ROOM 114-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDROOM1 97-13 BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM1 100-14 < SDROOM2 100-15 TOMROOM 104-12 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
DK_POWER 115-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM2 100-15 < SDSTD3 101-10 < HHTGHT1 105-13 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
DK_ELECT. 116-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDELECT 100-9 < SDROOM1 100-14 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMELEC 104-9 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < ReverseCym 120-1 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
DK_HOUSE 117-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDHOUSE2 97-10 BDHOUSE HOUSERIM 99-11 < < HOUSESD2 101-13 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 < < < < < HOUSECOWB 108-13 < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < < < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_JAZZ 118-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < < BDJAZZ 97-12 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
28
DK_STAND1 113-2-.1 ROLLSNARE 103-9 FINGERSNAP 113-9 ZAPP 115-10 GunShot 128-1 SCRATCH2 115-12 SCRATCH1 115-11 STICK 99-12 SQCLICK 115-15 HOUSERIM 99-11 MUTBELL 110-16 BDSTD2 97-15 BDSTD1 97-14 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDSTD1 100-16 HOUSECLAP 102-9 SDSTD4 101-11 TOMLOW 104-14 HHCLO1S 105-10 TOMLOW 104-14 HHPEDAL 105-12 TOMLOW 104-14 HHOPEN2 106-9 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMHIGH 104-10 CRASH 107-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 RIDECYM 107-13 CHINA 107-15 RIDECUP 107-12 TAMBSLP 108-10 SPLASH 107-14 COWBELL 108-11 CRASH 107-10 VIBRASLAP 108-12 RIDECYM 107-13 CONGASLAP 109-10 BONGOLOW 109-11 CONGAHSLAP 109-12 CONGAHIGH 109-14 CONGALOW 109-15 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBLOW 110-10 AGOGO 110-11 AGOGO 110-11 CABASA 110-12 MARACAS 110-14 WHISTLE 110-15
DK_ROOM 114-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDROOM1 97-13 BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM1 100-14 < SDROOM2 100-15 TOMROOM 104-12 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
DK_POWER 115-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM2 100-15 < SDSTD3 101-10 < HHTGHT1 105-13 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
DK_ELECT. 116-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDELECT 100-9 < SDROOM1 100-14 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMELEC 104-9 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < ReverseCym 120-1 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
DK_HOUSE 117-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDHOUSE2 97-10 BDHOUSE HOUSERIM 99-11 < < HOUSESD2 101-13 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 < < < < < HOUSECOWB 108-13 < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < < < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_JAZZ 118-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < < BDJAZZ 97-12 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
Tables A11
Drumkits
Tables A11
C5 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 C6 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 C7 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 C8 108
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < Applause 127-1
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
BONGOLOW 109-11 BONGOLOW 109-11 CONGASLAP 109-12 CONGAHIGH 109-14 CONGALOW 109-15 GUIROLONG 111-9 QUICALOW 111-14 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBALES 110-9 AGOGO 110-11 TRIANLONG 111-15 WHISTLE 110-15 BDHOUSE1 97-9 NOISEPERC 116-9 HOUSSD1 101-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES 3 114-11 VOICES2 114-10 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOICES2 114-10 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOXTIP 114-14 VOXTAP 114-13 CLAKSON 113-16 DOLLYVOX 114-15 TAMBSLP 108-10 ROLLSNARE 103-9 SDORCH 100-13 HHCLO1S 105-10 CLAVES 111-11 CONGALOW 109-15 QUICAHIGH 111-13 AGOGO 110-11 STICK 99-12 STICK 99-12 STICK 99-12 STICK 99-12
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
A12 Appendix
Drumkits
25 26 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 C2 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 C3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 C4 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71

Drumkits
C4 60
C3 48
C2 36
62
59
57
55
53
52
50
47
45
43
41
40
38
35
33
31
29
28
26
63
61
58
56
54
51
49
46
44
42
39
37
34
32
30
BDPOWER 98-11 SDELECT 100-9 SDROOM2 100-15 SDSTD3 101-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 CABASA 110-12 < TAMBSLP 108-10 < COWBELL 108-11 RIMSHOT2 99-10 BDJAZZ 97-12 BRUSRIG 103-11 DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 BRUSHTAP 103-13 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHCLO1S 105-10 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHPEDAL 105-12 WOODBLOCK 111-12 HHOPEN2 106-9 HOUSCLAP 102-9 BDSTD1 97-14 RIDECYM 107-13 SDSTD1 100-16 RIDECUP 107-12 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 SPLASH 107-14 TOMROOM 104-12 CRASH 107-10 VIBRASLAP 108-12 CHINA 107-15 FINGERSNAP 113-9
71
69
67
65
64
70
68
66
27
25
DK_BRUSH 119-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < < BDJAZZ 97-12 < BRUSHTAP 103-13 BRUSHSLP 103-12 BRUSREV 103-10 TOMBRUSH 115-13 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMBRUSH 115-13 < TOMBRUSH 115-13 < TOMBRUSH 115-13 TOMBRUSH 115-13 < TOMBRUSH 115-13 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
DK_ORCH. 120-2-1 < < HHTGHT1 105-13 HHPEDAL 105-12 HHOPEN2 106-9 RIDECYM 107-13 < < < < BDSTD3 97-16 BDORCH 98-10 < SDORCH 100-13 CASTANETS 112-12 SDORCH 100-13 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 < < < < < CRASHORCH 107-9 < < < < < < < < < < < <
DK_STAND.2 113-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDSTD3 97-16 < < SDSTD4 101-11 < SDSTD3 101-10 < HHCLO2 105-16 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
BDPOWER 98-11 SDELECT 100-9 SDROOM2 100-15 SDSTD3 101-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 CABASA 110-12 < TAMBSLP 108-10 < COWBELL 108-11 RIMSHOT2 99-10 BDJAZZ 97-12 BRUSRIG 103-11 DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 BRUSHTAP 103-13 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHCLO1S 105-10 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHPEDAL 105-12 WOODBLOCK 111-12 HHOPEN2 106-9 HOUSCLAP 102-9 BDSTD1 97-14 RIDECYM 107-13 SDSTD1 100-16 RIDECUP 107-12 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 SPLASH 107-14 TOMROOM 104-12 CRASH 107-10 VIBRASLAP 108-12 CHINA 107-15 FINGERSNAP 113-9
DK_WS 114-3-1
DK_STD.1WX 115-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM2 100-15 < SDSTD3 101-10 < HHTGHT1 105-13 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
DK_DANCE 116-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDELECT 100-9 < SDROOM1 100-14 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMELEC 104-9 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < ReverseCym 120-1 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
28
DK_BRUSH 119-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < < BDJAZZ 97-12 < BRUSHTAP 103-13 BRUSHSLP 103-12 BRUSREV 103-10 TOMBRUSH 115-13 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMBRUSH 115-13 < TOMBRUSH 115-13 < TOMBRUSH 115-13 TOMBRUSH 115-13 < TOMBRUSH 115-13 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
DK_ORCH. 120-2-1 < < HHTGHT1 105-13 HHPEDAL 105-12 HHOPEN2 106-9 RIDECYM 107-13 < < < < BDSTD3 97-16 BDORCH 98-10 < SDORCH 100-13 CASTANETS 112-12 SDORCH 100-13 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 < < < < < CRASHORCH 107-9 < < < < < < < < < < < <
DK_STAND.2 113-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDSTD3 97-16 < < SDSTD4 101-11 < SDSTD3 101-10 < HHCLO2 105-16 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
DK_WS 114-3-1
DK_STD.1WX 115-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM2 100-15 < SDSTD3 101-10 < HHTGHT1 105-13 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
DK_DANCE 116-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDELECT 100-9 < SDROOM1 100-14 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMELEC 104-9 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < ReverseCym 120-1 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
Tables A13
Drumkits
Tables A13
C5 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 C6 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 C7 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 C8 108
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
CONGAHIGH 109-14 TIMBALES 110-9 TRIANSHORT 111-16 TIMBALES 110-9 TRIANLONG 111-15 NOISEPERC 116-9 NOISEPERC 116-9 DOOR 113-13 NOISEPERC 116-9 SDSTD2 101-9 ROLLSNARE 103-9 SDSTD3 101-10
BreathNois 122-1 VIBRASLAP 108-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
< GUIRLONG 111-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1-9 BARCHIMES 16-2-1 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-13 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLACKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPY RIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY
A14 Appendix
Drumkits
25 26 27 29 30 31 32 33 34
< BDROOM1 97-13 BDELECT1 97-11 BDHOUSE1 97-9 BDPOWER 98-11 SDSTD1 100-16 SDORCH 100-13 SDSTD3 101-10 HOUSSD1 101-12 SDROOM2 100-15 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDROOM2 100-15 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMHIGH 104-10 HHCLO1S 105-10 HOUSEHH 105-15 HHPEDAL 105-12 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HHOPEN2 106-9 TAMBOURINE 108-9 HOUSEHH 105-15 CRASH 107-10 CHINA 107-15 RIDECYM 107-13 RIDECUP 107-12 CABASA 110-12 VOXHHCL 114-12 HOUSCLAP 102-9 BONGOLOW 109-11 BONGOLOW 109-11 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKHIGH 112-15 CONGALOW 109-15 < BDROOM1 97-13 BDELECT1 97-11 BDHOUSE1 97-9 BDPOWER 98-11 SDSTD1 100-16 SDORCH 100-13 SDSTD3 101-10 HOUSSD1 101-12 SDROOM2 100-15 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDROOM2 100-15 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMHIGH 104-10 HHCLO1S 105-10 HOUSEHH 105-15 HHPEDAL 105-12 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HHOPEN2 106-9 TAMBOURINE 108-9 HOUSEHH 105-15 CRASH 107-10 CHINA 107-15 RIDECYM 107-13 RIDECUP 107-12 CABASA 110-12 VOXHHCL 114-12 HOUSCLAP 102-9 BONGOLOW 109-11 BONGOLOW 109-11 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKHIGH 112-15 CONGALOW 109-15 BDSTD2 97-15 BDROOM1 97-13 BDELECT1 97-11 BDPOWER 98-11 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMHIGH 104-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 BDHOUSE1 97-9 BDSTD2 97-15 SDSTD1 100-16 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 SDSTD3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDELECT 100-9 TOMROOM 104-12 HOUSECLAP 102-9 COWBELL 108-11 CABASA 110-12 HHCLO1S 105-10 TAMBOURINE 108-9 HHOPEN2 106-9 CRASH 107-10 ROLLSNARE 103-9 RIDECYM 107-13 RIDECUP 107-12 TubularBel 15-1 TubularBel 15-1 TubularBel 15-1 KITCHEN 113-14 KITCHEN 113-14 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKHIGH 112-15 BreathNois 122-1 DK_STAND.3 113-4-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDSTD1 97-14 BDSTD2 97-15 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDORCH 100-13 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 < HHTGHT1 105-13 < < < HHOPEN1 105-11 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < DK_ROOM1WX 114-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < < < SDSTD2 101-9 < SCSTS3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_TECHNO 117-3-1 < < < < < < < < < BDTEKNO 98-9 BDJAZZ 97-12 HOUSERIM 99-11 HOUSSD1 101-12 < HOUSESD2 101-13 HOUSETCON 109-16 HHCLO2 105-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HHTGHT1 105-13 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HHOPEN2 106-9 HOUSETCON 109-16 ReverseCym 120-1 < < < < HOUSECOWB 108-13 < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 SDJAZZ2 100-11 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
46
51
58
63
Drumkits
70
28
71
29
69
26
30
68
31
67
32
66
33
65
35
64
C2 36
62
37
61
38
C4 60
40
59
41
57
42
56
43
55
44
54
45
53
47
52
C3 48
50
49
49
50
C3 48
52
47
53
45
54
44
55
43
56
42
57
41
59
40
39
C4 60
38
61
37
62
C2 36
58
51
46
39
34
BDSTD2 97-15 BDROOM1 97-13 BDELECT1 97-11 BDPOWER 98-11 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMHIGH 104-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 BDHOUSE1 97-9 BDSTD2 97-15 SDSTD1 100-16 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 SDSTD3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDELECT 100-9 TOMROOM 104-12 HOUSECLAP 102-9 COWBELL 108-11 CABASA 110-12 HHCLO1S 105-10 TAMBOURINE 108-9 HHOPEN2 106-9 CRASH 107-10 ROLLSNARE 103-9 RIDECYM 107-13 RIDECUP 107-12 TubularBel 15-1 TubularBel 15-1 TubularBel 15-1 KITCHEN 113-14 KITCHEN 113-14 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKHIGH 112-15 BreathNois 122-1
64
35
71
69
67
65
70
68
66
63
27
25
< < < < < < < < BDTEKNO 98-9 BDJAZZ 97-12 HOUSERIM 99-11 HOUSSD1 101-12 < HOUSESD2 101-13 HOUSETCON 109-16 HHCLO2 105-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HHTGHT1 105-13 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HHOPEN2 106-9 HOUSETCON 109-16 ReverseCym 120-1 < < < < HOUSECOWB 108-13 < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 SDJAZZ2 100-11 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_TECHNO 117-3-1 <
DK_JAZZ2 118-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < < BDJAZZ 97-12 RIMSHOT2 99-10 SDJAZZ3 100-12 < DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
28
DK_JAZZ2 118-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < < BDJAZZ 97-12 RIMSHOT2 99-10 SDJAZZ3 100-12 < DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
DK_M1 119-3-1
DK_SY77. 120-3-1
DK_STAND.3 113-4-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDSTD1 97-14 BDSTD2 97-15 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDORCH 100-13 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 < HHTGHT1 105-13 < < < HHOPEN1 105-11 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <
DK_ROOM1WX 114-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < < < SDSTD2 101-9 < SCSTS3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
Tables A15
Drumkits
DK_M1 119-3-1
DK_SY77. 120-3-1
Tables A15
C5 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 C6 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 C7 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 C8 108
< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16
< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < CABASAL 110-13 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16
A16 Appendix
Drumkits
25 26 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 C2 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 C3 48 49 50 51 52
58 59 C4 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 71 70

Drumkits
C2 36
41
57
40
38
35
33
31
29
28
26
42
56
43
55
44
54
45
53
C4 60
C3 48
71
69
67
65
64
62
59
57
55
53
52
50
47
70
68
66
63
61
58
56
54
51
49
46
39
37
34
32
30
27
25
DK_POWER1WX 115-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 BDSTD1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDROOM2 110-15 < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_ELECT1WX 116-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 BDSTD1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDROOM2 110-15 < SDROOM2 110-15 < < < < TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_HOUSE1WX 117-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDHOUSE 97-9 HOUSERIM 99-11 HOUSSD1 101-12 < SDSTD2 101-9 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < HOUSETCON 109-16 < < < < < < < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < TIMBALES 110-9 COWBELL 108-11 < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_JAZZWX 118-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDJAZZ 97-12 < SDJAZZ2 100-11 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_BRUSHWX 119-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDSTD2 97-15 < BRUSHTAP 103-13 BRUSHSLAP BRUSHREV 103-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_ORCHWX 120-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 HHCLO1S 105-10 HHCLO1L 105-9 HHOPEN2 106-9 RIDECYMB 107-13 < BDELECT1 97-11 RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < TIMPANI 48-1 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 FINGERSNAP 113-8 SDJAZZ3 100-12 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
28
DK_POWER1WX 115-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 BDSTD1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDROOM2 110-15 < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_ELECT1WX 116-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 BDSTD1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDROOM2 110-15 < SDROOM2 110-15 < < < < TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_HOUSE1WX 117-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDHOUSE 97-9 HOUSERIM 99-11 HOUSSD1 101-12 < SDSTD2 101-9 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < HOUSETCON 109-16 < < < < < < < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < TIMBALES 110-9 COWBELL 108-11 < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_JAZZWX 118-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDJAZZ 97-12 < SDJAZZ2 100-11 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_BRUSHWX 119-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDSTD2 97-15 < BRUSHTAP 103-13 BRUSHSLAP BRUSHREV 103-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_ORCHWX 120-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 HHCLO1S 105-10 HHCLO1L 105-9 HHOPEN2 106-9 RIDECYMB 107-13 < BDELECT1 97-11 RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < TIMPANI 48-1 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 FINGERSNAP 113-8 SDJAZZ3 100-12 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
Tables A17
Drumkits
Tables A17
C5 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 C6 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 C7 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 C8 108
< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < CABASAL 110-13 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16
< < < <
A18 Appendix
Drumkits
25 26 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 C2 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 C3 48 49 50 51 52
58 59 C4 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71

Drumkits
C2 36
41
57
40
38
35
33
31
29
28
26
42
56
43
55
44
54
45
53
C4 60
C3 48
71
69
67
65
64
62
59
57
55
53
52
50
47
70
68
66
63
61
58
56
54
51
49
46
39
37
34
32
30
27
25
DK_STAND2WX 113-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < < < SDSTD2 101-9 < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_ROOM2WX 114-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDROOM1 97-13 < SDSTD3 101-10 < SDROOM2 110-15 < < < < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_POWER2WX 115-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM1 100-14 < SDELECT 100-9 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_ELECT2WX 116-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDELECT1 97-11 < < < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 HOUSEHH 105-15 TOMHIGH 104-10 HOUSEHH 105-15 TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_HOUSE2WX 117-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDHOUSE2 97-10 < SDSTD2 101-9 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
28
DK_STAND2WX 113-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < < < SDSTD2 101-9 < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_ROOM2WX 114-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDROOM1 97-13 < SDSTD3 101-10 < SDROOM2 110-15 < < < < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_POWER2WX 115-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM1 100-14 < SDELECT 100-9 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_ELECT2WX 116-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDELECT1 97-11 < < < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 HOUSEHH 105-15 TOMHIGH 104-10 HOUSEHH 105-15 TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_HOUSE2WX 117-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDHOUSE2 97-10 < SDSTD2 101-9 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <
DK_RIDE IT 118-5-1
Tables A19
Drumkits
DK_RIDE IT 118-5-1
Tables A19
ROM-Styles
CC00 PC Style CC00 PC Style CC00 PC Style CC00 PC Style
8 BEAT
32 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
Bank 1
8Beat 1 8Beat 2 8Beat 3 8Beat 4 8Beat 5 8Beat 6 8Beat 7 8Beat 8
ROCK
32 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Bank 2
Rock 3 Rock 4 Shuffle SlowRock 3 SlowRock 4 Rock 5 Blues SlowBlues
DANCE2
32 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87
Bank 1
70' Disco Disco 01 Disco 02 Disco 03 Disco 04 Latin D.1 Latin D.2 Rap
U.S. TRAD Bank 2

32 120 TheatreOrg 121 Org.March 122 Welkish 123 Organsel 124 Hawaiian 125 KidsMarch 126 Mod.Evngls 127 Praise
8 BEAT
32 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
Bank 2
8Beat 9 8Beat 10 8Beat 11 8Beat 12 8Beat 13 SlowBeat SlowBallad 6_8Ballad
FUNK
32 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
Bank 1
Funk 1 Funk 2 Funk 3 Funk 4 Funk 5 Funk 6 Funk 7 Funk 8
DANCE2
32 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
Bank 2
BakerPop Harpy PartyPop EuroPop SynthDance SoulB.B. 80' Disco Open Disco
TRAD 1
33 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
Bank 1
Slow Waltz Waltz 1 Waltz 2 Romagna Mazurka RealVienna Orch.Waltz ItalyMarch
16 BEAT
32 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Bank 1
16Beat 1 16Beat 2 16Beat 3 16Beat 4 16Beat 5 16Beat 6 16Beat 7 16Beat 8
FUNK
32 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
Bank 2
Funk 9 Funk 10 Funk 11 Funk 12 Funk 13 Funk 14 NewAge Fusion1
JAZZ
32 96 97 98 99
Bank 1
Swing Mid Swing Slow Swing Big Band 1
TRAD 1
33 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
Bank 2
Cnt.Gospel G.de.Oory CountryBop Cajun Cnt.Rock SteamTrain Cowboy Cnt.Waltz
100 Big Band 2 101 Dixieland 102 Broadway 103 Foxtrot
16 BEAT
32 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Bank 2
16Beat 9 16Beat 10 16Beat 11 16Beat 12 16Beat 13 16Beat 14 16Beat 15 16BtBallad
DANCE1
32 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
Bank 1
TMerengue PianoDance FunkDance DiscoHit FastDance Pulsing SambaDance House
JAZZ
32
Bank 2
104 SwingBand 105 BourBonStr 106 EasySwing 107 LatinBand 108 QuickStep 109 BBandXmas 110 Foxtrot 2 111 Shuffle
TRAD 2
33 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Bank 1
Twist 1 HullyGully Reggae 1 Reggae 2 PasoDoble Polka Tarantella Pop '60
ROCK
32 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Bank 1
Rock 1 Rock 2 R. and B. SlowRock 1 SlowRock 2 Rock'nRoll Boogie LovelyRock
DANCE1
32 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
Bank 2
DigitHall Rap'nShift DownBeat DiscoFun HeavyDance Techno DancePop DiscoPop
U.S. TRAD Bank 1

32 112 Gospel 1 113 Sacred 114 Gospel 2 115 Western 116 Bluegrass1 117 Bluegrass2 118 Country 119 March USA
TRAD 2
33 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Bank 2
Bajon Mex. 3_4 Charleston Germ.Polka Boehmisch Twist Folk 2_4 Polka 6_8
A20 Appendix
Styles/Style Performances
CC00 PC Style
CC00 PC Style-Perf.
User Styles/Songs
CC00 PC User Style
On MIDI Common channel only
07
LATIN 1
Bank 1
36
06
Tables A21
33
32
Bossa Nova
05
33
SoftBossa
04
34
ChaCha 1
03
35
ChaCha 2
02
36
Rhumba 1
01
37
Rhumba 2
06
40
00
38
Rhumba 3
CC00 PC User Style-Perf. 07
39
Rhumba 4
05
04
03
02
01
00
44
USER 1
07
63
Calypso
31
LATIN 1
Bank 2
USER 2
62
Guaracha
30
33
40
Tango
44
08
61
Gipsy
29
41
Stand.Tango
09
60
Limbo
28
42
Samba
10
59
Caliente 2
27
43
Beguine
11
58
Caliente 1
26
44
Salsa 1
12
57
Makarena
25
45
Salsa 2
13
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
55
CC00 PC Song
15
33
56
El Tic Tac
44
24
46
Cumbia 1
14
LATIN 2
Bank 2
USER 4
47
Cumbia 2
15
CC00 PC Song-Perf.
55
Meneito 2
23
LATIN 2
Bank 1
USER 3
64
54
Meneito 1
22
07
33
48
Merengue 1
44
16
53
Disco Cha
21
49
Merengue 2
17
52
DiscoSamba
20
50
Mambo 1
18
51
Mambo 2
19
51
Mambo 2
19
50
Mambo 1
18
52
DiscoSamba
20
49
Merengue 2
17
53
Disco Cha
21
06
33
48
Merengue 1
44
16
54
Meneito 1
22
LATIN 2
07
Bank 1
USER 3
64
55
Meneito 2
23
47
Cumbia 2
15
CC00 PC Song-Perf. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
LATIN 2
Bank 2
USER 4
46
Cumbia 1
14
33
56
El Tic Tac
44
24
45
Salsa 2
13
57
Makarena
25
44
Salsa 1
12
58
Caliente 1
26
43
Beguine
11
59
Caliente 2
27
42
Samba
10
60
Limbo
28
41
Stand.Tango
09
61
Gipsy
29
33
40
Tango
44
08
62
Guaracha
30
LATIN 1
Bank 2
USER 2
63
Calypso
31
39
Rhumba 4
CC00 PC User Style-Perf.
38
Rhumba 3
07
40
00
37
Rhumba 2
01
36
Rhumba 1
02
35
ChaCha 2
03
34
ChaCha 1
04
33
SoftBossa
05
33
32
Bossa Nova
06
LATIN 1
Bank 1
36
00
USER 1
44 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
01 02 03 04 05 06
07
Tables A21

Styles/Style Performances

User Styles/Songs
CC00 PC User Style CC00 PC Song 55 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
CC00 PC Style
CC00 PC Style-Perf.
05 04 03 02 01 14 13 00 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Performances (RealTime)
CC00 PC Performances CC00 PC Performances
Effects
CC16 DSP A/B select 0 1 48 Eff1 (Reverbs GrpA) Eff1 (Reverbs GrpB) 0 1 2 8 9 10 16 SoftSax Trumpet Brass1 Brass2 Brass3 Brass4 BrassSec SaxSection SynBrass Strings1 Strings2 Strings3 Choir Vocal SynthPad1 SynthPad2 Hamn'Bass Swingin' SoftOrgan PercusOrgan PrettySplit BlueSplit JazzSplit HrmoncSplt 32 40 41 48 56 57 64 65 72 73 80 88 89 Hall 1 Hall 2 Hall 3 Warm Hall Long Hall St. Concert Chamber Studio Room 1 Studio Room 2 Studio Room 3 Club Room 1 Club Room2 Club Room3 Vocal Metal Vocal Plate 1 Plate 2 Church Mountains Falling CC16 DSP A/B select 64 65 48 Eff2 (Mod. GrpA) Eff2 (Mod. GrpB) 0 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 33 40 41 48 49 56 57 36 37 60 61 28 64 65 80 81 82 96 97 Mono Delay 1 Mono Delay 2 Stereo Delay 1 Stereo Delay 2 Multitap Delay 1 Multitap Delay 2 Ping Pong Pan Mix Chorus 1 Chorus 2 Ensemble 1 Ensemble 2 Phaser 1 Phaser 2 Flanger 1 Flanger 2 Chorus Delay 1 Chorus Delay 2 Flanger Delay 1 Flanger Delay 2 Dubbing Distortion Distortion Delay Pitch Shifter 1 Pitch Shifter 2 Shift Delay Rotary 1 Rotary 2
Group 1
48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GrandPiano EPSymphony CoolPiano Heavenly Cathedral Warm Grand Grit Organ St. Guitar CleanSweep L.R.Ballad TheBrass Digilogue PopSynth Matrix 98 Secrets EvenDeeper Piano E.Piano1 E.Piano2 E.Piano3 PianoStrgs E.PianoStrg Clavinet Vibraphone Marimba ManualBas1 ManualBas2 SoloGuitar JazzGtr1 OctJ.Gtr LeadDist FunkGuitar
Group 5
48 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 ChrousGtr RockOrgan JazzOrgan ClickOrgan VintageOrg Fisa Musette Harmonica
CC48 Rev Eff type select
CC48 Mod. Eff type select
Group 2
48 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Group 6
48 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Group 3
48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Group 7
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
104 Early 1 105 Early 2 106 Early 3 112 Stereo
Group 4
48 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Group 8
48 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
104 EQ Jazz 105 EQ Pops 106 EQ Rock 107 EQ Classic

A22 Appendix
Tables A23
1.
0.
Wavetables
MARTELLO
PIANO
46.
45.
HOU_TCON
HOU_COWB
91.
90.
VOICES_1
VIBRASLP
136. BOTTLE
135. BARCHIME
181. EL_BASS_L
180. ELBASS_H
226. 16_1DRAW
44.
HH_TGHT2
89.
TRIAN_SH
134. ARMONICA
179. BAGPIPE
224. MANDOL
2.
AGOGO
47.
HOUS_RIM
92.
VOICES_2
137. BRS_RIP
182. THUMBASS
227. ORJAZZ_S
43.
HH_TGHT1
88.
TRIAN_LO
133. ACO_STR
178. HARMACBS
223. PLECTRA
3.
BABYVOX
48.
HOUS_SD1
93.
VOICES_3
138. CASSOTTO
183. HARMELBS
228. BD_ORCH
42.
HH_PEDAL
87.
TOM_ROOM
132. ACCORDIO
177. ACBASS_H
222. A_MUSETT
4.
BD_ELECT1
49.
HOUS_SD2
94.
VOX_HHCL
139. CHOIR
184. BASSLAP_H
229. FINGBELL
41.
HH_OPEN1
86.
TOM_LOW
131. TUB_WAVE
176. ACBASS_L
221. ELPNKURZ
5.
BD_HOUS1
50.
HOUSCLAP
95.
VOX_TAP
140. CLARINET
185. BASSLAP_L
230. CELLO
40.
HH_CLO1S
85.
TOM_JAZZ
130. TRIANGLE
175. STRINGS
220. FRHORN_L
6.
BD_HOUS2
51.
HOUSEHH
96.
VOX_TIP
141. STEL_GTR
186. FRETLES
231. HH_CLO2
39.
HH_CLO1L
84.
TOM_HIGH
129. SUPERSAW
174. VOCALBOY
219. FRHORN_H
7.
BD_JAZZ
52.
HOUSRIDE
97.
WATER
142. CLAVINET
187. FLUTE
232. HH_OPEN2
38.
GUIRO_SH
83.
TOM_ELEC
128. SINUS
173. TROMBONE
218. VOCAL_BA
263. BRASS_2
8.
BD_ROOM1
53.
JNG_BELL
98.
WHISTLE
143. BIRDS
188. HARMGT_H
233. DOOR
37.
GUIRO_LG
82.
TIMPANI
127. SAW
172. PIZZICATO
217. VOCAL_DU
262. PIANOL2
9.
BD_STD_1
54.
MARACAS
99.
WIND_CHI
144. GUN_SHOT
189. HARMGT_L
234. KITCHEN
36.
FINGERSP
81.
TIMBALES
126. PULSE_45
171. TENORSAX
216. BRASS
261. PIANO_H
10.
BD_STD_2
55.
MT_SURDO
100. WOODBLCK
145. ELICOPT
190. DIST_GTR
235. LOGDRUM
35.
DROP
80.
TIMB_LOW
125. PULSE_40
170. SOPRANO
215. ACCORD2
260. STELGTR2
11.
BD_STD_3
56.
OP_SURDO
101. DIGIT1WV
146. PHONE_1
191. JAZZ_GT2
236. CRAS_ORC
34.
DOLLYVOX
79.
TAMBOURI
124. PULSE_35
169. SOFT_SAX
214. XILOPHNO
250. ACO_GTR2
12.
BD_TECNO
57.
QUICA_HI
102. DIGIT2WV
147. PHONE_2
192. GTR_KURZ
237. KNELGT_L
33.
DARBK_LO
78.
TAMB_SLP
123. PULSE_30
168. PICKBASS
213. VIBES
258. BD_POWER
13.
BONG_SLH
58.
QUICA_LO
103. 1685DRAW
148. SCRATCH1
193. ICE_RAIN
238. APPLAUSE
32.
DARBK_HI
77.
STICK
122. PULSE_25
167. PANFLUTE
212. TRUMPET
257. MANDOL2
14.
BONGO_HI
59.
RIDE_CUP
104. EL_PIAN7
149. SCRATCH2
194. KOTO
239. HARPSI_S
31.
CRASH
76.
SPLASH
121. PULSE_20
166. OCT_JGT
211. RHODES_L
256. ORROCK_S
15.
BONGO_LO
60.
RIDE_CYM
105. ORGAN_2W
150. SEA
195. OR_THEAT
240. VIOLA
30.
COWBELL
75.
SMASH
120. PULSE_15
165. OBOE
210. RHODES_H
255. MARIMBA
16.
BRUS_REV
61.
RIMSHOT1
106. ORGAN_3W
151. TICKTACK
196. ORROCK_F
241. VIOLIN
29.
CONGA_LO
74.
SD_STD4
119. PULSE_10
164. NOISE
209. ELPN_MKS
254. ORG_PIP1
17.
BRUS_RIG
62.
RIMSHOT2
107. ORGAN_4W
153. ZAPP
197. SAX_BARI
242. FKG_G_WS
28.
CONGA_HI
73.
SD_STD3
118. PULSE_O5
163. SPECTR_1
208. GTR_MUTE
253. TROMBO_K
18.
BRUSHSLP
63.
ROLL_SN
108. FROG_WV
153. ELGTR_S2
198. VOC-DUKN
243. GT_HARMO
27.
CON_L_SL
72.
SD_STD2
117. SQUARE
162. MUTE_TR1
207. FLICORNO
252. PIPE_S2
19.
BRUSHTAP
64.
SD_ELECT
109. ORGAN_5W
154. FAGOTTO
199. FLANGED
244. PIK_GRT1
26.
CON_H_SL
71.
SD_STD1
116. PIP_ORG3
161. JAZZ_GT1
206. ELPN_KNL
251. PIK_GTWS
20.
CABASA
65.
SD_JAZZ1
110. ORGAN_6W
155. FLHARD_H
200. BANJO
245. PIK_GRT2
25.
CLAVES
70.
SD_ROOM2
115. ORGAN_1W
160. HARP
205
ELPN_KNH
250. ORCH_HIT
21.
CABASA_L
66.
SD_JAZZ2
111.
VIBES_2W
156. FLHARD_L
201. KALIUMBA
246. WHAWHA1
24.
CLAKSON
69.
SD_ROOM1
114. FORMANT
159. SCRAP_GT
204. GLOCKEN
249. WHAWHA4
22.
CASTAGNT
67.
SD_JAZZ3
112. E_PIANO4
157. FLUGE_S2
202. SHAMISEN
247. WHAWHA2
23.
CHINA
68.
SD_ORCH
113. E_PIANO5
158. FNKGSTOP
203. SITAR
248. WHAWHA3
23.
CHINA
68.
SD_ORCH
113. E_PIANO5
158. FNKGSTOP
203. SITAR
248. WHAWHA3
22.
CASTAGNT
67.
SD_JAZZ3
112. E_PIANO4
157. FLUGE_S2
202. SHAMISEN
247. WHAWHA2
24.
CLAKSON
69.
SD_ROOM1
114. FORMANT
159. SCRAP_GT
204. GLOCKEN
249. WHAWHA4
21.
CABASA_L
66.
SD_JAZZ2
111.
VIBES_2W
156. FLHARD_L
201. KALIUMBA
246. WHAWHA1
25.
CLAVES
70.
SD_ROOM2
115. ORGAN_1W
160. HARP
205
ELPN_KNH
250. ORCH_HIT
20.
CABASA
65.
SD_JAZZ1
110. ORGAN_6W
155. FLHARD_H
200. BANJO
245. PIK_GRT2
26.
CON_H_SL
71.
SD_STD1
116. PIP_ORG3
161. JAZZ_GT1
206. ELPN_KNL
251. PIK_GTWS
19.
BRUSHTAP
64.
SD_ELECT
109. ORGAN_5W
154. FAGOTTO
199. FLANGED
244. PIK_GRT1
27.
CON_L_SL
72.
SD_STD2
117. SQUARE
162. MUTE_TR1
207. FLICORNO
252. PIPE_S2
18.
BRUSHSLP
63.
ROLL_SN
108. FROG_WV
153. ELGTR_S2
198. VOC-DUKN
243. GT_HARMO
28.
CONGA_HI
73.
SD_STD3
118. PULSE_O5
163. SPECTR_1
208. GTR_MUTE
253. TROMBO_K
17.
BRUS_RIG
62.
RIMSHOT2
107. ORGAN_4W
153. ZAPP
197. SAX_BARI
242. FKG_G_WS
29.
CONGA_LO
74.
SD_STD4
119. PULSE_10
164. NOISE
209. ELPN_MKS
254. ORG_PIP1
16.
BRUS_REV
61.
RIMSHOT1
106. ORGAN_3W
151. TICKTACK
196. ORROCK_F
241. VIOLIN
30.
COWBELL
75.
SMASH
120. PULSE_15
165. OBOE
210. RHODES_H
255. MARIMBA
15.
BONGO_LO
60.
RIDE_CYM
105. ORGAN_2W
150. SEA
195. OR_THEAT
240. VIOLA
31.
CRASH
76.
SPLASH
121. PULSE_20
166. OCT_JGT
211. RHODES_L
256. ORROCK_S
14.
BONGO_HI
59.
RIDE_CUP
104. EL_PIAN7
149. SCRATCH2
194. KOTO
239. HARPSI_S
32.
DARBK_HI
77.
STICK
122. PULSE_25
167. PANFLUTE
212. TRUMPET
257. MANDOL2
13.
BONG_SLH
58.
QUICA_LO
103. 1685DRAW
148. SCRATCH1
193. ICE_RAIN
238. APPLAUSE
33.
DARBK_LO
78.
TAMB_SLP
123. PULSE_30
168. PICKBASS
213. VIBES
258. BD_POWER
12.
BD_TECNO
57.
QUICA_HI
102. DIGIT2WV
147. PHONE_2
192. GTR_KURZ
237. KNELGT_L
34.
DOLLYVOX
79.
TAMBOURI
124. PULSE_35
169. SOFT_SAX
214. XILOPHNO
250. ACO_GTR2
11.
BD_STD_3
56.
OP_SURDO
101. DIGIT1WV
146. PHONE_1
191. JAZZ_GT2
236. CRAS_ORC
35.
DROP
80.
TIMB_LOW
125. PULSE_40
170. SOPRANO
215. ACCORD2
260. STELGTR2
10.
BD_STD_2
55.
MT_SURDO
100. WOODBLCK
145. ELICOPT
190. DIST_GTR
235. LOGDRUM
36.
FINGERSP
81.
TIMBALES
126. PULSE_45
171. TENORSAX
216. BRASS
261. PIANO_H
9.
BD_STD_1
54.
MARACAS
99.
WIND_CHI
144. GUN_SHOT
189. HARMGT_L
234. KITCHEN
37.
GUIRO_LG
82.
TIMPANI
127. SAW
172. PIZZICATO
217. VOCAL_DU
262. PIANOL2
8.
BD_ROOM1
53.
JNG_BELL
98.
WHISTLE
143. BIRDS
188. HARMGT_H
233. DOOR
38.
GUIRO_SH
83.
TOM_ELEC
128. SINUS
173. TROMBONE
218. VOCAL_BA
263. BRASS_2
7.
BD_JAZZ
52.
HOUSRIDE
97.
WATER
142. CLAVINET
187. FLUTE
232. HH_OPEN2
39.
HH_CLO1L
84.
TOM_HIGH
129. SUPERSAW
174. VOCALBOY
219. FRHORN_H
6.
BD_HOUS2
51.
HOUSEHH
96.
VOX_TIP
141. STEL_GTR
186. FRETLES
231. HH_CLO2
40.
HH_CLO1S
85.
TOM_JAZZ
130. TRIANGLE
175. STRINGS
220. FRHORN_L
5.
BD_HOUS1
50.
HOUSCLAP
95.
VOX_TAP
140. CLARINET
185. BASSLAP_L
230. CELLO
41.
HH_OPEN1
86.
TOM_LOW
131. TUB_WAVE
176. ACBASS_L
221. ELPNKURZ
4.
BD_ELECT1
49.
HOUS_SD2
94.
VOX_HHCL
139. CHOIR
184. BASSLAP_H
229. FINGBELL
42.
HH_PEDAL
87.
TOM_ROOM
132. ACCORDIO
177. ACBASS_H
222. A_MUSETT
3.
BABYVOX
48.
HOUS_SD1
93.
VOICES_3
138. CASSOTTO
183. HARMELBS
228. BD_ORCH
43.
HH_TGHT1
88.
TRIAN_LO
133. ACO_STR
178. HARMACBS
223. PLECTRA
2.
AGOGO
47.
HOUS_RIM
92.
VOICES_2
137. BRS_RIP
182. THUMBASS
227. ORJAZZ_S
44.
HH_TGHT2
89.
TRIAN_SH
134. ARMONICA
179. BAGPIPE
224. MANDOL
Tables A23

Wavetables

0. 1.
PIANO MARTELLO
45. 46.
HOU_COWB HOU_TCON
90. 91.
VIBRASLP VOICES_1
135. BARCHIME 136. BOTTLE
180. ELBASS_H 181. EL_BASS_L
225. PKBSMUTE 226. 16_1DRAW
225. PKBSMUTE
93 98,99 100,101 Cntrl 80 (ONE SHOT): 0 Fill>< 1 Fill< 2 Fill> 8 Intro 16 End 24-27 Variations 0-1-2-3 40 Key start 61 Rotary 1 slow/fast [GrpA] 62 Rotary 2 slow/fast [GrpB] 64 Start/Stop 66,67 Tempo inc. dec. 68,69 Preset inc. dec. Cntrl 81 OFF [0,63] ON[64,127] 0,1,2 Fill><-Fill<-Fill> 61 Rotary 1 (Off=slow) [GrpA] 62 Rotary 2 (Off=slow) [GrpB] Program Change True number System Exclusive System Common System Real Time Aux Messages Song Position Song Select Tune Clock Commands Active sensing All Sound Off Reset All Contr. Local ON OFF All Note Off 0-127 ***** o o o o o o o o o o o 0-127 o o o o o o o o o o o These messages are available on the Common channel only (1) Vocal Processor Controllers Mode 1 OMNI ON - POLY Mode 3 OMNI OFF - POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON - MONO Mode 4 OMNI OFF - MONO
Chorus depth NRPN RPN
93 Chorus depth (send) 98,99 NRPN 100,101 RPN
0 = Fill>< Off, 64 = Fill>< On 1 = Fill< Off, 65 = Fill< On 2 = Fill> Off, 66 = Fill> On
61 = Rotary 1 Slow, 125 = Rotary Fast 62 = Rotary 2 Slow, 126 = Rotary 2 Fast
0-127
Start, Stop Continue
Notes
o: YES x: NO
A24 Appendix
MIDI Implementation Chart

Manufacturer: Generalmusic S.p.A. FUNCTION Basic Channel Mode Bank change recognized on common channel, only in reception: Bank-Change P.change C#0 C#32 PC 32 0 0-95 Internal Styles 36 0 0-7 Int. Style Performances 40 0 0-7 User Style Performances 44 0 0-31 User Styles 48 0 0-63 Programmable Performances 55 0 0-15 Songs 64 0 0-7 Song-Performances C#16 DSP select 0 Eff1 Reverb GroupA 1 Eff1 Reverb Group B 64 Eff2 Mod. Group A 65 Eff2 Mod. Group B C#48 Eff Type select (See Effects charts for selection values of individual Eff types) Default Messages Altered 0-127 Multimode X X Multimode X X Default Changed 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-16 0,32 1 6,38 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16,48 17,49 18,50 64 66 67 71 72 73 74 85 91 Bank change Modulation Data Entry Volume Pan Expression Controller Vocal Volume (1) Vocal On/Off (1) Mode Recall (1) Voice Set Recall (1) Effects selection Effects volume Tuning control Damper Pedal Sustain (Sostenuto) Soft pedal Resonance Release time Attack time Filter 1 cut-off freq. Voice Mute Mode (1) Reverb depth (send) Transmitted Recognized Model: SK760/SK880 World Keyboard Remarks Voice Mute Mode (1) Reverb depth
Version: 1.00
2 MIDI IN; 2 THRU; 2 MIDI OUT EXTRA COMMON/CHORD CH.
Note Number True voice o o Velocity After Touch Pitch Bender Control Change 0,32 1 6,38 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 Bank change Modulation Data Entry Volume Pan Expression Contr. Vocal Volume (1) Vocal On/Off (1) Mode Recall (1) Voice Set Recall (1) o Keys Chs x o o o Note ON Note OFF o o
0-127 *****
true voice depends on selected sound
85 91
Voice Mute Mode (1) Reverb depth Remarks Version: 1.00
Note Number
Mode
Basic Channel
FUNCTION
Manufacturer: Generalmusic S.p.A.
True voice
Default Messages Altered
Default Changed
Transmitted
Multimode X X
0-127 *****
1-16 1-16
Model: SK760/SK880 World Keyboard
MIDI Implementation Chart
Recognized
Multimode X X
0-127
1-16 1-16
2 MIDI IN; 2 THRU; 2 MIDI OUT EXTRA COMMON/CHORD CH.
true voice depends on selected sound
18,50 64 66 67
Tuning control Damper Pedal Sustain (Sostenuto) Soft pedal
Control Change
Pitch Bender
After Touch
Velocity
Keys Chs
Note ON Note OFF
o o
x o
o o
o o
0,32 1 6,38 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16,48 17,49 18,50 64 66 67 71 72 73 74 85 91
Bank change Modulation Data Entry Volume Pan Expression Controller Vocal Volume (1) Vocal On/Off (1) Mode Recall (1) Voice Set Recall (1) Effects selection Effects volume Tuning control Damper Pedal Sustain (Sostenuto) Soft pedal Resonance Release time Attack time Filter 1 cut-off freq. Voice Mute Mode (1) Reverb depth (send)
Bank change recognized on common channel, only in reception: Bank-Change P.change C#0 C#32 PC 32 0 0-95 Internal Styles 36 0 0-7 Int. Style Performances 40 0 0-7 User Style Performances 44 0 0-31 User Styles 48 0 0-63 Programmable Performances 55 0 0-15 Songs 64 0 0-7 Song-Performances C#16 DSP select 0 Eff1 Reverb GroupA 1 Eff1 Reverb Group B 64 Eff2 Mod. Group A 65 Eff2 Mod. Group B C#48 Eff Type select (See Effects charts for selection values of individual Eff types)
Tables A25
Tuning control Damper Pedal Sustain (Sostenuto) Soft pedal Bank change Modulation Data Entry Volume Pan Expression Contr. Vocal Volume (1) Vocal On/Off (1) Mode Recall (1) Voice Set Recall (1)
85 91
18,50 64 66 67
0,32 1 6,38 7 10 11 12 13 14 15
Tables A25
RECOGNIZED CONTROL CHANGE MESSAGES (MIDI CONTROLLERS)

A ControlChange message activates a Controlller, determined by the first ControlChange value. The ControlChange consists of three parts:
CONTROL CHANGE ON TRACKS

CC00,32 CC01 CC06,38 CC07 CC10 CC11 CC12 CC13 CC14 CC15 CC16,48 CC17,49 CC18,50 CC32 CC64 CC66 CC67 CC71 CC72 CC73 CC74 CC80 CC81 CC85 CC91 CC93 CC98,99 Bank change. Modulation. Data Entry. Main Volume. Pan (panorama). Expression. Vocal Volume (Vocal Processor) Vocal On/Off (Vocal Processor) Mode Recal (Vocal Processor) Voice Set recall (Vocal Processor) Effects selection Effects volume General Purpose (Tuning control) BankSelect LSB. Damper pedal. Sostenuto (sustain) pedal. Soft pedal. Resonance. Release Time. Attack Time. Filter Cutoff Frequency. One Shot control On/Off control Voice Mute mode (Vocal Processor) Effect 1 send (E1, reverb depth). Effect 2 send (E2, modulation depth). NRPN
status byte - (status) determines the status of the ControlChange message. data byte 1 - (value 1) MIDI Controller activated by the ControlChange message. This is the number by which the ControlChanges are identified in the following tables. data byte 2 - (value 2) value of the activated MIDI Controller.
CC100-101 RPN
= travels on MiIDI Common channel only

A26 Appendix
The transfer of data relating to the samples contained in the sounds of the instrument ias based on the standard protocol, called SDS (Sample Dump Standard). The formats of the various commands available are as follows: ACK (handshake message): F0 H = System Exclusive Message status 7E H = Non-Real Time extension cc = device ID 7F H = ACK ID pp = packet number F7 H = EOX
CANCEL (handshake message): F0 H = System Exclusive Message status 7E H = Non-Real Time extension cc = device ID 7D H = CANCEL ID pp = packet number F7 H = EOX WAIT (handshake message): F0 H = System Exclusive Message status 7E H = Non-Real Time extension cc = device ID 7C H = WAIT ID pp = packet number F7 H = EOX
DUMP HEADER: F0 7E cc 01 ss ss ee ff ff ff gg gg gg hh hh hh ii ii ii jj F7 cc ss ss ee ff ff ff gg gg gg hh hh hh ii ii ii jj = = = = = = = =
The transfer of data relating to the samples contained in the sounds of the instrument ias based on the standard protocol, called SDS (Sample Dump Standard). The formats of the various commands available are as follows:
SAMPLE DUMP STANDARD
DUMP REQUEST: F0 H = System Exclusive Message status 7E H = Non-Real Time extension cc = device ID 03H = DUMP REQUEST ID ss ss = Request sample (LSB first) F7 H = EOX
ACK (handshake message): F0H = System Exclusive Message status 7EH = Non-Real Time extension cc = device ID 7FH = ACK ID pp = packet number F7H = EOX
device ID Sample number (LSB first) Sample format(# of significant bits from 8-28) Sample period in nanoseconds (LSB first) Sample length in words (LSB first) Sustain loop start point word number (LSB first) Sustain loop end point word number (LSB first) Loop type (00=forward,01=backward/forward,7F=loop off)
DUMP HEADER: F0 7E cc 01 ss ss ee ff ff ff gg gg gg hh hh hh ii ii ii jj F7
NACK (handshake message): F0 H = System Exclusive Message status 7E H = Non-Real Time extension cc = device ID 7E H = NACK ID pp = packet number F7 H = EOX
DUMP REQUEST: F0H = System Exclusive Message status 7EH = Non-Real Time extension cc = device ID 03H = DUMP REQUEST ID ss ss = Request sample (LSB first) F7H = EOX
System Exclusive A27
cc ss ss ee ff ff ff gg gg gg hh hh hh ii ii ii jj
WAIT (handshake message): F0H = System Exclusive Message status 7EH = Non-Real Time extension cc = device ID 7CH = WAIT ID pp = packet number F7H = EOX
CANCEL (handshake message): F0H = System Exclusive Message status 7EH = Non-Real Time extension cc = device ID 7DH = CANCEL ID pp = packet number F7H = EOX
NACK (handshake message): F0H = System Exclusive Message status 7EH = Non-Real Time extension cc = device ID 7EH = NACK ID pp = packet number F7H = EOX
UNIVERSAL NON-REAL TIME SYSTEM MESSAGES
SK760/SK880 System Exclusive Implementation
= = = = = = = =
device ID Sample number (LSB first) Sample format(# of significant bits from 8-28) Sample period in nanoseconds (LSB first) Sample length in words (LSB first) Sustain loop start point word number (LSB first) Sustain loop end point word number (LSB first) Loop type (00=forward,01=backward/forward,7F=loop off)

SK760/SK880 System Exclusive Implementation

UNIVERSAL NON-REAL TIME SYSTEM MESSAGES

SAMPLE DUMP STANDARD
DATA PACKET: F0H 7EH cc 02H kk <120 bytes> ll F7H
= = = = = = = =
System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID DATA PACKET ID running packet count (0-127) data (7 bit data format) checksum (XOR of 7E cc kk <120 bytes>) EOX
DEVICE INQUIRY
To be able to identify a MIDI device, the following two messages are utilized; the first used for the inquiry: INQUIRY MESSAGE: F0H = System Exclusive Message status 7EH = Non-Real Time extension cc = device ID 06H = INQUIRY ID 01H = Identity Request F7H = EOX and the second for the device response: RESPONSE MESSAGE: F0 7E cc 06 02 mm ff ff dd dd ss ss ss ss F7 cc = device ID mm = Manufactures Sistem Exclusive id code ff ff = Device family code (14 bits, LSB first) dd dd = Device family member code (14 bits, LSB first) ss ss ss ss = Software revision (format device specific)
UNIVERSAL REAL TIME SYSTEM MESSAGES

DEVICE CONTROL
These messages are used to control the general functions of the system, without refering to a specific MIDI channel and, therefore, inserted in the context of the Universal messages. Master Volume: F0H = 7FH = cc = 04H = 01H = vv vv = F7H = System Exclusive Message status Real Time extension device ID Device Control ID Master Volume ID Volume (LSB first) EOX
A28 Appendix
<Example 2> : The setting for the Attack of track 11 to +13 using common channel 2 (N.B. the 1st channel is 0 ), format 0 (7 bit data value) and with checksum. According to the address map relating to Performance Parameters - T_SLIDER the address relating to track 11 (the first track is 0) is 0A 1C 00H (Attack) and the value to set is 4DH; therefore the set stream is as follows: F0 2F 31 01 00 10 0A 1C 00 4D cc=?? F7 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) address data checksum (7)
GET SET F0H 2FH 3cH 00H/ 01H id cf aa1:3 ss1:3 dd1 ddn cc F7H
status F0 F0
data 2F 3c 00 id aa1 aa2 aa3 ss1 ss2 ss3 cc 2F 3c 01 id cf aa1 aa2 aa3 dd1 ... ddn cc 02 F7 data (7) = = = = = = = = = = = =
<Example 1> : The setting for the 1st Effect Type of Group A on Hall 3 using the common channel 7, the format 0 (7 bit data value) and without checksum. According to the address map relating to the Performance Parameters -EFFECTS A the address is 00 13 00H (effctnr1) and the value relating to HALL3 is 02H; therefore the set streams is as follows:
EXTREMELY IMPORTANT: when parameters have positive values that exceed 127 (=7FH), always enter f=2 in the cf field of the SET stream and transform the data into nibble format as in the example: 134 = 0x86 becomes 0x08 0x06. N.B.: in the following address map, the undefined value xx that parameterizes some of the addresses is the number relating to the structure (typically track or note).
EXAMPLES OF EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES AND CHECKSUM CALCULATIONS (relating to the structure of the Address Data Interface) aa1:3 ss1:3 dd1 ddn cc F7H = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 3 RealTime, c = Device ID (0-F) Get subfunction / Set subfunction Model ID, 00 = WK4 c = checksum (0:1), f = Data Format (0:4) 1 c=1 checksum present, c=0 absent; starting address code (MSB first) amount of required data bytes (MSB first) Data byte : first data byte to be sent Data byte : last data byte to be sent checksum ( optional ) EOX ( End Of Exclusive )
<Example 1> : The setting for the 1st Effect Type of Group A on Hall 3 using the common channel 7, the format 0 (7 bit data value) and without checksum. According to the address map relating to the Performance Parameters -EFFECTS A the address is 00 13 00H (effctnr1) and the value relating to HALL3 is 02H; therefore the set streams is as follows: F0 (1) 2F 36 (2) (3) 01 (4) 00 (5) 00 (6) 00 13 00 address 02 F7 data (7) F0H 2FH 3cH 00H/ 01H id cf = = = = = =
The MIDI System Exclusive capabilities of the SK Series instruments allow you to manipulate all parts of the instruments memory from a computer system. The following is a reference to the SysEx protocol used by the SK Series instruments. This Data Address Interface is based on two principal functions: SET and GET. SET is used to set the contents of some of the instruments resources while GET is used to withdraw them. At the reception of a GET message, the instrument replies with an appropriate SET message containing the values of the requested data and relative checksums.
<Example 2> : The setting for the Attack of track 11 to +13 using common channel 2 (N.B. the 1st channel is 0 ), format 0 (7 bit data value) and with checksum. According to the address map relating to Performance Parameters - T_SLIDER the address relating to track 11 (the first track is 0) is 0A 1C 00H (Attack) and the value to set is 4DH; therefore the set stream is as follows: F0 2F 31 01 00 10 0A 1C 00 4D cc=?? F7 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) address data checksum (7)
ADDRESS DATA INTERFACE
SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES
GET SET
status F0 F0
data 2F 3c 00 id aa1 aa2 aa3 ss1 ss2 ss3 cc 2F 3c 01 id cf aa1 aa2 aa3 dd1 ... ddn cc
(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (6=7 device ID) (4)Set Subfunction (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)EOX EOX F7 F7
F0 (1)
EXTREMELY IMPORTANT: when parameters have positive values that exceed 127 (=7FH), always enter f=2 in the cf field of the SET stream and transform the data into nibble format as in the example: 134 = 0x86 becomes 0x08 0x06. N.B.: in the following address map, the undefined value xx that parameterizes some of the addresses is the number relating to the structure (typically track or note).
EXAMPLES OF EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES AND CHECKSUM CALCULATIONS (relating to the structure of the Address Data Interface)
2F 36 (2) (3)
01 (4)
00 (5)
System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 3 RealTime, c = Device ID (0-F) Get subfunction / Set subfunction Model ID, 00 = WK4 c = checksum (0:1), f = Data Format (0:4) 1 c=1 checksum present, c=0 absent; starting address code (MSB first) amount of required data bytes (MSB first) Data byte : first data byte to be sent Data byte : last data byte to be sent checksum ( optional ) EOX ( End Of Exclusive ) 00 (6) 00 13 00 address
(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (6=7 device ID) (4)Set Subfunction (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)EOX

SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES

ADDRESS DATA INTERFACE
The MIDI System Exclusive capabilities of the SK Series instruments allow you to manipulate all parts of the instruments memory from a computer system. The following is a reference to the SysEx protocol used by the SK Series instruments. This Data Address Interface is based on two principal functions: SET and GET. SET is used to set the contents of some of the instruments resources while GET is used to withdraw them. At the reception of a GET message, the instrument replies with an appropriate SET message containing the values of the requested data and relative checksums. EOX F7 F7
(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (1=2 device ID) (4)Set Subfunction (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=1(Yes checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)EOX The checksum value is obtained with an XOR of all the bytes starting from the GeneralMusic ID (2FH) included; using ^ as the operator XOR ( OR Exclusive ), then: cc=checksum = 2F ^ 31 ^ 01 ^ 00 ^ 10 ^ 0A ^ 1C ^ 00 ^ 4D = 54 the message to send is: F0 2F 31 01 00 10 0A 1C 00 4D 54 F7 . <Example 3> : Setting the M.Transpose to -6 using common channel 2, format 0 (7 bit data value) with and without checksum. According to the address map relating to the Global Parameters - GLOBSET the address is 00 09 02H (transpose) and the value to set is 24-6=18=12H; therefore the set stream without checksum is as follows: F0 (1) 2F 31 (2) (3) 01 (4) 00 (5) 00 (6) 00 09 02 address 12 F7 data (7)
(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (1=2 device ID) (4)Set Subfunction (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0( No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)EOX with the checksum, the stream will be: F0 2F 31 01 00 10 00 09 02 12 16 F7 . <Example 4> : setting the parameter FltCutoff of the group AUDIOIN1 to 147 ( >127 ) on command channel 2 and format 2 ( data in nibble ) with and without checksum. According to the address map relating to Global Parameters - AUDIOIN1 the address is 00 0B 05H (FltCutoff) and the value to set in nibble format is, 09 03H; infact 147=93H, therefore the value is sliced in two nibbles 9 and 3 obtaining 09 03H; therefore the set stream without checksum is as follows: F0 (1) 2F 31 (2) (3) 01 (4) 00 (5) 02 (6) 00 0B 05 address 09 03 F7 data (7)
(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (1=2 device ID) (4)Set Subfunction (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0 ( No checksum), f=2 (nibble) (7)EOX with the checksum, the stream will be: F0 2F 31 01 00 12 00 0B 05 09 03 09 F7 . <Example 5> : To know the value of the parameter HighGain of the Equalizer using common channel 9 and format 0 (7 bit data value). According to the address map relating to the Global Parameters - EQUALIZER the addrress is 00 00 01H (HighGain) and the size is 00 00 01H; therefore, the get stream is as follows:

A30 Appendix
If, for example, the value of the parameter equals 1 dB, the instrument will respond with the appropriate Set stream containing the value requested and with the checksum; therefore, the stream returned will be: (GENERAL CONTROLS) FOOTSWITCH POLARITY F0 2F 38 01 00 10 00 00 01 0D 0A F7. 01 00 01 3BH = 59
GLOBAL PARAMETERS MIXER EQUALIZER
Address(H) Default
00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 02 00 00 03 01 01
Size (H)
Range(H) Parameter
FixCh_Mode ChordMode1 18 18 0C 0C
Parameter
LowGain HighGain LowFrequency HighFrequency 01 02
Description Size (H)

-12 -> +12 [dB] -12 -> +12 [dB] 100 -> 400 [Hz] 3.0 -> 15.0 [KHz] 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00
Default Address(H)
0EH= 2dB 0DH= 1dB 2=150KHz 0 = 3KHz 00 03 00 00 03 01
Address(H)
00 01 00 00 01 01 00 01 02
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
00 00 00
Parameter
video_display lyrics_fonts view_mode 15
Description
2
Default
15
Address(H)
00 02 00 00 02 01
Size (H)
Range(H)
Parameter
dynamic a.touch
Description
Default
Address(H)
00 03 00 00 03 01
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
Parameter
FixCh_Mode ChordMode1 ChordMode2 ChordMode3 DynamArrg Autobacking Chord_split
Description
Default
01 01 03
00 00 03
01 02
Address(H)
00 04 00 00 04 01 00 04 02
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
00 00 00 01 01 01
Parameter
Footswitch[1] Footswitch[2] Footswitch[3]
Address(H)
00 05 00 00 05 01 00 05 02
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
00 00 00
01ChordLanguage 01Help_Language 01Display_Mode F7 (6)
(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (8=9 device ID) (4)Get Subfunction (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6) EOX
(GENERAL) DISPLAY CONTROLS
Parameter
F0 2F 38 01 00 10 00 00 01 0D 0A F7.
(GENERAL CONTROLS) FOOTSWITCH POLARITY
Description
If, for example, the value of the parameter equals 1 dB, the instrument will respond with the appropriate Set stream containing the value requested and with the checksum; therefore, the stream returned will be:
0=Normally closed, 1=open 0=Normally closed, 1=open 0=Normally closed, 1=open
Description
0 = English, 1 = Italiano 0 = English, 1 = Italiano 0 = Positive 1 = Negative 00 (4) 00 (5)
REFERENCE TABLE
00 03 03 00 03 05 00 03 09 00 03 0B
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
00 00 00 15
04 01 01 6C
MIXER EQUALIZER
00 03 02
00 00 01
04
01 00 01 3BH = 59
Address(H)
GLOBAL PARAMETERS
on/off Up/low-multi (Auto chord mode) Full keyboard (Auto chord mode) Fix chord mode on/off on/off
00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 02 00 00 03
F0 (1)
2F 38 (2) (3)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Size (H)
00 00 01 address
00 00 00 00
Range(H)
18 18 0C 0C
00 00 01 size
LowGain HighGain LowFrequency HighFrequency
Parameter
-12 -> +12 [dB] -12 -> +12 [dB] 100 -> 400 [Hz] 3.0 -> 15.0 [KHz]
ARRANGE MODE 0EH= 2dB 0DH= 1dB 2=150KHz 0 = 3KHz
SCORE CONTROL
00 00 01 00 00 01
01 01
05 05
3=Medium 3=Medium
00 01 00 00 01 01
Address(H)
00 00 01 00 00 01
Size (H)
00 00
Range(H)
04 03
Parameter
video_display lyrics_fonts
GENERAL CONTROLS
GENERAL CONTROLS
04 03
00 01 02
01 char size 00 (if video_display=3) monitor bkgrnd col 00 00 00 01
00 02 00 00 02 01
Address(H)
00 00 01 00 00 01
Size (H)
01 01
00
Range(H)
05 05
Parameter
dynamic a.touch
SCORE CONTROL
ARRANGE MODE
Range(H)
view_mode
2 01 char size 00 (if video_display=3) monitor bkgrnd col 00
Description
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
00 00 00 00
00 03 02
00 00 01
03
04
ChordMode2
on/off Up/low-multi (Auto chord mode) Full keyboard (Auto chord mode) Fix chord mode on/off on/off
REFERENCE TABLE
03
Address(H)
(GENERAL) DISPLAY CONTROLS
00 04 00 00 04 01 00 04 02
Address(H)
00 03 03 00 03 05 00 03 09 00 03 0B
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Size (H)
Size (H)
00 00 00 15
00 00 00
Range(H)
(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (8=9 device ID) (4)Get Subfunction (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6) EOX
00 05 00 00 05 01 00 05 02
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
00 00 00
Range(H)
01ChordLanguage 01Help_Language 01Display_Mode
04 01 01 6C
01 01 01
ChordMode3 DynamArrg Autobacking Chord_split
Parameter
Parameter
Footswitch[1] Footswitch[2] Footswitch[3]
0 = English, 1 = Italiano 0 = English, 1 = Italiano 0 = Positive 1 = Negative
0=Normally closed, 1=open 0=Normally closed, 1=open 0=Normally closed, 1=open
Description
Description
Description
Description
Description

F0 (1)
2F 38 (2) (3)

00 (4)
00 (5)
00 00 01 address

00 00 01 size
F7 (6)
3=Medium 3=Medium
Default
Default
Default
0=English 0=English 0=Positive 0=NormClosd 0=NormClosd 0=NormClosd
Default Default
Default
0=NormClosd 0=NormClosd 0=NormClosd
Default
0=English 0=English 0=Positive
(GENERAL) NOTE TUNING/SCALE ( xx = NOTE = 0 - 7F ) Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Description
xx 06 00 xx 06 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 01 7F 7F coarse finetune
Default
0 -> 127 -63 -> +63;
(GENERAL) TUNING/SCALE
Address(H)
00 07 00 00 07 01 MIDI CLOCK
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
01 00 7F 0D
Parameter
Master_pitch kbd_scale
Description
-63 -> +63; 0 -> +13
Default
0 0=Equal
Address(H)
00 08 00 GLOBAL SET
Size (H)
00 00 01
Range(H)
00 01
Parameter
MidiClock
Description
Int/Ext
Default
0=Internal
Address(H)
00 09 02
Size (H)
00 00 01
Range(H)
00 30
Parameter
transpose
Description
-24 +24 [semitones]
Default
18H = 0
MIDI GENERAL SET
Address(H)
00 0A 00 00 0A 01 00 0A 02 00 0A 03 00 0A 04 00 0A 05 00 0A 06 00 0A 07 00 0A 08 00 0A 09 00 0A 0A
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 02 02 01 01 01 01 7F 01 01 01
Parameter
Common_ch Common_In Common_Out Midi_lock Clock_Send Midi_Merge MidiInTran MidiFixedDyn Midi_sysex SMF saveFrm Bank_select
Description
0=Off; 1->10 = chan 1->16 1 = MidiIn A, 2= MidiIn B 1 = MidiOut A, 2= MidiOut B
Default
0 = Off 1 = In A 1 = Out A 1 = On 1 = On 0 = Off 0 = Off 0 = Off 1 = On 0=GMidi 1
0 -> 127 0=Excl System OFF, 1=ON 0 = GMidi, 1 = smfformat
(GENERAL) MIC/LINE INPUT 1
Address(H)
00 0B 00 00 0B 01 00 0B 02 00 0B 03 00 0B 04 00 0B 05 00 0B 06 00 0B 07 00 0B 08 00 0B 09
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 7F 01 7F 7F 05 BF 7f 3E 03 01
Parameter
Volume EffGroup Eff1Send Eff2Send FltType FltCutoff FltResonance Pan AnalogOut Mic/Line
Description
0 -> 127 0 -> 127 0 -> 127 0 191, Use nibblized if > 127 0 -> 127 -31 -> +31 On/Off
Default
7FH =127 0 40H = 64 40H = 64 0 0 0 3EH = 31 0 0
(GENERAL) MIC/LINE INPUT 2
Address(H)
00 0C 00 00 0C 01 00 0C 02 00 0C 03 00 0C 04 00 0C 05 00 0C 06 00 0C 07 00 0C 08 00 0C 09
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 7F 01 7F 7F 05 BF 7f 3E 03 01
Parameter
Volume EffGroup Eff1Send Eff2Send FltType FltCutoff FltResonance Pan AnalogOut Mic/Line
Description
0 -> 127 0 -> 127 0 -> 127 0->191, Use nibblized if >127 0 -> 127 -31 -> +31 On/Off
Default
7FH=127 0 40H= 64 40H= 64 0 0 0 3EH= 31 0 0
A32 Appendix
MIDI COMMON/ARRG NoteToArrang
Address(H)
00 11 00 00 11 01 00 11 02 00 11 03
Size (H)
Range(H)
10 01 10 01
Parameter
Chord Ch.1 IN_1 Chord Ch.2 IN_2 64 64 64 64 64 64 64
Description
Address(H)
xx 12 00 xx 12 01 xx 12 02
Size (H)
Range(H)
01 01 01
Parameter
ped_ftsw[1] ped_ftsw[2] ped_ftsw[3]
Description
Default
1 1 1
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
00 00 00
xx 0F 00 xx 0F 01 xx 0F 02 xx 0F 03 xx 0F 04 xx 0F 05 xx 0F 06
Address(H)
MIDI FILTERS IN ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F , Midi Lock ON )
00 0E 00 00 0E 01 00 0E 02 0
Address(H)
(GENERAL) PEDALBOARD/COMPUTER MODE
xx 0D 00 xx 0D 01 xx 0D 02 xx 0D 03
Address(H)
MIDI_CHANNELS ( xx = CHANNEL3 = 0 - 1F )
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Size (H)
Size (H)
Size (H)
00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00
01 01 01 01
Range(H)
Range(H)
Range(H)
03 03 01
02 10 02 10
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
filter_1 filter_2 filter_3 filter_4 filter_5 filter_6 filter_7
MIDI CTRL PADS ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F ) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C)
Address(H)
MIDI FILTERS OUT ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F , Midi Lock ON )
Size (H)
Range(H)
Parameter
Computer Mode 0=Off, 1=Mac, 2=PC1, 3=PC3 0 = Off Pedalb. Mode 0=Off,1=Pdbass, 2=Pdchord, 3=MFun 0 = Off PcIfcPedB Mode switch
Midi_IN_Port Midi_IN_Ch Midi_OUT_Port Midi_OUT_Ch
1 = MidiIn A, 2= MidiIn B 1->10 = channels 1->16 1 = MidiOut A, 2= MidiOut B 1->10 = channels 1->16
Description
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
00 00 00 00
0=Off, 1->10 = chans 1->16 0=Off, 1->10 = chans 1->16
Address(H)
MIDI COMMON/ARRG NoteToArrang
xx 10 00 xx 10 01 xx 10 02 xx 10 03 xx 10 04 xx 10 05 xx 10 06
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Size (H)
00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Range(H)
64 64 64 64 64 64 64
Parameter
0=Off, 1->10 = chans 1->16
0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C)
Description
xx 10 00 xx 10 01 xx 10 02 xx 10 03 xx 10 04 xx 10 05 xx 10 06
0=Off, 1->10 = chans 1->16
Address(H)
Size (H)
Range(H)
Parameter
Description
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
00 00 00 00 00 00 00
64 64 64 64 64 64 64
00 11 00 00 11 01 00 11 02 00 11 03
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
00 00 00 00
MIDI FILTERS OUT ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F , Midi Lock ON ) 10 01 10 01 Chord Ch.1 IN_1 Chord Ch.2 IN_2
xx 12 00 xx 12 01 xx 12 02
Address(H)
MIDI CTRL PADS ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Size (H)
00 00 00
Range(H)
01 01 01
Parameter
Description
Description
Description
Description

MIDI_CHANNELS ( xx = CHANNEL 3 = 0 - 1F )

Address(H)
xx 0D 00 xx 0D 01 xx 0D 02 xx 0D 03
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
01 01 01 01 02 10 02 10
Parameter
Midi_IN_Port Midi_IN_Ch Midi_OUT_Port Midi_OUT_Ch
Description
1 = MidiIn A, 2= MidiIn B 1->10 = channels 1->16 1 = MidiOut A, 2= MidiOut B 1->10 = channels 1->16
Default
1=In A 1=Out A
(GENERAL) PEDALBOARD/COMPUTER MODE
Address(H)
00 0E 00 00 0E 01 00 0E 02 0
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
00 00 00 03 03 01
Parameter
Description
Default
Computer Mode 0=Off, 1=Mac, 2=PC1, 3=PC3 0 = Off Pedalb. Mode 0=Off,1=Pdbass, 2=Pdchord, 3=MFun 0 = Off PcIfcPedB Mode switch
MIDI FILTERS IN ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F , Midi Lock ON )
Address(H)
1 1 1 xx 0F 00 xx 0F 01 xx 0F 02 xx 0F 03 xx 0F 04 xx 0F 05 xx 0F 06 0 = Off 0 0 = Off 0
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 64 64 64 64 64 64 64
Parameter
Description
Default
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H
Default
Default
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H
1=Out A
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 1=In A
Default Default Default Default Default
Default
0 = Off 0 0 = Off 0
PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS
EFFECTS A
Address(H)
00 13 00 00 13 01 00 13 02 00 13 03 00 13 04 00 13 05 00 13 06 00 13 07 00 13 08 00 13 09 00 13 0A EFFECTS B
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
00 00 17 7F
Parameter
Eff_Type1 eff_vol1 par#1_1 par#2_1 par#3_1 Eff_Type2 eff_vol2 par#1_2 par#2_2 par#3_2 Eff2ToEff1
Description
0 -> 23 0 -> 127
Default
5=St.Concert 5AH = 90
00 00
1F 7F
0 -> 31 0 -> 127
9 = Chorus2 79H = 121
00
7F
0 -> 127
Address(H)
00 14 00 00 14 01 00 14 02 00 14 03 00 14 04 00 14 05 00 14 06 00 14 07 00 14 08 00 14 09 00 14 0A
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
00 00 17 7F
Parameter
Eff_Type1 eff_vol1 par#1_1 par#2_1 par#3_1 Eff_Type2 eff_vol2 par#1_2 par#2_2 par#3_2 Eff2ToEff1
Description
0 -> 23 0 -> 127
Default
2= Hall3 37H = 55
00 00
1F 7F
0 -> 31 0 -> 127
0=MonoDelay1 79H = 121
00
7F
0 -> 127
TRACK SOUND ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )
Address(H)
xx 15 00 xx 15 01 0
Size (H)
00 00 02 00 00 01
Range(H)
0: 7F+0:F 0
Parameter
Soundnr Ctrl32
Description
Prog.Change(MSB) + Bank(LSB) no sound if no zero
Default
MIDI CONFIGURATION ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )
Address(H)
xx 16 00 xx 16 01 xx 16 04 xx 16 05 xx 16 06 xx 16 07
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
00 00 01 01 01 01 03 03 02 10 02 10
Parameter
source destination Midi_In_Port Midi_In-Ch Midi_Our_Port Midi_out-Ch
Description
Track source 4 Track destination 5 1 = MidiIn A, 2= MidiIn B 1->10 = channels 1->16 1 = MidiOut A, 2= MidiOut B 1->10 = channels 1->16
Default
COMMON ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )
Address(H)
xx 17 00 xx 17 01 xx 17 02 xx 17 03 xx 17 04
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 02 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
00 00 00 00 00 7F 78 0300 07 01
Parameter
volume transp delay dyn_resp m_transp
Description
-60 -> +60 0 -> 768 Use nibblized if > 127
Default
3CH = 0 0 0 1
INTERNAL ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )
Address(H)
xx 18 00 xx 18 01 xx 18 02 xx 18 03 xx 18 04 xx 18 05
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
00 00 00 00 00 00 02 01 7F 03 01 7F
Parameter
mode m_priority detune analog_out effect_group vol_group_A
Description
Poly.Mono -64 -> +63 Selection effects group A or B Volume sent of eff. group A
Default
0 0 40H = 0 0
A34 Appendix
1 -> 11 0 -> 12
MIDI IN FILTER ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )
Address(H)
xx 19 00 xx 19 01 xx 19 02 xx 19 03 xx 19 04 xx 19 05 xx 19 06
Size (H)
Range(H)
Parameter
filter_in1 filter_in2 filter_in3 filter_in4 filter_in5 filter_in6 filter_in7
Description
Default
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H
Address(H)
xx 1A 00 xx 1A 01 xx 1A 02 xx 1A 03 xx 1A 04 xx 1A 05 xx 1A 06 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 0
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
Attack Release Flt Cutoff Flt Resonance Decay LFO Depth LFO Rate LFO Delay Soundnr 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 64 64 64 64 64 64 64
Parameter
filter_out1 filter_out2 filter_out3 filter_out4 filter_out5 filter_out6 filter_out7
Description
0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100
LOCAL ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )
Address(H)
xx 1B 00 xx 1B 01 xx 1B 02
Size (H)
Range(H)
Parameter
ped_ftsw[1] ped_ftsw[2] ped_ftsw[3] 01 01 01
Description
SLIDER ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )
Address(H) Default
xx 1C 00 xx 1C 01 xx 1C 02 xx 1C 03 xx 1C 04 xx 1C 05 xx 1C 06 xx 1C 07 xx 1C 08
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 02
Range(H)
Parameter
Attack Release Flt Cutoff Flt Resonance Decay LFO Depth LFO Rate LFO Delay Soundnr 64 64 64 64 64 64 64
Description
Address(H)
xx 1D 00 xx 1D 01 xx 1D 02 xx 1D 03 xx 1D 04 xx 1D 05 xx 1D 06 xx 1D 07 xx 1D 08 xx 1D 09
Size (H)
00 00 02 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
Parameter
Soundnr Level Panorama Transpose Tune FltCutOff Exclude Effect 1 Effect 2 Analog Out 7F 3E 07 07 0B 0C
Description
Address(H)
MIDI IN FILTER ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )
xx 18 06 xx 18 07 xx 18 08 xx 18 09 xx 18 0A xx 18 0B
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Size (H)
00 00 00 00 01 00
Range(H)
vol_group_B pan rand_pitch rand_pan Harmony PitchRange
Parameter
0: 7F+0:F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 03 00 7F 00 7F 00 04
Prog.Change(MSB) + Bank(LSB) 00 127 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 00 03 00 127 00 127 00 04
xx 19 00 xx 19 01 xx 19 02 xx 19 03 xx 19 04 xx 19 05 xx 19 06
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
00 00 00 00 00 00 00
64 64 64 64 64 64 64
filter_in1 filter_in2 filter_in3 filter_in4 filter_in5 filter_in6 filter_in7
LAYER1 SOUND PATCH ( xx = NOTE = 0 - 7F ) 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H
MIDI OUT FILTER ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )
DRUM KIT EDITING
Address(H)
LOCAL ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )
xx 1A 00 xx 1A 01 xx 1A 02 xx 1A 03 xx 1A 04 xx 1A 05 xx 1A 06
Address(H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Size (H)
Size (H)
00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Range(H)
Range(H)
filter_out1 filter_out2 filter_out3 filter_out4 filter_out5 filter_out6 filter_out7
Parameter
00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 0: 7F+0:F
-64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 Prog.Change(MSB) + Bank(LSB)
Address(H)
SLIDER ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )
xx 1B 00 xx 1B 01 xx 1B 02
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Size (H)
00 00 00
Range(H)
Parameter
Parameter
Volume sent of eff. group B -31 -> +31
1 -> 11 0 -> 12
0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100
Description
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
00 00 00
01 01 01
DRUM KIT EDITING
MIDI OUT FILTER ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )
Default
Default
xx 1C 00 xx 1C 01 xx 1C 02 xx 1C 03 xx 1C 04 xx 1C 05 xx 1C 06 xx 1C 07 xx 1C 08
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H
Address(H)
LAYER1 SOUND PATCH ( xx = NOTE = 0 - 7F )
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 02
Size (H)
00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 0: 7F+0:F
Range(H)
Parameter
-64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 Prog.Change(MSB) + Bank(LSB)
Description
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
00 00 00 00 00 00 00
64 64 64 64 64 64 64
0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100
xx 1D 00 xx 1D 01 xx 1D 02 xx 1D 03 xx 1D 04 xx 1D 05 xx 1D 06 xx 1D 07 xx 1D 08 xx 1D 09
00 00 02 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
0: 7F+0:F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 03 00 7F 00 7F 00 04
Soundnr Level Panorama Transpose Tune FltCutOff Exclude Effect 1 Effect 2 Analog Out
Prog.Change(MSB) + Bank(LSB) 00 127 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 00 03 00 127 00 127 00 04
Description
Description
Description

xx 18 06 xx 18 07 xx 18 08 xx 18 09 xx 18 0A xx 18 0B

00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

00 00 00 00 01 00
7F 3E 07 07 0B 0C
vol_group_B pan rand_pitch rand_pan Harmony PitchRange
Volume sent of eff. group B -31 -> +31
3EH =31 0 0 1 0
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H
Default
Default
Default Default
3EH =31 0 0 1 0
Default
40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 0
Default
DYNAMIC SWITCH
Address(H)
00 1E 00
Size (H)
00 00 01
Range(H)
00 7F
Parameter
DynSwitch
Description
00 127
Default
LAYER2 SOUND PATCH ( xx = NOTE = 0 - 7F )
Address(H)
xx 1F 00 xx 1F 01 xx 1F 02 xx 1F 03 xx 1F 04 xx 1F 05 xx 1F 06 xx 1F 07 xx 1F 08 xx 1F 09
Size (H)
00 00 02 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01
Range(H)
0: 7F+0:F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 03 00 7F 00 7F 00 04
Parameter
Soundnr Level Panorama Transpose Tune FltCutOff Exclude Effect 1 Effect 2 Analog Out
Description
Prog.Change + Bank 00 127 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 00 03 00 127 00 127 00=track,1=L+R,2=O1+O2,3=O1,4=O2
Default
TRACK SELECT
Address(H)
00 20 00
Size (H)
00 00 01
Range(H)
00 1F
Parameter
Selected
Description
00 31
Default
SYSTEM OBJECT ACCESS MESSAGES

SYSTEM RESOURCE ACCESS
Messages relating to the RESOURCE ACCESS allow the transfer via MIDI of the same basic resources of the instrument that can be exported to disk, and which are: System SETUP SOUNDS REAL PERFORMANCES STYLE PERFORMANCES USER STYLES SONGS
Each type of resource can constitute several files, in which case, before transmitting, are compacted into a single data block.. The transmission can take place in handshake mode for higher speeds and better control of the data transmitted (the system automatically recognizes the mode utilized according to the reply given or not after the transmission of the File Header Message). The MIDI message transmitted consists of the following structure: F0H 2FH 5cH ss id cf pp <data> = cc F7H = = = = System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) 6 = Subfunction ID = Model ID, 00 = WK4 = c = checksum (0-1), f = Data Format (0-3) = packet number (optional)
(optional) = EOX checksum (optional)
Subfunction ID :
File Header File Data Resource Request Parametr Request Parameter Data

01H 02H 03H 40H 41H 7
A36 Appendix
File Header message: F0H = System Exclusive Message status 2FH = ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC 5cH = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) 01H = Subfunction ID = FILE HEADER 00 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 03H = not checksum, format 3 (octect) < data> = 3 octects8 F7H = EOX File Data message: F0H = System Exclusive Message status 2FH = ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC 5cH = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) 02H = Subfunction ID = FILE DATA 00 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 13H = checksum, format 3 (octect) pp = packet number (00:7fH) < data> = 15 octects cc = checksum F7H = EOX
The transmission of one of the available resources starts by sending a message (File Header message) to indentify the successve blocks of data desired (File Data message). Typically the files concerned can be relatively long, therefore it is better to subdevide the information into several brief packets which can be individually tested and eventually retransmitted (in the case of using the handshake mode and the reception of an ACK reply confirms the correctness of the packet received, while a reply of the type NACK forces the retransmission of the error packet). Should it be necessar to interrupt the transmissoin, it is always possible to send the CANCEL command at any moment during the course of the communication. A WAIT command has also beed included for future implementations.
Resource Request message: F0H = System Exclusive Message status 2FH = Manufacturer ID = GENERAL MUSIC 5cH = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) 03H = Subfunction ID = RESOURCE REQUEST 00 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 00 = not checksum, format 0 tt = Resourse ID ss = all files(0), selected(>0) 9 F7H = EOX Resource ID: SETUP di sistema SOUNDS REAL PERFORMANCES STYLE PERFORMANCES USER STYLES SONGS 0 1 2 3 4 5
Resource Request message: F0H = System Exclusive Message status 2FH = Manufacturer ID = GENERAL MUSIC 5cH = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) 03H = Subfunction ID = RESOURCE REQUEST 00 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 00 = not checksum, format 0 tt = Resourse ID ss = all files(0), selected(>0) 9 F7H = EOX
File Data message: F0H = System Exclusive Message status 2FH = ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC 5cH = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) 02H = Subfunction ID = FILE DATA 00 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 13H = checksum, format 3 (octect) pp = packet number (00:7fH) <data> = 15 octects cc = checksum F7H = EOX
File Header message: F0H = System Exclusive Message status 2FH = ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC 5cH = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) 01H = Subfunction ID = FILE HEADER 00 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 03H = not checksum, format 3 (octect) <data> = 3 octects8 F7H = EOX
Resource ID:
SETUP di sistema SOUNDS REAL PERFORMANCES STYLE PERFORMANCES USER STYLES SONGS
ACK NACK CANCEL WAIT
0 1 2 3 4 5

ACK NACK CANCEL WAIT
7FH 7EH 7DH 7CH
The transmission of one of the available resources starts by sending a message (File Header message) to indentify the successve blocks of data desired (File Data message). Typically the files concerned can be relatively long, therefore it is better to subdevide the information into several brief packets which can be individually tested and eventually retransmitted (in the case of using the handshake mode and the reception of an ACK reply confirms the correctness of the packet received, while a reply of the type NACK forces the retransmission of the error packet). Should it be necessar to interrupt the transmissoin, it is always possible to send the CANCEL command at any moment during the course of the communication. A WAIT command has also beed included for future implementations.
7FH 7EH 7DH 7CH
ACK message: F0H = 2FH = 5cH = 7FH = 00 = 00 = pp = F7H = NACK message: F0H = 2FH = 5cH = 7EH = 00 = 00 = pp = F7H =
System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Subfunction ID = ACK Model ID, 00 = WK4 not checksum, format 0 packet number (00:7fH) EOX
System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Subfunction ID = NACK Model ID, 00 = WK4 not checksum, format 0 packet number (00:7fH) EOX
CANCEL message: F0H = System Exclusive Message status 2FH = ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC 5cH = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) 7DH = Subfunction ID = CANCEL 00 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 00 = not checksum, format 0 pp = packet number (00:7fH) F7H = EOX WAIT message: F0H = 2FH = 5cH = 7CH = 00 = 00 = pp = F7H =
System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Subfunction ID = WAIT Model ID, 00 = WK4 not checksum, format 0 packet number (00:7fH) EOX
EXAMPLES of Resource Request message compositions <Example 1> : System Setup request: F0 2F 50 03 00 00 00 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
00 (8)
F7 (9)
(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(5=RESOURCE ACCESS) + device ID (0=1 device ID) (4)Subfunction ID (3=RESOURCE REQUEST) (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)Resource ID (0=Setup) (8)not used for Setup Req (7)EOX
A38 Appendix
<Example 3> : Request for the 3rd Song in the System: F0 (1) 2F 50 (2) (3) 03 (4) 00 (5) 00 (6) 05 (7) 03 (8)
(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(5=RESOURCE ACCESS) + device ID (0=1 device ID) (4)Subfunction ID (3=RESOURCE REQUEST) (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)Resource ID ( 5=Song) (8)Selected ( 3 = 3^ file selezionato) (7)EOX
Messages relating to the DEVICE PARAMETERS ACCESS allows access to specific information relating to the instrument; the protocol invludes the transmission of a request message which will be followed by the eventual reply.
DEVICE PARAMETER ACCESS
Messages relating to the DEVICE PARAMETERS ACCESS allows access to specific information relating to the instrument; the protocol invludes the transmission of a request message which will be followed by the eventual reply. Parameter Request message: F0 H 2F H 5cH 40H 00 00 tt bs ps F7 H = = = = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Manufacturer ID = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Subfunction ID = PARAMETER REQUEST Model ID, 00 = WK4 not checksum, format 0 Parameter ID Bank Select PrChange Select (only for SOUND) EOX Parameter ID : 03 (8) F7 (9) (1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(5=RESOURCE ACCESS) + device ID (0=1 device ID) (4)Subfunction ID (3=RESOURCE REQUEST) (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)Resource ID ( 5=Song) (8)Selected (3 = 3^ file selezionato) (7)EOX
Parameter Data message: F0 H 2F H 5cH = = =
F0 (1)
<Example 2> : System Sound request:
2F 50 (2) (3)
03 (4)
00 (5)
00 (6)
01 (7)
System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERALMUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) 00 (8) F7 (9)
(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(5=RESOURCE ACCESS) + device ID (0=1 device ID) (4)Subfunction ID (3=RESOURCE REQUEST) (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)Resource ID (1=Sound ) (8)Selected (00 = All files) (7)EOX
STATUS of the system SOUND Name REAL PERF. Name STYLE PERF. Name USER STYLE Name SONG Name
0 1 2 3 4 5
F0H 2FH 5cH 40H 00 00 tt bs ps F7H
Parameter Request message:
DEVICE PARAMETER ACCESS
F0 (1)
<Example 3> : Request for the 3rd Song in the System:
2F 50 (2) (3)
= = = = = = = = = =
03 (4)
System Exclusive Message status Manufacturer ID = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Subfunction ID = PARAMETER REQUEST Model ID, 00 = WK4 not checksum, format 0 Parameter ID Bank Select PrChange Select (only for SOUND) EOX
F7 (9)
Parameter Data message:
(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(5=RESOURCE ACCESS) + device ID (0=1 device ID) (4)Subfunction ID (3=RESOURCE REQUEST) (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)Resource ID ( 1=Sound) (8)Selected ( 00 = All files) (7)EOX Parameter ID : STATUS of the system SOUND Name REAL PERF. Name STYLE PERF. Name USER STYLE Name SONG Name 0 1 2 3 4 5
F0H 2FH 5cH
= = =
System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERALMUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F)
00 (5)
00 (6)
05 (7)

<Example 2> : System Sound request:

F0 (1)
2F 50 (2) (3)
03 (4)
00 (5)
00 (6)
01 (7)
00 (8)
F7 (9)
41H 00 cf pp <data> cc F7H
= = = = = =
Subfunction ID = PARAMETER DATA Model ID, 00 = WK4 checksum=1, format (5 per Status, 0 altrimenti) packet number (00:7fH) checksum EOX
The data sent refer to the structure as described below. Status Data. The data relates to the parameters contained in the following fields (the quantities of memory are expressed in Kbyte): bytes 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 4 4 rel.addr. 0 1 2 3 4 8 12 16 20 name iClass iSubClass iRelease instrument peripherals totalSysRam freeSysRam totalBackedRam freeBackedRam totalVolRam description see classification in Tab.1 see classification in Tab.1 release HD=b1, AV=b0 Total System Memory Freee System memory Backed Sample Ram Memory Free Backed Sample Ram Memory Total Volatile Sample Ram Memory
24
freeVolRam
1 2 S2 S3 MK88 WS2 WS1 WS400 AS-1
Free Volatile Sample Ram Memory

3 4 S2 Box SK76 WX2 RPro1 5 SK88 6 7 8 SX3 WK3
iClass / iSubClass 1 - Synth Expander 2 - Masterkeyboards 3 - Keyboards 4 - Pianos 5 - Home Organs 6 - Classic Organs 7 - Accessories
WX2Box CD WX400 WK4 SX2 RPro2 RPprox Ps2500 PS1500
(TAB.1)
Parameter Data. In this case the streams relating to the parameter names requested are returned and all the data is identifed by the following 16 bytes: 0 Parameter ID 1 Bank Select 2 Perf Select 3-15 Parameter Name (13 char Max)
The parameters bs (bank select) and ps (prChange select) contained in the request vary according to the parameter as in Tab.2, taking into accound that the request will have effectively followed only in the case in which what has been requested is actually present in the system; to be able to request all the values available for a given parameter, it is sufficient to send the values bs=00 e ps=00. STATUS SOUND REAL PERF. 00 1 - 16 1 - 8 00 1 - 128 not used (nu) STYLE SONG 1 - 96 1 - 16 nu nu
Bank Select Range PrCh Select Range
(Tab.2)
A40 Appendix
format =1 (7 bit wide word LSB_J): the value of the data present in the stream has a range defined by the number of bytes transmitted. For example, to transmit the hexadecimal value F123 (61731 decimal) three bytes configured as follows are required: 03 62 23. This format is useful to transmit single data (byte, short, int, long, float, double) which do not fall within the range 0-127. format =2 (nibble): single byyes contain only 4 significant bits but which can represent much greater values. for example, to transmit the hexadecimal value F123 (61731 decimal) would require four bytes configured as: 0F 01 02 03; i practice, each single byte is sliced in two and transmitted on two bytes with the four most significant bits at 0. format =3 (octect): the bytes are groups in sets of 8 Bytes with 7 significant bits to represent 7 real bytes in 8 MIDI bytes (56 bit). This format allows, therefore, to achieve maximum compactness of the data to transmit in cases of data consisting of a large number of bytes whose priory value is not known. The procedure is as follows: from each bytes of the 7 in sequence, the least significan bit is extracted and saved in an eighth byte, therefore the same byte is shifted to the right; finally all is transmitted in the order. For example: 7 real bytes = 0x11 0x22 0x33 0x44 0x55 0x66 0x77 8 byte: 0x01 0x01 0x05 0x05 0x15 0x15 0x55 8 byte Midi = 0x09 0x11 0x1A 0x22 0x2B 0x33 0x3C 0x55. which when conve rted in BCD give: 0x31 0x32 0x33 0x34 0x35 0x36 0x37 0x38 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08
then shifting to the right and memorizing in a byte the extracted bits: 0x11 = 0x09 + 1 (b0) 0x22 = 0x11 + 0 (b1) 0x33 = 0x1A + 1 (b2) 0x44 = 0x22 + 0 (b3) 0x55 = 0x2B + 1 (b4) 0x66 = 0x33 + 0 (b5) 0x77 = 0x3C + 1 (b6) 8byte: 0x01 0x01 0x05 0x05 0x15 0x15 0x55
format =4 (nibble data dump): the single bytes containing only 4 significant bits to be able to represent any data stream. For example, the stream ciao corresponds to the ASCII data 0x63 0x69 0x61 0x6f and will, therefore, be represented by the following bytes: 0x06 0x03 0x06 0x09 0x06 0x01 0x06 0x0f.
format =5 (BCD data dump): the single bytes are subdivided in two nibbles and subsequently converted in BCD; this is a format particularly useful with numerical data which does not permit direct visualization. For example, the number 0x12345678 corresponds to the ASCII data 0x12 0x34 0x56 0x78 which subdevided in nibbles give: 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08
which when conve rted in BCD give:
APPENDIX A
format =0 (7 bit data value): the natural data format with values from 0 to 127. Does not require any form of treatment.
which when shown on the terminal gives the stream 12345678, representing the initial data.
which when shown on the terminal gives the stream 12345678, representing the initial data.
format =5 (BCD data dump): the single bytes are subdivided in two nibbles and subsequently converted in BCD; this is a format particularly useful with numerical data which does not permit direct visualization. For example, the number 0x12345678 corresponds to the ASCII data 0x12 0x34 0x56 0x78 which subdevided in nibbles give:
format =4 (nibble data dump): the single bytes containing only 4 significant bits to be able to represent any data stream. For example, the stream ciao corresponds to the ASCII data 0x63 0x69 0x61 0x6f and will, therefore, be represented by the following bytes: 0x06 0x03 0x06 0x09 0x06 0x01 0x06 0x0f.
8 byte Midi = 0x09 0x11 0x1A 0x22 0x2B 0x33 0x3C 0x55.
0x31 0x32 0x33 0x34 0x35 0x36 0x37 0x38
then shifting to the right and memorizing in a byte the extracted bits:
The procedure is as follows: from each bytes of the 7 in sequence, the least significan bit is extracted and saved in an eighth byte, therefore the same byte is shifted to the right; finally all is transmitted in the order. For example:
format =3 (octect): the bytes are groups in sets of 8 Bytes with 7 significant bits to represent 7 real bytes in 8 MIDI bytes (56 bit). This format allows, therefore, to achieve maximum compactness of the data to transmit in cases of data consisting of a large number of bytes whose priory value is not known.
format =2 (nibble): single byyes contain only 4 significant bits but which can represent much greater values. for example, to transmit the hexadecimal value F123 (61731 decimal) would require four bytes configured as: 0F 01 02 03; i practice, each single byte is sliced in two and transmitted on two bytes with the four most significant bits at 0.
format =1 (7 bit wide word LSB_J): the value of the data present in the stream has a range defined by the number of bytes transmitted. For example, to transmit the hexadecimal value F123 (61731 decimal) three bytes configured as follows are required: 03 62 23. This format is useful to transmit single data (byte, short, int, long, float, double) which do not fall within the range 0-127.
The messages used to control the system exclusives accept data in the following formats:
DATA FORMAT
7 real bytes = 0x11 0x22 0x33 0x44 0x55 0x66 0x77
0x11 = 0x09 + 1 (b0) 0x22 = 0x11 + 0 (b1) 0x33 = 0x1A + 1 (b2) 0x44 = 0x22 + 0 (b3) 0x55 = 0x2B + 1 (b4) 0x66 = 0x33 + 0 (b5) 0x77 = 0x3C + 1 (b6)

APPENDIX A

DATA FORMAT
The messages used to control the system exclusives accept data in the following formats: format =0 (7 bit data value): the natural data format with values from 0 to 127. Does not require any form of treatment.
Observations: The Set function of the System Exclusive is able to automatically identify the amount of the field to update, regardless of the format with which the data is sent with the following exceptions: the format 0 always modifies a bytes relating to the addres of the variable to update, therefore, if for example, we want to modify with format 0 a variable of 32 bits of the current value equalling 0x12345678 (hexadecimal value), after sending the data 0x7F we will obtain the variable updated to the value 0x7F345678. The correct method to update a variable with a value greate than 7 bit (correspnding to the decimal value 127) is to use the format 1 or 2; in the way, to update a 16 bit variable to the hexadecimal value 0x1234 you can send: format 1: format 2: 0x24 0x34 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 (2 data bytes) (4 data bytes).
the formats 4 and 5 do not consider the limits accepted by the filed in memory for which case should be taken not to send a numder of data higher than the accepted limit.
APPENDIX B
Creation of RESOURCE ACCESS files. To control the resources via system exclusive (RESOURCE ACCESS) makes use of the solution of packaging the various files which constitute the same resource into a single buffer. Generally, therefre, we would have the following situation: Resource File = FILE.000 FILE.001 FILE.002 ... FILE.00n
for a total of (n+2) files (with n which can also be 0). Each file can be identified by a set of three numbers which represente their own description: File ID = type (Resource ID) bank (0xFF if not exist) perf (0xFF if not exist)
This document wants to indicate how to identify the files concerned for each resource to be accessed, how to operate to manipulate these files and, finally, the effective transmission mode. Types of Resources The resources can be classified as follows: Resource ID : system SETUP SOUNDS REAL PERFORMANCES STYLE PERFORMANCES USER STYLES SONGS 0 1 2 3 4 5
for each of which concern various files For each of the resourcces available, it is possible to send a command requesting all the resources which make up the part of that groups (all the SOUNDS, all the SONGS, ...), or, it is possible to refer to a single resource of the currently selected group (send the selected SONG, the selected STYLE, ...).
A42 Appendix
Resourse ID SOUNDS REAL PERFORMANCES STYLE PERFORMANCES USER STYLES SONGS Creation of the Resource File
To create the Resource File it is necessary to write for each single file of a chunk consisting of a desription of the file and of the data that consistutes the file; the format of each chunk is the following: bytes 4 4 1 1 1 1 20 len-28 rel.addr. 0 4 8 9 10 11 12 32 name description chunck id data chunck len es.: 3010 file type file bank file perf not used F_HEAD vedi sotto < data > byte data
The variable F_HEADER present refers to the internal structure of how the file is effectively memorized within the system; to identify it we refer directly to the stuctures C used internally:
To calculate the totale length of the Resource File it is sufficient sum of the lengths of each file (Li) with the length of each single header chunk (32 bytes):
therefore the Resource File can be represented as: data len0 ... < data > for FILE.000 data len1 = len0+4 ... < data > for FILE.001 data len2= len0+len1+8 ... < data > for FILE.002 data len3= len0+len1+len2+12 ... < data > for FILE.003 data len_n = S[len(i)] + 4*n ... < data > for FILE.00n data len0 ... < data > for FILE.000 data len1 = len0+4 ... < data > for FILE.001 data len2= len0+len1+8 ... < data > for FILE.002 data len3= len0+len1+len2+12 ... < data > for FILE.003 data len_n = S[len(i)] + 4*n ... < data > for FILE.00n
To calculate the totale length of the Resource File it is sufficient sum of the lengths of each file (Li) with the length of each single header chunk (32 bytes): Resource File Length = S[Li] + n*32; bytes 4 4 1 1 1 1 20 len-28 rel.addr. 0 4 8 9 10 11 12 32 name description chunck id data chunck len es.: 3010 file type file bank file perf not used F_HEAD vedi sotto < data > byte data
The variable F_HEADER present refers to the internal structure of how the file is effectively memorized within the system; to identify it we refer directly to the stuctures C used internally: union TIME_INF { struct part { unsigned short hour : 5; unsigned short min : 6; unsigned short sec : 5; }; ushort time; }; // total 2 bytes union DATE_INF { struct part { unsigned short year : 7; unsigned short month : 4; unsigned short day : 5; }; ushort date; Max Select Number 16 8 96 32 16
therefore the Resource File can be represented as:
To create the Resource File it is necessary to write for each single file of a chunk consisting of a desription of the file and of the data that consistutes the file; the format of each chunk is the following:
Creation of the Resource File
Referring to the Resource Request Message command detailed above, setting the value of 0 in the field ss we will obtain all the resources, while specifying a number greater than 0 we will obtain the transmission of the single resource required. for each group of rerouces the possible selection values are the following:
union DATE_INF { struct part { unsigned short year : 7; unsigned short month : 4; unsigned short day : 5; }; ushort date;
union TIME_INF { struct part { unsigned short hour : 5; unsigned short min : 6; unsigned short sec : 5; }; ushort time; }; // total 2 bytes
Resource File Length = S[Li] + n*32;
SOUNDS REAL PERFORMANCES STYLE PERFORMANCES USER STYLES SONGS
Resourse ID

Referring to the Resource Request Message command detailed above, setting the value of 0 in the field ss we will obtain all the resources, while specifying a number greater than 0 we will obtain the transmission of the single resource required. for each group of rerouces the possible selection values are the following:

Max Select Number 16 8 96 32 16
};
// total 2 bytes
struct F_HEAD { unsigned char name[8],ext[3],flags; // 12 TIME_INF time; DATE_INF date; long length; };
// // // //
2 2 4 total 20 bytes
For completion, the description of the file inside the HEADER.hdr refers instead to a more complex stucture: struct F_HEADER { F_HEAD f; char name[16]; long offset; }; Creation of the Resource Header Before sending the Resource File, a Resource Header is sent which describes the entire Data File which is then sent. The Format of the file is the following: bytes 1 1 4 15 rel.addr. 0 1 2 6 name resource type nfile len name description Resource ID number of file total length of the effective binary resource file name of the complete structure associated to the file
for a total length of files equal to 21 bytes.
A44 Appendix
MIDI FILTERS conversion table N. Description 0 Filter off 1 Prg. change 2 Pitch 3 Mono touch 4 Poly touch 5 0 Bank sel 6 1 Modulation 7 2 Breath cnt. 8 3 Undef. cnt. 9 4 Foot cnt. 10 5 Portamento time 11 6 Data en. MSB 12 7 Main vol. 13 8 Balance 14 9 Undef. cnt. 15 10 Panorama 16 11 Expression 17 12 Control 1 18 13 Control 2 19 14 Undef. cnt. 20 15 Undef. cnt. 21 16 Gen. purp. c.1 22 17 Gen. purp. c.2 23 18 Gen. purp. c.3 24 19 Gen. purp. c.4 25 20 Undef. cnt. 26 21 Undef. cnt. 27 22 Undef. cnt. 28 23 Undef. cnt. 29 24 Undef. cnt. 30 25 Undef. cnt. 31 26 Undef. cnt. 32 27 Undef. cnt. 33 28 Undef. cnt. 34 29 Undef. cnt. 35 30 Undef. cnt. 36 31 Undef. cnt. 37 64 Damper ped. 38 65 Portamento 39 66 Sostenuto 40 67 Soft pedal 41 68 Legato foot 42 69 Hold 2 43 70 S.C. (Sn.v.) 44 71 S.C. (Res.) 45 72 S.C. (Rel.) 46 73 S.C. (Att.) 47 74 S.C. (Cut.) 48 75 S.C. (Undef.) 49 76 S.C. (Undef.)
APPENDIX C
N. 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
Description 77 S.C. (Undef.) 78 S.C. (Undef.) 79 S.C. (Undef.) 80 Gen. purp. c.5 81 Gen. purp. c.6 82 Gen. purp. c.7 83 Gen. purp. c.8 84 Portam. cnt. 85 Undef. cnt. 86 Undef. cnt. 87 Undef. cnt. 88 Undef. cnt. 89 Undef. cnt. 90 Undef. cnt. 91 Eff. 1 (Rev.) 92 Eff. 2 93 Eff. 3 (Chor.) 94 Eff. 4 95 Eff. 5 96 Data incr. 97 Data decr. 98 NRPN LSB 99 NRPN MSB 100 RPN LSB 101 RPN MSB 103 Undef. cnt. 104 Undef. cnt. 105 Undef. cnt. 106 Undef. cnt. 107 Undef. cnt. 108 Undef. cnt. 109 Undef. cnt. 110 Undef. cnt. 111 Undef. cnt. 112 Undef. cnt. 113 Undef. cnt. 114 Undef. cnt. 115 Undef. cnt. 116 Undef. cnt. 117 Undef. cnt. 118 Undef. cnt. 119 Undef. cnt. 119 Undef. cnt. 120 All snd. off 121 Reset all c. 122 Local cnt. 123 All note off 124 Omni m. off 125 Omni m. on 126 Mono m. on 127 Poly m. on

APPENDIX C

MIDI FILTERS conversion table N. Description 0 Filter off 1 Prg. change 2 Pitch 3 Mono touch 4 Poly touch 5 0 Bank sel 6 1 Modulation 7 2 Breath cnt. 8 3 Undef. cnt. 9 4 Foot cnt. 10 5 Portamento time 11 6 Data en. MSB 12 7 Main vol. 13 8 Balance 14 9 Undef. cnt. 15 10 Panorama 16 11 Expression 17 12 Control 1 18 13 Control 2 19 14 Undef. cnt. 20 15 Undef. cnt. 21 16 Gen. purp. c.1 22 17 Gen. purp. c.2 23 18 Gen. purp. c.3 24 19 Gen. purp. c.4 25 20 Undef. cnt. 26 21 Undef. cnt. 27 22 Undef. cnt. 28 23 Undef. cnt. 29 24 Undef. cnt. 30 25 Undef. cnt. 31 26 Undef. cnt. 32 27 Undef. cnt. 33 28 Undef. cnt. 34 29 Undef. cnt. 35 30 Undef. cnt. 36 31 Undef. cnt. 37 64 Damper ped. 38 65 Portamento 39 66 Sostenuto 40 67 Soft pedal 41 68 Legato foot 42 69 Hold 2 43 70 S.C. (Sn.v.) 44 71 S.C. (Res.) 45 72 S.C. (Rel.) 46 73 S.C. (Att.) 47 74 S.C. (Cut.) 48 75 S.C. (Undef.) 49 76 S.C. (Undef.)
N. 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
Description 77 S.C. (Undef.) 78 S.C. (Undef.) 79 S.C. (Undef.) 80 Gen. purp. c.5 81 Gen. purp. c.6 82 Gen. purp. c.7 83 Gen. purp. c.8 84 Portam. cnt. 85 Undef. cnt. 86 Undef. cnt. 87 Undef. cnt. 88 Undef. cnt. 89 Undef. cnt. 90 Undef. cnt. 91 Eff. 1 (Rev.) 92 Eff. 2 93 Eff. 3 (Chor.) 94 Eff. 4 95 Eff. 5 96 Data incr. 97 Data decr. 98 NRPN LSB 99 NRPN MSB 100 RPN LSB 101 RPN MSB 103 Undef. cnt. 104 Undef. cnt. 105 Undef. cnt. 106 Undef. cnt. 107 Undef. cnt. 108 Undef. cnt. 109 Undef. cnt. 110 Undef. cnt. 111 Undef. cnt. 112 Undef. cnt. 113 Undef. cnt. 114 Undef. cnt. 115 Undef. cnt. 116 Undef. cnt. 117 Undef. cnt. 118 Undef. cnt. 119 Undef. cnt. 119 Undef. cnt. 120 All snd. off 121 Reset all c. 122 Local cnt. 123 All note off 124 Omni m. off 125 Omni m. on 126 Mono m. on 127 Poly m. on
see Appendix A on Data Format 0=Echo LCD, 1=All, 2=All on 2 lines, 3=Lyric only, 4=Chord only The values 00H-0FH relatve to the Midi Port-A and 10H-1FH to Port-B 00=No Midi, No Keyboard, 1=only Keyboard, 2=only Midi, 3=Midi & Keyboard 00=N0 Midi, No Generation, 1=only Generation, 2=only Midi, 3=Midi & Generation see Appendix A on Data Format see paragraph Device Parameter Access Infact the Resource File Header is composed of 21 byte (see Appendix B) See Appendix B regarding the composition of the various resources available 28 + byte data number
10
A46 Appendix
Backup copies 3. 31, 3. 38 Balance 16. 14 Balance dynamic sensitivy 16. 14 Balance Envelope 16. 20 Balance Envelope Key On & Key Off 16. 21 Balance parameters 16. 20 Balance touch sensitivity 16. 14 Balance Tracking 16. 14, 16. 22 Balancing 2. 8 Band Pass 15. 3, 16. 39 Band-pass filter (Ed. Perf Sound) 15. 3 BankSelect 11. 5 Basic structure of a Style 8. 1 Bass (Vocal Processor) 10. 9 Bass Sustain 17. 4 Bass to Lowest 2. 29 Battery & Release 17. 9 Block 3. 1, 14. 4 Block rename 3. 35 Block size 3. 35
Data Entry 16. 7 Date & Time 17. 5
Index A47
Cancel files (Edit Disk) 3. 22 Catch locator 7. 19, 9. 16 Catch Note 15. 7, 17. 3 CC#0 (ControlChange) 13. 3 CC#32 (ControlChange) 13. 3 Change disk name 3. 29
Backup copies 3. 31, 3. 38 Balance 16. 14 Balance dynamic sensitivy 16. 14 Balance Envelope 16. 20 Balance Envelope Key On & Key Off 16. 21 Balance parameters 16. 20 Balance touch sensitivity 16. 14 Balance Tracking 16. 14, 16. 22 Balancing 2. 8 Band Pass 15. 3, 16. 39 Band-pass filter (Ed. Perf Sound) 15. 3 BankSelect 11. 5 Basic structure of a Style 8. 1 Bass (Vocal Processor) 10. 9 Bass Sustain 17. 4 Bass to Lowest 2. 29 Battery & Release 17. 9 Block 3. 1, 14. 4 Block rename 3. 35 Block size 3. 35
About MIDI 2. 59 About Songs 6. 1 About Standard MIDI files 6. 1 About Performances 2. 15 Accompaniment tracks 2. 23 Add segment 16. 16 Adjust the overall volume 2. 8 Adjust the sound volumes separately 2. 8 Algorithm 16. 36 Algorithms 16. 1 All (Score Controls) 7. 21 Amplitude Envelope 16. 15 Amplitude Envelope Contro 16. 15 Amplitude Envelope Key On 16. 16 Amplitude Envelope Tracking 16. 19 Amplitude Key Off 16. 17 Arrange Memory 2. 29 Arrange Mode 2. 29, 2. 32 Arrange On/Off 2. 29 Arrangement patterns 8. 1 Assign the MIDI channels 2. 60 Attack 15. 3 Audio Inputs 17. 6 Audio Out 15. 6 Audio Out (A/V interface) 17. 8 Auto accompaniments 2. 23 Auto Chord Mode 2. 32 Auto Preload 4. 1, 4. 3 Autobacking 2. 32
Index
Change Velocity 7. 12, 9. 12 Channel A effects 2. 35 Channel B effects 2. 35 Check version 3. 30 Chord (Vocal Processor) 10. 9 Chord Language 17. 6 Chord recognition modes 2. 32 Chord to Arr.1 / Chord to Arr.2 11. 6 Chord Type (Vocal Processor) 10. 12 Chords (Edit Score) 7. 23 Chords (Score Controls) 7. 21 Chords on lyrics (Video controls) 7. 22 Chords track 7. 3 Clock send 11. 4 Close 14. 4 Coarse 17. 3 Coarse&Fine 17. 3 Common Channel 11. 6 Common Channel/Arrangement 11. 6 Compare 15. 8, 16. 3 Compare exit 16. 3 Compatibility switch 11. 5 Compress 3. 32 Computer 17. 4 Computer port 2. 62 Configuration 11. 2 Configure a track 2. 61 Continuous Control Pedals 13. 2 Continuous Pedal Functions 13. 5 Copy (Edit Song) 7. 6 Copy (compare) 16. 3 Copy (Edit Disk) 3. 24 Copy (Edit Style) 9. 6 Copy a file (Edit Disk) 3. 24 Copy All tracks (Edit Song) 7. 6 Copy Chords track (Edit Song) 7. 6 Copy Lyrics track (Edit Song) 7. 6 Copy Master track (Edit Song) 7. 6 Copy mode (Edit Song) 7. 7 Copy mode (Edit Style) 9. 7 Copy Music track (Edit Song) 7. 6 Copy Parameters (Edit Song) 7. 7 Copy Riff (Edit Style) 9. 6 Copy Style (Edit Style) 9. 6 Copy times (Edit Song) 7. 7 Copy times (Edit Style) 9. 7 Copy to (Edit Perf Sound) 15. 4 Copy to Layer 15. 7 Copy to octave 17. 3 Copy Track (Edit Tracks) 14. 6 Copy Track (Edit Song) 7. 6 Copy Track (Edit Style) 9. 6 Copy Variation (Edit Style) 9. 6 Countdown 6. 6 Create a new Style 8. 2 Create a Preload list 4. 2 Create track 14. 6 Crossfade effects 14. 3 Cutoff (A/V interface) 17. 8 Cutoff Frequency 16. 23
About MIDI 2. 59 About Songs 6. 1 About Standard MIDI files 6. 1 About Performances 2. 15 Accompaniment tracks 2. 23 Add segment 16. 16 Adjust the overall volume 2. 8 Adjust the sound volumes separately 2. 8 Algorithm 16. 36 Algorithms 16. 1 All (Score Controls) 7. 21 Amplitude Envelope 16. 15 Amplitude Envelope Contro 16. 15 Amplitude Envelope Key On 16. 16 Amplitude Envelope Tracking 16. 19 Amplitude Key Off 16. 17 Arrange Memory 2. 29 Arrange Mode 2. 29, 2. 32 Arrange On/Off 2. 29 Arrangement patterns 8. 1 Assign the MIDI channels 2. 60 Attack 15. 3 Audio Inputs 17. 6 Audio Out 15. 6 Audio Out (A/V interface) 17. 8 Auto accompaniments 2. 23 Auto Chord Mode 2. 32 Auto Preload 4. 1, 4. 3 Autobacking 2. 32
Cancel files (Edit Disk) 3. 22 Catch locator 7. 19, 9. 16 Catch Note 15. 7, 17. 3 CC#0 (ControlChange) 13. 3 CC#32 (ControlChange) 13. 3 Change disk name 3. 29
Data Entry 16. 7 Date & Time 17. 5
Index A47

Index

Change Velocity 7. 12, 9. 12 Channel A effects 2. 35 Channel B effects 2. 35 Check version 3. 30 Chord (Vocal Processor) 10. 9 Chord Language 17. 6 Chord recognition modes 2. 32 Chord to Arr.1 / Chord to Arr.2 11. 6 Chord Type (Vocal Processor) 10. 12 Chords (Edit Score) 7. 23 Chords (Score Controls) 7. 21 Chords on lyrics (Video controls) 7. 22 Chords track 7. 3 Clock send 11. 4 Close 14. 4 Coarse 17. 3 Coarse&Fine 17. 3 Common Channel 11. 6 Common Channel/Arrangement 11. 6 Compare 15. 8, 16. 3 Compare exit 16. 3 Compatibility switch 11. 5 Compress 3. 32 Computer 17. 4 Computer port 2. 62 Configuration 11. 2 Configure a track 2. 61 Continuous Control Pedals 13. 2 Continuous Pedal Functions 13. 5 Copy (Edit Song) 7. 6 Copy (compare) 16. 3 Copy (Edit Disk) 3. 24 Copy (Edit Style) 9. 6 Copy a file (Edit Disk) 3. 24 Copy All tracks (Edit Song) 7. 6 Copy Chords track (Edit Song) 7. 6 Copy Lyrics track (Edit Song) 7. 6 Copy Master track (Edit Song) 7. 6 Copy mode (Edit Song) 7. 7 Copy mode (Edit Style) 9. 7 Copy Music track (Edit Song) 7. 6 Copy Parameters (Edit Song) 7. 7 Copy Riff (Edit Style) 9. 6 Copy Style (Edit Style) 9. 6 Copy times (Edit Song) 7. 7 Copy times (Edit Style) 9. 7 Copy to (Edit Perf Sound) 15. 4 Copy to Layer 15. 7 Copy to octave 17. 3 Copy Track (Edit Tracks) 14. 6 Copy Track (Edit Song) 7. 6 Copy Track (Edit Style) 9. 6 Copy Variation (Edit Style) 9. 6 Countdown 6. 6 Create a new Style 8. 2 Create a Preload list 4. 2 Create track 14. 6 Crossfade effects 14. 3 Cutoff (A/V interface) 17. 8 Cutoff Frequency 16. 23
Decay 15. 3 Del segm 16. 16 Delay 14. 5 Delay (delays) 10. 3 Delay (reverbs) 10. 3 Delay/Chorus/Flanger/Modulation table 10. 6 Delay/Modulation 2. 35 Delete (File) 3. 32, 3. 33 Delete (Microscope Edit Style) 9. 16 Delete Master Track (Edit Song) 7. 19 Delete measures 7. 11, 9. 11 Depth (Effects) 10. 3 Destination 3. 3, 3. 14 Detune 14. 2 Detune (Effects) 10. 4 Dialog windows 1. 8 Diffusion (Effects) 10. 3 Digital Signal Processor 2. 35 Directory 3. 3 Disk 3. 1 Disk commands 3. 2 Disk Drive Head Cleaning 3. 38 Disk formats 3. 1 Disk handling information 3. 37 Display Contrast 2. 1 Display controls 17. 6 Display Hold 2. 22, 5. 9 Display mode 17. 6 Display Song lyrics 2. 48 Drum mask 9. 18 Drumkit 2. 17, 15. 5 Drumkits A. 10 Dual 1 16. 2 Dual 2 16. 2 Dual 3 16. 2 Dual 4 16. 2 Duet 14. 4 Dynamic Arrange 2. 32 Dynamic layer 15. 5 Dynamic sensitivity 16. 11 Dynamic switch 15. 7
E
E-IDE interface (Hard disk) 3. 1 E1 Send (A/V interface) 17. 7 E2 Send (A/V interface) 17. 8 Echo LCD (Video controls) 7. 21 Edit (Vocal Processor) 10. 11 Edit Controllers/Pads 13. 1 Edit Effects 10. 1 Edit General 17. 1 Edit MIDI 11. 1 Edit Mixer 12. 1 Edit note 15. 6 Edit Perf Sound 15. 2 Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch 15. 1 Edit Score 7. 22 Edit Score page 7. 25 Edit Song 7. 1 Edit Sound 16. 1 Edit Sound Patch 15. 5 Edit Style 9. 1 Edit Style procedure 9. 1 Edit Tracks 14. 1
Eff 2 (Delay/Chorus/Flanger/Modulation) 15. 6 Eff Group (A/V interface) 17. 7 Eff. 1 (Reverb) 15. 6 Eff1 10. 1 Eff2 10. 1 Effect 1 - Reverb table 10. 5 Effect 2 - Modulation effects table 10. 6 Effect 2 to Effect 1 10. 1 Effect Type 2. 35 Effects 2. 35 Effects Bypass 2. 37 Effects Off 5. 9 Effects Programming 10. 3 Effects type 10. 1 Ejecting a Floppy Disk 3. 37 Empty Track (Edit Style) 9. 2 End 6. 7 End line (Edit Score) 7. 26 Entering Edit Sound 16. 4 Envelope finish 16. 15 Erase 6. 6, 7. 3, 8. 5 Erase (Edit Disk) 3. 22 Erase (Edit Style) 9. 3 Erase Master track (Edit Song) 7. 3 Erase Parameters (Edit Song) 7. 4 Erase Riff 8. 5 Erase Riff (Edit Style) 9. 3 Erase Song 6. 6 Erase Style 9. 3, 9. 4 Erase Track 6. 6, 14. 6 Erase Track (Edit Song) 7. 3 Erase Track (Edit Style) 9. 3 Erase Track (Style) 8. 5 Erase Variation 8. 5, 9. 4 Erase Variation (Edit Style) 9. 3 Error found 3. 30 Escape from edit sound 16. 5 Event List 7. 14, 9. 14 Event list 7. 17 Event type 9. 4 Exclude 15. 6 Execute 3. 32, 3. 33 Expand 15. 8 Extension (Edit Score) 7. 26 External (MIDI Clock) 11. 3
F
Fade In/Out 2. 28 Feedback (delays) 10. 3 Feedback (Distortion) 10. 3 Feel (Quantize) 6. 8 File Quantity 3. 2 File Selector 3. 3 File Type 3. 3 Files 3. 1 Filter 16. 23 Filter (A/V interface) 17. 8 Filter (Edit Drumkit/SoundPatch) 15. 6 Filter Control parameters 16. 23 Filter Cutoff (Ed. Perf Sound) 15. 3 Filter Cutoff Tracking 16. 25 Filter Envelope 16. 24 Filter Envelope Key On & Key Off 16. 26 Filter Envelope Tracking 16. 27
A48 Index
Index A49
Filters 16. 39 Fine pitch 16. 9 Finetune 17. 3 Fingered 1 2. 32 Fingered 2 2. 32 Fixed 9. 12 Fixed Chord Mode 2. 32 Fixed Velocity Mode (Edit Song) 7. 12 Floppy disk (Preload) 4. 3 Floppy disks 3. 1, 3. 14 Footswitch polarity 17. 2 Forced Stop 6. 4, 6. 7 Format Hard disk 3. 29 Format MS-DOS/Atari disk 3. 28, 3. 29 Format work disk 3. 28 Four (4) pole Filter 16. 23, 16. 39 Free 1 2. 32 Free 2 2. 32 Free memory 8. 6 Free memory (Edit Disk) 3. 34 Frequency Modulation 10. 3 Front Panel 1. 1 Full keyboard mode 2. 3
Handling Floppy Disks 3. 37 Hard Disk 3. 1, 3. 14 Hard Disk (Preload) 4. 3 Hard Disk check/recovery 3. 30 Hard Disk Protection 3. 31 Hard Disk Restore 3. 33 Hard Disk sleep time 3. 30 Hardcopy (Pads) 13. 3 Harmony 14. 4 Harmony intervals 10. 9 Harmony On/Off 2. 29 Harmony Type 2. 29, 14. 4 Headphones 2. 11 Help 5. 10 Help language 17. 6 High Frequency Decay 10. 3 High Gain (Effects) 10. 4 High Pass 16. 39 High-pass Filter (Ed. Perf Sound) 15. 3 How to back up your Hard Disk data 3. 31 How to program a Key On or Key Off envelope 16. 18 How to program a Tracking envelope 16. 13 How to restore backup data to the Hard disk 3. 33 How to use HELP 5. 10
Last Selection Memory 17. 6 Layer Range 16. 36 Layer Utility 16. 36 Level 16. 12, 16. 17 LFO 16. 31, 16. 38 LFO Delay 15. 4 LFO Depth 15. 4 LFO Rate 15. 4 Linear 6. 4, 6. 7 Linear curves 14. 3 Listen to the Demos (All, Song, Style) 2. 13 Load All 3. 12 Load Group 3. 10 Load Operations 3. 7 Load Single Block 3. 8 Load the Demo Song into memory 2. 42 Load WX2/SX2 Songs & Styles 3. 13 Local Off 11. 9 Locator 6. 7 Loop 6. 4, 6. 7 Loop and LFO 16. 38 Loop segm 16. 16, 16. 21 Low Frequency Oscillator 16. 31 Low Gain (Effects) 10. 4 Low Pass 16. 39 Low Pass Filter (Effects) 10. 3 Low-pass Filter (Ed. Perf Sound) 15. 3 Lower Memory 2. 29 Lyric 1...Lyric 4 (Score Controls) 7. 21 Lyrics 7. 24 Lyrics (Edit Score) 7. 25 Lyrics track 7. 3
General (Edit) 17. 1 General Disk procedure 3. 4 General Edit Perf Sound procedure 15. 1 General Load procedure 3. 7 General MIDI 6. 1, 11. 5 General Save procedure 3. 14 General settings (MIDI) 11. 3 General transposition 2. 9 Get score... (Edit Score) 7. 26 GM compatible MIDI Files 6. 1 GMX format 3. 1, 6. 1 Go to loc (Edit Style) 9. 16 Go to loc... (Edit Score) 7. 25 Group 3. 2 Group A & B 10. 1
Key 7. 17, 16. 12 Key Assign 13. 3 Key Note 8. 3, 8. 5 Key Off Envelope 16. 38 Key Off rate dyn. sensitivity 16. 15 Key range 14. 5 Key Start 2. 27 Key-play 1. 7 Keyboard Scale 17. 2 Keyboard Sensitivity 17. 2 Keyboard/Common Channel icon 11. 2
General (Edit) 17. 1 General Disk procedure 3. 4 General Edit Perf Sound procedure 15. 1 General Load procedure 3. 7 General MIDI 6. 1, 11. 5 General Save procedure 3. 14 General settings (MIDI) 11. 3 General transposition 2. 9 Get score... (Edit Score) 7. 26 GM compatible MIDI Files 6. 1 GMX format 3. 1, 6. 1 Go to loc (Edit Style) 9. 16 Go to loc... (Edit Score) 7. 25 Group 3. 2 Group A & B 10. 1
Handling Floppy Disks 3. 37 Hard Disk 3. 1, 3. 14 Hard Disk (Preload) 4. 3 Hard Disk check/recovery 3. 30 Hard Disk Protection 3. 31 Hard Disk Restore 3. 33 Hard Disk sleep time 3. 30 Hardcopy (Pads) 13. 3 Harmony 14. 4 Harmony intervals 10. 9 Harmony On/Off 2. 29 Harmony Type 2. 29, 14. 4 Headphones 2. 11 Help 5. 10 Help language 17. 6 High Frequency Decay 10. 3 High Gain (Effects) 10. 4 High Pass 16. 39 High-pass Filter (Ed. Perf Sound) 15. 3 How to back up your Hard Disk data 3. 31 How to program a Key On or Key Off envelope 16. 18 How to program a Tracking envelope 16. 13
Last Selection Memory 17. 6 Layer Range 16. 36 Layer Utility 16. 36 Level 16. 12, 16. 17 LFO 16. 31, 16. 38 LFO Delay 15. 4 LFO Depth 15. 4 LFO Rate 15. 4 Linear 6. 4, 6. 7 Linear curves 14. 3 Listen to the Demos (All, Song, Style) 2. 13 Load All 3. 12 Load Group 3. 10 Load Operations 3. 7 Load Single Block 3. 8 Load the Demo Song into memory 2. 42 Load WX2/SX2 Songs & Styles 3. 13 Local Off 11. 9 Locator 6. 7 Loop 6. 4, 6. 7 Loop and LFO 16. 38 Loop segm 16. 16, 16. 21 Low Frequency Oscillator 16. 31 Low Gain (Effects) 10. 4 Low Pass 16. 39 Low Pass Filter (Effects) 10. 3 Low-pass Filter (Ed. Perf Sound) 15. 3 Lower Memory 2. 29 Lyric 1...Lyric 4 (Score Controls) 7. 21 Lyrics 7. 24 Lyrics (Edit Score) 7. 25 Lyrics track 7. 3
IDE interface (Hard disk) 3. 1 Input VU 17. 7 Ins type (Edit Song) 7. 19 Ins type (Microscope Edit Style) 9. 16 Ins[ert] (Microscope Edit Style) 9. 16 Insert Measures 7. 10, 9. 10 Inserting a Disk into the disk drive 3. 37 Inserting chord symbols 7. 23 Inserting lyrics (Edit Score) 7. 24 Inserting notes (Edit Score) 7. 23 Internal (MIDI Clock) 11. 3 Internal sound generator icon 11. 2 Isolate a single sound 2. 21
Index A49

Filters 16. 39 Fine pitch 16. 9 Finetune 17. 3 Fingered 1 2. 32 Fingered 2 2. 32 Fixed 9. 12 Fixed Chord Mode 2. 32 Fixed Velocity Mode (Edit Song) 7. 12 Floppy disk (Preload) 4. 3 Floppy disks 3. 1, 3. 14 Footswitch polarity 17. 2 Forced Stop 6. 4, 6. 7 Format Hard disk 3. 29 Format MS-DOS/Atari disk 3. 28, 3. 29 Format work disk 3. 28 Four (4) pole Filter 16. 23, 16. 39 Free 1 2. 32 Free 2 2. 32 Free memory 8. 6 Free memory (Edit Disk) 3. 34 Frequency Modulation 10. 3 Front Panel 1. 1 Full keyboard mode 2. 3

How to restore backup data to the Hard disk 3. 33 How to use HELP 5. 10
IDE interface (Hard disk) 3. 1 Input VU 17. 7 Ins type (Edit Song) 7. 19 Ins type (Microscope Edit Style) 9. 16 Ins[ert] (Microscope Edit Style) 9. 16 Insert Measures 7. 10, 9. 10 Inserting a Disk into the disk drive 3. 37 Inserting chord symbols 7. 23 Inserting lyrics (Edit Score) 7. 24 Inserting notes (Edit Score) 7. 23 Internal (MIDI Clock) 11. 3 Internal sound generator icon 11. 2 Isolate a single sound 2. 21
Key 7. 17, 16. 12 Key Assign 13. 3 Key Note 8. 3, 8. 5 Key Off Envelope 16. 38 Key Off rate dyn. sensitivity 16. 15 Key range 14. 5 Key Start 2. 27 Key-play 1. 7 Keyboard Scale 17. 2 Keyboard Sensitivity 17. 2 Keyboard/Common Channel icon 11. 2
M
Macintosh 2. 62, 17. 5 Main Disk pages 3. 2 Mask 9. 17 Mask Arranger tracks 9. 17 Master 2. 59 Master Pitch 17. 2 Master Track 7. 17 Master transpose enable/disable 14. 1 Measures 8. 5 Medium Gain (Effects) 10. 4 Memory progress bar 6. 8 Metronome 6. 4, 8. 5 Mic/Line On/Off 17. 8 Microscope 7. 14, 9. 14 Microscope (Edit Song) 7. 16 MID extension 3. 17 MIDI Channels 2. 60, 11. 1 MIDI Clock 11. 3 MIDI Configuration 2. 61 MIDI connection rules 2. 59 MIDI events 6. 1 MIDI Filters 2. 63, 11. 3 MIDI Implementation Chart A. 37 MIDI IN 2. 59 MIDI IN Filter 2. 63 MIDI IN fix velocity 11. 4 MIDI IN icon 11. 2 MIDI IN Transpose 11. 4 MIDI Lock 2. 63, 11. 1, 11. 9 MIDI Merge 11. 4 MIDI OUT 2. 59 MIDI OUT Filter 2. 63 MIDI OUT icon 11. 2 MIDI Panic 2. 64 MIDI THRU 2. 59 Mixer 12. 1 Mixer Lock 2. 29 Mode 6. 6, 14. 2 Mode (F8) for Pedalboard options 17. 4 Mode (User Styles) 8. 4 Mode/Priority 14. 2 Modulation 13. 1 Move 3. 26, 7. 5, 9. 5 MS-DOS 3. 17 Multi keyboard mode 2. 7 Multifunction 17. 4 Multimedia 2. 48 Music track 7. 3 Musical motif 8. 1 Mute 1. 7 Mute a sound 2. 5
O
Octave 1 14. 4 Octave 2 14. 4 Octave Down 17. 3 Octave Up 17. 3 One Finger 2. 32 Open 1 14. 4 Open 2 14. 4 Option 6. 6 Oscillators and Layers 15. 2, 16. 1 Overdubb 6. 6 Overdubb Mode (User Styles) 8. 4 Overwrite 3. 32
P
Pads 2. 11, 13. 3 Pan 15. 6, 16. 33 Pan (A/V interface) 17. 7 Pan (Mixer) 12. 1 Pan Envelope Control 16. 33 Pan Envelope Key On & Key Off 16. 34 Pan Envelope Tracking 16. 35 Parametric Boost 16. 39 Parametric boost Filter (Ed. Perf Sound) 15. 3 Parametric Cut 16. 39 Parametric cut Filter (Ed. Perf Sound) 15. 3 PC1 2. 62 PC1 (Computer) 17. 5 PC2 2. 62 PC2 (Computer) 17. 5 Ped./Pad 13. 3 Pedal Volume 6. 6 Pedalbass 17. 4 Pedalboard 17. 4 Pedalboard / Computer 17. 4 Pedalchord 17. 4 Pedals assignment 13. 2 Pedals programming 13. 2 Pedals/Pads Lock 13. 3 Performance 2. 15 Performance tables A. 32 Permanent escape without saving 16. 5 Peterson 14. 4 Pitch Envelope 16. 28 Pitch Envelope Control 16. 28 Pitch Envelope Key On & Key Off 16. 29 Pitch Envelope Tracking 16. 30 Pitch Filter (Vocal Processor) 10. 12 Pitch touch sensitivity 16. 10 PitchBend 13. 1 Play (Preload) 4. 4 Play along with a Song 2. 53 Play Songs using Jukebox 2. 54 Play with the pedals 2. 12 Play with the Styles 2. 24 Play with the Wheels 2. 12 Play/Rec mode 6. 7 Playback all the songs or MIDI files on disk 4. 1 Playback the Demo Song 2. 44 Playing modes 2. 2 Point 16. 12 Power up and get to know the basics 2. 1 Precautions to observe when using SK disks with a computer 3. 38

N
Name 7. 2 Navigation and data entry 16. 7 New floppy Disk (Edit Disk) 3. 34 Next event (Edit Score) 7. 24, 7. 25 Normal 9. 12 Normal Velocity Mode (Edit Song) 7. 12 Note Off Quantize 7. 8, 9. 8 Note On Quantize 7. 8, 9. 8
A50 Index
Q R
Quantize 7. 8, 8. 3, 8. 6, 9. 8 Quick Rec Recording 2. 50
Index A51
Quantize 7. 8, 8. 3, 8. 6, 9. 8 Quick Rec Recording 2. 50
Preload 2. 46, 4. 1 Preload functions 4. 3 Preload list 4. 1 Previous event (Edit Score) 7. 24, 7. 25 Priority 14. 2 Programmable Pads 2. 11 Punch In/Out 6. 6, 8. 4
RAM -Sound 2. 17 RAM reset vi RAM-Sound 2. 17 Random pan (Mixer) 12. 2 Random pitch 14. 2 Range(H) A. 43 Real time keyboard sections 2. 23 Rear Panel 1. 2 Rec riff 8. 4 Rec View 6. 6 Rec View (User Styles) 8. 5 Rechargeable battery v Recognized Control Change messages A. 38 Record 1. 7 Record a Song (Quick rec.) 2. 50 Record method 6. 3 Record View page 6. 6 Recording a Song 6. 1 Release (Ed. Perf Sound) 15. 3 Replace 6. 6, 8. 4 Reset 3. 32, 3. 33 Reset list (Preload) 4. 3 Resetting at Power Up iv Resonance 16. 23, 16. 39 Resonance (A/V interface) 17. 8 Resonance (Ed. Perf Sound) 15. 3 Restore 17. 9 Restore All 17. 10 Restore all tracks 15. 4 Restore Current edit (Drumkit/SoundPatch) 15. 8 Restore Performance 17. 10 Restore S.P. Perf (Drumkit/SoundPatch) 15. 8 Restore Songs 6. 8 Restore Style-Performance 17. 10 Restore Styles 8. 4, 17. 10 Restore track 15. 4 Restoring the original Performance settings 2. 41 Restoring the Songs memory 2. 58, 6. 8 Restoring the User Styles memory 8. 4 Reverb Time 10. 3 Reverbs 2. 35 Reverbs (effect table) 10. 5 Riff 8. 1, 9. 3 Roll off curve 16. 23 ROM-Sound 2. 17 ROM-Sound tables A. 2 Room Size (Reverb) 10. 3 Root (Edit Score) 7. 24, 7. 26 Rotary (Reverb) 10. 3
RAM -Sound 2. 17 RAM reset vi RAM-Sound 2. 17 Random pan (Mixer) 12. 2 Random pitch 14. 2 Range(H) A. 43 Real time keyboard sections 2. 23 Rear Panel 1. 2 Rec riff 8. 4 Rec View 6. 6 Rec View (User Styles) 8. 5 Rechargeable battery v Recognized Control Change messages A. 38 Record 1. 7 Record a Song (Quick rec.) 2. 50 Record method 6. 3 Record View page 6. 6 Recording a Song 6. 1 Release (Ed. Perf Sound) 15. 3 Replace 6. 6, 8. 4 Reset 3. 32, 3. 33 Reset list (Preload) 4. 3 Resetting at Power Up iv Resonance 16. 23, 16. 39 Resonance (A/V interface) 17. 8 Resonance (Ed. Perf Sound) 15. 3 Restore 17. 9 Restore All 17. 10 Restore all tracks 15. 4 Restore Current edit (Drumkit/SoundPatch) 15. 8 Restore Performance 17. 10 Restore S.P. Perf (Drumkit/SoundPatch) 15. 8 Restore Songs 6. 8 Restore Style-Performance 17. 10 Restore Styles 8. 4, 17. 10 Restore track 15. 4 Restoring the original Performance settings 2. 41 Restoring the Songs memory 2. 58, 6. 8 Restoring the User Styles memory 8. 4 Reverb Time 10. 3 Reverbs 2. 35 Reverbs (effect table) 10. 5 Riff 8. 1, 9. 3 Roll off curve 16. 23 ROM-Sound 2. 17 ROM-Sound tables A. 2 Room Size (Reverb) 10. 3 Root (Edit Score) 7. 24, 7. 26 Rotary (Reverb) 10. 3
Sample-RAM (Edit Disk) 3. 34 Save All 3. 21 Save Group 3. 19 Save Group Real Perf 3. 19 Save Group Song 3. 19 Save Group Style Perf 3. 19 Save Group User Style 3. 19 Save operations 3. 14 Save procedure 2. 55 Save Single 3. 16 Save to a different Performance 2. 39 Save your programmed data to disk 2. 55 Save... (Edit General) 17. 3 Saving and naming the modified sound 16. 6 Saving changes to the current Performance 2. 38 Saving to the power-up Performance 2. 38 Scale Conversion 8. 3, 8. 5 Scale Conversion tables 8. 7 Scale Mode 16. 10 Score button 7. 20 Score Controls 7. 21 Score split (Video controls) 7. 21 Score track 7. 20 Search next 3. 36 Search Resource 3. 35 Segment 16. 12, 16. 17 Select All 3. 32, 3. 33 Select all (Preload) 4. 4 Select all tracks 6. 6 Select and play the Performances 2. 15 Select Performances (panel selection) 5. 1 Select Performances via MIDI 5. 1 Select riff (Microscope - Edit Style) 9. 14 Select Song Perfs via MIDI 5. 8 Select Song-Performances 5. 3 Select Song-Performances (panel selection) 5. 8 Select Songs (panel selection) 5. 7 Select Songs via MIDI 5. 7 Select Sounds (panel selection) 5. 4 Select Sounds via MIDI 5. 6 Select Sounds with the Numeric keypad 5. 4 Select Style Perfs via MIDI 5. 3 Select Style-Performances (panel selection) 5. 3 Select Styles (panel selection) 5. 2 Select Styles via MIDI 5. 2 Select the Vocal Processor 10. 9 Selection 5. 1 Semitone (Effects) 10. 4 Send Level 10. 2 Seq-play 1. 7 Set date 17. 5 Set time 17. 5 Setup 17. 9 Setup (Edit General) 17. 1 Shifting the pitch of your voice 10. 10 Show.. (Microscope Edit Style) 9. 14 Single 3. 2, 16. 2 SINGLE TOUCH. PLAY button 2. 24 Slave 2. 59 Slope 16. 39 Smart 14. 4 SMF (Preload) 4. 4
Index A51

Preload 2. 46, 4. 1 Preload functions 4. 3 Preload list 4. 1 Previous event (Edit Score) 7. 24, 7. 25 Priority 14. 2 Programmable Pads 2. 11 Punch In/Out 6. 6, 8. 4

S
Sample-RAM (Edit Disk) 3. 34 Save All 3. 21 Save Group 3. 19 Save Group Real Perf 3. 19 Save Group Song 3. 19 Save Group Style Perf 3. 19 Save Group User Style 3. 19 Save operations 3. 14 Save procedure 2. 55 Save Single 3. 16 Save to a different Performance 2. 39 Save your programmed data to disk 2. 55 Save... (Edit General) 17. 3 Saving and naming the modified sound 16. 6 Saving changes to the current Performance 2. 38 Saving to the power-up Performance 2. 38 Scale Conversion 8. 3, 8. 5 Scale Conversion tables 8. 7 Scale Mode 16. 10 Score button 7. 20 Score Controls 7. 21 Score split (Video controls) 7. 21 Score track 7. 20 Search next 3. 36 Search Resource 3. 35 Segment 16. 12, 16. 17 Select All 3. 32, 3. 33 Select all (Preload) 4. 4 Select all tracks 6. 6 Select and play the Performances 2. 15 Select Performances (panel selection) 5. 1 Select Performances via MIDI 5. 1 Select riff (Microscope - Edit Style) 9. 14 Select Song Perfs via MIDI 5. 8 Select Song-Performances 5. 3 Select Song-Performances (panel selection) 5. 8 Select Songs (panel selection) 5. 7 Select Songs via MIDI 5. 7 Select Sounds (panel selection) 5. 4 Select Sounds via MIDI 5. 6 Select Sounds with the Numeric keypad 5. 4 Select Style Perfs via MIDI 5. 3 Select Style-Performances (panel selection) 5. 3 Select Styles (panel selection) 5. 2 Select Styles via MIDI 5. 2 Select the Vocal Processor 10. 9 Selection 5. 1 Semitone (Effects) 10. 4 Send Level 10. 2 Seq-play 1. 7 Set date 17. 5 Set time 17. 5 Setup 17. 9 Setup (Edit General) 17. 1 Shifting the pitch of your voice 10. 10 Show.. (Microscope Edit Style) 9. 14 Single 3. 2, 16. 2 SINGLE TOUCH. PLAY button 2. 24 Slave 2. 59 Slope 16. 39 Smart 14. 4 SMF (Preload) 4. 4
SMF Save format 11. 4 SOLO button 2. 21 Song (Preload) 4. 3 Song mode 2. 2 Song Name 7. 2 Song Publisher 7. 2 Song-Quick Rec method 6. 2 Songs-Group 3. 10, 3. 19 Sound and Sound Patch 15. 1 Sound Patch 15. 5 Sound Patch Options 15. 7 Sound View 6. 6 Sound View (User Styles) 8. 4 SoundPatch 2. 17 Sounds 2. 17 Source 3. 3 Speed (rotary effects) 10. 3 Split point 2. 34 Split the keyboard 2. 4 Standard MIDI File 6. 1 Start and End locators 6. 4 Start parameters 7. 18 Status of a track 1. 7 Stereo panorama 12. 1 Store 15. 8 Store Performance 2. 38 Style 8. 5 Style Lock 2. 16 Style Name 9. 2 Style Performance 2. 30 Style tables A. 30 Style/RealTime mode 2. 2 Styles 2. 23 Sustain 16. 15 Switch action pedals 13. 2 Switch Pedal Functions 13. 4 System Exclusive 11. 4 System Exclusive Implementation A. 39
Up-dateable operating system iv Upper/Lower keyboard mode 2. 4 User programmable scales 17. 2 User Style Recording 8. 1, 8. 3 Using the Keypad to Select a Sound 2. 20 Utility 3. 28
V
Variation 9. 3 Variations 2. 26 Velocity 7. 12 Velocity (Edit Style) 9. 12 Velocity curve 14. 3 Velocity mode 7. 12 Velocity mode (Edit Style) 9. 12 Velocity range 14. 3 Video controls (Score Controls) 7. 21 View mode (Score Controls) 7. 21 Vocal harmonies 10. 7 Vocal Processor 10. 7, 10. 9 Vocoder (Vocal Processor) 10. 10 Vocoder Track 10. 12 Voice 1 (Vocal Processor) 10. 9 Voice 2 (Vocal Processor) 10. 9 Voice 3 (Vocal Processor) 10. 9 Voice 4 (Vocal Processor) 10. 9 Voice Set (Vocal Processor) 10. 12 Volume 16. 11 Volume (A/V interface) 17. 7 Volume (Mixer) 12. 1 Volume touch sensitivity 16. 11 Volume Tracking 16. 12 Volume, Velocity & Aftertouch 16. 38
W
WAIT (handshake message): A. 39 Warnings 1. 8 Wave Start Dynamic mode 16. 10 Wave Start Dynamic sensitivity 16. 10 Wave Vector 16. 9 Waveform 16. 9, 16. 38 Wavestart 16. 10 Wavetables A. 34 What is a Riff? 8. 1 Wheels 2. 12, 13. 1 Write Protect Tab 3. 37
T
Tap Tempo 2. 28 Tempo 6. 7, 8. 5 Tempo Lock 2. 29 Temporary escape 16. 5 Time 16. 17 Time Signature 6. 7, 8. 5 Time Signature (User Styles) 8. 2 Title 7. 2 To octave 17. 3 Track Icons 1. 7 Track Scroll button 2. 23 Track transposer 14. 1 Transpose 7. 13, 9. 13, 14. 1, 16. 9 Transpose (Edit Drumkit/SoundPatch) 15. 6 Transposing tracks by octaves 2. 10 Tuning 15. 6 Tuning mode 16. 9 Tuning/Scale 17. 2 Two (2) pole filter 16. 23
Y
Y shift (Video controls) 7. 21
Z
Zoom 16. 16
U
Undo 6. 5, 7. 2, 9. 2 Undo (Style) 8. 3 Unison (Vocal Processor) 10. 11
A52 Index

SK760 880 Powerstation UK

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SK760 880 Powerstation UK

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SK760 880 Powerstation UK

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IMPORTANT Read Before Using Keyboard!

Location of Dial, Enter & Escape controls.

IMPORTANT Read Before Using Keyboard!

Location of Dial, Enter & Escape controls.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

10. 11. 12.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION

Stock Code 271219

Chapter 1 Layout & Display

Chapter 2 User Guide

1 The SK760/880 playing modes 2. 2

2 Play the SK760/880 keyboard sounds (Style/RealTime mode) 2. 3

3 Adjusting the volume of the real time sounds 2. 8

7 Selecting the SK Sounds 2. 17

8 Display Hold 2. 22 9 The Styles 2. 23

3 Adjusting the volume of the real time sounds 2. 8

2 Play the SK760/880 keyboard sounds (Style/RealTime mode) 2. 3

1 The SK760/880 playing modes 2. 2

Chapter 2 User Guide

Chapter 1 Layout & Display

5 Listen to the Demo Songs 2. 13 6 The Performances 2. 15

11 The Digital Signal Processor (DSP) 2. 35

10 Arrange Mode and the chord recognition modes 2. 32

7 Selecting the SK Sounds 2. 17

5 Listen to the Demo Songs 2. 13 6 The Performances 2. 15

13 Load and play back the supplied Demo Song 2. 42

16 Record a Song (Quick rec.) 2. 50

17 Save your programmed data to disk 2. 55

Chapter 6 Songs, MIDI files & Song recording 6. 1

Chapter 7 Edit Song 7. 1

Chapter 8 User Style recording 8. 1

Chapter 9 Edit Style 9. 1

Chapter 10 Edit Effects 10. 1

Chapter 11 Edit MIDI 11. 1

Chapter 12 Edit Mixer 12. 1

Chapter 13 Edit Controllers/Pads 13. 1

Chapter 13 Edit Controllers/Pads 13. 1

Chapter 10 Edit Effects 10. 1

Chapter 8 User Style recording 8. 1

Chapter 14 Edit Tracks 14. 1

Chapter 15 Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch 15. 1

Chapter 16 Edit Sound 16. 1

Chapter 17 Edit General 17. 1

HOW TO USE THE OWNERS MANUAL

HOW TO USE THE OWNERS MANUAL

TWO VERSIONS OF A POWERFUL WORKSTATION

TWO VERSIONS OF A POWERFUL WORKSTATION

FEATURES OF THE WK6 & WK8

starting from disk-based samples or data received via MIDI.

IMPORTANT PRELIMINARY NOTES

WARNING- Sounds based on sample RAM (RAM

Programmable Performances User Styles (User buttons)

Setup (general settings)

RAM-Sounds (based on samples in ROM) RAM

-Sounds (based on samples in Backed S-RAM)

Samples in Backed S-RAM

Samples in Volatile S-RAM

The rechargeable battery